Nitsuko 124i - 384i Software Hardware Program Features PDF
Nitsuko 124i - 384i Software Hardware Program Features PDF
Nitsuko 124i - 384i Software Hardware Program Features PDF
com
124i/384i
Software Manual
P/N 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0, June 1998 Printed in U.S.A.
030733.402
telemanuals.com
This manual has been developed by Nitsuko America. It is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel, and should be read in its entirety before attempting to install or program the system. Any comments or suggestions for improving this manual would be appreciated. Forward your remarks to:
Nitsuko America, Telecom Division 4 Forest Parkway Shelton, CT 06484 http://www.nitsuko.com Attention: Manager, Technical Publications
Nothing contained in this manual shall be deemed to be, and this manual does not constitute, a warranty of, or representation with respect to, any of the equipment covered. This manual is subject to change without notice and Nitsuko America has no obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this manual. Further, Nitsuko America also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make changes in equipment design or components as it deems appropriate. No representation is made that this manual is complete or accurate in all respects and Nitsuko America shall not be liable for any errors or omissions. In no event shall Nitsuko America be liable for any incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this manual. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied or reproduced without prior written consent of Nitsuko America.
Table of Contents
telemanuals.com
Table of Contents
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Personal Computer Interface (PCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Telemarketing Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Database Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Open Architecture Interface (OAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Split (From Conference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Continued Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Continued Dialing for Trunk Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Cordless Telephone (Nitsuko 900i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Data Communications Interface (DCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 RS-232-C DCI Module (DCI-A: P/N 92266) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Centronics DCI Module (DCI-B: P/N 92267) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 3-Port DCI Unit (3DCI-A: P/N 92258). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 DCI Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Keyset-Originated Data Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Terminal-Originated Data Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Terminal-Originated Voice Call (Telemarketing Dial). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 DCI Department Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Hayes Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 DCI Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Speed Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Physical Ports and Software Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Department Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Overflow Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 User Log Out/Log In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Enhanced Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Department Step Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Dial Number Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Dial Pad Confirmation Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Dial Tone Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 DID Dialed Number Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Flexible DID Service Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 DID Intercept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Vacant Number Intercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Busy Intercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Ring-No-Answer Intercept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 DID Camp-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 DID Routing Through the VAU Automated Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Federal Communications Commission DID Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Direct Inward Line (DIL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 DIL Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 DISA Class of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Trunk Group Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Common Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Operator Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Paging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 DISA Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 DISA Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Department Calling with Overflow Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
ii
Table of Contents
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directory Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do Not Disturb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Line Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E911 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Alarm Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fax Machine Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer to Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Inward Line to Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bridged Fax Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible System Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forced Trunk Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group Listen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handsfree and Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intercom Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotel/Motel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotline, External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . InDepth and inDepth+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intercom Abandoned Call Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISDN Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary Rate Interface (PRI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Rate Interface (BRI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labelmaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incoming Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outgoing Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incoming Only Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outgoing Only Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Both Ways Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meet Me Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meet Me Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meet Me Paging Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memo Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microphone Cutoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Name Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Networking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 264 265 268 272 275 278 279 284 287 287 287 287 290 293 296 298 303 305 307 310 312 312 312 312 312 319 321 323 324 326 331 333 333 333 335 336 338 338 338 338 345 345 345 345 349 353 356 360 362 366 368 368 373 377 381
iii
Table of Contents
Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigned Night Answer (ANA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Night Answer (UNA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off Hook Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Called Extension Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Signaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selectable Off Hook Signaling Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off Hook Signaling Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One-Touch Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One-Touch Serial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging, External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBX Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBX Trunk Access Code Screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBX Trunk Toll Restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBX Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC Attendant Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prime Line Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outgoing Prime Line Preference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incoming Prime Line Preference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Privacy (Data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Private Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incoming only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outgoing only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Both ways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse to Tone Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repeat Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reverse Voice Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ring Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ringdown Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Number Dialed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Secretary Call (Buzzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Secretary Call Pickup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selectable Display Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selectable Ring Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 383 383 389 389 389 389 389 389 395 400 402 402 406 406 411 415 415 415 415 415 419 420 420 420 424 427 427 427 427 430 433 435 438 440 444 447 450 453 456 457 461 463 465
iv
Table of Contents
Station Message Detail Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abandoned Call Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blocked Call Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Costing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customized Date Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferred Call Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Call Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digit Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digit Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duration Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBX Call Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial and Parallel SMDR Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension Name or Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANI/DNIS Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANI/DNIS Routing to the VAU Automated Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TAPI Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tenant Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie Line Class of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First Digit Absorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk GroupAccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forced Trunk Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie Line Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible Tie Line Service Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Permit Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Restrict Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrict Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permit Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . International Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toll Restriction for Abbreviated Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local Call Digit Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toll Call Digit Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toll Free Trunks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBX Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toll Restriction Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toll Restriction Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic Management Report (TMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension (Department) Groups Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Without Holding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic On-Hook Transfer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Group Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Queuing/Camp On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 471 471 471 471 471 471 471 483 484 493 495 502 507 512 512 512 512 512 512 512 512 513 513 513 513 513 521 524 524 524 524 524 524 525 525 525 525 525 525 532 534 543 543 543 543 543 543 549 552 555 v
Table of Contents
Voice Announce Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAU Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park and Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Digit Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simultaneous Call Answering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flexible Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Overflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Automated Attendant Greetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice Prompting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time, Date and Station Number Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Forwarding to Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring to Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversation Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal Answering Machine Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice Mail Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice Mail Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Center Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning Tone For Long Conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Year 2000 Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 558 559 559 560 561 561 561 561 561 561 562 565 566 585 585 586 586 586 586 586 586 586 599 603 604 607
vi
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
0200 - Programming Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
0201 - Setting the Programming Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 0202 - Setting User Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
viii
Table of Contents
0700- Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
0701 - Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
Table of Contents
1025 - Toll Restriction Override Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 - Loop Key Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 - Fixed Call Forwarding Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028 - Multiple Directory Number Key Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029 - Fixed Call Forwarding When Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030 - Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101 - DSS Console Extension Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102 - DSS Console Key Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103 - DSS Console Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104 - DSS Console Alternate Answering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105 - Operators Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106 - Direct Line Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107 - DSS Console Lamp Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201 - DCI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 - DCI Port Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 - DCI Tenant Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204 - DCI Department Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205 - DCI Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206 - Initialize DCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207 - DCI Hotline Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913 914 916 918 919 920 921 922 922 924 925 926 927 931 936 937 938 939 941 942
1700 - Pooled Modem Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967 1800 - DISA, OPA and DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
1801 - DISA Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802 - DISA and OPA Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804 - VAU Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1805 - DID Translation Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1806 - DID Translation Table Number Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807 - DID Translation Table Expected Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1808 - DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1809 - DID Intercept Ring Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1810 - DID Intercept Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x 969 971 973 975 977 978 981 982 983 985
Table of Contents
1811 - DISA Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 1812 - DISA Toll Restriction Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 1813 - Alternate Trunk Routing for DISA Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
1900 - Automatic Call Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993 2000 - Copy and Clear Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
2001 - Copy Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995 2002 - Initialize Extension Numbers and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 2003 - Initialize Service Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
xi
Table of Contents
3000 - Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
3001 - Account Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049 3002 - Verified Account Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
xii
Account Codes
124i Available. 360 fixed bins available. Common bins are 000-199. Group bins are 200-359. Each of the eight Abbreviated Dialing Groups has 20 group bins. DSS Console Chaining requires Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18. system software or higher. You can only chain to stored Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers. Storing a Flash requires Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18 system software or higher. Modifying the outgoing dial tone detection criteria requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Storing a bin number with a Programmable Function Key requires Base or EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Available. Verified Account Codes, Operator Notification and Account Codes for Incoming Calls require Base or EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Hidden Account Codes require Base or EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Prior to Base or EXCPRU 4.02 software, Account Codes are from 1-8 digits long. In Base or EXCPRU 4.02 or higher, Account Codes are from 1-16 digits long. Verified Account Codes are from 3-16 digits long with Base 4.02 or higher and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
384i Available. 1990 bins available (0000-1990) for Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing. Up to 32 Abbreviated Dialing Groups available. DSS Console Chaining requires system software 3.06.14 or higher.
Modifying the outgoing dial tone detection criteria is available in all versions. Storing a bin number with a Programmable Function Key requires system software 3.07.10 or higher 14 or higher. Available. Verified Account Codes, Operator Notification and Account Codes for Incoming Calls require system software 3.07.10 or higher. Hidden Account Codes require system software 3.07.18 or higher. In system software prior to 3.07.10, Account Codes are from 1-8 digits long. In system software 3.07.10 and higher, Account Codes are from 1-16 digits long. Verified Account Codes are from 3-16 digits long.
124i
In Base 3.05, EXCPRU 3.05 or higher. Forced Account Codes do not block 911 calls. Available. Available. Available ---- six ACI software ports (two 3-ACI Modules max.) and 4 ACI Department Groups (1-4). ACI modules auto-ID when plugged in. Not available. Available. Basic ACD operation requires EXCPRU version 2.18 or higher. ACD is not available with Base software. ACD ---- The Next Generation is available in EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. InDepth/inDepth+ is not available. For more information, refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**). Available. Changing the tone detection setup and trunk access code requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Dial Treatments can contain # and * characters in Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available. Available. In Base or EXCPRU software 4.02 or higher, turning off the Barge In tones also turns off the called extensions display.
384i In system software 3.07.25 or higher, all X11 calls except for 01 and 411 are local calls. Forced Account Codes do not block 911 calls.
Available. Available. Available ---- 192 ACI software ports (64 3-ACI Modules max.) and 32 ACI Department Groups. ACI modules do not auto-ID. Available ---- requires system software 3.01.02 or higher. Available. Basic ACD operation requires system software 3.04 or higher.
ACD ---- The Next Generation requires system software 3.07.18 or higher.
For more information, refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**). Available Changing the tone detection setup and trunk access code requires system software 3.04 or higher. Dial Treatments can contain # and * characters in system software 3.06.02 and higher. Available. Available. In system software 3.07.10 and higher, turning off the Barge In tones also turns off the called extensions display.
124i Users cannot dial the Barge In code (810) before calling a busy extension.
Call Forwarding/ Do Not Disturb Override Call Timer Call Waiting/Camp On Callback
384i System software 3.07.24 and higher allows users to dial the Barge In code (810) before calling a busy extension. System software 3.07.24 and Users can Barge In only higher allows users to Barge In after hearing busy tone. after hearing busy/ring tone in addition to busy tone. System software 3.07.30 and Users cannot press a Barge higher allows users to press a In key (or a Super Display Barge In key (or a Super Display Barge In soft key) before Barge In soft key) before calling calling a busy extension. a busy extension. See MULTIPLE DIRECTORY NUMBERS/CALL COVERAGE Available Available Base software prior to 1.2R System software prior to 3.04 uses different dial codes. uses different dial codes COS control over reminder COS control for reminder message requires system messages requires system software 3.04 or higher. software 2.13 Base, 2.18 EXCPRU or higher. Available. Available---- system software prior to 3.04 has different programming options. Fixed Call Forwarding Off- Fixed Call Forwarding OffPremise available in all Premise requires Base 1.2N versions. or higher or any version of EXCPRU. Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining Fixed Call Forwarding requires system software 3.07.12 Chaining requires Base or or higher EXCPRU software 4.02 or higher. Available Available System software prior to 3.04 uses different procedures. DSL sets require Base 2.13, DSL sets require system software 3.06.02 or higher. EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available. Available ---- system software prior to 3.04 uses different procedures. Available. Available. Available. Available. Available. Available. Available. Available.
124i Available. Multiple Message Format requires system software 1.2N. There are 200 Caller ID bins available, numbered 000-199. Automatically out dating the Caller ID Block Code (*67) is available. Base 1.2R and earlier out dated the non-standard code *6. Prior to Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18, the Caller ID display can be up to 10 digits. In Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18 or higher, the display can be up to 12 digits (for non-ACD calls). Available ---- 52 trunks. Adjusting the side tone for analog trunks is not available. Customizing CODEC Gain Types and Trunk Ring Tones requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Unanswered calls can overflow to Voice Mail in Base 1.2R or higher and all versions of EXCPRU. Unanswered calls can overflow to the VAU Automated Attendant in Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Available ---- 52 trunks. Customizing CODEC Gains and setting up Alternate Trunk Access Codes require Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. The ability to turn DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls on and off requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
384i Available. Multiple Message Format type codes 4 (number absence) and 8 (name absence) require system software 3.04. There are 1000 Caller ID bins available, numbered 000-999. Automatically out dialing the Caller ID Block Code (*67) requires system software 3.06.02 or higher. Prior to system software 3.06.09, the Caller ID display can be up to 10 digits. In 3.06.09 and higher, the display can be up to 12 digits (for non-ACD calls). Available---- 128 trunks. Adjusting the side tone for analog trunks is available. Customizing CODEC Gain Types and Trunk Ring Tones requires system software 3.04 or higher. Unanswered calls can overflow to Voice Mail in system software 3.05.15 or higher. Unanswered calls can overflow to the VAU Automated Attendant in system software 3.07.10 or higher. Available ---- 128 trunks. Customizing CODEC Gains and setting up Alternate Trunk Access Codes require system software 3.04 or higher. The ability to turn DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls on and off is not available.
124i Available ---- 10 Classes of Service and 96 extension/virtual extension ports. An extensions Class of Service cannot be changed via a Service Code. Available. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences or 4 eight-party conferences. Split (From Conference) is not available. Adding a parked call to a Conference requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. The Conference initiator cannot place conference trunks on Hold. The Trunk Answer Code (867) requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences or 4 eight-party conferences. Available. Available ---- requires Base 3.03 or EXCPRU 3.03 or higher. Available ---- 72 DCI software ports, allocated between 72 DCI Modules and six 3-DCI Units (two per cabinet) maximum.
384i Available ---- 15 Classes of Service in each Tenant Group and 384 extension/virtual extension ports. In system software 3.07.31 or higher, an extensions Class of Service can be changed via Service Code 177. Available. Each DTU-A/C allows either 4 four-party conferences or 2 eight-party conferences per PCB. Split (From Conference) requires system software 3.07.24 or higher. Adding a parked call to a Conference requires system software 3.07.24 or higher. System software 3.07.24 or higher allows the initiator to place conference trunks on Hold. The Trunk Answer Code (867) Requires system software 3.07.24 or higher. Each DTU-A/C allows either 4 four-party conferences or 2 eight-party conferences per PCB. Available. Available ---- requires system software 3.07.10 or higher. Available ---- 288 DCI software ports, with 144 DCI Modules and 48 3-DCI Units maximum. System software prior to 3.04 uses different DCI Types. System software 3.05 and higher has default assignments for the first 3-DCI installed. Available. Enhanced hunting requires system software 3.06.02 or higher. Available.
Continued Dialing Cordless Telephone (Nitsuko 900i) Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Department Calling
Available. Enhanced hunting requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available.
124i Available. Available. Changing the tone requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available. Allocating circuits for Dial Tone Detection is not required. Tone Detection Setup requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. The Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone option requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Available ---- Four DID Translation Tables with 200 entries each. Prior to Base 1.2R, Wink Start Dial Pulse DID operation was unavailable. Intercept routing to Voice Mail requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. DTMF DID requires a Tone Detector (DTDU) PCB. Tone Detection Setup requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Enhanced Answer Supervision requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. DID Routing Through the VAU Automated Attendant requires Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Routing by trunk to a specific VAU message requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Intercept routing to the VAU Automated Attendant requires Base or EXCPRU software 4.02 or higher. Available ---- 52 trunks, 96 extensions/virtual extensions and eight Department Groups.
384i Available. Available. Changing the tone requires system software 3.04 or higher. Available. Allocating CDTU circuits for Dial Tone Detection is required. Tone Detection Setup requires system software 3.04 or higher. The Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone option requires system software version 3.07.10 or higher. Available ---- eight DID Translation Tables with 1500 entries each.
Intercept routing to Voice Mail requires system software 3.02 or higher. Tone Detection Setup requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Enhanced Answer Supervision requires system software 3.05.15 or higher. DID Routing Through the VAU Automated Attendant requires system software 3.06.16 or higher. Limited capabilities available with 3.06.09. Routing by trunk to a specific VAU message requires system software 3.07.10 or higher Intercept routing to the VAU Automated Attendant requires system software 3.07.10 or higher. Available ---- 128 trunks, 384 extensions/virtual extensions and 32 Department Groups.
124i Department Group as DIL destination always available. DIL overflow to Voice Mail requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. DIL overflow to the VAU Automated Attendant is not available. Available ---- 15 users, 8 DISA Classes of Service and 52 trunks. Requires DTDU PCB for DTMF DISA trunks. Enhanced Answer Supervision requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Overflow routing to Voice Mail requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Tone Detection Setup and setting the CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Overflow routing to the VAU Automated Attendant is not available. Available. 8 consoles maximum (two maximum per extension). Storing additional digits after a Service Code requires system software Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. DSS Console flash rates may be customized in Base or EXCPRU software or higher. Available. Not available. Requires Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
384i Department Group as DIL destination requires system software 3.04 or higher. DIL overflow to Voice Mail requires system software 3.05.15 or higher. DIL overflow to the VAU Automated Attendant requires system software 3.07.10 or higher. Available ---- 15 users per Tenant Group, 15 DISA Classes of Service and 128 trunks. Requires DTMF receivers on CDTU PCB for DTMF DISA trunks. Enhanced Answer Supervision requires system software 3.05.15. Overflow routing to Voice Mail is available. Tone Detection Setup and setting the CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels requires system software 3.04 or higher. Overflow routing to the VAU Automated Attendant requires system software 3.07.10 or higher. Available. 32 consoles maximum (four maximum per extension. Storing additional digits after a Service Code requires system software 3.06.14 or higher.
DSS Console flash rates may be customized in system software 3.07.14 or higher. Available. Available. Requires system software 3.06.02 or higher.
124i Available. Customizing the Keyset Splash Tone, Keyset Confirmation Tone, Trunk Ring Tone, Intercom Ring Tone and Alarm Ring Tone requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available. Available ---- eight Door Boxes and one Chime Tone. Available. Available ---- Requires Base or EXCPRU software 4.02 or higher. Each PGDU PCB has 4 sensors, with 8 maximum per system (2 PCBs). All sensors set for alarm. Changing the Alarm Ring Tone frequencies requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Each PGDU PCB has 4 sensors, with 8 maximum per system (2 PCBs). All sensors set for alarm. Available. Available. Complete numbering flexibility requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available. Available ---- eight Call Pickup Groups. Available. Enhanced operation is available in Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available. Available. Available. Available.
384i Available. Customizing the Keyset Splash Tone, Keyset Confirmation Tone, Trunk Ring Tone, Intercom Ring Tone and Alarm Ring Tone requires system software 3.04 or higher. Available. Available ---- eight Door Boxes and three Chime Tones. Available. Available ---- Requires system software 3.07.10 or higher. Each PGDU has 8 sensors, with 16 maximum per system (2 PCBs). Sensors 1-4 and 9-12 as set for alarm. Sensors 5-8 and 13-16 set for fax. Changing the Alarm Ring Tone frequencies requires system software 3.04 or higher. Each PGDU has 8 sensors, with 16 maximum per system (2 PCBs). Sensors 1-4 and 9-12 as set for alarm. Sensors 5-8 and 13-16 set for fax. Available. Available. Complete numbering flexibility requires system software 3.04 or higher. Available. Available ---- 32 Call Pickup Groups Available. Enhanced operation available in system software 3.05.15 or higher. Available. Available. Available. Available.
Handsfree and Monitor Handsfree Answerback/ Forced Intercom Ringing Headset Operation Hold
Hotel/Motel
124i Hold Recall to Operator requires system software Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Not available.
384i Hold Recall to Operator requires system software 3.06.14 or higher. Available ---- refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000HMT**) for additional information. Year 2000 Compliance requires system software 3.07.25 or higher. Available. Available. Available ---- requires system software 3.07.18 or higher. Available. Changing the Intercom ring tone requires system software 3.04 or higher. Available. Contact your sales representative for availability. Available. Available. Available. Available. Each DTU-A/C allows either 4 four-party conferences or 2 eight-party conferences per PCB. Available. Available. Available. Available. Single line telephones can leave, cancel and receive Messages Waiting. Prior to system software 3.02, single line telephones cannot receive a Message Waiting. COS control for reminder messages requires system software 3.04 or higher. Available. Available.
Year 2000 Compliance not available. Available. Available. Not available. Available. Changing the Intercom ring tone requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available. Currently not implemented. Available. Available. Available. Available. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences or 4 eight-party conferences. Available. Available. Available. Available. Single line telephones can leave, cancel and receive Messages Waiting.
Intercom Abandoned Call Display ISDN Compatibility Labelmaker Last Number Redial Line Preference Loop Keys Meet Me Conference
COS control for reminder messages requires system software 2.13 Base, 2.18 EXCPRU or higher. Available. Available.
Music on Hold Name Storing Networking Night Service Off Hook Signaling
124i In Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher, a Call Coverage key will flash when the covered extension has a second call waiting. Available. Available. Not Available. Available. Available. Off Hook Signaling Enhancements are not available. Available. Entering names at a keyset requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Storing a Flash command requires system software Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available. Available ---- eight External Paging zones and eight alarm circuits maximum. Combined Paging is always available. Available ---- eight Internal Paging Groups (Zones). Available ---- 8 System Park orbits. Personal Park requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Enhanced Dial Buffering not implemented. Splitting between calls on Park keys not available. Available. Not available. Available. Available. Available.
One-Touch Calling
384i In system software 3.07.10 and higher, a Call Coverage key will flash when the covered extension has a second call waiting. Available. Available. Available ---- requires system software 3.07.15 or higher. Available. Available. Off Hook Signaling Enhancement require system software 3.07.24 or higher. Available. Entering names at a keyset requires system software 3.06.02 or higher. Storing a Flash command requires system software.
Available. Available ---- eight External Paging zones and 16 alarm circuits maximum. Combined Paging is available prior to system software 3.04 only if a PGDU is installed. Available ---- 32 Internal Paging Groups (Zones). Available ---- 32 System Park orbits. Personal Park requires system software 3.04 or higher. Enhanced Dial Buffering requires system software 3.06.06 or higher. Splitting between calls on Park keys requires system software 3.06.14 or higher. Available. Consult your sales representative for availability. Available. Available. Available.
PBX Compatibility PC Attendant Console Prime Line Selection Privacy (Data) Private Line
Feature Name Programmable Function Keys Pulse to Tone Conversion Repeat Redial Reverse Voice Over Ring Groups Ringdown Extensions
Room Monitor Save Number Dialed Secretary Call (Buzzer) Secretary Call Pickup Selectable Display Messaging
124i Available. Available. Available. Available. Available ---- 16 Ring Groups. Available ---- 96 extensions/virtual extensions and 24 Hotline assignments. Available. Available. Available. Available. Available.
384i Available. Available. Available. Available. Available ---- 128 Ring Groups. Available ---- 384 extensions/virtual extensions and 50 Hotline assignments (in each Tenant Group). Available. Available. Available. Available. Available ---- system software prior to 3.04 uses different procedures and programmable keys. Available. Available. Available ----255 single line telephones maximum. Install 2-OPX Modules in any port. The system automatically disables the next adjacent port.
Available. Available. Available ----72 single line telephones maximum. Install 2-OPX Modules in odd numbered ports only. The system automatically disables the next adjacent port. Analog Message Waiting lamping not available. Setting the DTMF criteria requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Adjusting the side tone level is not available. Loop Disconnect Supervision for 2- OPX Modules not available. Available. The RD/COST field and Call Costing is available. Expanded ACCOUNT column not available. Year 2000 Compliance is not available.
Analog Message Waiting lamping is available. Setting the DTMF criteria requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Loop Disconnect Supervision for 2- OPX Modules requires system software 3.06.02. Available. The RD/COST field and Call Costing is only available in system software prior to 3.07.10. The ACCOUNT column is expanded to 16 digits in 3.07.10 or higher. Year 2000 Compliance requires system software 3.07.25 or higher.
TAPI Compatibility
124i Available ---- Basic T1 capabilities require EXCPRU version 2.18 or higher. T1 DID and tie lines require a DTDU PCB. ANI/DNIS Compatibility requires EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. It is not available in Base software. ANI/DNIS routing to the VAU Automated Attendant requires EXCPRU software 4.02 or higher. Routing by trunk to a specific VAU message is also available in EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Enhanced Answer Supervision for T1 tie trunks requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Voice Mail Caller ID with ANI/DNIS requires EXCPRU version 2.18 or higher. Available Basic TAPI commands require the Nitsuko TAPI Service Provider 1.02.02. TAPI Enhancements require Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Additional TAPI Commands not available.
384i Available ---- Customizing the CODEC Gain Types requires system software 3.04 or higher.
ANI/DNIS Compatibility requires system software 3.06.02 or higher. ANI/DNIS routing to the VAU Automated Attendant (page 447) requires system software 3.06.09 or higher. Routing by trunk to a specific VAU message requires system software 3.07.10 or higher. Enhanced Answer Supervision for T1 tie trunks requires system software 3.05.15 or higher. Voice Mail Caller ID with ANI/DNIS requires system software 3.06.14 or higher. Available ---- requires system software 3.04 or higher. Basic TAPI commands available in both Nitsuko TAPI Driver versions. TAPI Enhancements require system software 3.06.02. Additional TAPI Commands require 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver. System software 3.07.12 or higher provides compatibility with the Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver through Program 0419:11. Each DTU-A/C allows either 4 four-party conferences or 2 eight-party conferences per PCB. Enhanced Tandem Trunking requires system software 3.05.10 or higher.
Compatibility with the Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver is not available. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences or 4 eight-party conferences. Enhanced Tandem Trunking requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Tandem Trunking
124i Available with EXCPRU PCB only. DTMF tie lines require a DTDU PCB. Customizing CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels and Tone Detection Setup requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Enhanced Answer Supervision requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available. Year 2000 Compliance is not available. Available ---- eight Toll Restriction classes and 72 extensions. Digit counting (0702:4) not required in order to use the Permit and Restrict Code Tables. Available. Available ---- requires EXCPRU 2.10 or higher and an LAPB PCB. Not available in Base software. Year 2000 Compliance is not available. Available. MOH or ringback on Transfer requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available ---- 16 trunk groups and 36 routes. Changing the Trunk Access Code requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Available ---- 16 trunk groups. Available.
384i Available.
Customizing CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels and Tone Detection Setup require system software 3.04 or higher. Enhanced Answer Supervision requires system software 3.05.15 or higher. Available. Year 2000 Compliance requires system software 3.07.25 or higher. Available ---- 15 Toll Restriction Classes in each Tenant Group and 256 extensions. In system software 3.05.15 and earlier, you must enable digit counting (0702:4) in order to use the Permit and Restrict Code Tables. Available. Available ---- requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Toll Restriction
Transfer
Year 2000 Compliance requires system software 3.07.25 or higher. Available. MOH or ringback on Transfer requires system software 3.04 or higher. Available ---- 128 trunk groups and 64 routes. Changing the Trunk Access Code requires system software 3.04 or higher. Available ---- 128 trunk groups. Available.
Voice Mail
124i Available ---- install VAU in odd numbered ports only. The system reserves the next adjacent port for the expansion module (if installed). If not installed, the adjacent port is disabled. When a user presses 8 with system software 2.13 Base, 2.18 EXCPRU or higher, they hear the date immediately after the time. The Voice Announce Unit is Year 2000 Compliant and will announce the year 2000 and above. Available. COS control over the reminder message requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Changing the DTMF tone detection criteria requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. To accommodate customerprovided pagers, Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18 or higher can accept Park and Page strings containing any valid DTMF digits. In Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher, a line key changes from red to green when an AME users presses CALL1 to intercept the call. Voice Mail Caller ID with ANI/DNIS requires EXCPRU version 2.18 or higher. Message Center Mailbox requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Voice Mail key flashes red when there are messages waiting.
384i Available ---- Park and Page and Personal Greeting have different procedures prior to system software 3.04.
When a user presses 8 with system software 3.06.02 or higher, they hear the date immediately after the time. The Voice Announce Unit is Year 2000 Compliant and will announce the year 2000 and above. Available. COS control over the reminder message and requires system software 3.04 or higher. Changing the DTMF tone detection criteria setup requires system software 3.04 or higher. To accommodate customerprovided pagers, system software 3.05.09 and higher can accept Park and Page strings containing any valid DTMF digits. In system software 3.06.02 or higher, a line key changes from red to green when an AME users presses CALL1 to intercept the call. Voice Mail Caller ID with ANI/DNIS requires system software 3.06.14 or higher. Message Center Mailbox requires system software 3.07.10. In system software 3.07.10 and higher, Voice Mail key flashes green when subscriber mailbox has messages waiting.
Voice Over Volume Controls Warning Tone For long Conversation Year 2000 Compliance
Available. Available. Available. Available ---- unaffected by the date change to the year 2000. The system uses a two-digit date code entry. Future releases will use a four-digit date code entry.
384i Year 2000 Compliance requires system software 3.07.25 or higher. Consult your Sales Representative for applicable NVM-Series Voice Mail software. Available. Available. Available. Available ---- system software prior to 3.07.25 is unaffected by the date change to the year 2000. The system uses a twodigit date code entry. With system software 3.07.25 or higher, the system uses a fourdigit date code entry.
Section 1 Features
FEATURES 1
2 FEATURES
Section 1 - Features
Before Reading This Section
This section provides detailed information on the systems features. If you dont know what the various features are, review the Table of Contents for this section and the manuals Index. After reviewing, turn back to this section for the specifics.
FEATURES 3
4 FEATURES
Table 1-1, Abbreviated and Post Dialing Service Codes Abbreviated Service Codes1
Code Starting with an asterisk (*) For this feature. . . * (+ ext. no.) # Directed Call Pickup When you are. . . Picking up a call ringing or waiting at an extension Picking up a call ringing an extension in your own pickup group Answering a Message Waiting request Starting with a pound sign (#) For this feature. . . System Programming Password Protection Account Codes When you are. . . Entering the telephone programming mode Entering an Account Code from an SLT Using Universal Answer to pick up a call ringing over the paging system Adding a caller to a Conference from an SLT Dialing a Common Abbreviated Dialing number Flashing a trunk from an SLT Dialing a Group Abbreviated Dialing number
Message Waiting
Making a Combined Page Enabling a Call Forwarding option Disconnecting a call in progress on a trunk Setting up Selectable Display Messaging, Off Premise Call Forwarding or Personal Greeting Logging out of or on to an ACD Group Picking up a call parked in a system Park orbit (1-8 or 01-32) Splitting (switching) between calls on an SLT Calling your mailbox
Forced Trunk Disconnect Call Forwarding, Off Premise, Selectable Display Messaging, Voice Announce Unit Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Park
5 6 (+ orbit) 7
Using Last Number Redial Parking a call in a system Park orbit (1-8 or 01-32) Using Personal Abbreviated Dialing Setting up an Unsupervised Conference Placing an outside call over a specific trunk
Abbreviated Dialing
Voice Mail
9
1
FEATURES 5
6 FEATURES
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). ** *# Picking up a call ringing or waiting at another extension Picking up a call ringing an extension in your own pickup group (except Ring Group calls) Answering a Message Waiting request Making a Combined Page Canceling Call Forwarding Activating Personal Answering Machine Emulation Activating Call Forwarding when Busy Activating Call Forward Follow Me at the destination extension Activating Call Forwarding Immediate Activating Call Forwarding when Unanswered (delayed) Activating Call Forwarding (Both Ringing) Disconnecting a call in progress on a trunk Directed Call Pickup Voice Announce Unit Group Call Pickup 1007
*0 *1 *2 + 0 *2 + 1 + Type (2-4)
Message Waiting Paging Call Forwarding Voice Mail (Personal Answering Machine Emulation) Call Forwarding Call Forwarding with Follow Me Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Forced Trunk Disconnect Selectable Display Messaging Call Forwarding Off-Premise
*2 + 2 + Destination + Type (2-4) *2 + 3 + Destination + Type (2-4) *2 + 4 + Destination + Type (2-4) *2 + 6 + Destination + Type (2-4) *2 + 7 + Destination + Type (2-4) *3 (after #9 + 001-128 + busy)
*4 + 3 + Message (01-20), or Activating and canceling Selectable *4 + 3 + Hang up to cancel Display Messaging *4 + 6 + Trunk access code + Outside number, or *4 + 6 + Hold + Hang up to cancel Forwarding your calls to an off-premise telephone number
*4 + 7 + Record message + # Recording, listening to or erasing a + Condition (2, 4, 6 or 7) + Personal Greeting or Park and Page Destination + Type (2 or 3), or *4 + 7 + 3 to cancel *5 *6 + Orbit (1-8 or 01-32) *7 Logging out of or on to an ACD Group Picking up a call parked in a system Park orbit (1-8 or 01-32) Splitting (switching) between calls on an SLT
1081
FEATURES 7
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). *8 # Calling your mailbox Step Calling through a Department Group Entering the system programming mode Entering an Account Code at an SLT Using Universal Answer Code to pick up a call ringing over the paging system Entering an Account Code Voice Mail Department Step Calling System Programming Password Protection Account Codes Central Office Calls, Answering Account Codes Conference Abbreviated Dialing Flash Abbreviated Dialing Last Number Redial Park Abbreviated Dialing Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) Central Office Calls, Placing Message Waiting Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing Callback/Camp On/ Trunk Queuing Voice Announce Unit Voice Announce Unit Voice Announce Unit Voice Over 1037 1038 1033 + orbit 1-32 1059 1021 -
Hookflash + #1 + extension + Activating Conference from a Single Line hookflash twice (500/2500) set #2 + bin #3 #4 + bin #5 #6 + orbit (1-8 or 01-32) #7 #8 #9 + 001-128 0 (Off-hook) 1 (Off-hook) Dialing a Common Abbreviated Dialing number Flashing a trunk from an SLT Dialing a Group Abbreviated Dialing number Using Last Number Redial Parking a call in a system Park orbit (1-8 or 01-32) Using Personal Abbreviated Dialing Setting up an Unsupervised Conference Placing a call over a specific trunk Leaving a Message Waiting at a coworkers busy or unanswered extension Changing the signaling mode of your outgoing Intercom call Camping On or leaving a Callback for a busy extension or trunk Listening for the date Listening to the General Message Checking an extensions number Sending a Voice Over to a busy extension after hearing Busy/Ring tone.
1020 1057
8 FEATURES
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). Sending off-hook signal tones to a busy extension Listening for the time Placing a call using ARS or Trunk Group Routing SLT listening to the General Message Recording, listening to or erasing the General Message Calling busy extension through VAU Automated Attendant. Voice prompt asks you to leave your number for a return call. Recording, listening to or erasing a VAU Message Leaving a message at an extension, without first calling that extension Enabling DND at a room telephone Canceling DND at a room telephone Enabling DND for another room telephone Canceling DND at another room telephone Setting a Wake Up Call for your own room telephone Canceling a Wake Up Call for your own room telephone Setting a Wake Up Call for another guests room telephone Canceling a Wake Up Call for another guests room telephone Enabling Room to Room Call Restriction for a guests room telephone Disabling Room to Room Call Restriction for a guests room telephone Off Hook Signaling Voice Announce Unit ARS Trunk Group Routing Voice Announce Unit Voice Announce Unit Voice Announce Unit 1018 1011 -
7 (Off-hook) 8 (On-hook) 9 111 112 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or 7 to record 114 + Your own phone number 116 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or 7 to record 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135
Voice Announce Unit Hotel/Motel (Message Waiting) Hotel/Motel (Do Not Disturb) Hotel/Motel (Do Not Disturb) Hotel/Motel (Do Not Disturb) Hotel/Motel (Wake Up Call) Hotel/Motel (Wake Up Call) Hotel/Motel (Wake Up Call) Hotel/Motel (Wake Up Call) Hotel/Motel (Wake Up Call) Hotel/Motel (Room to Room Call Restriction) Hotel/Motel (Room to Room Call Restriction)
--
136
FEATURES 9
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). 137 Changing a rooms telephone Toll Restriction (When Checked In) level Setting a room as checked in Setting a room as checked out Setting a room as available (clean) from the rooms telephone Setting a room as available (clean) from another telephone Requesting a Room Status Printout Calling, erasing or scrolling through phone numbers on your display left by the Automated Attendant Hotel/Motel (Toll Restriction [When Checked In]) Hotel/Motel (Room Status) Hotel/Motel (Room Status) Hotel/Motel (Room Status) Hotel/Motel (Room Status) Hotel/Motel (Room Status Printouts) Voice Announce Unit (Automated Attendant) Caller ID Caller ID Department Calling Voice Mail ACD ACD ACD ACD ACD ACD Hotel/Motel (Toll Restriction [Cecked In]) ACD ACD ACD ACD 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0 -
138 139 140 141 142 143 + VOLL, VOLM, 2 (Call) or 3 (Erase)
146 + 2 (Change), 3 (Delete) Changing, deleting or adding new numbers to the Caller ID Table or 6 (New) 148 + 2 (Call) or 3 (Erase) 150 + 0 (install) or 1 (remove) 154 155 156 157 158 159 Hookflash + 160 166 167 168 169 170 10 FEATURES Returning or erasing a missed Caller ID call Logging in (0) or logging out (1) for your Department Calling Group Enabling Conversation Record at ESL set Logging out of or on to an ACD Group from an SLT Activating Work Time Canceling Work Time Activating Rest Mode Canceling Rest Mode ACD Recording for SLT Changing Toll Restriction for a checked in room Logging an agent into their ACD Group Logging an agent out of their ACD Group Supervisor assigning an agent into another ACD Group or changing an agents status An agent changing their own status
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). Changing your ACD Group assignment Programming extension names Making an Internal Zone Page Making an All Call Internal Page Placing a call to a Door Box Making an External Zone page Making an External All Call page Placing an outside call over a trunk group Stepping through a Department Group Sending a Call Waiting tone to a busy ext. Breaking into another extensions call Listening to the incoming ring choices Changing the signal type for calling an ext. Saving a number (from SLT) or dialing a saved number Setting modem outgoing parameters Activating Day Mode Activating Night Mode Activating Midnight Mode Activating Rest Mode Changing your extensions incoming ring tones Enabling Handsfree Answerback for incoming Intercom calls Enabling Forced Ringing for incoming Intercom calls Enabling/disabling Dial Pad Confirmation Tone Turning Background Music on and off ACD Name Storing Paging, Internal Door Box External Paging Central Office Calls, Placing Department Step Calling Call Waiting Barge In Selectable Ring Tones Intercom Save Number Dialed Data Communications Night Service 1014 1039 + pswd 1040 + pswd 1041 + pswd 1042 + pswd 1006 + zone 1076 1004 + zone 1005 1012 + group
170 + ACD Group 800 + enter name 801 + zone (1-9 or 01-32) 801 + zone (0 or 00) 802 + Door Box (1-8) 803 + zone (1-8) 803 + zone (0) 804 + trunk group (1-9, 01-99 or 001-128) 808 809 810 811 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (trk) + tone (1-3) 812 815 817 818 + pswd (0000) + 0 818 + pswd (0000) + 1 818 + pswd (0000)+ 2 818 + pswd (0000) + 3 820 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (trk) + tone (1-3) 821 823
Selectable Ring Tones Handsfree Answerback/ Forced Intercom Ringing Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom ringing Dial Pad Confirmation Tone Background Music Alarm Time and Date
824 825
827 + 1 or 2 + time, or Checking, setting or canceling an alarm 827 + 1 or 2 + 9999 to cancel Setting the system Time and Date 828 + password (0000) + year + month + day + day of week (0-6) + hour + minutes 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 11
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). 830 832 834 840 Remote maintenance Placing a call on Group Hold Switching from headset to handset mode and visa versa System alarm message delete Activating Do Not Disturb Hold Headset Operation Do Not Disturb 1028 -
847 + 0 (Cancel) 1 (Trk calls) 2 (Paging, ICM and transfers) 3 (Paging, ICM and trk calls) 4 (Call Forwards) 849 850
Placing a call on Exclusive Hold at a DSL/SLT set. Camping On to an extension when calling into the system through the VAU Automated Attendant Changing the function of a programmable key Accessing One-Touch Key Serial Operation store and delete functions
Hold Voice Announce Unit (Automated Attendant) Programmable Function Keys One-Touch Serial Operation
851 + key + code 852 + One-Touch + Key sequence + Programmable key (1034) to store, or 852 + One-Touch + Programmable key (1034) to cancel 853 + bin + number + HOLD to store 854 + bin + number + HOLD to store
1034
Storing Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers Storing Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers
Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing One-Touch Dialing Group Call Pickup Park Hold ACD Hold
855 + One Touch key + code Programming a One-Touch Key or Personal Speed Dial 856 857 859 860 862 Answering a call ringing a phone in your pickup group (except Ring Group calls) Parking a call or picking up a parked call Retrieving a call from Exclusive Hold at a DSL/SLT set. DID ACD Access Code (not used) Picking up a call from Group Hold
12 FEATURES
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). 863 Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page on an Internal Paging Zone (if your extension is in the group called) Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page if your extension is not in the group paged Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page on an External Paging Zone. Retrieving a Conferenced CO line Answering a call ringing a phone in another pickup group (except Ring Group calls) Answering a call ringing a phone in another pickup group if you dont know the groups number (except Ring Group Calls) Canceling a Callback request Canceling Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension Canceling all Messages Waiting you have left at other extensions Temporarily overriding an extensions Toll Restriction Clearing number saved by Last Number Redial Initializing the DCI Changing the Music on Hold Tone Meet Me Conference Meet Me Paging Meet Me Paging 1010
864 + zone paged (0-9 or 00-32) 865 + zone (0-8) 867 + line number 868 + pickup group (1-9 or 01-32) 869
Meet Me Conference Meet Me Paging Conference Group Call Pickup Group Call Pickup
870 871 + ext 873 875 + pswd (0000) + place outside call 876 880 881 + pswd (0000) + 0 (no tone), 1 (minuet) or 2 (nocturne) 883 884 885 892 893 899
Callback Message Waiting Message Waiting Toll Restriction Override Last Number Redial Data Communications Music on Hold
Enabling the DCI auto-answer mode Disconnecting an active data call Clearing the number saved by Save Number Redial Forcing Off Hook Signaling to voiceannounce your phone Forcing Off Hook Signaling to ring your phone Testing Callback operation for SLTs
Data Communications Data Communications Save Number Redial Off Hook Signaling Off Hook Signaling Callback
FEATURES 13
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). 853 + bin + number + HOLD to store 854 + bin + number + HOLD to store #2 + bin #4 + bin #7 + bin Storing Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers Storing Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers Dialing a Common Abbreviated Dialing number Dialing a Group Abbreviated Dialing number Using Personal Abbreviated Dialing Entering an Account Code Entering an Account Code at an SLT 1037 1038 1046 1053 1053 1049 1049 -
Abbreviated Dialing
Account Codes
827 + 1 or 2 + time, or 827 + Checking, setting or canceling an alarm 1 or 2 + 9999 to cancel *5 155 156 157 158 159 Hookflash + 160 167 168 169 170 + ACD Group 860 Logging out of or on to an ACD Group Logging out of or on to an ACD Group from an SLT Activating Work Time Canceling Work Time Activating Rest Mode Canceling Rest Mode ACD Recording for SLT Allowing ACD Agent to log into a group Allowing ACD Agent to log out of a group Allowing supervisor to change agents status Changing your ACD Group assignment DID ACD Access Code (not used) Placing an call using Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection Turning Background Music on and off Canceling Call Forwarding Activating Call Forwarding when Busy Activating Call Forwarding Immediate
Automatic Route Selection or Trunk Group Routing Background Music Call Forwarding
14 FEATURES
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). *2 + 6 + Destination + Type (2-4) *2 + 7 + Destination + Type (2-4) Activating Call Forwarding when Unanswered (delayed) Activating Call Forwarding (Both Ringing) Forwarding your calls to an off-premise telephone number 1080 1080 1081
*4 + 6 + Trunk access code + Outside number, or *4 + 6 + Hold + Hang up to cancel *2 + 3 + Destination + Type (2-4) *7 2 870 899
Call Forwarding with Follow Me Call Waiting / Camp On Callback / Camp On / Trunk Queuing
Activating Call Forward Follow Me at the destination extension Splitting (switching) between calls on an SLT Camping On or leaving a Callback for a busy extension or trunk Canceling a Callback request Testing Callback operation for SLTs
Caller ID
146 + 2 (Change), 3 (Delete) Changing, deleting or adding new numbers to the Caller ID Table or 6 (New) 148 + 2 (Call) or 3 (Erase) Returning or erasing a missed Caller ID call Using Universal Answer to pick up a call ringing over the paging system Placing a call over a specific trunk Placing an outside call over a trunk group Activating Conference from a Single Line (500/2500) set Retrieving a CO line in a Conference Setting modem outgoing parameters Initializing the DCI Enabling the DCI auto-answer mode Disconnecting an active data call Logging in (0) or logging out (1) for your Department Calling Group Step Calling through a Department Group Enabling/disabling Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
#0 #9 + 001-128 804 + trunk group (1-9, 01-99 or 001-128) Hookflash + #1 + extension + hookflash twice 867 + line number
Conference
Data Communications
1074 1021 -
FEATURES 15
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). ** + ext. 847 + 0 (Cancel) 1 (Trk calls) 2 (Paging, ICM and Call Forwards) 3 (Paging, ICM and trk calls) 4 (Call Forwards) 802 + Door Box (1-8) #3 *3 (after #9 + 001-128 + busy) *# Picking up a call ringing or waiting at an extension Activating Do Not Disturb -
Placing a call to a Door Box Flashing a trunk from an SLT. Disconnecting a call in progress on a trunk Picking up a call ringing an extension in your own pickup group (except Ring Group calls) Answering a call ringing a phone in another pickup group (except Ring Group calls) Answering a call ringing a phone in another pickup group if you dont know the groups number (except Ring Group calls) Changing the signaling mode of your outgoing Intercom call Enabling Handsfree Answerback for incoming Intercom calls Enabling Forced Ringing for incoming Intercom calls Switching from headset to handset mode and visa versa Placing a call on Group Hold Placing a call on Exclusive Hold at a DSL/SLT set Retrieving a call from Exclusive Hold at a DSL Picking up a call from Group Hold Leaving a message at an extension, without first calling that extension Enabling DND at a room telephone
1007
1028 -
126 127
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 Canceling DND at a room telephone Enabling DND for another room telephone Canceling DND at another room telephone Setting a Wake Up Call or your own room telephone Canceling a Wake Up Call for your own room telephone Setting a Wake Up Call for another guests room telephone Canceling a Wake Up Call for another guests room telephone Enabling Room to Room Call Restriction for a guests room telephone Disabling Room to Room Call Restriction for a guests room telephone Changing a rooms telephone Toll Restriction (When Checked In) level Setting a room as checked in Setting room as checked out Setting a room as available (clean) from the rooms telephone Setting a room as available (clean) from another telephone Requesting a Room Status Printout Changing a rooms telephone Toll Restriction level (when checked in) Using Last Number Redial Clearing number saved by Last Number Redial -
Hotel/Motel (Do Not Disturb) Hotel/Motel (Do Not Disturb) Hotel/Motel (Do Not disturb) Hotel/Motel (Wake Up Call) Hotel/Motel (Wake Up Call) Hotel/Motel (Wake Up Call) Hotel/Motel (Wake Up Call) Hotel/Motel (Room to Room Call Restriction) Hotel/Motel (Room to Room Call Restriction) Hotel/Motel (Toll Restriction [When Checked In]) Hotel/Motel (Room Status) Hotel/Motel (Room Status) Hotel/Motel (Room Status) Hotel/Motel (Room Status) Hotel/Motel (Room Status Printouts) Hotel/Motel (Toll Restriction [When Checked In]) Last Number Redial
136
137
#5 876
FEATURES 17
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). 863 Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page on an Internal Paging Zone (if your extension is in the group called) Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page if your extension is not in the group paged Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page on an External Paging Zone. Leaving a Message Waiting at a coworkers busy or unanswered extension Answering a Message Waiting request Canceling Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension Canceling all Messages Waiting you have left at other extensions Changing the Music on Hold Tone 1010
864 + zone paged (0-9 or 00-32) 865 + zone (0-8) Message Waiting 0 (Off-hook) *0 871 + ext 873 Music on Hold 881 + pswd (0000) + 0 (no tone), 1 (minuet) or 2 (nocturne) 800 + enter name 818 + pswd (0000) + 0 818 + pswd (0000) + 1 818 + pswd (0000) + 2 818 + pswd (0000) + 3 7 (Off-hook) 892 893 One-Touch Dialing One-Touch Serial Operation
1023 -
Programming extension names Activating Day Mode Activating Night Mode Activating Midnight Mode Activating Rest Mode Sending off-hook signal tones to a busy ext. Forcing Off Hook Signaling to voiceannounce your phone Forcing Off Hook Signaling to ring your phone
1039 + pswd 1040 + pswd 1041 + pswd 1042 + pswd 1018 1034
855 + One-Touch key + code Programming a One-Touch Key or Personal Speed Dial Accessing One-Touch Key Serial 852 + One-Touch + Key sequence + Programmable Operation store and delete functions key (1034) to store, or 852 + One-Touch + Programmable key (1034) to cancel *1 + Zone (1-8) *1 + Zone (0) 803 + zone (1-8) 803 + zone (0) Making a combined zone page. Making a combined All Call page. Making an external zone page Making an external All Call page
18 FEATURES
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). 801 + zone (1-9 or 01-32) 801 + zone (0 or 00) #6 + orbit (1-8 or 01-32) *6 + orbit (1-8 or 01-32) 857 851 + key + code 815 885 Making an Internal Zone Page Making an Internal All Call Page Parking a call in system Park orbit (1-8 or 01-32) Picking up a call parked in a system Park orbit (1-8 or 01-32) Parking a call or picking up a parked call Changing the function of a programmable key Saving a number (from SLT) or dialing a saved number Clearing the number saved by Save Number Redial number 1006 + zone 1076 1033 + orbit 1033 + orbit 1014 1081 -
Paging, Internal Park Park Park Programmable Function Keys Save Number Dialed
*4 + 3 + message (01-20), or Activating and Canceling Selectable *4 + 3 + Hang up to cancel Display Messaging 811 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (trk) + tone (1-3) 820 + 1 (ICM) + 2 (trk) + tone (1-3) Listening to the incoming ring choices Changing your extensions incoming ring tones Entering the system programming mode Setting up an Unsupervised Conference
System Programming Password Protection Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) Time and Date
#*#* #8
Setting the system Time and Date 828 + password (0000) + year + month + day + day of week (0-6) + hour + minutes 875 + pswd (0000) + place outside call 9 2 (Off-hook) Temporarily overriding an extensions Toll Restriction Placing a call using Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection Camping on to or leaving a Callback at a busy trunk
Toll Restriction Override Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection Trunk Queuing
1011 1020
FEATURES 19
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first). ** + ringing ext. Picking up a call ringing another extension for Directed Call Pickup or VAU Park and Page. 1081
*4 + 7 + Record message + # Recording, listening to or erasing a + Condition (2, 4, 6 or 7) + Personal Greeting or Park and Page Destination + Type (2 or 3), or *4 + 7 + 3 to cancel 3 (On-hook) 4 (On-hook) 6 (On-Hook) 8 (On-hook) 111 112 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or 7 to record 114 + Your own phone number 116 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or 7 to record 143 + VOLL, VOLM, 2 (Call) or 3 (Erase) 850 Listening for the date Listening to the General Message Checking an extensions number Listening for the time SLT listening to the General Message Recording, listening to or erasing the General Message Calling busy extension through VAU Automated Attendant. Voice prompt asks you to leave your number for a return call. Recording, listening to or erasing a VAU Message Calling, erasing or scrolling through phone numbers on your display left by the Automated Attendant Camping On to an extension when calling into the system through the VAU Automated Attendant Leaving a message in a co-workers mailbox after calling their busy or unanswered extension. Activating Personal Answering Machine Emulation Calling your mailbox Enabling Conversation Record at DSL set Sending a Voice Over to a busy extension after hearing Busy/Ring tone
Voice Mail
8 (Off-hook)
1059 1057
20 FEATURES
Code: 1038 Dialing a stored Group Operation: Press key + Abbreviated Dialing number bin + Line or CALL key Account Codes Code:1054 Operation: Press key + Dial Account Code Entering Account Codes
None
#4 + bin
None
Code: 1046 Basic Operation Operation: Press key to Logging in or out of an ACD Group log in Press key + 1 to log out or 0 to cancel Code: 1047 Operation: Press key Turning ACI Call Recording on or off
On red when logged in Off when logged out On red when recording Off when not recording On while calling your supervisor or after being answered by your supervisor Flashing fast at the supervisor while ringing On red when Rest Mode enabled Off when Rest Mode disabled -
*5
160
Out of Service Taking an ACD Group out of Service (for Group Supervisors only), or Taking all ACD Groups out of service (for System Supervisors only) Monitoring an ACD Agents conversation
Switching (splitting) between an ACD Agent and their outside caller after an emergency call
FEATURES 21
Code: 1079 Operation: Press key while on hook Barge In Call Forwarding Call Forwarding, Off-Premise Code: 1019 Operation: Press key Code: 1080 Operation: Press key Code: 1081 Operation: Press key
Queue Status Check With 384i 3.07.18 or higher, an in an ACD group and wish to check status of the queue groups Barging In on a co-workers conversation Call Forwarding to extension or Voice Mail Setting up Call Forwarding OffPremise, Selectable Display Messaging, VAU Park /Page and VAU Personal Greeting Overriding an extensions Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb Leaving a Callback request at a busy extension, Camping On to a busy extension, or Queuing for a busy trunk Changing, deleting or adding new numbers to the Caller ID Table
*2 *4
Code: 1022 Operation: Call extension + Press key Code: 1020 Operation: Call busy extension or access busy trunk + Press key Code: 1073 Operation: Press key + 2 (Change), 3 (Delete) or 6 (New)
None
Caller ID
None
146
Code: Trunk number Pressing a line key to place or (0001-0128) or 0000 to answer a trunk call (where undefine trunks are 0001-0128) Operation: Press key
On green when seized, on red when busy (by other party), Slow Flash green when ringing, Hold flash when on Hold
#9
22 FEATURES
Code: 1016 Setting up a Conference or a Operation: Set up call Meet Me Conference + Press key + set up call to add + Press key twice Code: 1017 Operation: Set up trunk call + Press key Setting up a Voice Call Conference
None
Data Communications
Code: 1029 Placing a data call Operation: Press key + ext or outside number Code: 1030 Operation: Press key + line key Code: 1045 Operation: Press key + terminal dial On a data call and wish to block Barge In and Off Hook Signaling Using your PC for Telemarketing Dial Logging in or logging out of your Department Calling Group Step Calling through a Department Group for an idle member Using Directory Dialing
Code: 1074 Operation: Press key Code: 1021 Operation: Dial busy ext + Press key Code: 1082 Operation: Do not lift handset + Press key Code: 1007 Operation: CALL + Press key Code: 1008 Operation: CALL + Press key
150 #
None
3 (On hook) *#
Answering a call ringing another phone in your Pickup Group Answering a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group - if you dont know the group number
None
None
869
Code: 1009 + Pickup Answering a call ringing a Group (1-9 or 01-32) phone in a specific Pickup Operation: CALL + Group Press key + Pkup Group Hotline Headset Operation Hold Code: 1058 + dest. ext Operation: Press key Code: 1028 Operation: Press key Placing a call to your Hotline partner Enabling or disabling Headset Operation
None
868
Full BLF (red) for covered ext. On red when activated None
834 -
Code: 1043 Putting a call on System Hold Operation: Place or (if your phones Hold key is answer call + Press key reassigned)
FEATURES 23
Code: 1044 Putting a call on Exclusive Operation: Place or Hold answer call + Press key Placing or answering a trunk Code: 1078 + 0 call (Incoming), 1 (Outgoing) or 2 (Both Ways) + 000 (All trunk groups incoming or ARS outgoing) or Trunk group (001-128). Operation: Press key Code: 1010 Operation: Press key Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page
Loop Keys
None
863
Storing, using or checking a Code: 1015 Memo Dial number Operation: Store: While on call, Press key + number Use: Press key + CALL or line Erase: CALL + Press key Code: 1023 Operation: Call extension + Press key Code: 1026 Operation: Set up call + Press key Code: 1036 + ext. Operation: Press key Code: 1039 + pswd (0000) Operation: Press key Code: 1040 + pswd (0000) Operation: Press key Code: 1041 + pswd (0000) Operation: Press key Code: 1042 + pswd (0000) Operation: Press key Answering a Message Waiting
None
Message Waiting
None
*0
Microphone Cutoff
On red when activated Slow Flash red when ringing, On red when busy On red when activated On red when activated On red when activated On red when activated
Placing or answering a call to your virtual (phantom) extension Activating the Day Mode
818 + pswd (0000) + 0 818 + pswd (0000) + 1 818 + pswd (0000) + 2 818 + pswd (0000) + 3
24 FEATURES
None
852
Paging, External
Making an external zone page Making an external All Call page Broadcasting to an Internal Paging Zone Broadcasting to all Internal Paging zones Placing a call into or retrieving a call from a Park Orbit
On red when activated On red when activated On red when activated On red when activated Fast Flash when orbit busy (green at originator, red at others) Fast Flash while system waits to redial Full BLF red
Code: 1056 + dest. ext. Initiating Reverse Voice Over Operation: Press and hold key Code: 1025 Activating Room Monitor Operation: Press key at destination and source Saving, redialing or checking Code: 1014 a saved number Operation: Save: Place call + Press key Redial: Line or CALL + Press key Code: 1031 + sec. ext Operation: Press key Code: 1032 + boss ext Operation: Press key Calling your secretary (using the buzzer) A secretary picking up a call ringing your bosss extension.
Room Monitor
FEATURES 25
Serial Call
Code: 1035 Operation: Trk call + Hold + ext + Press key Code:1077 Operation: Press key Code: 1011 Operation: Press key Code: 1012 + trk group (1-9, 01-99 or 001-128) Operation: Press key
None
9 804
Trunk Queuing
Code: 1020 Camping On or Queuing for a Operation: Hear busy trunk tone for trk + Press key Code: 1081 Operation: Press key Setting up Call Forwarding OffPremise, Selectable Display Messaging, VAU Park and Page and VAU Personal Greeting
None
Voice Announce Unit (Park and Page) (Personal Greeting) Voice Mail
None
*4
Calling Voice Mail or leaving Code: 1059 In 384i 3.07.10 or higher, a message enter 1059 followed by extension or Message Center number. Operation: Press key Code: 1060 Operation: Set up call + Press key Using Voice Mail Record
None
*8 or 8
Slow Flash red when active On red when responding Hold Flash red when listening
Voice Over
26 FEATURES
telemanuals.com
Introducing the Features Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-5, Function Key Codes by Number
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over). Use this key... Code: Trunk number (0001-0128) or 0000 to undefine Operation: Press key For this feature... Central Office Calls When you are... Pressing a line key to place or answer a trunk call (where trunks are 0001-0128) Key Lamp Status On green when seized, on red when in use (by other party), Slow Flash green when ringing, Hold flash when on Hold On red when activated On red when activated On red when activated None Also see Srvc Code #9
Code: 1004 + zone (1-8) Operation: Press key Code: 1005 Operation: Press key Code: 1006 + zone (1-9 or 01-32) Operation: Press key Code: 1007 Operation: CALL + Press key Code: 1008 Operation: CALL + Press key Code: 1009 + Pickup Group (1-9 or 01-32) Operation: CALL + Press key + Pickup Group Code: 1010 Operation: Press key Code: 1011 Operation: Press key Code: 1012 + tr group (1-9, 01-99 or 001-128) Operation: Press key Code: 1014 Operation: Save: Place call + Press key Redial: Line or CALL + Press key
Broadcasting to an External Paging Zone Broadcasting to all External Paging Zones Broadcasting to an Internal Paging Zone Answering a call ringing another phone in your Pickup Group Answering a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group - if you dont know the group number Answering a call ringing a phone in a specific Pickup Group
*#
None
869
None
868
Meet Me Conference (Also see Conference) Meet Me Paging Trunk Group Routing Trunk Groups
Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page Accessing a trunk using Trunk Group Routing Using a loop key to access a Trunk Group Saving, redialing or checking a saved number
None
863
9 804
None
FEATURES 27
Conference
#1
None
None
Barging In on a co-workers conversation Leaving a Callback request at a busy extension, Camping On to a busy extension, Queuing for a busy trunk Step Calling through a Department Group for an idle member Overriding an extensions Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb Answering a Message Waiting
None
None
None
*0
Room Monitor
Fast Flash red at destination, Hold Flash red at source On red when activated On red when activated
Microphone Cutoff
Headset Operation
834
28 FEATURES
On a data call and wish to block Barge In and Off Hook Signaling Calling your secretary (using the buzzer) A secretary picking up a call ringing your bosss extension. Placing a call into or retrieving a call from a Park Orbit
#6 (Park) *6 (pickup)
852
Serial Call
Placing a Serial Call to a coworker Placing or answering a call from your virtual (phantom) extension Dialing a stored Common Abbreviated Dialing number Dialing a stored Group Abbreviated Dialing number
None
#2 + bin
Abbreviated Dialing
None
#4 + bin
FEATURES 29
Hold
Putting a call on System Hold (if hold key is reassigned) Putting a call on Exclusive Hold Using your PC for Telemarketing Dial Basic Operation Logging in or out of an ACD Group
None
None
On red when logged in Off when logged out On red while recording. Off while not recording On while calling your supervisor or after being answered by your supervisor Flashing fast at the supervisor while ringing On red when Rest Mode enabled Off when Rest Mode disabled
*5
Call Recording Turning ACI Call Recording on or off Emergency Call Placing or receiving an Emergency Call
160
30 FEATURES
Code: 1051 Operation: Press key Code: 1052 Operation: Press key
On if Work Time enabled, Flashing while on a call if Auto Work Time enabled Off when Work Time disabled None
Code: 1054 Operation: Press key and dial Account Code Code: 1056 + dest. ext. Operation: Press and hold key Code: 1057 Operation: Hear Off-Hook Signaling tones + Press key Code: 1058 + dest. ext. Operation: Press key
Account Codes
Voice Over
On red when responding Hold Flash red when listening Full BLF (red) for covered ext. Off when idle, on when busy, double wink when logged off or not installed, and double wink on when logged on. None
Placing a call to your Hotline partner Displaying an Agents status using BLF keys
Code: 1059 In 384i 3.07.10 or higher, enter 1059 followed by extension or Message Center number. Operation: Press key
Voice Mail
*8 or 8
FEATURES 31
Caller ID
146
Department Calling
Logging in or logging out of your Department Calling Group Activating repeat redial while on a call Broadcasting to all Internal Paging Zones Transferring a call (if CONF (TRF) is not set for Transfer) Placing or answering a trunk call
On when removed, Off when installed Fast Flash while system waits to redial On red when activated None Flash red when ringing, On green when in use
150
Repeat Redial
801 + 0 or 00 -
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (384i 3.07.18 or higher) Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Off-Premise Selectable Display Messaging Voice Announce Unit (Park and Page) Voice Announce Unit (Personal Greeting) Directory Dialing (384i 3.06.02 or higher)
Viewing the ACD Queue Status of each ACD group Call Forwarding to extension or Voice Mail Setting up Call Forwarding Off-Premise, Selectable Display Messaging, VAU Park and Page and VAU Personal Greeting
None
None None
*2 *4
None
3 (On hook)
32 FEATURES
384i
124i
1 10 8 200
1-128 1-128 1-128 1-64 1-128 1000 (0-999) 8 1500 16 15 per Tenant 15 per Tenant
FEATURES 33
34 FEATURES
384i
124i
0000
0000
Count toward total number of allowed hardware ports (124 or 384 depending on the system). These devices share the same pool of extension numbers. Extension numbers cannot overlap.
Extension numbers can be three or four digits long. See Flexible System Numbering.
FEATURES 35
Door Chime 3
Service Set Tone, Service Clear Tone Talk Back Tone, Paging Tone, Splash Tone 2 Speaker Monitor Tone, Door Relay Tone, Door Call Tone, Splash Tone 1 Splash Tone 3 1 Second Signal Tone
3 2 1
1 1
800 Hz 800 Hz
-13 dB -13 dB
36 FEATURES
Variable: 440 Hz + 480 Hz at -22 dB for 1 Second, 440 Hz at -22 dB for 200 mS, 3 Seconds Off 350 Hz + 440 Hz 440 Hz + 480 Hz 480 Hz + 620 Hz 800 Hz -16 dB -16 dB -21 dB -13 dB Steady 1 Second On, 3 Seconds Off 250 mS Off, 250 mS On 500 mS Off, 500 mS On
Variable: 440 Hz + 480 Hz at -16 dB for 1 Second, 440 Hz at -16 dB for 200 mS, 3 Seconds Off Variable: 440 Hz at -14 dB for 250 mS, 620 Hz at -14 dB for 250 mS 440 Hz 440 Hz -14 dB -14 dB 200 mS On, then Off 3 Seconds On, then Off Selected in Program 0902 for trunks and Program 1001 Item 2 for extensions Selected in Program 0902 for trunks and Program 1001 Item 2 for extensions Selected in Program 0902 for trunks and Program 1001 Item 2 for extensions Selected in Program 0902 for trunks and Program 1001 Item 2 for extensions
Combination of... High: 1032 Hz + 865 Hz + 16 Hz Med: 865 Hz + 416 Hz + 16 Hz Low: 421 Hz + 360 Hz + 16 Hz Combination of... High: 2667 Hz + 2000 Hz + 8 Hz Med: 2000 Hz + 1600 Hz + 8 Hz Low: 1455 Hz + 1185 Hz + 8 Hz Combination of... High: 1778 Hz + 2286 Hz + 25 Hz Med: 889 Hz + 711 Hz + 24 Hz Low: 438 Hz + 360 Hz + 24 Hz Combination of... High: 2462 Hz + 2286 Hz + 25 Hz Med: 2000 Hz + 1882 Hz + 25 Hz Low: 1524 Hz + 1455 Hz + 25 Hz
FEATURES 37
Combination of... High: 800 Hz + 1032 Hz + 12 Hz Med: 604 Hz + 865 Hz + 12 Hz Low: 400 Hz + 640 Hz + 12 Hz Combination of... High: 800 Hz + 1000 Hz Med: 800 Hz + 1000 Hz Low: 800 Hz + 1000 Hz
Set in Program 0304 for alarm sensors. (Pitch is identical, but pattern is unique for ranges 1-3.)
38 FEATURES
Abbreviated Dialing
Account Codes
FEATURES 39
telemanuals.com
When... You dial 827 to set an alarm You dial 827 to set an alarm, then dial 1 (to set Alarm 1) or 2 (to set Alarm 2) Your extension is idle, after setting Alarm n (1 or 2) You set an alarm time but do not hang up You dial 827, 1 or 2 to select an alarm type then 9999 to cancel You press CHECK, dial 827, then 1 or 2 to check your alarm setting An caller has left their number on your phone You dial Service Code 143 to scroll through, call or erase numbers left on your display be the Automated Attendant You dial Service Code 825 to turn Background Music on You dial Service Code 825 to turn Background Music off You have Barged-In (speech mode) on a co-workers Intercom call You have Barged-In (speech mode) on a co-workers outside call You have Barged-In (monitor mode) on a co-workers Intercom call You have Barged-In (monitor mode) on a co-workers Intercom call
Time and Date LEAVE (digits) LEAVE NUM C:2 E:3 (digits)
Background Music
Barge In
BREAK IN (ext name) (ext name) (trk name) (ext name) BREAK IN
BREAK IN (ext name) (ext name) (trk name) (ext name) BREAK IN
40 FEATURES
CFW
FEATURES 41
Time and Date CAMP-ON (ext name) Time and Date CAMP CANCEL Time and Date CALL-BACK (ext name) Time and Date NO CALLER INFO Time and Date UNAVAILABLE INFO Time and Date OUT-OF-STATE Time and Date CHG:2, DEL:3, NEW:6 Time and Date PERSONAL:7 CO:2 ENTER NEW NO. + HOLD ENTER NAME + HOLD Time and Date CHG. BY NAME?:Y/N Time and Date DEL. BY NAME?:Y/N
42 FEATURES
(trk name) (Incoming Number) (Incoming Number) (Incoming Name) (trk name) (HH:MM:SS) (Incoming Number) (Incoming Number) HH:MM:SS (Incoming Name MISSED CALL
(trk name) BUSY (trk name) RINGING (trk name) (trk name) ANSWERED
Conference
FEATURES 43
Time and Date GROUP LISTEN Time and Date SET HEADSET MODE Time and Date CANCEL HEADSET MODE
Hold HOLD
Time and Date GROUP HOLD (ext name) (trk name) GROUP HOLD
44 FEATURES
(ext name) HLD RCALL (trk name) HOLD RECALL (trk name) HOLD Intercom Time and Date TALKING TO (ext name) DND Time and Date (ext name)
Time and Date CALLING (ext name) Time and Date CALL FROM(name) Time and Date HANG UP Time and Date BUSY(ext name) Intercom Abandoned Call Display CHECK ABANDON CALL (nnn) (ext name)
FEATURES 45
CHECK DSSnn (digits) One-Touch Serial Operation KEY PROG CHECK FTR KEY LINE KEY nn FEATURE KEYS FTR KEY
46 FEATURES
For this key function . . . 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018
1019 1020
FEATURES 47
Room Monitor
ROOM MONITOR ICM DIAL Time and Date MONITOR << (ext name) Time and Date MONITORED >>
TEXT MESSAGE DIAL MESSAGE No. SET INCOM RING 1:INT 2:EXT SET INT INCOM RING 1:(H) 2:(M) 3:(L) SET EXT INCOM RING 1:(H) 2:(M) 3:(L) SET (type) INCOM RING (n) SET CONFIRM INCOM RING 1:INT 2:EXT CONFIRM INT INCOM 1:H 2:M 3:L CONFIRM EXT INCOM 1:H 2:M 3:L + TN1-4
Serial Call
(trk name) WAIT TRF (trk name) TRANSFER<< (trk name) TRF RCALL
(ext name)
Transfer
(ext name)
(ext name)
Trunk Queuing
50 FEATURES
FEATURES 51
52 FEATURES
FEATURES 53
ICM Ring
Call 2
Callback
Alarm
External Alarm 1
External Alarm 2
External Alarm 3
External Alarm 4
Call 4
92000 - 142
54 FEATURES
Slow Flash
60 IPM
Exclusive Hold
120 IPM
Hold
120 IPM
Flutter
180 IPM
92000 - 141
DSS Console
SECONDS 0 2 (Fast Flash) 120 IPM 1 2
3 (Wink Off)
4 (Double Wink On, then Off) 5 (Slow Flash) 6 (Double Wink Off, then On) 7 (Double Wink On, then Off)
920 - 141e
120 IPM
60 IPM
60 IPM
60 IPM
FEATURES 55
features. While your phone is idle, the Soft Keys are normal One Touch Keys.
92 - 155 D A
CHECK
CLEAR
SERVICE RINGING
[DIRECTORY]
[MENU]
1 9 17
2 10 18
3 11 19
4 12 20
5 13 21
6 14 22
7 15 23
8 16 24
Programmable Function Keys Abbreviated Dialing Dual Line Appearance Keys Last Number Redial Do Not Disturb Microphone Cutoff Speakerphone
MW
1 4
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
DIAL
CALL 1
LND
CALL 2
FLASH
MIC
DND
CONF (TRF)
SPK
HOLD
VOLUME
Message Waiting Lamp Handsfree, Handset, Page and BGM Volume Control
Microphone
56 FEATURES
Alphanumeric Display
9200 - 109
CHECK
DIGITAL
CLEAR
17
MW MIC DND
1 4
GHI
2
ABC
3
DEF
DC
CL 1
5
JKL
6
MNO
FLSH
CL 2
7
PRS
8
TUV
9
WXY
LND CONF
(TRFR)
SPK
VOL
*
Flash
0
OPER
HOLD
FEATURES 57
Alphanumeric Display
92 - 199AA
CLEAR CHECK
10
9 17
10 18
11 19
12 20
13 21
14 22
15 23
16 24
Programmable Function Keys Abbreviated Dialing Dual Line Appearance Keys Last Number Redial Do Not Disturb Microphone Cutoff Speakerphone
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
MW
1 4
2 5 8 0
3 6 9
DIAL
CALL 1
LND
CALL 2
FLASH
MIC
DND
CONF (TRF)
SPK
HOLD
VOLUME
Message Waiting Lamp Handsfree, Handset, Page and BGM Volume Control
Microphone
58 FEATURES
Alphanumeric Display
9200 - 108
DIGITAL
CLEAR CHECK
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 10
Ringer/Splash Tone Volume Control Message Waiting Lamp Microphone Cutoff Do Not Disturb
1 9 17 25
2 10 18 26
3 11 19 27
4 12 20 28
5 13 21 29
6 14 22 30
7 15 23 31
8 16 24 32
MW MIC DND
1 4
GHI
2
ABC
3
DEF
DC
CL 1
5
JKL
6
MNO
FLSH
CL 2
7
PRS
8
TUV
9
WXY
LND CONF
(TRFR)
SPK
VOL
*
Flash
0
OPER
HOLD
FEATURES 59
9200 - 110
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51 61
52 62
53 63
54 64
55 65
56 66
57 67
58 68
59 69
60 70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81 91
82 92
83 93
84 94
85 95
86 96
87 97
88 98
89 99
90 100
ALT.
NIGHT
DAY
BREAK
NITE2
PAGE
GROUP
DOOR
EXT.1
EXT.2
External Page
Door Boxes
Internal Page
60 FEATURES
Storing a Flash requires system software 3.06.14 or higher. Modifying the outgoing dial tone detection criteria is available in all versions. Storing a bin number with a Programmable Function Key requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
Abbreviated Dialing gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers. This saves time, for example, when calling a client with whom they deal often. Instead of dialing a long telephone number, the extension user just dials the Abbreviated Dialing code. There are three types of Abbreviated Dialing: Common, Group and Personal. All co-workers within the same Tenant Group can share the Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers. All co-workers in the same Abbreviated Dialing Group can share the Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers. Personal Abbreviated Dialing numbers are available only at a users own extension. To set up Personal Abbreviated Dialing, refer to the "One-Touch Calling" feature. The 384i system has 1990 Abbreviated Dialing bins that you can allocate between Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing. Each 384i Tenant Group can have up to 32 Abbreviated Dialing Groups. The 124i system has 360 Abbreviated Dialing bins. Common Abbreviated Dialing bins are 000-199. Group bins are 200-359 (with 20 bins in each of the eight Abbreviated Dialing Groups). Each Abbreviated Dialing bin can store a number up to 24 digits long. When placing an Abbreviated Dialing call, the system normally routes the call through Trunk Group Routing or ARS (whichever is enabled). Or, the user can preselect a specific trunk for the call. In addition, the system can optionally force Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers to route over a specific Trunk Group. User preselection always overrides the system routing.
FEATURES 61
62 FEATURES
Start
Yes
Do you want to modify the ougoing Abbreviated Dialing call dial tone detection criteria? No
Group
Common
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
FEATURES 63
No
Yes
No
Does the system use Group Abbreviated Dialing? (Skip this decision for 124i.)
Yes
Yes
In 0603, enter names for the Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing bins.
The bin's address displays at a keyset when you are entering the Common Abbreviated Dialing number. In 0604, for bin's address enter 0. ARS/Trunk Group Routing
No
Should Common Abbreviated Dialing bin use ARS/Trunk Group Routing or a specific Trunk Group?
Trunk Group
In 0604, for bin's address enter Trunk Group number (1-128 in 384i, 1-16 in 124i).
Should users have onebutton dialing for Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing?
Yes
In 1006, assign Programmable Keys for Common (code 1037) and Group (code 1038) Abbreviated Dialing.
No In 384i 3.07.10 or higher, you can store the bin number with the key code. Do not store bin 0, 00 or 000.
64 FEATURES
Stop
No
Yes
In 0601, make sure Common Abbreviated Dialing uses 2-digit bin numbers (100 bins total).
Common
Do you want DSS Console Chaining for Common or Group Abbreviated Dialing?
Group
In 0602, make sure Group Abbreviated Dialing uses 2-digit bin numbers (100 bins total).
To use chaining: 1. Place the first call. 2. Press the DSS Console key to chain to the stored number.
Stop
FEATURES 65
Related Features
Account Codes Abbreviated Dialing bins can contain stored Account Codes. Automatic Route Selection For systems with Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects. Central Office Calls, Placing A user can implement Abbreviated Dialing only if their extension has outgoing access to trunks. Dial Tone Detection Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection. One-Touch Calling An extension can have a One-Touch Key for Abbreviated Dialing operation. PBX Compatibility If you enter a PBX trunk access code in an Abbreviated Dialing bin, the system automatically inserts a pause after the bin. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Abbreviated Dialing operation. Single Line Telephones Single line telephones can only dial Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers. Tenant Service Each tenant can have their own set of Abbreviated Dialing bins, or tenants may optionally share bins.
66 FEATURES
Operation
To store an Abbreviated Dialing number: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 853 (for common) or 854 (for group). 3. Dial common (000-999) or group storage code (00-99). Initially, there are 1000 Common Abbreviated Dialing codes (numbered 000 to 999). There are Group Abbreviated Dialing codes only if you define them in programming. 4. Dial telephone number you want to store (up to 24 digits). Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. To enter a pause, press MIC. To store a Flash, press FLASH. 5. Press HOLD. 6. Enter the name associated with the Abbreviated Dialing number. When entering a letter, press DND to toggle between upper and lower case. When entering names, use the One-Touch Keys and dial pad keys as shown below. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press DSS1 three times. DSS1 = A-D DSS2 = E-H DSS3 = I-L DSS4 = M-P DSS5 = Q-T DSS6 = U-Z DSS7 = -- (hyphen) DSS8 = - (space) DSS9 = Extended ASCII characters DSS10 = Punctuation marks CHECK saves text entry after you select it. Dial pad digits = 1-9, # and * CONF (TRF) deletes entries (i.e., backspaces over previous entries)
Note: You dont have to press CHECK after numerical entries or after your last entry. 7. 8. Press HOLD. Press SPK to hang up.
FEATURES 67
68 FEATURES
Description
124i
Available. Verified Account Codes, Operator Notification and Account Codes for Incoming Calls require Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Hidden Account Codes require Base or EXCPRU software 4.02 or higher. In Base or EXCPRU software prior to 4.02, Account codes are from 1-8 digits long. In Base or EXCPRU 4.02 and higher, Account Codes are from 1-16 digits long. Verified Account Codes are from 316 digits long.
384i -
In Base 3.05, EXCPRU 3.05 or higher, Forced Account Codes do not block 911 calls.
Available. Verified Account Codes, Operator Notification and Account Codes for Incoming Calls require system software 3.07.10 or higher. Hidden Account Codes require system software 3.07.18 or higher. In system software prior to 3.07.10, Account Codes are from 1-8 digits long. In system software 3.07.10 and higher, Account Codes are from 1-16 digits long. Verified Account Codes are from 316 digits long. In system software 3.07.25 or higher, all X11 calls except for 011and 411 are local calls. Forced Account Codes do not block 911 calls.
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or restrict trunk calls. The system has three types of Account Codes:
Optional Account Codes Optional Account Codes allow a user to enter an Account Code while placing a trunk call or anytime while on a call. This type of Account Code is optional; the system does not require the user to enter it. Forced Account Codes Forced Account Codes require an extension user to enter an Account Code every time they place a trunk call. If the user doesnt enter the code, the system prevents the call. As with Optional Account Codes, the extension user can elect to enter an Account Code for an incoming call. However, the system does not require it. Forced Account Codes does not block 1-800, 1-888 and emergency assistance (911) calls. (384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or higher) Once set up in system programming, you can enable Forced Account Codes on a trunk-by-trunk basis. In addition, Forced Account Codes can apply to all outside calls or just long distance calls. Forced Account Codes for Toll Calls restricts calls according to the following chart:
Number of Digits Dialed If first digit is not 1 If first digit is 1
Not allowed Allowed - does not require Account Code Allowed - requires Account Code Allowed - Requires Account Code Allowed - requires Account Code
Not allowed Allowed - requires Account Code Allowed - requires Account Code Allowed - does not require Account Code N/A
FEATURES 69
911
1
N/A
If you change the local call length inToll Restriction, this value changes accordingly.
Verified Account Codes (384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or Higher) With Verified Account Codes, the system compares the Account Code the user dials to a list of up to 1000 pre-programmed codes. If the Account Code is in the list, the call goes through. If the code dialed is not in the list, the system prevents the call. Verified Account Codes can be from 3-16 digits long using the characters 0-9 and #. During programming, you can use "wild cards" to streamline entering codes into system memory. For exammple, the entry 123W lets users dial Verified Account Codes from 1230 through 1239.
Operator Notification (384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or Higher) To prevent Account Code abuse, the system can notify the operator each time an Account Code violation occurs. This can happen if the user fails to enter an Account Code (if Forced) or enters a Verified Account Code that is not in the list. The notification is an automatic Intercom call to the attendant and a "RESTRICT" message in the operators display. (If the attendant fails to enter a valid Account Code, the system drops the call.) Account Codes for Incoming Calls (384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or Higher) The system can control the ability of extension users to enter Accout Codes for incoming calls. When this option is enabled, a user can dial * while on an incoming call, enter an Account Code, and then dial * to return to their caller. If the option is disabled, any digits the user dials after answering an incoming call outdial on the connected trunk. Hiding Account Codes (384i 3.07.18 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or Higher) Account Codes can be optionally hidden from a telephones display. This would prevent, for example, an unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display and making note of the digits that dial out. When hidden, the Account Code digits show as the character "*" on the telephones display. Account Code Capacity Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes. In 384i System Software prior to 3.07.10 and 124i prior to Base/EXCPRU 4.02, Account Codes can be from 1-8 digits long, using 0-9 and #. In 384i System Software 3.07.10 or higher, Account Codes can be from 1-16 digits long. Verified Account codes can be from 3-16 digits long. Conditions (A.) If a user enters a code that exceeds the eight digit limit, the system ignores the Account Code entry. (B.) If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g., *1234*) appear on the SMDR report as part of the number dialed.
Description (Contd)
Default Setting Acount codes are disabled.
70 FEATURES
Start
In 3001:1, enter 0.
Disabled
Should your system have: - Account Codes disabled, - Optional Account Codes, - Forced Account Codes, or - Verified Account Codes?
Optional
In 3001:1, enter 1
Stop
Forced or Verified
In 3001:1, enter 2 for Forced or 3 for Verified and go to the next step.
In 3001:2, enter 1.
Toll calls
Should Account Codes be Forced/ Verified for all calls or just toll calls?
All calls
In 3001:2, enter 0.
In 0702:3, set the maximum number of digits the system will permit in local calls.
In 0701:3, enable the Maximum Number of Digits for Local Call option.
- In 1004, assign Toll Restriction class to extensions. - Also, refer to the Toll Restriction feature and set up the system's entire Toll Restriction scheme.
Verified
Forced
FEATURES 71
In 0406:84, enter 0.
No
Should the operator receive an alert if a user improperly enters an Account Code?
Yes
In 0406:84, enter 1.
Yes
After the system prompts the user, do they have enough time to enter an Account Code?
No
Should user be able to press a function key (instead of dialing *) to enter an Account Code? No
Yes
In 3001:3, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 3001:3, enter 1.
In 3001:4, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 3001:4, enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of Service to extensions. This assignments pertains to Programs 0406 and 3001.
No
Yes
Stop
72 FEATURES
Start
Disabled
Should Tenant Group have Account Codes enabled, disabled or forced (required)? Forced
Enabled
No
If allowed for Tenant Group, should extension be able to enter an Account Code?
Yes
Always enable this option if your system has Forced Account Codes.
Stop
FEATURES 73
If you change this program from its default value (0), you must set up an entire Toll Restriction scheme. If you dont, users will not be able to place toll calls.
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 3: Maximum Number of Digits in Local Call Account Codes use this option to determine the maximum number of digits in a local call. Calls using more digits than this entry are considered to be toll calls. You assign one of four tables in this program, assign a table to a Toll Restriction Class in Program 0701 above, and then assign Toll Restriction Classes to extensions in Program 1004 below. (Also see Program 3001 Item 2 below.) 0921 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part B), Item 4: Account Code Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Account Codes for each trunk. 1004 - Toll Restriction Class Use this option to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to an extension. See also Programs 0701 and 0702 above. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a function key as an Account Code key (code 1054). Use this key instead of the dialpad to enter the * before and after the Account Code. 3001 - Account Code Setup, Item 1: Account Code Mode For each Class of Service (1-15) use this option to select the Account Code Mode. The options are: 0 Account Codes disabled. (Any codes you enter dial out as part of your initial call.) 1 Account Codes optional (not required). 2 Account Codes required (forced) but not verifiable. 3 Account Codes required (forced) and verifiable. 3001 - Account Code Setup, Item 2: Forced Account Code Toll Call Setup For each Class of Service (1-15), enter 1 in this option to enable Forced Account Codes for just toll calls. Enter 0 to enable Forced Account Codes for local and toll calls. 3001 - Account Code Setup, Item 3: Account Codes for Incoming Calls For each Class of Service (1-15), enter 1 in this option to enable Account Codes for incoming calls. enter 0 to disable Account Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any codes you enter dial out on the connected trunk. 3001 - Account Code Setup, Item 4: Hiding Account Codes For each Class of Service (1-15), enter 1 to have the system hide Account Codes on an extensions display as they are entered. Enter 0 to have the Account Codes displayed. 3002 - Verified Account Code Table Use this option to enter data into the Verified Account Code Table. You can enter up to 1000 codes from 3-16 digits in length. For a wild card, press the FLASH key.
74 FEATURES
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection ARS can force a user to enter an Authorization Code prior to using a certain route. The system verifies the ARS Authorization Code dialed against the ARS Authorization Code list (Program 2109). One-Touch Calling To simplify Account Code entry, store the Account Code (e.g., *1234*) in a One-Touch Key. Just press the key instead of dialing the codes. Station Message Detail Recording Account Codes appear on the SMDR report (even if they are hidden on the phones display).
Operation
384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or higher To enter an Account Code any time while on a trunk call: The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter. You can use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes enabled. You may also be able to use this procedure for incoming calls. This procedure is not available at SLTs. 1. Dial *. OR Press your Account Code key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1054). 2. Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #). If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an an "*" character on the telephones display. 3. Dial *. OR Press your Account Code key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1054). (Continued)
FEATURES 75
76 FEATURES
FEATURES 77
Features A Alarm
Alarm
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Alarm lets a keyset extension work like an Alarm clock. An extension user can have Alarm remind them of a meeting or an appointment. There are two types of Alarms: Alarm 1 (sounds only once at the preset time) Alarm 2 (sounds every day at the preset time) Conditions None
Programming
Start
No
Yes
Yes
In Program 0405 Item 23, set the duration of the alarm signal (0-64800 seconds).
No
Stop
78 FEATURES
Features A Alarm
Programming (Contd) 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 23: Alarm Duration
Set the duration of the Alarm signal (0-64800 seconds). 0406 - COS Options, Item 27: Alarm In an extensions Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) Alarm setting. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
None
Operation
To set the alarm: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line set, lift handset. 2. Dial 827. 3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2). Alarm 1 sounds only once. Alarm 2 sounds each day at the preset time. 4. Dial the alarm time (24-hour clock). For example, for 1:15 PM dial 1315. 5. At keyset, press SPK to hang up. OR At single line set, hang up. To silence an alarm: 1. At keyset, press CLEAR. OR At single line set, lift handset. To check the programmed alarm time: 1. Press CHECK. 2. Dial 827. 3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2). The programmed time displays. 4. Press CLEAR. To cancel an alarm: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line set, lift handset. 2. Dial 827. 3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2). 4. Dial 9999. 5. At keyset, press SPK to hang up. OR At single line set, hang up.
FEATURES 79
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Multibutton display telephones have a 2-line, 20 character per line alphanumeric display that provides various feature status messages. These messages help the display telephone user process calls, identify callers and customize features. Refer to Table 1-8 at the beginning of this section for a listing of the available multibutton telephone displays. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled for all display telephones.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the Following Page
0406, COS Options, Item 37: Trunk Name Display, Seizing In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a trunks name/number when the user seizes the trunk. 0406, COS Options, Item 38: Trunk Name Display, Incoming In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a trunks name/number when the trunk is ringing. 0406, COS Options, Item 39: Extension Name Display, Answer In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the incoming Intercom callers name and number. 0406, COS Options, Item 40: Intercom Name Display, Incoming In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the pre-answer display of the incoming Intercom callers name and number. 0406, COS Options, Item 42: Transfer Display In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions incoming Transfer pre-answer display. 0406, COS Options, Item 51: Group Call Pickup Information Display In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions Group Call Pickup display. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
80 FEATURES
Start This also disables the Call Timer. In Program 0406 Item 37, enter 0. No When a user seizes a trunk, should they see the trunk name on their display? Yes In Program 0406 Item 37, enter 1
No
When a trunk rings an extension, should their display show the trunk name and "RINGING" display?
Yes
No
When a user answers an Intercom call, should their display show the calling extension's name and "TALKING TO" answer display?
Yes
No
When a user receives an Intercom call, should their display show the callers name and "CALL FROM" pre-answer display?
Yes
No
When a user receives a transferred call, should their display show the "TRANSFER <<" transfer pre-answer display?
Yes
No
When a user employs Call Pickup to intercept a call, should their display show the "CALL P/U" display?
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 81
Operation
Operation is automatic if enabled in programming. Refer to Table 1-8 at the beginning of this section.
82 FEATURES
Description
124i Available six ACI software ports (two 3-ACI Modules max.) and 4 ACI Department Groups (1-4). ACI modules auto-ID when plugged in. 384i Available 192 ACI software ports (64 3-ACI Modules max.) and 32 ACI Department Groups. ACI modules do not auto-ID.
The Analog Communications Interface (ACI) provides three analog ports (with associated relays) for Music on Hold, External Paging or auxiliary devices such as tape recorders and loud bells. The 384i allows up to 64 ACIs, for a maximum of 192 analog ports. The 124i allows up to 2 ACIs, for a maximum of 6 analog ports. Each ACI unit requires an unused port on a DSTU PCB. The ACI gives you more flexibility when connected to auxiliary devices since it doesnt use up resources on PGDU (Page/Door Box), ASTU (Analog Station) or ATRU (Analog Trunk) PCBs.
Music on Hold You can connect up to three customer-provided Music on Hold music sources to an ACI. This lets you add additional music sources if the external source on the CPU PCB or the internal source are not adequate. By using ACIs, you could even have a different music source for each trunk. When the system switches the ACI analog port to a trunk on Hold, the ACI relay associated with the ACI analog port closes. You can use this capability to switch on the music source, if desired. Extension users can dial the ACI analog port extension number and listen to the connected music source. The ACI relay associated with the port closes when the call goes through. For Music on Hold, connect the music source to the ACI analog port IN (Input) jack. Connect the music source control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details.
External Paging An ACI analog port can also be an External Page output. When connected to customer-provided External Paging equipment, the ACI port provides External Paging independent of the PGDU PCB. To use the External Paging, an extension user just dials the ACI analog port extension number and makes the announcement. The system broadcasts the announcement from the ACI analog port and simultaneously closes the associated ACI relay. You can use the relay closure to control the External Paging amplifier, if required. This external paging zone is not included in external all call paging or combination paging (internal and external). For External Paging, connect the Paging amplifier to the ACI analog port OUT (output) jack. Connect the amplifier control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details.
Auxiliary Device Control The ACI can control a customer-provided tape recorder. When an extension user dials the ACI analog port extension number, they can automatically start the recorder and activate the record function. When the user hangs up, the recording stops and the tape recorder turns off. For tape recording, connect the tape recorder AUX input jack to the ACI analog port OUT (output) jack. Connect the recorder control leads (if available) to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details. By using Department Calling, you can arrange multiple tape recorders into a pool. When an extension user dials the Department Group pilot number, they reach the first available tape recorder in the pool. The relays on the ACI can optionally control customer-provided external ringers (loud bells) and buzzers. When an extension user dials the ACI analog port extension number, the associated ACI relay closes and activates the ringer. You could use this capability to control an emergency buzzer for a noisy machine shop floor, for example.
FEATURES 83
ACI Call Recording ACI Call Recording allows you to use a recording device connected to an ACI to automatically record calls. The recording device is typically a customer-provided tape recorder. Once set up, ACI Call Recording starts automatically as soon as the user answers their call. You can set up ACI Call Recording to output to a single ACI port/recording device or to a pool of ACI ports/devices. With a single device, all calls are stored in a centralized location. With a pool of devices, youll be sure to have a port available for recording even in peak traffic periods. Once set up, ACI Call Recording automatically occurs for all trunk calls that ring an extension. This includes the following trunk types: Central Office calls programmed to ring the extension. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Direct Inward Line (DIL) Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Tie lines ACI Call Recording is not available for outgoing trunk calls, transferred calls or Intercom calls. You can set up recording on a per trunk or per extension basis.
Physical Ports and Software Ports Each ACI consists of a physical port for connection to the phone system and three analog ports. For programming purposes, the analog ports are also called software ports (see the illustration below). The physical port connects to a station position on a DSTU PCB. During installation, the first ACI you set up is physical port 1; the second ACI is physical port 2, etc. Each ACI has three software ports, which are numbered independently of the physical ports. Normally, the first ACI set up has software ports 1-3; the second ACI has software ports 4-6, etc. In 384i there are a total of 192 software ports (64 ACIs x 3 ports each). There are six software ports in 124i. During programming, you assign ACI extension numbers, Department Group options and Tenant Group options to ACI software ports, not physical ports. During installation, you connect equipment to the jacks on the ACI that correspond to the software port. Refer to the system Hardware Manual for more installation details.
9200 - 166
PORT 3
PORT 2
PORT 1
LINE
IN
OUT
CTL
IN
OUT
CTL
IN
OUT
CTL
Software Port 3
Software Port 2
Software Port 1
84 FEATURES
Default Setting No ACIs programmed, although in 124i an ACI will auto-ID as soon as you plug it in.
FEATURES 85
Run 0004. The system sets the software ports in consecutive order starting with the lowest available number.
Automatically
(Skip this decision for 124i) Do you want to set the ACI port programming manually or automatically?
Manually
In 0005, enter circuit type 5 for each ACI physical port. Use "Order" option to set software port number.
(Skip this decision for 124i) In 1302, assign each ACI software port to a tenant group.
In ACI software port for Music on Hold or External Paging/ Aux Device Control?
Music on Hold
In 0504, enter an extension number for each ACI software port. Direct dialing is required for External Paging and Ringer Control
Should system users be able to use Department Calling to call ACI software ports?
Yes
No
Stop
86 FEATURES
Start
Stop
No
Yes
(Skip this step for 124i) In 0308, assign a CDTU block for speech recording (1).
In 0920 and 1020 below, enter an ACI group pilot number (assigned in 0508) as the recording destination.
Pool of ports
Dedicated port
In 0920 and 1020 below, enter an ACI port's extension number (assigned in 0504) as the recording destination.
In 1020, enter: - The ACI Call Recording Destination. - A=1 and S=0
Per extension
Do you want ACI Call Recording to activate for every ringing call on a designated trunk or per extension?
Every call
In 0920, enter: - The ACI Call Recording Destination. - A=1 and S=0
Make sure ICM No. entry in 0920 is cleared. For each ACI port used for recording, in 1301 be sure to set the port for output (2).
Stop
FEATURES 87
Related Features
Background Music ACI software ports cannot be Background Music music sources. Hotline An extension cannot have Hotline keys for ACI software ports. Music on Hold ACI software ports can be Music on Hold music sources. Since the system allows up to 192 ACI software ports, each trunk can have its own music source. One-Touch Calling An extension can have One-Touch Keys for ACI software ports. The gives the extension user: - One touch access to external music - One touch External Paging - One touch loud ringer control Paging, External ACI software ports can provide External Paging with control, independent of the External Paging circuits on the PGDU PCB. 88 FEATURES 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 89
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available requires system software 3.01.02 or higher.
Attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers hear busy tone. This helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow destination for unanswered calls. For example, you can program Direct Inward Lines and Voice Mail calls to route to the attendant when their primary destination is busy. With Attendant Call Queueing, these unanswered calls would normally "stack up" for the attendant until they can be processed. The 32 call queue total includes Intercom, DISA, DID, DIL, tie line and transferred calls. If the attendant doesnt have an appearance for the queued call, it waits in line on a CALL key. If the attendant has more than 32 calls queued, an extension can Transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy Transfer enabled. Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent, non-programmable system feature. Conditions None
Programming 0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 19: Busy Transfer
Prevent (0) or allow (1) extensions to Transfer calls to an attendant that has more than 32 calls is queue. 1105 - Operators Extension Assign the operator (attendants) extension for each Tenant Group.
Related Features
"Call Forwarding" / "Personal Greeting" Forwarding when unanswered or busy can only occur at the attendant if there are more than 32 calls in queue.
Operation
None
90 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. Basic ACD operation requires EXCPRU version 2.18 or higher. ACD is not available with Base software. ACD The Next Generation requires EXCPRU software 4.02 or higher. The inDepth and inDepth+ is not available. For more information, refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**). 384i Available. Basic ACD operation requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) uniformly distributes calls among member agents of a programmed ACD Group. When a call rings into an ACD Group, the system automatically routes the call to the agent that has been idle the longest. Automatic Call Distribution is much more sophisticated and comprehensive than Department Calling and other group services it can accurately judge the work load at each agent and distribute calls accordingly. The system allows up to eight ACD Groups and up to 144 ACD agents. You can put any agent in any group. In addition, an agent can be in more than one group as long as only one of the groups is active at a time. This allows, or example, a Technical Service representation to answer Customer Service calls at lunch time when many of the Customer Service reps are unavailable. The ACD Master Number is the "extension number" of the whole group. Calls directly ringing or transferred to the ACD Master number enter the group and are routed accordingly. Although the master number can be any valid extension number, you should choose a number that is out of the normal extension range. Automatic Call Distribution operation is further enhanced by:
ACD Call Queuing When all agents in an ACD Group are unavailable, an incoming call will queue and cause the Queue Status Display to occur on the ACD Group Supervisors display. The display helps the supervisor keep track of the traffic load within their group. The Queue Status Displays shows: - The number of calls queued for an available agent in the group. - The trunk that has been waiting the longest, and how long it has been waiting. For each ACD Group, you can set the following conditions: - The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs. - How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs (see the Queue Status Display Timing illustration below). - If the supervisor should hear a Queue Alarm whenever the time in queue portion reoccurs. This alarm is a single beep tone that reminds the supervisor to check the condition of the queue.
ACD Overflow (With Announcements) ACD offers extensive overflow options for each ACD Group. For example, a caller ringing in when all agents are unavailable can hear an initial announcement (called the 1st Announcement). This announcement can be a general greeting like, "Thank you for calling. All of our agents are currently busy helping other customers. Please stay on the line and we will help you shortly." If the caller continues to wait, you can have them hear another announcement (called the 2nd Announcement) such as, "Your business is important to us. Your call will be automatically answered by the first available agent. Please stay on the line." If all the ACD Groups agents still are unavailable, the call can automatically overflow to another ACD Group or the Voice Mail Automated Attendant.
FEATURES 91
Agent Log In and Log Out Services An ACD Agent can log in and log out of their ACD Group. While logged in, the agent is available to receive ACD Group calls. When logged out, the agent is excluded from the groups calls. The programmable keys and alphanumeric display on an agents phone show at a glance when they are logged in or logged out. Emergency Call If an ACD Agent needs assistance with a caller, they can place an Emergency Call to their ACD Group Supervisor. Once the supervisor answers the Emergency Call, they automatically monitor both the ACD Agent and the caller. If the agent needs assistance, the supervisor can join in the conversation. Emergency Call can be a big help to inexperienced ACD Agents that need technical advise or assistance with a difficult caller. The supervisor can easily listen to the conversation and then "jump in" if the situation gets out of hand. Enhanced DSS Operation An ACD Supervisor (Group or System) can use their DSS Console to monitor the status of the ACD Agents within a group. The DSS Console is an essential tool for supervisors. Once you assign a DSS Console to a supervisor, the 10 function keys in the last row become ACD Group select buttons (see the illustration below). When the supervisor presses a button for an ACD Group, the console key flash rates tell the supervisor at a glance which of the groups agents are: - Logged onto the group (i.e., in service) - Logged out of the group (i.e., out of service) - Busy on a call - Placing an Emergency Call to the supervisor - Not available or installed The ACD Supervisor can also use their console for placing and transferring calls just like any other extension user.
Flexible Time Schedules An ACD Work Schedule lets you divide a day into segments (called Work Periods) for scheduling the activity in your ACD Groups. You can set up four distinct Work Schedules, with up to eight Work Periods in each Work Schedule. Each day of the week has one Work Schedule, but different days can share the same schedule. For example, your Monday through Friday Work Schedule could consist of only two Work Periods. Work Period 1 could be from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM when your business is open. Work Period 2 could be from 5:00 PM to 8:00 AM which covers those times when your business is closed. Headset Operation (With Automatic Answer) An ACD Agent or ACD Group Supervisor can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. The headset conveniently frees up the users hands for other work and provides privacy while on the call. In addition, an ACD Agent with a headset can have Automatic Answer. This allows an agent busy on a call to automatically connect to the next waiting call when they hang up. Incoming Call Routing Incoming trunk calls can automatically route to specific ACD Groups. These types of calls ring directly into the ACD Group without being transferred by a co-worker or the Automated Attendant.
92 FEATURES
Rest Mode Rest Mode temporarily logs-out an ACD agents phone. There are two types of Rest Mode: - Manual Rest Mode An ACD Agent can enable Manual Rest Mode anytime they want to temporarily log out of the ACD Group. They might want to do this if they go to a meeting or get called away from their work area. While logged out, calls to the ACD Group will not ring the agents phone. - Automatic Rest Mode When an ACD Group has Automatic Rest Mode, the system will automatically put an agents phone in Rest Mode if it is not answered. This ensures callers wont have to wait while ACD rings an extension that wont be answered. For keysets, the system enables Automatic Rest Mode for all phones with Rest Mode keys. For SLTs, you must set an option in programming to enable Automatic Rest Mode.
Supervisor, ACD Group You can designate an extension in an ACD Group to be the groups supervisor. Once assigned as an ACD Group Supervisor, the user can: - Take the entire ACD Group out of service. - Check the log out status of each agent after the group taken down. - Restore the ACD Group to service. During programming, you can choose one of three modes of operation for each ACD Group supervisor: - Supervisors extension cannot receive calls to the ACD Group. - Supervisors extension can only receive ACD Group calls during overflow conditions. - Supervisors extension receives calls just like any other ACD Group agent (mode 2). An ACD Group can have only one supervisor. In addition, an extension can be a supervisor for only one ACD Group.
Supervisor, ACD System You can designate an extension as an ACD System Supervisor. Once assigned as an ACD System Supervisor, the user can: - Take the all the systems ACD Groups out of service simultaneously. - Check the log out status of each agent after the groups are taken down. - Restore all the ACD Groups to service simultaneously. The system can have only one ACD System Supervisor.
Traffic Management Reports The system provides comprehensive Traffic Management (TMS) Reports that help when analyzing ACD traffic, system usage and calling patterns. Refer to the Traffic Management feature for more information. The TMS report is in five sections: - Trunk Calls Sorted by Extension - Trunk Calls Sorted by Trunk - ACD Calls Sorted by Agent - ACD Calls Sorted by ACD Group - All Trunks Busy Report
FEATURES 93
Work Time Work Time temporarily busies-out an ACD agents phone so they can work at their desk uninterrupted. This gives the agent time to fill out important logs and records as soon as they are finished with their call. There are two types of Work Time: - Manual Work Time An ACD Agent can enable Manual Work Time any time they need to work at their desk undisturbed. You might prefer this Work Time mode if an agent only occasionally has to fill out follow-up paper work after they complete their call. When the agent is through catching up with their work, they manually return themselves to the ACD Group. - Automatic Work Time The system implements Automatic Work Time for the agent as soon as they hang up their current call. This is helpful in applications (such as Tech Service groups) where follow-up paperwork is a requirement for every call. When the agent is done with their work, they manually return themselves to the ACD Group.
ACD The Next Generation The second generation of ACD provides a host of new call management productivity tolls: - ACD Group Call Coverage Keys To help cover calls during peak periods, a keyset can have Call Coverage keys for ACD Groups. When a call rings into a covered ACD Group, it rings the appropriate ACD Group Call Coverage key. The key can ring immediately, after a delay or just flash. The Call Coverage key also facilitates one-button Transfer for an ACD Group. The covering extension does not have to be a member of the ACD Group. - Hotline Key Shows Agent Status An extensions Hotline keys provide the "normal" Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for co-workers and a unique BLF for ACD Agents. Similary to the supervisors DSS Console BLF, the unique BLF shows when the covered agent is in service, out of service or busy on a call. This enhanced BLF gives a department manager, for example, ACD Group monitoring capabilities without having to become a supervisor with a DSS Console. - Enhanced Supervisor Options An ACD supervisor can individually assign extensions to ACD Groups, and set an agents status once assigned. This provides the supervisor with tremendous flexibility to reassign agetns as work loads vary. - Queue Status Display with Scrolling To aid in keeping track of call volumes, a display keyset user can view any ACD Groups Queue Status Display by pressing a uniquely programmed Programmable Function Key. The user can the press VOL L and VOL M to scroll through all the systems ACD Group queues. The display keyset does not have to be an ACD Agent or supervisor. - Overflow Announcements from Voice Mail The NVM-Series Voice Mail system can provide the ACD overflow announcements in systems that do not have a Voice Announce Unit installed. When a caller queues for an available agent, designated Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes provide the overflow messages. - Escape from Queue with NVM-Series Escape From Queue uses NVM-Series Call Routing Mailboxes for announcement messages to provide callers with enhanced options while in queue. After listening to this type of announcement, they can either wait in queue or dial a digit for an alternate destination. The destination is typically the operator, a mailbox or an extension.
94 FEATURES
ACD The Next Generation (Contd) - Programmable Wrap-up Timer When an agent finishes their call, the system automatically starts a wrap-up timer and blocks any ACD calls to the agent. This gives them time to complete important logs and records before a new call comes in. When the timer expires, the system returns the agent to the ACD Group to handle new callers. - InDepth and inDepth+ (384i only) InDepth and inDepth+ are Windows-based Management Information Systems that work with the systems built-in ACD. These ACD/MIS systems enhance the 384i with real time statistics and reports on ACD Group traffic patterns and usage. Refer to the inDepth and inDepth+ feature on page 324 for more.
For more information on Automatic Call Distribution, refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**). Conditions Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**). Default Setting Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
Programming
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
Programming (Contd)
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
Related Features
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
Operation
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
FEATURES 95
Description
124i Available. Changing the tone detection setup and trunk access code requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Dial Treatments can contain # and * characters in Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available. Changing the tone detection setup and trunk access code requires system software 3.04 or higher. Dial Treatments can contain # and * characters in system software 3.06.02 and higher.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) provides call routing and call restriction based on the digits a user dials. ARS gives the system the most cost-effective use of the connected long distance carriers. ARS is an on-line call routing program that you can customize (like other system options) from a display telephone. ARS accommodates over 14,000 theoretical call routing choices - without a custom-ordered rate structure database. With ARS, you can modify the systems routing choices quickly and easily. This is often necessary in todays telecommunications world where the cost structure and service choices frequently change. ARS Feature Summary
ARS provides: Call Routing ARS can apply 3-digit (area code) or 6-digit (area code and local exchange) analysis to every number dialed. For programming, ARS provides separate 3-digit and 6-digit tables. Each table can have as many numbers as the installation requires. Dialing Translation (Special Dialing Instructions) ARS can automatically execute stored dialing instructions (called Dial Treatments) when it chooses a route for a call. The system allows up to 15 Dial Treatments. The Dial Treatments can: Automatically insert or delete a leading 1 Insert or delete an area code (NPA) Add digits (such as a dial-up OCC number), pauses and waits to the dialing sequence Require the user to enter an authorization code when placing a call (see Forced Authorization Code below) Time of Day Selection For routing purposes, ARS provides eight different time of day selections (called Rate Periods). You can assign these Rate Periods to any time of day (in 1/2 hour intervals) or day of week (Monday-Friday, Saturday, Sunday or Holiday). Hierarchical Class of Service Control ARS allows or denies call route choices based on an extensions ARS1 Class of Service. This allows lower Classes of Service (e.g., 1) to access routes unavailable to higher Classes of Service (e.g., 27). The system provides up to 28 (0-27) ARS Classes of Service. Forced Authorization Code The Dial Treatment for designated routes may require the user to enter an ARS Authorization Code before ARS allows routing. This code is verifiable and is enforced by an extensions ARS Class of Service. Each extension can have its own unique ARS Authorization Code.
Use Program 2110 to set an extensions ARS Class of Service. An extensions Class of Service (set in Programs 0406 and 1005) has no affect on ARS routing choices.
96 FEATURES
Separate Routing for Selected Call Types To provide unique control, you can program separate routing instructions for: Operator assisted (0 +) calls International (011) calls Directory assistance (411, 1411 and 555) calls Emergency (911) calls Separate Routing for Equal Access (10XXX) Calls Choose different routing for directly-dialed (10XXX + 1) and operator-assisted (10XXX + 0) Equal Access calls.1 Separate Routing for 976 Calls Restriction for 976 calls is hierarchical according to an extensions ARS Class of Service.
Basic ARS Operation When a user places an outside call, ARS analyzes the digits dialed and assigns one of 64 Selection Numbers to the call. The Selection Number chosen depends on which digits the user dialed. ARS then checks the time of day, the day of week and the extensions ARS Class of Service. Based on these call routing options, ARS selects a trunk group for the call and imposes the Dial Treatment instructions (if any). Conditions (A.) Do not use ARS behind a Centrex/PBX. (B.) ARS is intended for areas that use the North American Number Plan (NANP).
This equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of Equal Access codes. Modifications by aggregators to alter these capabilities may be a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumer Services improvement act of 1990 and Part 68 of the FCC Rules.
FEATURES 97
Start
No
Stop
The trunk groups are also your ARS Service Numbers. Are your carriers organized into separate trunk groups? Yes No In 0905, assign trunks of the same carrier type to the same trunk group.
Yes
In 2107, program a different Dial Treatment for each carrier with special requirements.
No
Do any Dial Treatments require ARS Authorization Codes? Yes In 2109, assign Authorization Codes to extensions.
Are your Rate Periods the same as the default Rate Periods? Yes
No
In 2104, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 2104, enter 1.
98 FEATURES
For example: NNX+nnnn calls use number 1. 1+NNX+nnnn calls use number 2. 1+NPA+NNX+nnnn calls use number 3.
On each Call Route Options Worksheet, assign a Selection Number to each unique type of call.
Enter the range of Rate Periods on the Call Route Options Worksheet.
No
Yes
For each Selection Number, make copies of the Call Route Options worksheet for each Rate Period.
For each COS on the worksheet, enter the Service Number (trunk group) that the Selection Number should use for the Rate Period you are programming.
Enter the Call Route Options Worksheet data into program 2101.
FEATURES 99
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(384i Only) Do you want users to dial 9 to access ARS? No If a user dials a call that is not programmed in ARS, should the system route the call to Trunk Group1 or play error tone?
Yes
In 0510, specify the Primary Trunk Access Code for each Tenant Group.
In 0402:7, enter 0.
Trunk Group 1
Error tone
In 0402:7, enter 1.
After ARS seizes a trunk, does the system wait an adequate time before outdialing the call? Yes Stop
No
100 FEATURES
FEATURES 101
Rate Period1
1 2
Time/Day
Mon-Fri, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Mon-Fri, 5:00PM to 11:00 PM Sat, Sun, Holiday, 8:00 AM to 11:00 PM All days, 11 PM to 8:00 AM Not defined
3 4-8
1
2107 - ARS Dial Treatments Program up 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS dialing translation.
102 FEATURES
Related Features
Dial Tone Detection Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection. Speed Dial Speed Dial bypasses ARS routing. Tenant Service All tenant groups share the same ARS programming. However, you can enable or disable ARS for each individual tenant. Toll Restriction Toll Restriction overrides ARS. Trunk Group Routing A system with Automatic Route Selection cannot also have Trunk Group Routing. Trunk Queuing/Camp On With ARS installed, Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route. The system automaticaly redials the queued call when the extension user lifts the handset.
Operation
To place a call using ARS. 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line set, lift handset. Youll hear normal Intercom dial tone. 2. Dial 9. Youll hear a second, "stutter" dial tone. 3. Dial outside number. If you hear another "stutter" dial tone, you must enter your extensions ARS Authorization Code.
FEATURES 103
104 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to speakers in keysets. If an extension user activates it, BGM plays whenever the users extension is idle. The method the system uses to provide Background Music (and Music on Hold) depends on the setting of a jumper on the CPRU PCB, how the music source is connected and the setting in program 0914. The table below shows how these settings interact. Refer to Music on Hold on page 373 for more information.
BGM/MOH Operation Matrix To get this result . . . CPRU "S" Jumper INT EXT Set these options . . . External Music Source MOH (1&2) BGM (5&6) Program 0914
MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls None Background Music None MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls Internally synthesized 1 Background Music None MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls None Background Music None MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls From connected music source Background Music From connected music source MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls Internally synthesized 1 Background Music None
255
254
255
255
254
FEATURES 105
MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls Internally synthesized 1 Background Music From connected music source MOH for Intercom Calls From connected music source MOH for Trunk Calls From connected music source Background Music None MOH for Intercom Calls None MOH for Trunk Calls None Background Music From connected music source MOH for Intercom Calls From connected music source MOH for Trunk Calls None Background Music None MOH for Intercom Calls None MOH for Trunk Calls From connected music source Background Music From connected music source
1
254
254
254
255
255
If Program 0302, Item 1: MOH Tone is set to 0, Music on Hold will not be provided.
Conditions (A.) Background Music requires a customer-provided music source connected to the CPU auxiliary terminals. Refer to the system Hardware Manual. Default Setting Not installed.
106 FEATURES
Start
No
Yes
Stop
Related Features
Music on Hold The system can broadcast music to callers on Hold. Single Line Telephones Background Music is not available on single line telephones.
Operation
To turn Background Music on or off: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 825. 3. Press SPK to hang up.
FEATURES 107
Description
124i Available. In Base 4.02 and EXCPRU 4.02 and higher, turning off the Barge In tones also turns off the called extensions display. Users cannot dial the Barge In code (810) before calling a busy extension. 384i Available. In system software 3.07.10 and higher, turning off the Barge In tones also turns off the called extensions display. System software 3.07.24 and higher allows users to dial the Barge In code (810) before calling a busy extension. System software 3.07.24 and higher allows users to Barge In after hearing busy/ring tone in addition to busy tone. System software 3.07.30 and higher allows users to press a Barge In key (or a Super Display Barge In soft key) before calling a busy extension.
Users cannot press a Barge In key (or a Super Display Barge In soft key) before calling a busy extension.
Barge In permits an extension user to break into another extension users established call. This sets up a threeway conversation between the intruding extension and the two parties on the initial call. With Barge In, an extension user can get a message through to a busy co-worker right away. There are two Barge In modes: Monitor Mode (Silent Monitor) and Speech Mode. With Monitor Mode, the caller Barging In can listen to another users conversation but cannot participate. With Speech Mode, the caller Barging In can listen and join another users conversation.
CAUTION
Unauthorized intrusion on calls using this feature may be interpreted as an invasion of privacy.
Conditions None Default Setting Refer to the Default Settings chart in the back of this book.
108 FEATURES
In 0401:5, enter 0.
Yes
In 0401:5, enter 1.
In 0406:65, enter 0
No
Yes
In 0406:65, enter 1.
In 0406:66, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0406:66, enter 1.
In 0406:44, enter 0.
Speech
Monitor
In 0406:44, enter 1.
In 0405:61, enter 0
Play Once
When a user Barges In, should the Barge In tone play once or repeat?
Repeat
Should extensions have single-digit Barge In access? No Should extensions have one-button Barge In access? No Stop
Yes
Yes
FEATURES 109
Related Features
Conference An extension user cannot Barge In on a Conference. Intercom An extension user cannot Barge In on an Intercom call if one of the Intercom callers is using Handsfree Answerback. Both Intercom parties must have either lifted the handset or pressed SPK. Off Hook Signaling If the system has Automatic Off Hook Signaling, an extension user can Barge In on an Intercom call only if the second extension appearance is busy or ringing. Privacy (Data) Privacy blocks Barge In attempts. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Barge In operation.
Operation
To Barge In after calling a busy extension: The call must be set up for about 10 seconds before you can Barge In. Listen for busy/ring or busy tone. 1. Call busy extension. 2. Press Barge In key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1019). To Barge in without first calling the busy extension: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 810. OR Press Barge In key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1019). 3. Dial busy extension. 110 FEATURES 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Please refer to the Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage on page 368 for information on this feature.
FEATURES 111
Description
124i Available. Base software prior to 1.2R uses different dial codes. COS control for reminder messages requires system software 2.13 Base, 2.18 EXCPRU or higher. 384i Available. System software prior to 3.04 uses different dial codes. COS control over reminder message requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their calls to another extension. Call Forwarding ensures that the users calls are covered when they are away from their work area. The types of Call Forwarding are: Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered Calls to the extension forward when busy or not answered (requires system software 3.04 or higher). Call Forwarding Immediate All calls forward immediately to the destination, and only the destination rings. Call Forwarding with Both Ringing All calls forward immediately to the destination, and both the destination and the forwarded extension ring (not for Voice Mail). Call Forwarding when Unanswered Calls forward only if they are unanswered (Ring No Answer). Personal Answering Machine Emulation Allows the extension to emulate an answering machine. Turn to "Voice Mail" for more. Call Forwarding will reroute calls ringing an extension, including calls transferred from another extension. The extension user must enable Call Forwarding from their phone. To redirect calls while a user is at another phone, use "Call Forwarding with Follow Me". A periodic VAU announcement may remind users that their calls are forwarded. Conditions (A.) Normally, the system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards. For example, extension 316 forwards to 318, and 318 in turn forwards to 320. Calls to 316 route to 318. Calls to 318 route to 320. The system does allow a single chain, however, if the second extension in the chain is forwarded off-premise (*46 + trunk access code + destination telephone number). (B.) Periodic reminder message requires a Voice Announce Unit (VAU) Module. Default Setting Enabled.
112 FEATURES
telemanuals.com
Features B-D Call Forwarding
Programming
For Older Systems
Start
No
Should extension be able to use Call Forwarding with Both Ringing (Service Code*27)?
Yes
(Optional) For one-button access, in 1006 assign a Call Forwarding with Both Ringing key (code 1000).
No
Should extension be able to use Call Forwarding when Busy (Service Code *22)?
Yes
(Optional) For one-button access, in 1006 assign a Call Forwarding When Busy key (code 1002).
No
Should an Extension be able to use Call Forwarding when Unanswered (Service Code*26)?
Yes
In 0405 Item 1, set the Delayed Call forwarding Time. Unanswered calls forward after this interval.
(Optional) For one-button access, in 1006 assign a Call Forwarding when Unanswered key (code 1003).
Do you want one-button access to call Forwarding Immediately (Service Code *24)? No
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 113
In 0406:23, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0406:23, enter 1.
In 0406:31, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0406:31, enter 1.
In 0406:32, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0406:32, enter 1.
In 0405:1. set the Delayed Call Forwarding Time. Unanswered calls forward after this interval.
Do you want one-button access to the Call Forwarding setup code (*2)?
Yes
No
In 0419:3, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0419:3, enter 1.
Stop
114 FEATURES
Related Features
Call Forwarding, Fixed Fixed Call Forwarding is a permanent type of forwarding that automatically reroutes calls under certain condition without any user action. User entered Call Forwarding overrides Fixed Call Forwarding. Call Forwarding, Off-Premise An extension user can forward their calls to an off-premise location. Call Forwarding with Follow Me While away from their desk, a user can redirect their calls to a co-workers extension. Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override Override Call Forwarding or DND at another extension. Department Calling An extension user cannot forward their calls to a Department number. Do Not Disturb If an extension user activates DND option 4, the system prevents other extensions from forwarding calls to them. If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND option 4, callers to the forwarded extension hear DND tone. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Call Forwarding operation. Voice Announce Unit The periodic reminder message requires a Voice Announce Unit (VAU).
FEATURES 115
116 FEATURES
4.
(Older Systems) To cancel Call Forwarding if you dont know the mode enabled: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line set, lift handset. 2. Dial *20. This is the universal cancel code. It also cancels Call Forward Follow Me, Personal Greeting, Park and Page (VAU) and Selectable Display Messaging. 3. At keyset, press SPK to hang up. OR At single line set, hang up.
FEATURES 117
Description
124i
Available.
384i
Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise requires Base 1.2N or higher or any version of EXCPRU. Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining requires Base 4.02 and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
Available system software prior to 3.04 has different programming options. Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise available in all versions. Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining requires system software 3.07.12 or higher.
Fixed Call Forwarding is a type of forwarding that is permanently in force at an extension. Calls to an extension with Fixed Call Forwarding enabled automatically reroute without any user action. Unlike normal Call Forwarding (which is turned on and off by extension users), Fixed Call Forwarding is set by the administrator in system programming. Fixed Call Forwarding complements Voice Mail, for example. The administrator can program Fixed Call Forwarding to send a users unanswered calls to their Voice Mail mailbox. Each individual user no longer has to manually set this operation. In system programming, the administrator can set the Fixed Call Forwarding destination and type for each extension and virtual extension. The forwarding destination can be an on- or off-premise extension port or Voice Mail port. The Fixed Call Forwarding Types are: Fixed Call Forwarding with Both Ringing (Program 1027 Option 1) Fixed Call Forwarding when Unanswered (Program 1027 Option 2) Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate (Program 1027 Option 3) Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy or Unanswered (Program 1027 Option 4) Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise (Program 1030) Fixed Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls: Intercom calls from co-workers extensions Calls routed from the Automated Attendant (VAU) or Voice Mail Direct Inward Lines DISA, DID and tie line calls to the forwarded extension Transferred calls Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining Fixed Call Forward Chaining allows Fixed Call Forwards to loop from one extension to the next. For example, you could have the chain 301 302 303 304 set up for Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy. If extension 301 is busy, calls to 301 route to 302. If 302 is also busy, the calls route to 303 and so on. Chaining allows you to set up very basic hunting between co-workers. Keep the following in mind when setting up Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining: If Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining forms a complete Call Forwarding loop (i.e., 301 302 303 301), the system rings the last extension in the chain (303). It does not complete the loop. If Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining finds an extension with user-implemented Call Forwarding in the mid dle of a chain, it rings that extension. It does not continue routing to the other extensions in the chain. If one of the extensions in a Fixed Call Forwarding chain has its fixed option set for Both Ringing (1), the system rings that extension. It does not continue routing to the other extensions in the chain. The receiving extensions display shows: STA AAA AAA is the extension that initially placed the call.
TRANSFER<< STA BBB BBB is the first extension in the Fixed Call Forwarding chain.
118 FEATURES
Programming
Refer to the flowcharts on the next two pages.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 1: Delayed Call Forwarding Time Set the Delayed Call Forwarding interval. For an unanswered call, Fixed Call Forwarding When Unanswered occurs after this interval. 1027 - Fixed Call Forwarding Setup For an extension port, assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Type (0-4) and the destination extension port. Available types are: 0 = Fixed Call Forwarding off 1 = Fixed Call Forwarding with Both Ringing (do not use for Voice Mail ports) 2 = Fixed Call Forwarding when Unanswered 3 = Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate 4 = Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered Prior to 384i system software 3.04, type 4 was not available. (384i Prior to 3.04 Only) 1029 - Fixed Call Forwarding When Busy For an extension port, assign the destination extension port for Fixed Call Forwarding When Busy. Any number of extensions can have the same Fixed Call Forwarding destination. This program is not available with system software 3.04 or higher. 1030 - Fixed Call Forwarding Off Premise For each extension port, assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise telephone number (up to 24 digits). Be sure to include the trunk access code.
FEATURES 119
telemanuals.com
Immediate
Which Fixed Call Forwarding mode do you want: - Both Ringing - Unanswered - Immediate - Unanswered/Busy - Off-premise?
Both Ringing
Unanswered or Busy
Off-premise
Unanswered
See A below.
Does Forwarding When Unanswered occur after the proper delay interval?
No
In 1030, assign the destination port and enter the off-premise telephone number.
In 0901:31, enable loop supervision (1) for each trunk that should be able to use Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise.
Stop
120 FEATURES
Start
Yes
Immediate
Do you want Forwarding With Both Ringing, When Unanswered or Immediate? Unanswered
Both Ringing
Does Forwarding When Unanswered occur after the proper delay interval? No
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 121
Operation
None
122 FEATURES
Description
124i
384i -
Available system software prior to 3.04 uses different procedures. DSL sets require system software 3.06.02 or higher.
Off-Premise (OPX) Call Forwarding allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site location. By enabling OPX Call Forwarding, the user can stay in touch by having the system forward their calls while they are away from the office. The forwarding destination can be any phone number the user enters, such as a car phone, home office, hotel or meeting room. Off-Premise Call Forwarding can route the off-site phone number over a specific trunk or through a trunk group, Automatic Route Selection or Trunk Group Routing.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls: Intercom calls from co-workers extensions Calls routed from the Automated Attendant (VAU) or Voice Mail1 Direct Inward Lines1 DISA, DID and tie line calls to the forwarded extension1 Transferred calls1
OPX Call Forwarding does not reroute "Ring Group" calls (i.e., trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Programs 0909 and 0910). Conditions (A.) Call Forwarding Off-Premise requires either loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or ground start trunks. (B.) The trunk access code and the outside telephone number combined cannot exceed 24 digits. (C.) Normally, the system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards. For example, extension 316 forwards to 318, and 318 in turn forwards to 320. Calls to 316 route to 318. Calls to 318 route to 320. The system does allow a single chain, however, if the second extension in the chain is forwarded off-premise (*46 + trunk access code + destination telephone number). Default Setting Disabled.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding can reroute an incoming trunk call only if the outgoing trunk selected has disconnect supervision enabled (see Programming above).
FEATURES 123
Start
No
Yes
No
Should extension have one-touch access to the Call Forwarding (Device) setup code?
Yes
In 0901 Item 31, enable loop supervision (1) for each trunk that should be able to use Call Forwarding Off-Premise.
Stop
Related Features
Call Forwarding, Fixed Fixed Call Forwarding can automatically forward an extensions calls to an outside number. Toll Restriction The outside number OPX Call Forwarding dials can only be a number normally allowed by the forwarded extensions Toll Restriction. Voice Announce Unit (VAU) In systems with a VAU, callers to an extension forwarded off-premise hear, "Please hold on, your call is being rerouted."
124 FEATURES
Operation
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key + Dial *4. OR Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1081) OR At DSL/SLT, lift handset Dial *4. 2. Dial 6 + trunk access code. Trunk access codes are 9 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 804 + Line Group (1-9, 01-99 or 001128) or #9 + Line number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5. 3. Dial the outside number to which your calls should be forwarded. 4. (Keyset only) Press HOLD. 5. Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up if you dialed *4 in step 1. Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes. To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key + Dial *4. OR Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1081) OR At DSL/SLT, lift handset and dial *4. 2. Dial 6 + HOLD. 3. Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up if you dialed *4 in step 1. Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key stops flashing.
FEATURES 125
(384i Prior to System Software 3.04) To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line set, lift handset. 2. Dial *20 This is the universal cancel code. It also cancels on-premise Call Forwarding, Call Forward Follow Me, Personal Greeting, Park and Page (VAU) and Selectable Display Messaging. 3. At keyset, press SPK to hang up. OR At single line set, hang up.
126 FEATURES
Description
124i Available 384i Available system software prior to 3.04 uses different procedures.
While at a co-workers desk, a user can have Call Forwarding with Follow Me redirect their calls to the co-workers extension. This helps an employee who gets detained at a co-workers desk longer than expected. To prevent losing important calls, the employee can activate Call Forwarding with Follow Me from the co-workers phone. Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension. To reroute calls from the initiating (forwarding) extension, use Call Forwarding. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Start
Yes
In 1005, assign Class of Service to extensions. Prior to 384i system software 3.04, you could enable a Call Forwarding Follow Me key (code 1001). Should extension have one-button access to the Call Forwarding (Station) setup code *2? No Yes In 1006, assign a Call Forwarding (Station) key (code (1080).
Stop
FEATURES 127
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Call Forwarding with Follow Me operation.
Operation
To activate Call Forward Follow Me: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial *2. OR Press Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1080). OR At DSL/SLT, lift handset and dial *2. 2. Dial 3 + Dial your own extension number (i.e., the source). 3. Dial Call Forwarding Type: 2 = All Calls 3 = Outside calls only 4 = Intercom calls only 4. SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed *2 in step 1. Your Call Forwarding (Station) Programmable Function Key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated. To cancel Call Forward Follow Me: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial *2. OR Press Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1080). OR At DSL/SLT, lift handset and dial *2. 2. Dial 0. 3. SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed *2 in step 1. Your Call Forwarding (Station) Programmable Function Key goes out.
128 FEATURES
FEATURES 129
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension. This is helpful, for example, to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through. Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Start
No
Stop
130 FEATURES
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Call Forwarding/DND Override operation.
Operation
To override an extensions Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb: 1. Call the forwarded or DND extension. 2. Press Override key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1022).
FEATURES 131
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Call Timer lets a keyset user time their trunk calls on the telephone display. This helps users that must keep track of their time on the phone. For incoming trunk calls, the Call Timer begins as soon as the user answers the call. For outgoing trunk calls, the Call Timer starts about 10 seconds after the user dials the last digit. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Start
No
Yes
Stop
0406 - COS Options, Item 46: Call Timer In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to use the Call Timer. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display Disabling the trunk name seize display (Program 0406:Item 37=0) also disables the Call Timer.
Operation
To time your trunk calls: 1. Place trunk call. The timer starts automatically.
132 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) without hanging up. When the user Camps-On, the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicating the waiting call. The call goes through when the busy extension becomes free. Call Waiting helps busy extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in line for a busy extension without being forgotten. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Start
No
Yes
In 1005, assign Class of Service to extensions. This key is also used for Callback and Trunk Queuing. Should extension have one-button Camp On? No Yes In 1006, assign a Camp On key (code 1020).
No
Stop
FEATURES 133
Related Features
Callback If an extension user Camps-On and then hangs up, the system converts the Camp On to a Callback. Dual Line Appearance/Off Hook Signaling If an extension busy on a call has Off Hook Signaling, an incoming Intercom calls rings the idle second line appearance. Off Hook Signaling The Off Hook Signaling Enhancements give an extension the ability to block a caller from dialing 2 to Camp On. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Call Waiting/Camp On operation. Transfer An extension user may be able to Transfer a call to a busy extension. Trunk Queuing/Camp-On Trunk Queuing lets an extension user Camp-On to a trunk.
Operation
To Camp-On to a busy extension: 1. Call busy extension. You must hear busy tone. 2. Dial 2 or press Camp-On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020). 3. Do not hang up. To Camp-On to a trunk, see Trunk Queuing. To cancel a Camp-On request: 1. Hang up. 2. At keyset, press idle CALL key and Dial 870. OR At keyset, press Camp-On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020). OR At single line set, lift handset and dial 870. To Split (answer a waiting call) at a single line telephone: Listen for Camp On beep. 1. Hookflash and dial 894. To repeatedly split between the two calls.
134 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
When an extension user calls a co-worker that doesnt answer, they can leave a Callback request for a return call. The user does not have to repeatedly call the unanswered extension back, hoping to find it idle. The system processes Callback requests as follows: 1. Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B. Caller can place or answer additional calls in the mean time. 2. When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring. 3. Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy) extension B. If caller A doesnt answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Callback. 4. As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B. Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring. When Callback Automatic Answer is enabled, a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset. When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled, the user must press the ringing line appearance to answer the Callback ring. Conditions (A.) An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time. Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 14: Callback Automatic Answer Enable (1) or disable (0) Callback Automatic Answer. 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 6: Callback Ring Duration Time Set the duration of the Callback ring (0-64800 seconds). 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 29: Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time The system cancels Callback and Trunk Queuing requests after this interval (0-64800 seconds). 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Callback (code 1020). This key is also the Camp-On key.
FEATURES 135
No
Should users be able to just lift the handset to answer the Callback ring?
Yes
In 0405 Item 29, enter the interval after which the system cancels Callback requests.
This is also the Camp On key. Should extension user have one-button access to Callback? No Yes In 1006, assign a Callback key (code 1020).
Stop
136 FEATURES
Operation
To place a Callback: 1. Call unavailable (busy or unanswered) extension. 2. Dial 2 or press Callback key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020). 3. Hang up. 4. Lift handset when busy extension calls you back. If the unavailable extension was unanswered (not busy), the Callback goes through after your co-worker uses their phone for the first time. If you have Callback Automatic Answer, you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension when you lift the handset. If you dont have Callback Automatic Answer, you must press the ringing line appearance to place the call. To cancel a Callback: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key and Dial 870. OR At keyset, press Camp-On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020). OR At single line set, lift handset and dial 870. To test Callback at your keyset: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 899. 3. Press SPK to hang up. 4. When you hear two beeps, press SPK again. You hear synthesized Music on Hold. 5. Press SPK to hang up.
FEATURES 137
Description
124i Available Multiple Message Format requires system software 1.2N. There are 200 Caller ID bins available, numbered 000-199. Automatically outdialing the Caller ID Block Code (*67) is available. Base 1.2R and earlier outdialed the non-standard code *6. Prior to Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18, the Caller ID display can be up to 10 digits. In Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18 or higher, the display can be up to 12 digits (for non-ACD calls). 384i Available Multiple Message Format type codes 4 (number absence) and 8 (name absence) require system software 3.04. There are 1000 Caller ID bins available, numbered 000-999. Automatically outdialing the Caller ID Block Code (*67) requires system software 3.06.02 or higher. Prior to system software 3.06.09, the Caller ID display can be up to 10 digits. In 3.06.09 and higher, the display can be up to 12 digits (for non-ACD calls).
Caller ID allows a display keyset to show an incoming callers telephone number (called the Directory Number or DN) and optional name. The Caller ID information is available as either a post-answer or pre-answer display. Normally, the system provides the Caller ID post-answer display. With the post-answer display, the user sees the incoming callers number/name after they answer the call. With the pre-answer display, the user can preview the callers number before picking up the ringing line. The pre-answer display is only available if the system has Automatic Handsfree for incoming line/loop keys disabled. Refer to the table on the following for the available Caller ID displays. Caller ID supports the telcos Called Number Identification (CNI) and Called Number Delivery (CND) service, when available. These services provide the Caller ID information (i.e., messages) between the first and second ring burst of an incoming call. There are two types of Caller ID message formats currently available: Single Message Format and Multiple Message Format. With Single Message Format, the telco sends only the callers phone number (DN). The DN is either 7 or 10 digits long. In Multiple Message Format, the telco sends the DN and the callers name. The DN for this format is also 7 or 10 digits long, and the name provided consists of up to 15 ASCII characters. In 384i system software prior to 3.06.09 and 124i, the telephones display can show up to 10 Caller ID digits. In 384i 3.06.09 and higher, the display can show up to 12 Caller ID digits (for non-ACD calls).
Once installed and programmed, Caller ID is enabled for all types of trunk calls, including: Ring Group calls Calls transferred from another extension Calls transferred from the VAU Module (via the VAU Automated Attendant) Calls transferred from Voice Mail (screened or unscreened) Direct Inward Lines (DILs)
Caller ID temporarily stores 16 calls (total of abandoned and unanswered). New calls replace old calls when the buffer fills.
138 FEATURES
Absence Reason Code P displays as PRIVATE Absence Reason Code O displays as OUT OF AREA Caller ID number (provided by telco) Caller ID name (provided by telco) Trunk name provided by phone system (Program 0903) Systems Caller Timer display System Time System Date
Pre-answer Display Post-Answer Display Display when Reviewing
With Caller ID name and number With Caller ID number Without Caller ID name With name absence code Without Caller ID number With Caller ID name With number absence code Without Caller ID number Without Caller ID name With number & name absence codes Without Caller ID number Without Caller ID name With number absence code Without Caller ID number Without Caller ID name With name absence code
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
CID-num CID-name Trunk name CID-num Trunk name CID-name Trunk name Name Absence Code Trunk name Number Absence Code Trunk name Name Absence Code CID-num Ringing -
CID-num NN:NN:NN CID-name Trunk name NN:NN:NN CID-num Trunk name NN:NN:NN CID-name Trunk name NN:NN:NN Name Absence Code
CID-num HH:MM:SS CID-name CID-num HH:MM:SS YY:MM:DD CID-name HH:MM:SS YY:MM:DD Name Absence Code HH:MM:SS YY:MM:DD
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Trunk name NN:NN:NN Number Absence Code Number Absence Code Trunk name NN:NN:NN Name Absence Code CID-num nn:nn:nn NO CALLER INFO HH:MM:SS YY:MM:DD Name Absence Code HH:MM:SS YY:MM:DD Trunk name HH:MM:SS YY:MM:DD Trunk name Absence code Trunk name NO CALLER INFO
Without Caller ID number Without Caller ID name Without any absence code Without time and date With absence reason Without time and date Without absence reason
FEATURES 139
140 FEATURES
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Disable Automatic Handsfree for line/loop key calls (0406 Item 125 = 0).
No
Yes
FEATURES 141
Yes
No
In 2403, enter 0 (no DCI software port assigned as the Caller ID printer port).
No
Yes
Stop
142 FEATURES
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection ARS can block outgoing Caller ID information on a call-by-call basis. To do this, insert the Caller ID block code (e.g., *67) in the ARS Dial Treatments. Station Message Detail Recording Caller ID information outputs on the SMDR report. T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) ANI/DNIS can use the Caller ID tables for routing. Refer to page 483 for more.
Operation
DISPLAYING THE INCOMING NUMBER To display the name/number for your incoming call: With Automatic Handsfree on Incoming Line/Loop Key Calls 1. Press FLASH and the incoming line loop key. If the Caller ID data includes the name, you can scroll left and right by pressing * and #. 2. Press line/loop key to answer the call. Without Automatic Handsfree on Incoming Line/Loop Key Calls Do not lift the handset. Press line/loop key. If the caller ID data includes the name, you can scroll left and right by pressing * and #. Lift handset or press SPK to answer the call. FEATURES 143
1. 2. 3.
Entering Names
When entering names, use the One-Touch Keys and dial pad keys as shown below. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press DSS1 three times. DSS1 = A-D DSS2 = E-H DSS3 = I-L DSS4 = M-P DSS5 = Q-T DSS6 = U-Z DSS7 = -- (hyphen) DSS8 = - (space) DSS9 = Extended ASCII characters DSS10 = Punctuation marks CHECK saves text entry after you select it. Dial pad digits = 1-9, # and * CONF (TRF) deletes entries (i.e., backspaces over previous entries)
Note: You dont have to press CHECK after numerical entries or after your last entry.
144 FEATURES
Entering Names
When entering names, use the One-Touch Keys and dial pad keys as shown below. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press DSS1 three times. DSS1 = A-D DSS2 = E-H DSS3 = I-L DSS4 = M-P DSS5 = Q-T DSS6 = U-Z DSS7 = -- (hyphen) DSS8 = - (space) DSS9 = Extended ASCII characters DSS10 = Punctuation marks CHECK saves text entry after you select it. Dial pad digits = 1-9, # and * CONF (TRF) deletes entries (i.e., backspaces over previous entries)
Note: You dont have to press CHECK after numerical entries or after your last entry. 7. 8. Press HOLD. Return to step 3 to add another number to the Caller ID Table. OR Press HOLD to exit.
FEATURES 145
146 FEATURES
FEATURES 147
Description
124i Available 52 trunks. Adjusting the sidetone for analog trunks is not available. Customizing CODEC Gain Types and Trunk ring Tones requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Unanswered calls can overflow to Voice Mail in Base 1.2R or higher and all versions of EXCPRU. Unanswered calls can overflow to the VAU Automated Attendantin Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Available 128 trunks. Adjusting the sidetone for analog trunks is available. Customizing CODEC Gain Types and Trunk Ring Tones requires system software 3.04 or higher. Unanswered calls can overflow to Voice Mail in system software 3.05.15 or higher. Unanswered calls can overflow to the VAU Automated Attendant in system software 3.07.10 or higher.
The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO (trunk) calls to meet the exact site requirements. This lets trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions. For additional information on making trunks ring, refer to the Ring Group feature. Delayed Ringing Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for trunks. If the trunk is not answered at its original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group. This could help a secretary that covers calls for their boss. If the boss doesnt answer the call, it rings the secretarys phone after a programmable interval. Universal Answer Universal Answer allows an employee to answer a call by going to any keyset and dialing a unique Universal Answer code. The employee doesnt have to know the trunk number or dial any other codes to pick up the ringing trunk. Youll normally set up Universal Answer along with Universal Night Answer (see "Night Service"). When a Universal Night Answer call rings the External Paging, an employee can answer the call from the first available phone. You might also want to use Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume of normal telephone ringing is not adequate. After hearing the ringing over the Paging, an employee can then easily pick up the call from a shop phone. See "Night Service" for more on Universal Night Answer. Conditions (A.) The system provides analog trunk CO service via ATRU PCBs. ATRU PCBs can connect to either loop start or ground start CO lines. However, ground start operation requires the installation of additional ATRU daughter boards. Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details. (B.) Analog Trunk (ATRU) PCBs do not require circuit type programming. In addition, the system automatically detects the ATRU ground start daughter boards, if installed.
148 FEATURES
Is trunk other than CO loop start DTMF? No In 0910, assign trunks to Ring Groups. Trunks that ring extensions the same way should be in the same Ring Group. A trunk can be in only one Ring Group for each Night Service mode.
Yes
If trunk is programmed to ring extension, incoming access (set in 0911/0912) is not required.
In 0911, set up the Trunk Access Maps. A trunk can be in more than one map. Each map sets incoming/outgoing options.
In 0909, assign extension to trunk's Ring Group and enter 0 (no ringing).
Not Ring
Ring
No
In 0912, assign extension to Access Map that prevents user from answering trunk.
Yes
In 0912, assign extension to Access Map that allows user to answer the trunk.
FEATURES 149
In 0405:62, enter 0.
No
Yes
Should calls reroute to a Ring Group, Voice Mail or the VAU Automated Attendant? Voice Mail
Ring Group
When a user is on an outside call, is the sidetone level correct? Yes Do you want to change the way calls ring keysets? No Do you want to change the way calls ring single line telephones? No Assign a different CODEC Gain Type in 0901:3. If required, change the CODEC gains in 0117. Do you want to adjust the gain (volume) for trunks or single line telephones?
No
In 0129, adjust the sidetone level for trunks connected to ATRU PCB ports.
Yes
Change the Ring Tone Range in 0902 amd 1001:2, the tones within each range in 0111 and the ring cadence in 1008:4.
Yes
Trunks
SLTs
In 0401:3, enter 0.
No
If a call rings longer than a specified interval, should the ring cadence change to a unique "alarm" sound?
Yes
150 FEATURES
For ringing extensions, should extension ring when line key starts flashing or wait for the system ring cycle?
The system changes the ring cadence for ringing calls after this interval.
Yes
Check 0901:2 (Delayed Ringing) and review settings of 0114:15,16 and 17.
No
Yes
In 1006, do not program function keys as loop keys (code 1012 + trunk group).
No
Yes
In 1006, program function keys as looop keys (code 1012 + trunk group).
Non-ringing loop keys require access programming. Ringing loop keys require Ring Group programming.
FEATURES 151
Universal Answer
No Stop
Universal Answer will answer the trunk if it is in the extension's programmed route.
Stop
152 FEATURES
FEATURES 153
Related Features
Direct Inward Line Direct Inward Lines ring an extension directly, without Ring Group or Access Map programming. Night Service Use Universal Answer to pick up Universal Night Answer calls. Programmable Function Keys Line keys and loop keys simplify answering outside calls. Ringing Line Preference An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset. Tenant Service An extension user cannot answer trunks that belong to another tenant group. The user can, however, answered trunk calls transferred from another tenant group.
154 FEATURES
FEATURES 155
Description
124i Available 52 trunks. Customizing CODEC Gains and setting up Alternate Trunk Access Codes require Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. The ability to turn DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls on and off requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available 128 trunks. Customizing CODEC Gains and setting up Alternate Trunk Access Codes require system software 3.04 or higher. The ability to turn DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls on and off is not available.
The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk calls. This lets you customize the call placing options to meet site requirements and each individuals needs. A user can place a call by: Pressing Line Keys or "Loop Keys" Pressing a Trunk Group (i.e., loop) key Pressing a Trunk Group Routing (dial 9) key Dialing a code for a specific trunk (#9 + the trunks number) Dialing a code for a Trunk Group (804 + group number) Dialing a code for Trunk Group Routing or ARS (9) Dialing an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (which you must define) Conditions (A.) The system provides analog trunk CO service via ATRU PCBs. ATRU PCBs can connect to either loop start or ground start CO lines. However, ground start operation requires the installation of additional ATRU daughter boards. Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details. (B.) Analog Trunk (ATRU) PCBs do not require circuit type programming. In addition, the system automatically detects the ATRU ground start daughter boards, if installed. Default Setting Enabled.
156 FEATURES
No
Yes
Stop
No
Yes
Build an outgoing restriction matrix. In the default program, extensions have full access to all trunks. Do you need to restrict certain extensions from placing calls on certain trunks? In 0911 for each Access Map, select the access options for each trunk.
Yes
No
In 0901:29, enter 0.
No
(Skip this decision for 384i) Should caller hear DTMF confirmation tones as they are dialing a trunk call?
Yes
In 0901:29, enter 1.
FEATURES 157
If a user preselects a line, how long should the system remember the preselection?
No
Yes
No
Should extension users have one-button access to trunk groups for placing calls?
Yes
In 1006, assign Trunk Group Routing/dial 9 keys (code 1011) and/or Trunk Group/ loop keys (1012 + group number).
Assign a different CODEC Gain Type in 0901:3. If required, change the CODEC gains in 0117 (384i only).
Trunks
Do you want to adjust the gain (volume) for trunks or single line telephones?
In 0129, adjust the sidetone level for trunks connected to ATRU PCB ports.
No
Do you want to adjust the gain (volume) for conversations on single line telephones?
Yes
No
158 FEATURES
Check the Analog Trunk Timers in 0114 and 0135 for compatibility with the telco.
For example, to make 50 the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code: DIAL = 5 Digit = 2 Kind = 8
Stop
No
Do you want to set up an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (384i only)?
Yes
In 0518, assign the Service Code set up in the previous step for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
In 0922, enter the extension's port number and enter the Trunk Group Routing route number.
Yes
No
In 0922, enter the extension's port number and enter 0 to prevent routing.
Turn to the Trunk Group Routing feature and set up Trunk Group Routing.
No
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 159
160 FEATURES
Operation
To place a call over a trunk group: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key OR At single line set, lift handset. 2. Dial 804. 3. Dial line group number (1-9, 01-99 or 001-128). 4. Dial number. OR 1. At keyset, press trunk group key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1012 + group). Also see the "Loop Keys" feature. 2. Dial number. To place a call using Trunk Group Routing: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line set, lift handset. 2. Dial 9. If your system has an Alternate Trunk Route Access code, you may dial that instead. 3. Dial number. OR 1. At keyset, press Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1011). Also see the "Loop Keys" feature. 2. Dial number.
FEATURES 161
162 FEATURES
telemanuals.com
Features B-D Class of Service
Class of Service
Description
124i Available 10 Classes of Service and 96 extension/virtual extension ports. An extensions Class of Service cannot be changed via a Service Code. 384i Available 15 Classes of Service in each Tenant Group and 384 extension/virtual extension ports. In system software 3.07.31 or higher, an extensions Class of Service can be changed via Service Code 177.
Class of Service (COS) sets various features and dialing options (called items) for extensions. The system allows any number of extensions to share the same Class of Service. An extension can have a different Class of Service for each of the Night Service modes. This lets you program a different set of dialing options for daytime operation, nighttime operation and even during lunch breaks. An extensions Class of Service can be changed in system programming or via a Service Code (normally 177). Conditions None Default Setting (384i Only) The attendant (port 01/extension 301) has Class of Service 15 in all Night Service modes. All other extensions have Class of Service 1 in all Night Service modes. (124i Only) The attendant (port 01/extension 301) has Class of Service 10 in all Night Service modes. All other extensions have Class of Service 1 in all Night Service modes. See the charts beginning on page 2 for the default settings of the individual options.
If changing Class of Service via Service Code: The password required to change Class of Service via Service Code 177 is 0000 (Program 0202 Item 1 = 0000). An extension can use Service Code 177 to change another extensions Class of Service (Program 0406 Item 71 = 1). An extension automatically blocks another extensions attempt to change their Class of Service via Service Code 177 (Program 0419 Item 19 = 0). The default Service Code for this option is 177 (Program 0514 Item 67 = 177).
FEATURES 163
Stop
Yes
In 0406 and 0419, change the data for the option as required.
Find the COS option (item) on the chart and review the associated feature.
In 0406:71, enter 0. This also prevents an extension from changing the system Time and Date.
No
Should an extension be able to dial a Service Code to change an extension's Class of Service?
Yes
In 0406:71, enter 1. This also lets an extension set the system Time and Date.
Is the default password (0000) for changing Class of Service OK? Yes
No
In 0419:19, enter 0.
No
Should extension allow another user to change its COS via Service Code 177?
Yes
In 0419:19, enter 1.
Do you want to use a Service Code other than 177 to change an extension's COS? No In 1005, assign Class of Service to extensions.
Yes
Start
164 FEATURES
Name
Flash for Single Line Telephones Manual Night Service Enable Long Conversation Alarm
This option...
Enables/disables Flash for single line (500/2500 type) telephones Enables/disables an extensions ability to use manual Night Service Switching Enables/disables the Warning Tone for Long Conversation (not for SLTs) Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Call Forwarding/DND Override Allows/prevents an extension busy on a call from receiving off-hook signaling Allows an extension to manually (0) or automatically (1) send off hook signals to a busy extension. Enables/disables an extensions ability to switch privacy at their extension
Is used with...
"Flash" "Night Service"
"Warning Tone for Long Conversation" "Call Forwarding/DND Override" "Off-Hook Signaling" "Off-Hook Signaling" "Privacy"
(384i) (Disabled [0] 3.05. or higher. Enabled [1] prior to 3.05) (124i) 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
Call Forwarding/DND Override Off Hook Signaling Receive Automatic Off Hook Signaling Data Privacy
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
0 (Manual)
1 (Automatic)
1 (Enabled)
FEATURES 165
Name
Group Call Pickup (Within Group)
This option...
Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extensions own Pickup Group (Service Code *#) Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group (Service Code 869) Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing a specific group (Service Code 868) Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Unscreened Transfer Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Do Not Disturb Enables/disables an extensions Intercom Abandoned Call display Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Meet Me Conference and Paging Enables/disables an extensions ability to leave Messages Waiting Enables/disables an extensions ability to initiate a Conference or Meet Me Conference Enables/disables an extensions ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference Enables/disables an extensions ability to store Abbreviated Dialing numbers Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Common Abbreviated Dialing Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Group Abbreviated Dialing
Is used with...
"Group Call Pickup"
1 (Enabled)
Group Call Pickup (Another Group) Group Call Pickup for Specific Group
1 (Enabled)
10
1 (Enabled)
11
Unscreened Transfer
"Transfer"
1 (Enabled)
12 13
Do Not Disturb Intercom Abandoned Call Display Meet Me Conference and Paging Message Waiting
"Do Not Disturb" "Intercom Abandoned Call Display" "Meet Me Conference Meet Me Paging" "Message Waiting"
1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
14
1 (Enabled)
15
1 (Enabled)
16
Conference
"Conference Meet Me Conference" "Voice Call Conference" "Abbreviated Dialing "Abbreviated Dialing" "Abbreviated Dialing"
1 (Enabled)
17
Voice Call Conference Storing Abbreviated Dialing Entries Common Abbreviated Dialing Group Abbreviated Dialing
1 (Enabled)
18
1 (Enabled)
19
1 (Enabled)
20
1 (Enabled)
166 FEATURES
Name
Department Group Step Calling External Paging Call Forwarding (Both Ringing)
This option...
Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Department Group Step Calling Enables/disables an extensions ability to make an External Page Enables/disables an extensions ability to activate Call Forwarding with Both Ringing (Service Code *27) Enables/disables an extensions ability to dial Service Code 2 for a Camp On or Callback Enable/disable an extensions ability to Camp On to a busy trunk Enables/disables an extensions ability to initiate Call Forwarding with Follow Me Enables/disables an extensions ability to set an alarm Enables/disables an extensions ability to use DSS Console Alternate Answer TBD TBD Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Call Forward When Busy (Service Code *22) Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Call Forward When Unanswered (Service Code *26) Enables/disables Toll Restriction Override (Service Code 875) Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Transfer Without Holding Enables/disables an extensions ability to initiate a Group Hold
Is used with...
"Department Group Step Calling" "Paging, External" "Call Forwarding"
1 (Enabled)
22 23
1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
24
Extension Camp On /Callback Trunk Queuing (Camp On) Call Forwarding with Follow Me Alarm DSS Console Alternate Answer Long Toll Call Alert Call Transfer Call Forward When Busy Call Forwarding When Unanswered
1 (Enabled)
25
1 (Enabled)
26
"Call Forwarding with Follow Me" "Alarm" "Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console" TBD TBD "Call Forwarding"
1 (Enabled)
27 28
1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
29 30 31
32
"Call Forwarding"
1 (Enabled)
33 34
1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled)
35
"Hold"
1 (Enabled)
FEATURES 167
Name
Group Hold Answer Trunk Name Display, Seizing Trunk Name Display, Incoming Extension Name Display, Answer
This option...
Enables/disables an extensions ability to pick up a call on Group Hold Enables/disables the displaying of a trunks name/number when the user seizes the trunk Enables/disables the displaying of a trunks name/number when the trunk is ringing Enables/disables the displaying of the incoming Intercom callers name/number after answer Enables/disables the pre-answer display of the incoming Intercom callers name and number Enables/disables Ringdown Extension for extensions with this COS Enables/disables an extensions incoming Transfer pre-answer display
Is used with...
"Hold"
1 (Enabled)
37
"Central Office Calls, Placing" "Name Storing" "Central Office Calls, Answering" "Name Storing" "Intercom" "Name Storing"
1 (Enabled)
38
1 (Enabled)
39
1 (Enabled)
40
1 (Enabled)
41
0 (Disabled)
42
1 (Enabled)
43 44 Barge In Mode
Not used Enables the extensions Barge In speech mode (0) or Monitor mode (1). Enable/disable an extensions ability to change the Music on Hold tone Enable/disable an extensions Call Timer Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Memo Dial Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Last Number Redial Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Save Number Dial "Barge In" 0 (Speech)
45
Changing the Music on Hold Tone Call Timer Memo Dial Last Number Redial
"Music on Hold"
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
46 47 48
"Call Timer" "Memo Dial" "Last Number Redial" "Save Number Dial"
49
1 (Enabled)
168 FEATURES
Name
Dial Number Preview Group Call Pickup Information Display Internal Paging Background Music
This option...
Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Dial Number Preview Enable/disable an extensions Group Call Pickup display Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Internal Paging Enable/disable an extensions ability to turn Background Music on and off (Service Code 825) Enable/disable an extensions ability to initiate Room Monitor Enable/disable an extensions ability to be monitored Allow/prevent an extension from enabling/disabling the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Continued Dialing
Is used with...
"Dial Number Preview" "Group Call Pickup" "Paging, Internal" "Background Music"
1 (Enabled)
51 52 53
54 55
Room Monitor, Initiating Extension Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored Dial Pad Confirmation Tone Continued Dialing ISDN Connected Line Identification Selectable Ring Tone Selection
0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled)
56
0 (Prevented)
57 58 59
1 (Enabled)
Refer to the PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or the BRI Manual (92000BRI**) Enable/disable an extensions ability to change the incoming ring tones Not used "Selectable Ring Tones" 1 (Enabled)
Enable/disable Intercom calling for the extension Enable/disable trunk calling for the extension Enable/disable an extensions ability to pick up a call ringing into a Pickup Group (Service Codes *# and 868) Enable/disable an extensions ability to call a department number Enables/disables Barge In at initiating extension
64
Department Calling
1 (Enabled)
65
1 (Enabled)
FEATURES 169
telemanuals.com
Features B-D Class of Service
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406 Default Item
66 67 68
Name
Barge In, Receive Secretary Call Setting Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing Programmable Function Key Programming DCI Auto Answer
This option...
Blocks/allows Barge In at the receiving extension Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Secretary Call Allows/prevents an extension from enabling Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming Intercom calls Enables/disables an extensions ability to program their function keys Enables/disables an extensions ability to set the DCI Auto Answer Mode (Service Code 883) Enables/disables an extensions ability to set the Time and Date and an extensions Class of Service via Service Code 177. Enables/disables an extensions ability to force Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls Enables/disables and extensions ability to use Microphone Cutoff Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Repeat Redial Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Selectable Display Messaging Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Automatic On Hook Transfer Not used
Is used with...
"Barge In" "Secretary Call" "Handsfree Answerback / Forced Intercom Ringing" "Programmable Function Keys" "Data Communications"
69
1 (Enabled)
70
1 (Enabled)
71
1 (Enabled)
72
"Handsfree Answerback / Forced Intercom Ringing" "Microphone Cutoff" "Repeat Redial" "Selectable Display Messaging" "Transfer"
1 (Enabled)
73
1 (Enabled)
74 75
1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
76
1 (Enabled)
Refer to the PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or the BRI Manual (92000BRI**) Not used
170 FEATURES
Name
ISDN Calling Party Subaddress (384i prior to 3.07.10 and 124i) Account Codes (384i 3.07.10 or higher) Account Codes Extension Name Checking Selectable Ring Tones
This option...
Is used with...
Refer to the PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or the BRI Manual (92000BRI**) Enables/disables an extensions ability to enter Account Codes Enables/disables operator alert when an extension improperly enters an Account Code. Enables/disables an extensions ability to program its name Enables/disables an extensions ability to check the Selectable Ring Tones Not used "Account Codes" 0 (Disabled)
84
"Account Codes"
0 (Disabled)
85 86
1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
87-90 91 92 93 94 95 Operator Transfer After Hold Callback Directed Call Pickup E-Hold (2nd) E-Hold Answer (2nd) Transfer Callback Display
Not used Not used Not used Not used Enables/disables the Transfer Callback display. If enabled, second line of display shows recall source. Enables/disables extensions ability to record, erase and listen to VAU messages Enables/disables extensions ability to dial 4 or Service Code 111 and listen to the General Message Enables/disables extensions ability to dial Service Code 112 and record, listen to or erase the General Message Enables/disables extensions ability to dial Service Code *47 to record, listen to or erase a Personal Greeting. This option also affects Park and Page. "Transfer" 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
96
VAU Record
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
97
1 (Enabled)
98
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
99
Personal Greeting
FEATURES 171
Name
Voice Over Initiate Voice Over Receive
This option...
Enables/disables an extensions ability to initiate Voice Over Enables/disables an extensions ability to receive Voice Over
Is used with...
"Voice Over" "Voice Over"
0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
1 (Enabled) 0 (Disabled)
Not used Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Group Listen Not used Not used Not used Refer to the Hotel/Motel Guide (P/N 92000HMT**) "Group Listen" 0 (Disabled)
112
172 FEATURES
Name
Forced Trunk Disconnect
This option...
Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect
Is used with...
"Forced Trunk Disconnect"
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
Not used Enables/disables the Caller ID display at an extension Enables/disables an extensions ability to edit the stored Caller ID information Enables/disables Automatic Handsfree for incoming calls on line/loop keys Enables/disables an extensions ability to dial the Universal Answer code (#0) Not used Call Forwarding Off-Premise Enables/disables an extensions ability to set up Call Forwarding Off-Premise for their phone "Call Forwarding, Off-Premise" 0 (Disabled) "Caller ID" "Caller ID" 1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
125
126
Universal Answer
"Universal Answer"
0 (Disabled)
127 128
FEATURES 173
Name
(384i 3.05.10 or higher) Manual Tandem Trunking (384i 3.05.10 or higher) Tandem Trunking on Hang up (384i 3.05 or higher) VAU Reminder Messages ACD Queue Status Display
This option...
Allows an extension user to set up a tandem call by pressing their CONF (TRF) key. Allows an extension user to set up a tandem call automatically when they hang up. Enables/disables the Call Forwarding, Message Waiting and Voice Mail reminder messages. Enables/disables the Queue Status Display for the ACD Group Supervisors COS. Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**) for additional information.
Is used with...
"Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)" "Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)" "Voice Announce Unit"
0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled)
5 6
Not used (384i 3.06.06 or higher) Enhanced Dial Buffering Not used (384i 3.07.10 or higher) Display 911 Dialed Station Name and Number (384i 3.07.10 or higher) E911 Alarm Ring Enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to display the name and number of the extension that activated E911 service. (If disabled, option 9 below is also disabled.) Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension s ability to play the E911 alarm ring. (This can only occur if option 8 above is also enabled.) If enabled (1), an extension user can dial 886 to turn off the E911 alarm ring. If disabled, an extension user cannot dial 886. "E911 Compatibility" 0 (Disabled) Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) Enhanced Dial Buffering. If disabled, the system uses the standard dial buffering. "Park" 0 (standard dial buffering enabled)
7 8
"E911 Compatibility"
0 (Disabled)
10
"E911 Compatibility"
0 (Disabled)
174 FEATURES
Name
(384i 3.07.12 or higher) TAPI Auto Idle Mode (Driver ID)
This option...
Enter 0 for this option if you are installing the Nitsuko TAPI Service Provider 1.02.01 driver. Enter 1 for this option if you are installing the Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.01 (or higher) driver. Enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions Off Hook Signaling for incoming DID calls. Enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to block off hook signals manually sent from a co-worker. Enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to block callers from dialing 2 to Camp On. Enable (1) or disable (0) DID Call Waiting for an extension.
Is used with...
"TAPI Compatibility"
12
(384i 3.07.24 or higher) DID Off Hook Ringing (384i 3.07.24 or higher) Block Manual Off Hook Signaling (384i 3.07.24 or higher) Block Camp On (384i 3.07.24 or higher) DID Call Waiting Not used (384i 3.07.31 or higher) Allow COS to be Changed Not used
13
14
15
16-18 19
Enable (1) or disable (0) the ability of an extensions COS to be changed via Service Code 177.
"Class of Service"
16-64
FEATURES 175
Operation
To change an extensions Class of Service (via Service Code 177): 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 177. You see: Enter Password3. Dial password and press HOLD. Use the Time and Date and MOH password (normally 0000). You see: Enter Station#. Youll hear error tone and have to start over if you dial an incorrect code. 4. Dial the extension number you want to change. You see: DAY:nn Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged. The extension you dial may be set to block your attempt to change their Class of Service. 5. Enter the Day Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 4 and press HOLD. You see: NIGHT:nn Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged. 6. Enter the Night Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 4 and press HOLD. You see: MIDNIGHT:nn Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged. 7. Enter the Midnight Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 4 and press HOLD. You see: REST:nn Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged. 8. Enter the Rest Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 4 and press HOLD. You see: Enter Station# 9. Go to step 4 and enter another extension number. OR Press SPK to hang up.
176 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) applications automate your office with TAPI compatibility and external PC control. CTI puts your telephone system on the cutting edge of modern office productivity with: Personal Computer Interface (PCI) Use a DCI Module installed in your Super Display or 32-Button Display keyset as a Personal Computer Interface. Installing Nitsukos TAPI software driver (P/N 94000) and TAPI compatible software in your personal computer will allow your PC to operate your telephone. Nitsukos TAPI software driver provides all TAPI Basic Services and a host of TAPI Supplemental Services. See "TAPI Compatibility" for more. Note: You can obtain TAPI Driver P/N 94000 separately or as part of the TAPI Kit (P/N 92966B). The TAPI Kit consists of the TAPI Driver in addition to DCI Module P/N 92266B. Telemarketing Dial Telemarketing Dial is PC-based dialing that enables your staff to canvas prospects quickly and efficiently. Use third-party database software installed on your PC as auto-dialer which can automatically look up your clients and dial their numbers. See "Data Communications Interface (DCI)" for more on setting up this feature. Database Lookup Provided through Caller ID and TAPI Compatible third-party software (such as Symantecs ACT!), Database Lookup displays your callers account information before their call is even answered. Go to "Data Communications Interface (DCI)" for the details on programming the system to enable this feature. Open Architecture Interface (OAI) OAI allows unique PC-based system functions via third-party development. Conditions None Default Setting None
Programming
Refer to the "Data Communications Interface (DCI)" feature for programming specifics.
Related Features
Data Communications Interface (DCI) Turn to this feature for more on connecting and programming DCI Modules and 3-DCI Units. TAPI Compatibility See this feature for the details on the TAPI services provided by the system and Nitsukos TAPI driver.
Operation
None
FEATURES 177
Description
124i The system allows either 8 fourparty conferences or 4 eight-party conferences. Split (From Conference) is not available. Adding a parked call to a Conference requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. The Conference initiator cannot place conferenced trunks on Hold. The Trunk Answer Code (867) requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Each DTU-A/C allows either 4 four-party conferences or 2 eightparty conferences per PCB. Split (From Conference) requires system software 3.07.24 or higher. Adding a parked call to a Conference requires system software 3.07.24 or higher. System software 3.07.24 or higher allows the initiator to place conferenced trunks on Hold. The Trunk Answer Code (867) requires system software 3.07.24 or higher.
Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation. With Conference, a user may set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. The system allows either four or eight parties maximum per conference. No more than two parties in Conference can be outside callers. Split (From Conference) Split allows a user to alternate (i.e., switch) between their callers in Conference. This will allow a dispatcher, for example, to control a telephone meeting between themselves, a customer and a service technician. The dispatcher can meet together with all parties, privately set up a service strategy with the technician and then meet again to set the schedule. Split cycles through the Conference in the same order in which the Conference was initially set up. If a user places an outside call, conferences extension 302 followed by extension 303, Split will cycle from the trunk, to 302 and finally to 303. The Split cycle then repeats. Conditions (384i Only) Conference requires either a DTU-A or DTU-C PCB (eight PCBs maximum per system). Default Setting Enabled.
178 FEATURES
FEATURES 179
Start
No
(Skip this decision for 124i) Should the system have Conference capability?
Yes
In 0308, assign the blocks on the CDTU PCB for Conference (entry 0).
Stop Should each CDTU PCB allow four 4party conferences or two 8-party conferences?
In 0302:2, enter 1.
Two 8-party
Four 4-party
In 0302:2, enter 0.
In 0406:16, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0406:16, enter 1.
In 0402:6, enter 1.
Conference
Transfer
In 0402:6, enter 0. Also see the Transfer feature and Program 0402:2.
No
Yes
No
Yes
Stop
180 FEATURES
Related Features
Conference, Voice Call Set up a Conference with a co-worker in your immediate work area. Meet Me Conference Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging. Meet Me Paging Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two-party meeting via Paging. Programmable Function Keys In order for keyset to have Conference, it must have a Conference function key. Transfer You can optionally program the CONF (TRF) key for Transfer. In this case, the keyset must have a Conference function key.
FEATURES 181
1. 2. 3.
4.
To Split (alternate) between the parties in Conference: Keyset 1. Press CONF (TRF) or Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016). 2. Dial *7. Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Press CONF or Conference key twice to set up the Conference again. Single Line Set Hookflash and dial*7. Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Hookflash twice to set up the Conference again.
1.
182 FEATURES
1. 2. 3.
4.
To exit a Conference without affecting the other parties: Keyset 5. Press HOLD. If you press Hold while on a call with two outside callers, the outside callers hear Music on Hold. Single Line Set Hang up. If you are not permitted to use Tandem Trunking, outside callers may hear Music on Hold.
1.
FEATURES 183
Description
124i The system allows either 8 fourparty conferences or 4 eight-party conferences. 384i Each DTU-A/C allows either 4 four-party conferences or 2 eightparty conferences per PCB.
Voice Call Conference lets extension users in the same work area join in a trunk Conference. To initiate a Voice Call Conference, an extension user just presses the Voice Call Conference key and tells their co-workers to join the call. The system releases the privacy on the trunk, and other users can just press the trunks line key to join the call. Voice Call Conference does not use the telephone system features to announce the call. The person initiating the Voice Call Conference just announces it "through the air." Conditions (384i Only) Conference requires either a DTU-A or DTU-C PCB (eight PCBs maximum per system). Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup (124i Only) Set the Conference mode of the system. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences (0) or 4 eight-party conferences (1). (384i Only) Set the Conference mode of each DTU-A or DTU-C PCB. The system allows either 4 fourparty conferences (0) or 2 eight-party conferences (1) per PCB. 0308 - Conference Circuit Setup (384i Only) Assign the circuits on the DTU-A or DTU-C PCBs as Conference circuits (0). 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 9: Meet Me Conference Time Set the interval users have to join a Voice Call Conference after it is announced. (Note that this interval is also used for Meet Me Conference.) 0406 - COS Options, Item 17: Voice Call Conference In an extensions COS, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Voice Call Conference (code 1017).
Related Features
Conference Set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. Programmable Function Keys Voice Call Conference requires a Voice Call Conference function key. Single Line Telephones This feature is not available at single line telephones.
184 FEATURES
No
(Skip this decision in 124i.) Should the system have Conference capability?
Yes
In 0308, assign the blocks on the CDTU PCB for Conference (entry 0).
Stop Should each CDTU PCB allow four 4-party conferences or two 8party conferences?
Two 8-party
Four 4-party
No
Yes
After the Conference is announced, do users have an adequate time to join the Conference? Yes In 1006, assign a function key as a Voice Call Conference key (code 1017).
No
Stop
FEATURES 185
186 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Continued Dialing allows an extension user to dial a call, wait for the called party to answer and then dial additional digits. This helps users that need services like Voice Mail, automatic banking and Other Common Carriers (OCCs). There are two types of Continued Dialing: Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls Depending on an extensions Class of Service, a keyset user may be able to dial additional digits after their Intercom call connects. In systems with Voice Mail, for example, Continued Dialing lets extension users dial the different options after the Voice Mail answers. Without Continued Dialing, extension users cannot access these Voice Mail options.
Continued Dialing for Trunk Calls Continued Dialing gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking, an outside Automated Attendant, bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers (OCCs). After the outside service answers, the user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow. Without Continued Dialing, the systems Toll Restriction will cut off the call after a specific number of dialed digits. See Programming below for additional information.
NOTICE
Continued Dialing may make the system more susceptible to toll fraud. Conditions Since a 2500 set dial pad is always active, the system does not limit Intercom Continued Dialing from these phones. Default Setting Enabled.
FEATURES 187
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
In 0702:3 set the maximum number of digits to be dialed for a local call.
No In 0702:4 set the maximum number of digits to be dialed for non-local calls.
Stop
Long distance calls are calls where the NPA or NNX is in either the Common Permit Code Table (0702:7) or the Permit Code Table (0702:5). Refer to the Toll Restriction Feature for more information.
188 FEATURES
Related Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion Users can place calls to services over Dial Pulse trunks - and then dial DTMF digits after the service answers. Toll Restriction The ability to use Continued Dialing on trunk calls is set by Toll Restriction programming.
Operation
To use Continued Dialing: 1. Place Intercom or trunk call. 2. Continue dialing after call connects. Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing.
FEATURES 189
Description
124i Available requires Base 3.03 or EXCPRU 3.03 or higher. 384i Available requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
The Nitsuko 900i (P/N 85456D) is a 900 MHz digital cordless telephone that provides mobility, flexibility and convenience for those who spend much of the workday away from their desk. Fully integrated with the telephone system, the Nitsuko 900i offers many standard features such as Park, Page, Do Not Disturb, Hotline Voice Over and Voice Mail. The Nitsuko 900i is normally paired with a companion keyset during installation for improved one-button call coverage capabilities. Complemented by four fully programmable function keys (with LEDs), the Nitsuko 900i achieves a whole new level of convenience and mobility. An easy-to-read LCD display, volume controls, a rechargeable battery and a handy belt clip round out the elegant and affordable Nitsuko 900i. For complete installation and operation instructions, refer to the Nitsuko 900i Cordless Phone Installation and User Guide (P/N 85456DINS**). Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
Priority Ring Tone (set in Program 1019)
1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3
190 FEATURES
Refer to the Nitsuko 900i Installation and User Guide (P/N 85456DINS**) for additional information.
Connect the 900i base unit "LINE IN" jack to an available DSTU station port
Automatically
(Skip this decision for 124i) Do you want to set the 900i port programming manually or automatically?
Manually
In 1006, leave the programmable keys at their default setting (i.e., as line keys 1-4).
No
Should the 900i have a key appearance for all incoming trunk calls?
Yes
In 1006, assign a "both ways" loop key (code 1078 + 2) to one of the 900i programmable keys.
Stop
No
Yes
Connect the 900i base unit "LINE OUT" jack to the companion keyset.
FEATURES 191
No
Should user be able to use the "desk" button on the 900i base to Transfer calls to the companion keyset?
Yes
In 1009, assign the 900i port as the Boss STA PORT and enter the companion keyset port as the STA_nn data.
In 1006, assign a Call Coverage Key (1036 + ext.) on the 900i for the companion keyset and visa versa.
In 1016, disable (0) ringing for the selected extension and function key for each Night Service mode.
Flash
Ring
In 1016, enable (1) ringing for the selected extension and function key for each Night Service mode.
Delayed
For calls ringing the Call Coverage keys, should the ringing be immediate or delayed?
Immediate
In 0414 Item 5, adjust the Call Coverage Delay Interval if required. Do you want to change the way calls ring Call Coverage keys? In 1018, assign a ring tone range for each extension port assigned to a Call Coverage key.
Yes
No
When an extension has more than one Call Coverage key, do you want to change the ringing priority? No Stop
Yes
192 FEATURES
Related Features
Refer to the Nitsuko 900i Cordless Phone Installation and User Guide (P/N 85456DINS**) for Related Feature information.
Operation
Refer to the Nitsuko 900i Cordless Phone Installation and User Guide (P/N 85456DINS**) for the specifics on feature operation.
FEATURES 193
Description
124i Available 72 DCI software ports, allocated between 72 DCI Modules and six 3-DCI Units (two per cabinet) maximum. 384i Available 288 DCI software ports, with 144 DCI Modules and 48 3DCI Units maximum. System software prior to 3.04 uses different DCI Types. System software 3.05 and higher has default assignments for the first 3-DCI installed.
With the Data Communications Interface (DCI), you can use your telephone system to set up a data network. DCI networking lets system users share common office resources such as PCs, modems and printers. Since the phone system handles the network communications, you can eliminate the expense of separate wiring, network adapters and network driver software. The DCIs can switch asynchronous RS-232-C data at speeds from 300 to 19.2K baud. Internal X.25 packet switching ensures maximum data reliability with a minimum of disruption to other system activities. There are three types of DCIs: RS-232-C DCI Module (DCI-A: P/N 92266) The DCI-A is a single port data module that installs in a multibutton phone for serial (RS-232-C) communications. Although it installs in the phone, the DCI-A has its own unique port and extension number. Use DCI-A to easily add RS-232-C data capabilities to any keyset. The 384i system can have up to 144 DCI Modules; the 124i up to 72 (DCI-A plus DCI-B - see below).
Centronics DCI Module (DCI-B: P/N 92267) The DCI-B is also a single port data module that installs in a multibutton telephone, but it is used for parallel (Centronics) communication. Like the DCI-A, DCI-B also has its own unique port and extension number. Use the DCI-B to connect a parallel printer to your data network. The DCI-B operates in one direction only. A switch on the DCI-B lets you send data OUT (from DCI-B to printer) or IN (from printer to DCI-B). The 384i system can have up to 144 DCI Modules,; the 124i up to 72 (DCI-A plus DCI-B - see above). The DCI-B requires a unique cable consult with your sales representative. 3-Port DCI Unit (3DCI-A: P/N 92258) The 3DCI-A is a stand-alone unit that connects to a single DSTU PCB port and provides three RS-232-C ports. The 3DCI units are helpful in areas that have a high concentration of data devices. Since you can have three devices connected to each 3DCI, you use up 1/3 the number of DTSU PCB ports (when compared to the DCI Module). Keep in mind, however, that 3DCI Units do not have an associated telephone. The 384i system can have up to 48 3DCI Units (144 data ports); the 124i up to three (six data ports).
DCI Features Keyset-Originated Data Call Place a call to another DCI by using your telephone dial pad. The data call automatically sets up if the called DCI answers.
Terminal-Originated Data Call Place data calls directly from your PC. You can dial using Hayes compatible dialing commands (e.g., ATDT) or use the powerful auto-dialing features of your communications software. Terminal-Originated Voice Call (Telemarketing Dial) Use your PC to place an outgoing call, then switch to a voice call after the number dials out. This is a great feature for telemarketers that have a list of names to call stored in their communications software. Let the communications software dial the call - then switch it to a voice call after the stored number dials out. Each phone with Telemarketing Dial should have a Telemarketing Dial key (code 1045). See Programming for more.
194 FEATURES
DCI Department Group Group DCIs into departments for pooled DCI operation. For example, you can program several network printers into a DCI Department Group (see the illustration below). When a user calls the department, they connect to the first available printer. DCI Department Groups also allow modem pooling for trunk calls without using a proprietary Modem Pooling PCB (see the illustration below). Users placing outside calls select one of the pooled modems as part of the dialing sequence. Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional installation details.
92 0 - 168 f
3DCI
PC
3DCI
ASTU
Modem
Modem
Modem
FEATURES 195
Hayes Compatibility The DCI is compatible with many Hayes AT commands. For example, you can use S-registers to change DCI communications parameters (refer to Table DCI-2). In addition, Result Codes help you monitor the progress of your call (refer to Table DCI-4). You can also enter over 20 Hayes commands from your terminal to control dialing and terminal options, Result Code display and S-register programming (refer to Table DCI-5). DCI Hotline DCI Hotline sets up a "nailed-up" (permanent) connection between a DCI Module and another DCI. During programming, you set the DCI Module as the "source" and the other DCI as the "target." When the user at the source presses the keyset data key, the system automatically sets up the data link to the target DCI. You could use a DCI Hotline at a terminal connected through the phone system to a mini-computer. When the terminal user presses the keyset Hotline key, the terminal goes on-line to the mini-computer. Speed Conversion The system can automatically compensate for speed differences between two connected data devices. For example, a PC receiving at 2400 baud can accept files sent by another PC at 19.2K baud. There is no need for the two devices to match their communications speed
Physical Ports and Software Ports DCIs have physical ports and corresponding software ports. The software ports are used during system programming. For DCI Modules, the physical port is the same as the phone port into which the module is installed. In 384i, the software port (1-144) depends on the installation order (set in Program 0005). Order 1 specifies software port 1; order 144 specifies software port 144. Normally youll assign DCI Order 1 to the first DCI Module you install and Order 144 to the last. In 124i, the software port is the same as host telephones physical port. The total of all 124i data device software ports cannot exceed 72. Each 3DCI consists of a physical port for connection to the phone system and three software ports. The physical port is the station port into which the 3DCI line cord is plugged. In 384i, the 3DCIs have a different software port numbering scheme which is also determined by the installation order set in Program 0005. The 3DCI with order 1 (shown below) has software ports 145, 146 and 147. The 3DCI with order 48 (the highest 3DCI order number available) has software ports 286, 287 and 288. Normally, you assign 3DCI Order 1 to the first 3DCI you install and Order 48 to the last. In 124i, the software port is the same as the extension port to which the module is connected and the next two consecutive ports. The total of all 124i data device software ports cannot exceed 72.
384i Data Communications Interface Devices Device Total Number of Physical Ports Installation Order Numbers Software Ports
1-144 1-48
1-144 145-288
196 FEATURES
(384i System Shown) During programming, you assign DCI extension numbers, Department Group options and Tenant Group options to DCI software ports, not physical ports. During installation, the equipment plugged into the connectors correspond to the DCI software ports. Refer to the system Hardware Manual for more installation details. Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
FEATURES 197
920
Number of Rings Until Auto-Answer The number of rings required before the DCI port answers the call. Ring Count The register that stores the number or rings detected by the DCI Escape Character The decimal value of the ASCII character used for Escape Carriage Return Character The decimal value of the ASCII character used for carriage return Line Feed Character The decimal value of the ASCII character used for line feed. Backspace Character The decimal value of the ASCII character used as a backspace. Wait for Carrier After Dial During call setup, sets time DCI waits for carrier from remote modem before hanging up. Also Sets time DCI pauses when it encounters a W in the dial string. Carrier Detect Response Time Minimum duration of valid carrier signal. Lost Carrier to Hang Up Delay Length of time DCI waits before hanging up after loss of carrier (must be greater than register 9) Escape Code Guard Time Delay (guard) time before and after entering escape character. Delay to DTR In synchronous mode, sets interval between connection and examination of DTR. Also After connection, sets minimum duration of valid DTR signal.
0-127 (decimal)
43
0-127 (decimal)
13
0-127 (decimal)
10
1-255 (seconds)
30
9 10
12
50 (1 second)
25
5 (50mS)
198 FEATURES
58
DTE/DCE Terminal Type You can configure a DCI-A Module (P/N 92266) as either a DCE of DTE device. Use the DCE (1) configuration if you have a straight-thru cable and you want to connect directly to a terminal or PC serial port. Use the DTE (0) configuration if you have a straight-thru cable and you want to connect directly to a modem. (This option requires system software 3.04. Prior to 3.04, this options was Register 59, Data Watchdog Timer.) Data Watchdog Timer (Low) If a data low condition exists for longer than this interval, the system disconnects the data call. This option is only available in system software prior to 3.04. Data Watchdog Timer (High) If a data high condition exists for longer than this interval, the system disconnects the data call. This option is only available in system software prior to 3.04. Packet Size Sets the size of the data packet. Packets exceeding this size are transmitted. Packets less than this size are not (unless timeout occurs - see register 63). Terminate Code The decimal value of the ASCII code used to end (terminate) a command line. Data Transmission Time Sets how long DCI waits before transmitting an incomplete packet. Use register 61 to set packet size. Result Code Send/Block Allows/prevents sending of Result Codes to device connected to DCI. Result Code Type Enables sending of Result Codes as words or numbers. Result Code Mode Determines which set of Result Codes are sent to device connected to DCI (Basic or Extended - see Table with DCI feature).
0 = DTE 1 = DCE
0 (DTE)
59
0 (disabled)
60
0 (disabled)
61
255
62
0-127 (decimal)
13 (CR)
63
0, 1-255 (0, 50-12750 mS) 0=disabled 0=Send 1=Do Not Send 0=Numeric 1=Words 0=Basic 1=Extended
5 (250 mS)
64
0 (Send)
1 (Words)
0 (Basic)
FEATURES 199
65
1=300 BPS 2=600 BPS 3=1200 BPS 4=2400 BPS 5=4800 BPS 6=9600 BPS 7=19,200 BPS 0=1 stop bit 1=2 stop bits 0=7 data bits 1=8 data bits 0=No parity 1=Not used 2=Odd parity 3=Even parity 0=Control enabled 1=Disabled (normally on) 0=Control enabled 1=Disabled (normally on) 0=Control enabled 1=Disabled (follows RTS) 0=No flow control 1=RTS/CTS (hardware) flow control enabled 2=XON/XOFF between DCI and connected terminal 3=XON/XOFF between sender and receiver (DCI transparent)
6 (9600 BPS)
Stop Bit Sets the number of stop bits the DCI expects in the data stream Data Bits Sets the number of data bits the DCI expects in the data stream. Parity Sets the parity method the DCI expects in the data stream 66 Request to Send (RTS) Control Enables (0) or disables (1) RTS (pin 4) control. If disabled, the DCI holds RTS on. Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Control Enables (0) or disables (1) DTR (pin 20) control. If disabled, the DCI holds DTR on. Clear to Send (CD Control) Enables (0) or disables (1) CTS (pin 5) control. If disabled, CTS follows RTS (pin 4). Flow Control Sets flow control.
0 (1 stop bit)
1 (8 data bits)
0 (no parity)
200 FEATURES
DCI X.25 Packet Switching (LAPB) Registers (Register Type 2) Register Description Range Default
Internal Calls 1 T1 Timer After the DCE (DCI) sends a packet, it must receive a response from the connected DTE within the T1 interval. If a response is not received, the DCE resends the packet. T2 Timer After the connected DTE receives a packet from the DCE, it must respond within the T2 interval. (T2 must be less than T1.) N1 The maximum number of bits in an I (Information Transfer) frame. N2 After T1 expires, N2 is the maximum number of transmissions and retransmissions of a packet allowed. K The maximum number of I (Information Transfer) frames a connected device may have unacknowledged (outstanding). 0-65535 mS 500 mS
0-65535 mS
250 mS
0-65535 bits
2080 bits
0-65535 times
20 times
0-7 frames
7 frames
External Calls 6 T1 Timer After the DCE (DCI) sends a packet, it must receive a response from the connected DTE within the T1 interval. If a response is not received, the DCE resends the packet. T2 Timer After the connected DTE receives a packet from the DCE, it must respond within the T2 interval. (T2 must be less than T1.) N1 The maximum number of bits in an I (Information Transfer) frame. N2 After T1 expires, N2 is the maximum number of transmissions and retransmissions of a packet allowed. K The maximum number of I (Information Transfer) frames a connected device may have unacknowledged (outstanding). 0-65535 mS 2000 mS
0-65535 mS
1000 mS
0-65535 bits
2080 bits
0-65535 times
7 times
10
0-7 frames
7 frames
FEATURES 201
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 22
Protective Ground Transmitted Data Received Data Request to Send Clear to Send Data Set Ready Signal Ground Carrier Detect Data Terminal Ready Ring Indicator To DCI To Terminal To DCI To Terminal To DCI To Terminal To DCI To DCI
202 FEATURES
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 10 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR Returned when command entered without error. Connection is established (any speed) with result code set 0. Displays at destination terminal while call is ringing. No carrier received from destination call disconnected. Incorrect command entered.
CONNECT 1200 Call connected at 1200 baud. BUSY NO ANSWER Destination extension busy or no pooled modem available. Destination doesnt answer within allowed time.
CONNECT 2400 Call connected at 2400 baud. CONNECT 300 CONNECT 600 CONNECT 4800 CONNECT 9600 Call connected at 300 baud. Call connected at 600 baud. Call connected at 4800 baud. Call connected at 9600 baud.
CONNECT 19200 Call connected at 19200 baud. CAMP ON SET CAMP ON FAIL CAMP ON CALL BACK After getting BUSY result code, caller uses ATK to Camp-On. Camp on attempt fails (see CAMP On SET above). Extension waiting for CAMP ON to go through
FEATURES 203
AT A/ A Dn
Precedes all commands - place at beginning of command line. Re-executes the most recent AT command. Answers incoming call. Dial according to the value of n, where n can be: 0-9, A to D, # and * (in telephone number) [, ], - or space (used to make number easier to read, but ignored at time of dialing). Terminal does not echo commands input by user. Terminal echoes commands input by user. Hang up (disconnect) current call. Returns the version on the ROM chip in the DCI. Camp On to busy system extension.
Return to Communication Mode After entering command mode (by entering an escape sequence), use AT0 to return to the communications mode. Result Codes On Result Codes Off Register Contents Change Register Numeric Result Codes Set Verbal Result Codes Set Result Code Set 0 Result Code Set 1 Result Code Set 2 Result Code Set 3 Result Code Set 4 Reset Initialize Registers Store Registers Result codes are displayed. Result codes are not displayed. The contents of register x are displayed (e.g., S1?) displays the contents of register 1). (x=two digits). The contents of register X are changed to entry y. (x=2 digits, y=3 digits). DCI provides numeric result codes, instead of verbal result codes. See also Q0 and Q1. DCI provides verbal result codes, instead of numeric result codes. See also Q0 and Q1. Enable result code set 0 (basic result codes). Enable result code set 1. Enable result code set 2. Enable result code set 3. Enable result code set 4. Reset the DCI, using the last values saved by system programming or the &W command. The DCI returns all registers to their factory default settings. The DCI saves (stores) the current register values . Register values saved are S0, S2-S5, S12, S61-S66.
204 FEATURES
In 0005, assign 3DCI's station port circuit type 4. Order 1-48 corresponds to software ports 145-288.
3DCI Unit
Is DCI a DCI Module or 3DCI Unit? (In 124i, skip this decision.)
DCI
In 0005, assign DCI's station port circuit type 2. Order 1-144 corresponds to software ports 1-144.
Modem
Is DCI software port connect to DTE (Terminal), DCE (Modem) or Centronics (parallel) device. Parallel In 1202 (DCI Type) for the DCI software port, enter 2.
Terminal
In 1202 (DCI Sub-type) for the DCI software port, enter 1 for each sub-type .
Same
Unique
In 1202 (DCI Sub-type) for the DCI software port, enter a unique sub-type number (1-10).
You can also use Hayes commands to change S-registers and other options.
Do you want to change a DCI software port's default communications options? No (384i only) In 1203, assign each DCI software port to a Tenant Group (1-4).
Yes
In 1201 for each sub-type (1-10), set the values for the DCI S-registers (Register Type 1) and LAPB (X.25 packet switching) registers (Register Type 2).
FEATURES 205
Yes
In 1205, assign each DCI software port to a non-restrictive Toll Restriction Class (1-15). Also refer to the Toll Restriction feature.
No
Yes
In 1205, assign each DCI software port to a restrictive Toll Restriction Class (1-15). Also refer to the Toll Restriction feature.
Yes
If you don't initialize, any changes you made in 1201 won't take effect.
206 FEATURES
No
Yes
Yes
Should keyset be able to set DCI Automatic Answer (Service Code 883)?
FEATURES 207
Is the terminal connected to the DCI software port also for SMDR?
Yes
No
Is the terminal connected to the DCI software port also for system reports?
Yes
In 0007, enter the DCI software port number as the system report port number.
No
Is the terminal connected to the DCI software port also for the alarm report?
Yes
In 0008, enter the DCI software port number as alarm report port number.
No
Yes
No
Stop
In 1914:2 enter the software port to which the DCI has been assigned in Program 0005.
208 FEATURES
Related Features
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications CTI applications automate the office with TAPI compatibility and external PC control. Prime Line Selection Do not set up Prime Line Selection for extensions with Telemarketing Dial. Programmable Function Keys A keyset with a Data Module must have a data key. Optionally, keysets can also have Telemarketing Dial keys. Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot use the Data Communications capabilities of the system. Station Message Detail Recording The system uses DCIs for SMDR and system reports. TAPI Compatibility The system has Telephony Programming Applications Interface (TAPI) capability.
Operation
KEYSET-ORIGINATED DATA CALL To place a keyset-originated data call: Your extension must have a data key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1029) 1. Press idle CALL key and dial DCI extension number. The data key lights when the call connects. If you see "BUSY" on your terminal display, you may be able to type ATK (Enter) to Camp On. Refer to Table DCI-4 for other Result Codes. Refer to Table DCI-5 for a complete list of Hayes-compatible commands. If you call a busy DCI-B, your data key continues to flash. TERMINAL-ORIGINATED VOICE CALL (Telemarketing Dial) To place a terminal-originated voice call: 1. Press Telemarketing Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1045). 2. Using the terminal, type ATDT , the extension you want to call and press Enter. To save time, you can use your communication softwares dialing directory feature. 3. Press Telemarketing Dial key after call dials out. TERMINAL-ORIGINATED DATA CALL To make sure your terminal is working properly: 1. Type AT (Enter). OK displays on the next line. If you dont see OK, check the communications parameters of your DCI and communications software. When calling from a DCI-B, you can only place keyset-originated data calls. To place a call from your terminal: 1. Type ATDT nnn (where nnn is the DCI extension you want to call) press Enter. You see CONNECT if your call goes through. For other Result Codes you may see, refer to Table DCI-4. 210 FEATURES 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 211
Description
124i Available. Enhanced hunting requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available. Enhanced hunting requires system software 3.06.02 or higher.
With Department Calling, an extension user can call an idle extension within a preprogrammed Department Group by dialing the groups pilot number. The call would ring the first available extension in the group. For example, this would let a caller dial the Sales department just by knowing the Sales departments pilot number. The caller would not have to know any of the Sales departments extension numbers. The system allows up to 32 Department Calling Groups per Tenant Group. There are two types or routing available with Department Calling: Priority Routing and Circular Routing. With Priority Routing, an incoming call routes to the highest priority extensions first. Lower priority extensions ring only if all higher priority extensions are busy. With Circular Routing, each call rings a new extension. In a Department Group with extensions 310 (Priority 1), 311 (Priority 2) and 312 (Priority 3) The first call rings 310. The second call rings 311. The third call rings 312. The fourth call rings 310 and the cycle repeats. Note: When programming, the high priority extensions have low priority numbers. For example, priority 1 has a higher priority than priority 10. Overflow Routing Department Calling also provides overflow routing for extensions within the group. If a user directly dials a busy extension within a Department Group, the system can optionally route the call to the first available group member. User Log Out/Log In An extension user can log out and log in to a Department Calling Group. By logging out, the user removes their extension from the group. Once logged out, Department Calling bypasses their extension. When they log back in, Department Calling routes to their extension normally. All users can dial a code to log in or log out of their Department Calling Group. A keyset can optionally have a function key programmed for one-button log in and log out operation.
212 FEATURES
Not answered (Option 1) A call to the pilot number will cycle through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The call will continue to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. If the Department Group has Priority Routing enabled, and the highest priority member is busy, the call will not route. Busy or not answered (Option 2) A call to the pilot number will cycle through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The call will continue to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. Calls into groups with Priority Routing and Circular Routing route identically. Simultaneous ringing (Option 3) All idle members of the Department Group ring simultaneously. Calls do not cycle between group members.
If all members of the Department Group are busy, an incoming or transferred call to the groups pilot number will queue for an available member. Each group has a queue that can hold up to 10 waiting calls. Once the queue fills, additional callers hear busy tone and cannot queue for an available member. If a display phone is waiting in queue, the user will see: WAITING (group name). If a transferred call in queue is an outside call, and the system has a VAU Module installed, the queued caller will hear, "Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes free." The VAU Automated Attendant can also Transfer calls to Department Groups. Refer to "Voice Announce Unit" feature for more information on setting up the VAU Automated Attendant. The system prevents hunting to a Department Group extension if it is: Busy on a call In Do Not Disturb Call Forwarded Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
FEATURES 213
Call
Call
Call
20 0A
214 FEATURES
92
Circular Routing
Call 1
Call 2
Call 3
20 0B
Call 4
92
FEATURES 215
No
Yes
Priority Routing
Should calls into a Department Group use Priority Routing or Circular Routing?
Circular Routing
The 384i allows up to 32 Department Groups. The 124i allows up to 8. In 1003, assign extension to Department Group 0. In 1003, assign extension to Department Group.
No
Yes
If you are using Priority Routing, use 1003 to set the extension's priority within the group.
This only applies to Intercom calls to department members, not pilot numbers. In 0410 Item 2, enter 1. Overflow If extension user calls a busy Department Group member, should call overflow or be busy? Busy In 0410 Item 2, enter 0.
Yes
In 1006, assign a key for Department Calling log out (code 1074).
216 FEATURES
Yes
In0901:14-17, assign Service Type 4 for each trunk you want to set up as a DIL.
No
In 0917, assign the Department Group pilot number as the DIL destination.
In 384i, for Department Groups 1-32 enter 385-417. In 124i, for Department Groups 1-8 enter 97-104.
No
Stop
Yes
In 0410:4, select the enhanced hunting type you want: 0 = When busy 1 = When not answered 2 = When busy or not answered 3 = Simultaneous ringing
Does a call ring a Department Group member the right interval before hunting?
No
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 217
218 FEATURES
Operation
To call a department: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line set, lift handset. 2. Dial departments extension number. The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department. To log out of your Department Calling Group: While you are logged out, Department Calling cannot route calls to your extension. 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 150 + 1. OR 1. Press Department Calling Log In key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1074). The key lights while you are logged out. To log back in to your Department Calling Group: While you log back in, Department Calling will route calls to your extension. 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 150 + 0. OR 1. Press Department Calling Log In key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1074). The key goes out when you log back in.
FEATURES 219
220 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
After calling a busy Department Calling Group member, an extension user can have Department Step Calling quickly call another member in the group. The caller does not have to hang up and place another Intercom call if the first extension called is unavailable. Department Step Calling also allows an extension user to cycle through the members of a Department Group. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the Following Page
0406 - COS Options, Item 21: Department Step Calling In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to use Department Step Calling. 0512 - Single Digit Service Code Setup If required, use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code (normally #). 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a function key Department Step Calling (code 1021).
Related Features
Department Calling An extension user can call an idle extension within a preprogrammed Department Group by dialing the groups pilot number. Department Calling also provides overflow routing for extensions within the group - which simulates Step Calling. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Department Step Calling operation.
Operation
To make a Step Call: You step through Extension Groups set in Program 1003. 1. Place call to busy Department Group member. OR Place call to Department Group pilot number. 2. Dial #. OR Press Step Call key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1021). 3. Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members.
FEATURES 221
No
Yes
No
After calling a busy Department Group member, should caller be able to step call to another group member?
Yes
No
Yes
In 0512:1, enter the digit you want to use for stepping through a Department Group.
Another digit
Stop
222 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Dialing Number Preview lets a display keyset user dial and review a number before the system dials it out. Dialing Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors. Conditions An extension user cannot edit the displayed number. Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Start
No
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 223
Related Features
None
Operation
To use Dial Number Preview to place a call: 1. Do not lift the handset or press a CALL key. 2. Dial *. 3. Dial number you want to call. The number displays. 4. To dial out the displayed trunk number, press a line key. If the previewed number as a trunk access code (e.g., 9), you can press CALL instead. OR To dial out the displayed Intercom number, press a CALL key. OR To cancel the number without dialing it out, Press HOLD.
224 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. Changing the tone requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available. Changing the tone requires system software 3.04 or higher.
For an extension with Dial Pad Confirmation Tone enabled, the user hears a beep each time they press a key. This is helpful for Intercom calls and Dial Pulse trunk calls, since these calls provide no Call Progress tones. Conditions None Default Setting Disabled
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 56, enter 0 to disable turning Dial Pad Confirmation Tone on and off.
No
Should extension be able to turn the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone on and off?
Yes
In 0406 Item 56, enter 1 to enable turning Dial Pad Confirmation Tone on and off.
(384i Only) Do you want to change the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone? No
Yes
In 0110, select another frequency and duration for the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone.
Stop
FEATURES 225
Related Features
Single Line Telephones Dial Pad Confirmation Tone does not apply to single line telephones.
Operation
To enable/disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 824.
226 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. Allocating circuits for Dial Tone Detection is not required. Tone Detection Setup requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. The Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone option requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Available. Allocating CDTU circuits for Dial Tone Detection is required. Tone Detection Setup requires system software 3.04 or higher. The Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone option requires system software version 3.07.10 or higher.
If a trunk has Dial Tone Detection enabled, the system monitors for dial tone from the telco or PBX when a user places a call on that trunk. If the user accesses the trunk directly (by pressing a line key or dialing #9 and the trunks number), the system will drop the trunk if dial tone does not occur. If the user access the trunk via a Trunk Group (by dialing a trunk group code or automatically through a feature like Last Number Redial), the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group. Refer to the chart under Programming below for more.
Dial Tone Detection is available for the following features: Automatic Route Selection Abbreviated Dialing Central Office Calls, Placing Last Number Redial Loop Keys (outbound) Save Number Dialed T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) Tie Lines Trunk Group Routing Trunk Groups
Conditions None Default Setting Disabled for manually dialed calls; enabled for automatically dialed calls.
FEATURES 227
In 0901:11, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0901:11, enter 1
In 0921:3, enter 0.
No
For Trunk Group calls, should the system skip to the next trunk if dial tone is not detected?
Yes
In 0921:3, enter 1.
In 0901:11, enter 1. Be sure this doesn't conflict with the site requirement for directly accessed trunks.
Drop
If dial tone is not detected, should trunk hang (not disconnect) or drop?
Hang In 0901:11, enter 0. Be sure this doesn't conflict with the site requirement for directly accessed trunks.
Does the system wait the correct interval before dropping/ disconnecting when there is no dial tone?
No
Yes
If required, use program 0116:11-32 to set the criteria for dial tone detection.
(384i Only) In 0303, be sure at least one DSTU block is reserved for dial tone detection (type 4).
Stop
228 FEATURES
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect) Trunk hangs (does not disconnect) Trunk drops Trunk drops Trunk hangs (does not disconnect) Trunk reroutes after timeout Trunk drops Trunk reroutes after timeout
0 0 1 1
0116 - Tone Detection Setup Use Items 11-32 to set the criteria for dial tone detection. (384i Only) 0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Circuit Setup If dial tone detection is enabled, be sure to allocate at least one CDTU block for dial tone detection (type 4). 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 60, Dial Tone Detection Timer If dial tone detection is enabled, the system will wait this interval for the telco to return dial tone. When this interval expires, the system assumes dial tone is not present. To disable this timer (and have the system wait continuously), enter 0. 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 11, Dial Tone Detection for Directly Accessed Trunks Enable(1) or disable (0) dial tone detection for manually dialed trunk calls. This option only pertains to calls placed using line keys or Direct Trunk Access. 0921 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part B), Item 3: Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone If enabled, the system will skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option pertains to calls placed using Loop Keys, Abbreviated Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or Save Number Dialed. It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls.
Related Features
See Description above.
Operation
Dial Tone Detection is automatic if enabled in programming.
FEATURES 229
Description
124i Available Four DID Translation Tables with 200 entries each. Prior to Base 1.2R, Wink Start Dial Pulse DID operation was unavailable. Intercept routing to Voice Mail requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. DTMF DID requires a Tone Detector (DTDU) PCB. Tone Detection Setup requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Enhanced Answer Supervision requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. See page 844. DID Routing Through the VAU Automated Attendant requires Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Routing by trunk to a specific VAU message requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.. Intercept routing to the VAU Automated Attendant requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Available eight DID Translation Tables with 1500 entries each.
Intercept routing to Voice Mail requires system software 3.02 or higher. Tone Detection Setup requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Enhanced Answer Supervision requires system software 3.05.15 or higher. See page 844. DID Routing Through the VAU Automated Attendant requires system software 3.06.16 or higher. Limited capabilities available with 3.06.09. Routing by trunk to a specific VAU message requires system software 3.07.10 or higher. Intercept routing to the VAU Automated Attendant requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lets outside callers directly dial system extensions. DID saves time for callers who know the extension number they wish to reach. To place a DID call, the outside caller dials the local exchange (NNX) and additional digits to ring the telephone system extension. For example, DID number 926-5400 can directly dial extension 400. The caller does not have to rely on attendant or secretary call screening to complete the call. Note: Direct Inward Dialing requires DID service from telco.
In addition to direct dialing of system extensions, DID provides: DID Dialed Number Translation Flexible DID Service Compatibility DID Intercept DID Camp-On
DID Dialed Number Translation DID allows eight different tables for DID number translation. This gives you more flexibility when buying DID service from telco. If you cant buy the exact block of numbers you need (e.g., 301-556), use the translation tables to convert the digits received. For example, a translation table could convert digits 501-756 to extension numbers 301-556. The 384i system has 1500 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among the eight DID Translation Tables. There is one translation made in each entry. For a simple installation, you can put all 1500 entries in the same table. For more flexibility, you can optionally distribute the 1500 entries among the eight tables. The 124i system has 200 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among four DID Translation Tables. There is one translation made in each entry. Just as in 384i, in a simple installation you can put all 200 entries in the same table. Or, you can distribute the 200 entries among the four tables. In addition to number conversion, each DID Translation Table entry can have a name assigned to it. When the DID call rings the destination extension, the programmed name displays. 230 FEATURES 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Busy Intercept Busy Intercept determines DID routing when a DID caller dials a busy extension. If Busy Intercept is enabled, the call immediately routes to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. If Busy Intercept is disabled, the call follows DID Camp-On programming (see below). Ring-No-Answer Intercept Ring-No-Answer Intercept sets the routing options for DID calls that ring unanswered at the destination extension. With Ring-No-Answer Intercept enabled, the unanswered call reroutes to the DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail after the DID Ring-No-Answer Time interval. If Ring-No-Answer Intercept is disabled, the unanswered call rings the destination until the outside caller hangs up.
DID Camp-On DID Camp-On sets what happens to DID calls to busy extensions when you have Busy Intercept disabled. With DID Camp-On enabled, a call to a busy extension camps-on for the DID Ring No Answer Time interval. It then diverts to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. Without DID Camp-On, the caller to the busy extension just hears busy tone. DID Routing Through the VAU Automated Attendant DID calls can optionally route through the Automated Attendant. The DID caller hears an initial Automated Attendant Greeting explaining their dialing options. If the caller misdials, they can hear a second greeting with additional instructions. For example, the first Automated Attendant Greeting can be, "Thank you for calling. Please dial the extension number you wish to reach or dial 0 for the operator." If the caller inadvertently dials an extension that doesnt exist, they could hear, "The extension you dialed is unavailable. Please dial 0 for assistance or dial # to leave a message so we can call you back." You assign Automated Attendant greetings (i.e., VAU Messages) to the numbers in each Translation Table. This provides you with extensive flexibility when determining which greetings the system should play for which dialed numbers. You could, for example, set up 926 5401 through 926 5449 to route to extensions 301-349, and have 926 5450 route to the automated attendant. Federal Communications Commission DID Requirements Allowing this equipment to operate in a manner that does not provide proper answer supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules. This equipment returns answer supervision to the Public Switched Telephone Network when the DID trunk is: Answered by the called station Answered by the attendant Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user Routed to a dial prompt
FEATURES 231
232 FEATURES
In 0905, assign each unique type of DID trunk to its own trunk group. Enter data in worksheet page 1.
No
Yes
In 0905, assign all DID trunks to the same group. Enter data in worksheet page 1.
In 0901 Item 27, enter 0 for Dial Pulse. Enter data in worksheet page 1.
DP
DTMF
In 0901 item 27, enter 1 for DTMF. Enter data in worksheet page 1.
In 0132, make sure the DID Trunk Timers are compatible with the local telco.
(384i Only) In 0303, reserve at least one DTU block for DTMF reception (type 2).
Immed.
Wink
In 0901 Items 14-17, enter trunk service type for each Night Service mode. Enter data in worksheet page 1.
No
Yes
In 0901 Item 14-17, enter 3 for each Night Service mode. Enter data in worksheet page 1.
For example, a trunk can be a DID trunk (type 3) in the day and a normal (type 0) trunk at night. Should DID ring extension's function key or line appearance?
In 1006, make sure the DID trunk doesn't appear as a line key.
Line Appearance
Function Key
In 1006, assign a function key as a line or loop key for the DID.
FEATURES 233
No
Yes
In 1808, assign each DID trunk group to a different Translation Table (1-8). Enter the data on worksheet page 2.
For each Translation Table, set the number of digits the DID service provides. Enter the data on worksheet page 2 (one entry per table).
In 1808, assign the DID trunk group to Translation Table 1. Enter the data in worksheet page 2.
Determine how many Translation Table entries you need for each table.
Yes
No
Determine how may Translation Table entries you need for Table 1.
Allocate Translation Table entries to each Translation Table. On worksheet page 2, use "Table No. Entry" to record the entry number, and "Address No." for the entry's corresponding address.
Enter the data from worksheet page 2 into 1805 and 1807.
Allocate Translation Table entries to Translation Table 1. On worksheet page 2, use "Table No. Entry" to record the entry number, and "Address No." for the entry's corresponding address.
For each Translation Table Entry on worksheet page 2, use 1806 to enter data in the "Digits Received", "Digits Dialed" and "Name" fields.
234 FEATURES
Do you want DID Intercept? Yes Should the intercept destination be a Ring Group, the VAU Automated Attendant or Voice Mail?
No
Stop
Ring Group
Determine which extension Ring Group you want for DID Intercept. Set up Ring Groups in 0909 and 0910.
Voice Mail In 1809, assign 128 (384i) or 16 (124i) to each Translation Table. In 1809, assign an extension Ring Group to each Translation Table.
In 2205, enter the VAU message number that should play for each trunk.
In 1810:1, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 1810:1, enter 1.
In 0405:10, set the Intercom Interdigit Time (for DID callers that fail to dial).
In 1810:2, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 1810:2, enter 1.
In 1810:3, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 1810:3, enter 1.
No
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 235
Start
Stop
No
Yes Optionally, you can enter 127 in the TRF field to have the call route to the VAU message defined in Program 2205. If you do, skip the rest of this chart. In 1806 for the DID number dialed, enter 882 in the TRF entry.
After entering 882 above, enter the number of the VAU message (01-16) the caller should hear when the Automated Attendant answers (e.g., 882 02 ).
This message could be similar to your main company greeting. Callers can dial Automated Attendant options after hearing this message.
Enter the same VAU message number as you entered above (e.g., 88202 02 ).
No
Should callers hear a unique VAU message if they misdial after the Automated Attendant answers?
Yes
Enter the number of the VAU message (01-16) that has the unique message (e.g., 88202 03 ).
Normally, you should let callers dial additional Automated Attendant options after hearing this message.
Stop
236 FEATURES
FEATURES 237
Related Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA also allows outside callers to dial system extensions directly. Off Hook Signaling The Off Hook Signaling Enhancemetns provide DID calls with additional Off Hook Signaling options. Refer to this feature for the specifics. Programmable Function Keys To simplify answering DID calls, assign function keys as line keys for the DID trunks.
Operation
DID calls ring extensions like normal trunk calls.
238 FEATURES
Trunk Service Type Option Program No. Entry Range 1-128 Trunk Number Trunk Group 0905 1-128 Signaling Type 0901-27 DP=0 DTMF=1 0 0 0 Start Type 2301 Immed.=0 Wink=1 1 1 1 Day 0901-14 Normal=0 DISA=2 DID=3 3 3 3 Night 0901-15 Normal=0 DISA=2 DID=3 0 0 0 Midnight 0901-16 Normal=0 DISA=2 DID=3 0 0 0 Rest 0901-17 Normal=0 DISA=2 DID=3 3 3 3
Sample Entries
1 2 3
2 2 2
Your Entries
FEATURES 239
Your Entries
Make one entry for each Night Service mode. 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
240 FEATURES
Description
124i Available 52 trunks, 96 extensions/virtual extensions and eight Department Groups. Department Group as DIL destination always available. DIL overflow to Voice Mail requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. DIL overflow to the VAU Automated Attendant is not available. 384i Available 128 trunks, 384 extensions/virtual extensions and 32 Department Groups. Department Group as DIL destination requires system software 3.04 or higher. DIL overflow to Voice Mail requires system software 3.05.15 or higher. DIL overflow to the VAU Automated Attendant requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a trunk that rings an extension, virtual extension or Department Group directly. Since DILs only ring one extension or group (i.e., the DIL destination), employees always know which calls are for them. For example, a company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for International Sales Information. When outside callers dial the DILs phone number, the call rings the operator on the International Sales line key. The DIL does not ring other extensions. DIL Delayed Ringing Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for another extensions DIL. If the DIL is not answered at its original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group. This could help a Technical Service department, for example, that covers calls for an Inside Sales department. If the Inside Sales calls are not answered, they ring into the Technical Service department. Conditions (A.) If unanswered, a DIL without delayed ringing rings an extension until the outside party hangs up. The DIL does not automatically reroute. (B.) If a DIL rings a Department Group and all agents are busy, the system routes the call as follows: 1. The trunk rings the overflow destination assigned in 0919. 2. If there is no 0919 assignment, the trunks rings the PC Attendant Console (if installed). 3. If there is 0919 assignment or PC Attendant, the call rings according to the Ring Group assignments in 0909 and 0910. 4. If none of the destinations in steps 1-3 above are available, the call continues to ring until a destination becomes free. Default Setting Disabled.
FEATURES 241
Stop
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
If a DIL rings too long, does it route to the overflow destination after the proper interval?
No
Yes
Voice Mail
Should the DIL overflow destination be a Ring Group, Voice Mail or the VAU Automated Attendant?
Ring Group
VAU
In 0909, assign the extensions that should receive the overflow to the Ring Group programmed in 0919. Enter 1 to enable ringing.
Stop
242 FEATURES
Related Features
Call Forwarding Call Forwarding does not reroute DILs. If an extension forwards their trunk calls, the trunk rings according to Ring Group programming. Central Office Calls, Placing You can place DILs in trunk groups to make outgoing DIL calls easier. Department Calling A DIL cannot have an Extension (Department) Group as its destination. Do Not Disturb If an DILs destination extension is in DND, an incoming call rings according to Ring Group programming. Group Call Pickup A user can activate Group Call Pickup to intercept a DIL ringing another extension. Name Storing Program a name for a DIL. This makes it easier to identify the incoming call. Private Line To simulate Private Line operation, create a unique Access Map for the DIL that allows full access only for the destination. Give all other extensions only Hold access Off Hook Signaling If a keysets first channel is busy, a DIL always signals the idle second channel if available. If the second channel already has a call waiting, DIL waits in line for a channel to become free. The outside caller hears ringback tone while this occurs. Programmable Function Keys If an extension has a line key for a DIL, the call will ring the key. If not, the call rings an available line appearance. For other extensions, the DIL indicates as busy. Ring Groups A DIL will ring its assigned extension without Ring Group programming. A DIL only rings its assigned extension. If will not ring other extensions in a Ring Group. 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0 FEATURES 243
244 FEATURES
Description
124i Available 15 users, 8 DISA Classes of Service and 52 trunks. Requires DTDU PCB for DTMF DISA trunks. Enhanced Answer Supervision requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. See page 844. Oveflow routing to Voice Mail requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Tone Detection Setup and setting the CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Overflow routing to the VAU Automated Attendant is not available. 384i Available 15 users per Tenant Group, 15 DISA Classes of Service and 128 trunks. Requires DTMF receivers on CDTU PCB for DTMF DISA trunks. Enhanced Answer Supervision requires system software 3.05.15. See page 844. Overflow routing to Voice Mail is avaiable. Tone Detection Setup and setting the CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels requires system software 3.04 or higher. Overflow routing to the VAU Automated Attendant requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
DISA permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions, trunks and selected features. This could help an employee away from the office that wants to directly dial co-workers or use the companys trunks for long distance calls. To use DISA, the employee: Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk Waits for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone Dials the 6-digit DISA password (access code) Waits for a second unique dial tone Accesses a system trunk, uses a selected feature or dials a system extension DISA calls ring system extensions like other outside calls. If an extension has a line key for the DISA trunk, the call rings that key. If the extension does not have a line key, the call rings an idle CALL key. You can set DISA operation differently for each Night Service mode. For example, a trunk can be a normal trunk during the day and a DISA trunk at night. You can also set the routing for DISA trunks when the caller dials a busy or unanswered extension, dials incorrectly or forgets to dial. DISA Class of Service DISA Class of Service provides features and dialing restrictions for DISA callers. This allows you to control the capabilities of the DISA callers dialing into your system. When a DISA caller first accesses the system, they must enter a DISA password before proceeding. The system associates the password entered with a specific user number, which in turn has a Class of Service. If the Class of Service allows the action (such as making outgoing trunk calls), the call goes through. If the DISA Class of Service doesnt allow the action, the system prevents the call. The DISA Class of Service options are:
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access When a DISA caller dials into the system, they may be able to dial 9 and place outside calls. Any toll charges are incurred by the system. The call follows the systems Trunk Group Access or Automatic Route Selection - whichever is enabled.
FEATURES 245
Trunk Group Access DISA callers may be able to access a specific trunk group for outgoing calls through the system. To access a Trunk Group, the user dials Service Code 804 followed by the Trunk Group number (e.g., 1). This allows the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected group. Trunk Group Access bypasses the systems Trunk Group Routing/ARS. As with dial 9 access, any toll charges are incurred by the system. Also see Direct Trunk Access below. Common Abbreviated Dialing The systems Common Abbreviated Dialing bins may be available to DISA callers. This could save the DISA caller time when dialing. Operator Calling A DISA caller may be able to dial 0 for the systems operator. Paging Internal and External Paging may be available to DISA callers. This allows co-workers in adjacent facilities, for example, to broadcast announcements to each other. Direct Trunk Access DISA callers may be able to select a specific trunk for outgoing calls through the system. To directly access a trunk, the user dials Service Code #9 followed by the trunks number (e.g., 001). This allows the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected trunk. Direct Trunk Access bypasses the systems Trunk Group Routing/ARS. As with dial 9 access, any toll charges are incurred by the system. Also see Trunk Group Access above.
DISA Toll Restriction The digits a DISA caller dials for an outgoing call may be subject to the systems Toll Restriction. For example, Toll Restriction can prevent users from dialing a 1-900 service. When an incoming DISA caller tries to use system trunks to dial 1-900, Toll Restriction will deny the call. DISA Operating Modes The DISA Operating Modes determine what happens when a DISA caller forgets to dial, calls a busy or unanswered extension or dials incorrectly. The system can either drop the call or send it to a preset Ring Group (called a the DISA Transfer Destination). Department Calling with Overflow Message If a DISA caller dials a busy Department Calling Group, the system can periodically play the voice prompt, "Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes free." while the caller waits. The interval between the voice prompts is the DISA Overflow Message Time. When an extension in the Department Group becomes available, the call automatically goes through. If the Department Calling Group remains busy past the DISA No Answer time (see the flow chart on page 251), the DISA call routes to the overflow destination or disconnects. (What happens to the unanswered call is set by the DISA Operating Mode). The Overflow Message requires a Voice Announce Unit. Conditions The DISA caller must use a 2500 type (DTMF) telephone. DISA is compatible with calling devices that meet the DTMF signaling requirements of EIA Specification RS-464. DISA trunks must be ground start or supervised loop start. Default Setting Disabled.
246 FEATURES
(384i Only) In 0303, reserve at least one CDTU block for DTMF reception (entry 2).
Each Tenant Group in 384i and each 124i system can have up to 15 users. There is one DISA Class of Service and one password per user.
In 0901:14-17, set the circuit type for DISA trunks (type 2).
If DISA callers should be able to place outgoing calls through the system, enable loop supervision in 0901:31 for outgoing trunks and the DISA trunks.
In 1801, set up the 6digit DISA password and Class of Service for each user.
Disconnect
Transfer
In 1802:1-3, enter 1 for each trunk that should transfer. Each trunk may be programmed differently. Item 1 = Timeout Item 2 = RNA/busy Item 3 = Mistake in dialing
Does system play busy tone for an adequate interval before disconnecting caller?
Should Transfer destination be a Ring Group, Voice Mail or VAU Automated Attendant?
Ring group
No Voice Mail In 0414:3, change the DISA Busy Tone Interval. Yes
In 0909, assign extensions to the ring group programmed in 1803 that should receive DISA transfers.
No
Should DISA caller's Class of Service allow dialing 9 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS?
Yes
In 1811, set the Trunk Group Route the DISA caller accesses when they dial 9.
FEATURES 247
In 0412 Item 3, enter 0 to prevent dialing trunks via Service Code 805.
No
Should DISA caller's Class of Service allow dialing Service Code 804 and a Trunk Group for outside calls?
Yes
In 0412 Item 3, enter 1 to allow dialing trunks via Service Code 805.
In 0412 Item 4, enter 0 to prevent DISA caller from using Common Abbreviated Dialing.
No
Should DISA caller's Class of Service allow use of Common Abbreviated Dialing?
Yes
In 0412 Item 4, enter 1 to allow DISA caller to use Common Abbreviated Dialing.
In 0412 Item 5, enter 0 to prevent DISA caller from dialing telephone system operator.
No
Should DISA caller's Class of Service allow caller to dial telephone system operator?
Yes
In 0412 Item 5, enter 1 to allow DISA caller to dial telephone system operator.
In 0412 Item 6, enter 0 to prevent DISA caller from using Internal Page.
No
Should DISA caller's Class of Service allow caller to use Internal Page?
Yes
In 0412 Item 7, enter 0 to prevent DISA caller from using External Page.
No
Should DISA caller's Class of Service allow caller to use External Page?
Yes
248 FEATURES
No
Should DISA caller's Class of Service allow dialing #9 to select a specific trunk for an outside call?
Yes
Should the system Toll Restrict calls the DISA caller places over system trunks?
Yes
In 1812, enter a Toll Restriction Class (1-15 in 384i, 1-8 in 124i) for each DISA user (1-15).
No
After the system answers, does DISA caller have adequate time to dial their number?
No
Yes
Check the settings of: 0405:17 - DTMF Receiver Active Time 0405:34 - DISA Dial Tone Time
FEATURES 249
When DISA caller rings an extension, does the system ring for an adequate time before setting the call as Ring No Answer?
No
Yes
When DISA caller makes an Internal Page, does the system allow the Page to continue for an adequate duration?
No
Yes
When DISA caller makes an External Page, does the system allow the Page to continue for an adequate duration?
No
Yes
In 0116, check the criteria for DTMF tones for compatibility with the telco.
No
For each DISA trunk, in 0901 Item 3 set the CODEC Gain Type.
Yes
If required, in 0117 change the transmit and receive levels for the CODEC Gain Types.
250 FEATURES
DISA Call rings in, caller dials DISA password and destination Department Calling Group.
Is an extension in the dialed Department Calling Group available? No System plays ringback to caller and starts DISA Overflow Message Timer (0414 Item 4).
Yes
Yes
No
Has DISA Overflow Message Timer (0414 Item 4) expired? Stop Yes
No
Yes
FEATURES 251
252 FEATURES
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection In a system with ARS enabled: When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call (if allowed), the system routes the call via ARS. In a system with ARS disabled: When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call (if allowed), the system uses the routes programmed for Trunk Group Routing. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Direct Inward Dialing also allows outside callers to directly access system extensions. Voice Announce Unit Department Calling with Overflow Message requires a VAU Module.
FEATURES 253
254 FEATURES
Description
124i Available Eight consoles maximum (two maximum per extension). Storing additional digits after a Service Code requires system software Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. DSS Console flash rates may be customized in Base 4.02 or EXCPRU 4.20 or higher. 384i Available 32 consoles maximum (four maximum per extension. Storing additional digits after a Service Code requires system software 3.06/14 or higher. DSS Console flash rates may be customized in system software 3.07.14 or higher.
The DSS Console (P/N 92255) gives a keyset user a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) and one-button access to extensions, trunks and system features. This saves time for users that do a lot of call processing (e.g., operators or dispatchers). The DSS Console simplifies: Calling extensions and Door Boxes Placing, answering and transferring outside calls Making an External or Internal Page Switching the Night Service mode Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer The DSS Console also provides DSS Console Alternate Answer. This lets a keyset user with a DSS Console quickly reroute their calls to a co-worker. When the user places their console off-duty (by pressing the ALT. key), their calls route automatically to the programmed co-worker.
0 11 6
You can also program the DSS Console keys to store Service Codes and Programmable Feature Key codes (up to four digits long). This provides the DSS Console user with many of the features available on One-Touch and Programmable Feature Keys. The DSS Console keys can optionally store additional associated digits after the Service Code. For example, storing 8041 under a DSS Console key accesses Trunk Group 1 when the console user presses the key. The system allows a specific number of extensions to have DSS Consoles. These are called the DSS Console Installations. In 384i, each installation can have up to four consoles. In 124i, each installation can have up to two consoles. (These are termed the DSS Console Connections.) The maximum number of DSS Consoles allowed in 384i is 32 (8 console installations x 4 consoles maximum per extension). The maximum allowed in 124i is eight (4 console installations x 2 consoles maximum per extension). Refer to the chart below. If an extension has more than one DSS Console, each additional console requires a separate power supply.
DSS Console Capacities System 384i 124i Console Installations Max. per Extension
8 4
4 2
FEATURES 255
92
00
256 FEATURES
Start
DSS number corresponds to console installation number. There are eight installations - with up to three consoles connected at each installation.
In 1102, select DSS Console range 1-3. (Skip to next step in 124i.)
Extensions
Trunks
Do you want to customize the DSS Console's keys for extensions? Yes In 1103, enter extension, Service Code or function.
No
No
Do you want to customize the DSS Console's keys for trunks? Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
FEATURES 257
Yes
Yes
Refer to Paging, External and Paging, Internal features for programming details.
Yes
No
Stop
258 FEATURES
1 1 0 0
0406 - COS Options, Item 28: DSS Console Alternate Answer In an extensions COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extensions ability to use DSS Console Alternate Answer. 1005 - Class of Service Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions. 1101 - DSS Console Extension Assignment Designate the DSS Console installations (i.e., the extensions that have DSS Consoles connected to them). (384i Only) 1102 - DSS Console Key Range For each connection at each console installation, designate the range of the DSS Consoles keys: 1 (extension ports 1-200), 2 (extension ports 201-400), 3 (extension ports 401-600) or 4 (DLS). 1103 - DSS Console Key Assignment Customize DSS Console keys to function as DSS keys, function keys and Service Code keys. 1104 - DSS Console Alternate Answering If the console should have Alternate Answering, use this program to assign the Alternate Answering Destination. 1106 - Direct Line Selection If a DSS Console has program 1102 set for option 4 (DLS), use this program to assign trunks to DSS Console keys. 1107 - DSS Lamp Table If required, use this program to customize the DSS Console flash rates. Also see the chart on page 55.
FEATURES 259
260 FEATURES
Placing a trunk call from your DSS Console: 1. (124i Only) Press EXT.2. 2. Press DSS Console key assigned to trunk. 3. Dial outside number. If you dont have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.
Trunk Busy Lamp Field
Answering a trunk call from your DSS Console: 1. Press flashing DSS Console key assigned to trunk. If you dont have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.
Calling a Door Box from your DSS Console: 1. Press DOOR. 2. Press DSS Console key for Door Box you want to call (1-8). If you dont have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to talk to the Door Box.
Door Box Busy Lamp Field
FEATURES 261
Making an Internal Page using your DSS Console: 1. Press GROUP. 2. Press DSS Console Internal Page zone key (Group key 1-32). If the zone you want is busy, try again later. If you dont have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.
Switching the Night Service mode from your DSS Console: 1. Press Night Service key (NIGHT, DAY, BREAK or NITE 2).
Night Service Busy Lamp Field
The system is in the... Night Mode Day Mode Rest Mode Midnight Mode
262 FEATURES
Using a DSS Console key as a One-Touch or Programmable Function Key: You can store Service codes, Programmable Function Key codes and other digits under DSS Console keys. The stored code can not be longer than four digits. 1. Press DSS Console key for function. For example, you can Forward your calls by pressing CALL + DSS Key + 1 + destination. Your DSS key must have been previously programmed for the Call Forward feature.
FEATURES 263
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Directed Call Pickup permits an extension user to intercept a call ringing another extension. This allows a user to conveniently answer a co-workers call from their own telephone. With Directed Call Pickup, an extension user can pick up: Trunk calls (i.e., Ring Group calls) Direct Inward Lines Transferred trunk calls Transferred Intercom calls Ringing and voice-announced Intercom calls Conditions (A.) Directed Call Pickup does not pick up calls recalling an extension (such as Hold and Transfer recalls). (B.) An extension can use Directed Call Pickup to intercept calls to which it is denied access in Programs 0911 and 0912. Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
None
Related Features
For other features which let you cover a co-workers calls, refer to: Department Calling Group Call Pickup Hotline Multiple Directory Numbers Secretary Call Pickup Voice Mail Voice Mail Park and Page also uses the Directed Call Pickup code.
Operation
To use Directed Call Pickup to intercept a call to a co-workers extension: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line set, lift handset. 2. Dial **. 3. Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept. If more than one call is coming in, the system sets the priority for which call it will answer first.
264 FEATURES
Description
124i Not available. Requires Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available. Requires system software 3.06.02 or higher.
Directory Dialing allows a display or Super Display keyset user to select a co-worker or outside call from a list of names, rather than dialing the phone number. There are four types of Directory Dialing: C - Company (Common) Abbreviated Dialing D - Department (Group) Abbreviated Dialing P - Personal Abbreviated Dialing (One-Touch) Keys X - Co-workers extensions Conditions (A.) Directory Dialing sorts directory names in alphabetical order (based on the first four characters of the name) when the system starts up or reboots. In addition, the system will re-sort extension names when: You change Program 1002 (Extension Tenant). You change Program 0502 (Extension Numbers and Names). Any user dials 800 and changes their extensions name. (B.) Directory Dialing follows all the programmed options and conditions for Abbreviated Dialing, Intercom Calling and One-Touch Calling. Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Start
No
Yes
When the user waits between Directory Dialing steps, does Directory Dialing cancel at the proper time? Yes
No
In 0405 Item 10, change the Interdigit Time to meet the system's requirements.
Stop
FEATURES 265
Related Features
None
Operation
To use Directory Dialing from a display keyset: 1. Do not lift handset or press SPK. 2. Dial 3. OR Press Directory Dialing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1082). OR Press DIRECTORY (Super Display only). If you wait too long between your selections, Directory Dialing automatically cancels. 3. Dial type of Directory Dialing from the table below.
Pressing this key . . . 2 3 7 9 C D P X Selects Directory Dialing for . . .
Company (Common) Abbreviated Dialing Department (Group) Abbreviated Dialing Personal Abbreviated Dialing (One-Touch ) Keys Extensions
4.
5.
6.
Directory Dialing follows any feature restrictions that your system may have enabled. For example, if your extension cannot normally use Common Abbreviated Dialing, Directory Dialing cant access it either. If you dial 7 from a Super Display keyset, your One-Touch Key names will display. Pressing L or M scrolls through the names in key number order (not alphabetically). Dial the first letter/number for the name/number you want to call. For example, dial 2 if the name begins with A, B, C or 2. If the name begins with Q or Z, dial 0. Look at your phones display and dial the digit for the letter/number selected in step 4 above. For example, if you dialed 2 in step four, youll see: 1=A 2=B 3=C 4=2. Youll want to dial 1 to select the letter A, 2 to select B and so on. The first name/number that begins with your selection displays. If you see, "UNLISTED NAME," there is no name stored for your selection. If you have a Super Display keyset, the first 10 numbers that match your selection will display. To see the next 10 matches, press [SCROLL]. To see the previous 10 matches, press [->]. Press VOLUME L or M to scroll through all the names/numbers that begin with that letter/number. OR Lift handset or press DIAL, CALL1 or SPK to place the selected call. If you selected an outside call, the call will route according to your systems Trunk Group Routing/ARS setup. 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
266 FEATURES
FEATURES 267
Description
124i Available. Customizing the Keyset Splash Tone, Keyset Confirmation Tone, Trunk Ring Tone, Intercom Ring Tone and Alarm Ring Tone requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available. Customizing the Keyset Splash Tone, Keyset Confirmation Tone, Trunk Ring Tone, Intercom Ring Tone and Alarm Ring Tone requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns provide extension users with audible and visual call status signals. This lets users tell the types of calls by listening to the ringing/tones and watching the keys. It also helps users monitor the progress of their calls. In addition, Distinctive Ringing lets keyset users customize their Intercom and trunk call ringing. This is helpful for users that work together closely. For example, if several co-workers set their keysets to ring at different pitches, the co-workers can always tell which calls are for them. Refer to the following tables at the beginning of this section: Table 1-7 System Tones Table 1-9 System Ring Rates Table 1-10 System Flash Rates You can also customize the tones the system uses for splash tone, confirmation tone, trunk ring tone, Intercom ring tone and Alarm ring tone. Refer to the chart below and the Programming section for more details.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns Program Description
Set the frequency of the systems splash tone. This is the tone the system uses, for example, to alert the user of an incoming voice-announced Intercom call. Set the frequency and duration of the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone. When an extension user enables Dial Pad Confirmation Tone (Service Code 824), they hear this tone each time they press a key. Set the trunk ring tones, which are the tones a user hears when a trunk rings an extension. Set the Intercom and the External Alarm Sensor ring tones.
0111 - Trunk Ring Tone 0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
268 FEATURES
No
Yes
In 0902, select the ring tone range for each trunk. Use 0111 to customize these ranges.
In 1001 Item 2, select the trunk ring tone for each keyset extension.
In 1001 Item 3, select the Intercom ring tone for each keyset extension. Use 0112 to customize the Intercom (and Alarm) Ring Tone. Yes Do you want to change the way Intercom calls ring extensions? No
In 1001 Item 6, select the ring cycle for each 500/2500 set. These settings affect both Intercom and trunk call ringing. In 1008, set the incoming call ring cycle for keyset extensions.
Should keyset users be able to change or check the incoming ring tones? No In 0109, select a new keyset splash tone frequency. Yes (384i Only) Do you want to change the frequency of the keyset splash tone? No
Yes
In 0110, select a new frequency and duration for the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone.
Yes
(384i Ony) Do you wnat to change the frequency and duration of the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone? No Stop
FEATURES 269
Related Features
Single Line Telephones Single line telephone users cannot listen to or change the pitch of their phones incoming ring. .
270 FEATURES
FEATURES 271
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Do Not Disturb blocks incoming calls and Paging announcements. DND permits an extension user to work by the phone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements. The user can activate DND while their phone is idle or while on a call. Once activated, incoming trunk calls still flash the line keys. The user may use the phone in the normal manner for placing and processing calls. There are five Do Not Disturb options available at each extension: 1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked 2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked 3 = All calls blocked 4 = Incoming Call Forwards blocked 0 = Do Not Disturbed canceled Conditions None Default Setting Enabled for all extensions except the attendant.
Programming
Start
No
Yes
No
Yes
Stop
Process
272 FEATURES
Related Features
Call Forwarding If an extension user activates DND option 4, the system prevents other extensions from forwarding calls to them. If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND option 4, callers to the forwarded extension hear DND tone. Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension.
Operation
To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while your extension is idle: Keyset 1. Do not lift the handset. 2. Press DND key. OR Press idle CALL key and dial 847. If you wait longer than 10 seconds before going to the next step, the system automatically enables option 3 below. If you have already enabled DND, waiting more than 10 seconds before the next step automatically cancels DND. Dial the DND option code 0 = Cancel DND 1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked 2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked 3 = All calls blocked 4 = Call Forwards blocked Single Line Telephone Lift handset. Dial 847. Dial the DND option code 0 = Cancel DND 1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked 2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked 3 = All calls blocked 4 = Call Forwards blocked
3.
1. 2. 3.
FEATURES 273
274 FEATURES
Description
124i Available eight Door Boxes and one Chime Tone. 384i Available eight Door Boxes and three Chime Tones.
The Door Box is a self-contained Intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance door. A visitor at the door can press the Door Box call button (like a door bell). The Door Box then sends chime tones to all extensions programmed to receive chimes. To answer the chime, the called extension user just lifts the handset. This lets the extension user talk to the visitor at the Door Box. The Door Box is convenient to have at a delivery entrance, for example. It is not necessary to have company personnel monitor the delivery entrance; they just answer the Door Box chimes instead. Any number of system extensions can receive Door Box chime tones. Each Door Box has a pair of normally open relay contacts that can connect to an electric door strike. Use these contacts to remotely control the entrance door. After answering the Door Box chimes, a keyset user can press FLASH to activate the Door Box contacts. This in turn releases the electric strike on the entrance door. The device connected to the Door Box contacts cannot exceed the contact ratings shown in the table below:
FEATURES 275
No
Yes
In 1502, select the station port you want to have not ring and enter 0.
No
Should extensions ring when Door Box user presses call button?
Yes
In 1502, select the station port you want to have ring and enter 1.
(Skip this decision for 124i) Do you want to change the Door Box chime patterns?
Yes
In 1503, select the chime pattern (1-3) for each Door Box.
No Is the Door Box caller's voice at a normal level? In 0120, assign a Door Box gain type that either decreases or increases the volume.
No
Yes
Once a Door Box starts ringing an extension, does user have adequate time to answer?
No
Yes If the Door Box chimes stop before users can answer them, consider extending the Door Box Answer Time.
In 0405 Item 59, change the Door Lock Cancel Time interval.
No
When single ine (2500 type) user hookflashes or keyset user presses the Flash key, does it release the Door Box strike for the proper amount of time?
Yes Stop
276 FEATURES
Related Features
Paging, External If a PGDU PCB has a Door Box connected, you cannot use that port for External Paging.
Operation
To call a Door Box: Keyset 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 802. 3. Dial Door Box Number (1-8). Single Line 2500 Type 1. Lift handset. 2. Dial 802. 3. Dial Door Box Number (1-8). To activate the Door Box strike: Keyset 1. While talking to the Door Box, press the Flash key. Single Line 2500 Type 1. While talking to the Door Box, hookflash. To answer a Door Box chime: 1. Lift handset.
FEATURES 277
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Each keyset has two line appearance keys (CALL1 and CALL2) for placing and answering calls. These line appearance keys, assigned to the extensions number, simplify operations for busy users. For example, the user can easily process a new call on one appearance with a call in progress on the other. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
None
Related Features
Off Hook Signaling Off Hook Signaling rings an extensions second line appearance when the first appearance is busy.
Operation
None
278 FEATURES
Description
124i Available Requires system software Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Available Requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
E911 Compatibility ensures that emergency calls always get through. If an emergency occurs, a user simply goes to any phone, lifts the handset and dials 911. The systems built-in E911 compatibility places the emergency call even if the user forgets to dial an access code or press a line key. The E911 capabilities include:
Attendant Notification The attendant receives a notification each time a co-worker dials an emergency 911 call. This notification is the co-workers name and number display optionally accompanied by an audible alarm. Notification occurs regardless of whether the attendant is idle or busy on a call. You can optionally extend this capability to other supervisory extensions as well. Emergency Routing When an extension user dials 911, the system can automatically find a trunk for the call. The system can choose a route to which the user normally does not have access. If all normal routes are busy, the system can even disconnect an active call and place the emergency call. E911 Compatibility uses the flexibility of the Automatic Route Selection Call Route Options to route 911 emergency calls (even in systems in which ARS is not enabled). Compatibility with Customer Provided E911 Equipment The system can automatically send a 911 call to customer-provided E911 equipment (such as the Proctor 911 ANI-LINK System II). The E911 equpment will intercept the call, dial emergency service and provide the callers extension number to the emergency personnel.
FEATURES 279
in 0419:8, enter 0.
No
When a user dials 911, should the attendant and supervisors see the E911 alarm display (i.e., user's name and number)?
Yes
In 0419:8, enter 1.
In 0419:9, enter 0.
No
When the E911 alarm displays, should the attendant and supervisors also hear an audible alarm?
Yes
In 0419:9, enter 1.
No
Does the default alarm duration (60 seconds) meet the site requirements? Yes
When an alarm is sounding, should the user be able to dial 886 to turn it off? No In 0419:10, enter 0.
Yes
In 0419:10, enter 1.
In 0420:1, enter 0.
Yes
Should extension users have to enter a trunk access code (e.g., 9) before dialing 911?
No
In 0420:1, enter 1.
An extension user can just lift the handset and dial 911. Continued on next page.
280 FEATURES
In 0401:21, enter 1.
Yes
No
In 0401:21, enter 0.
ARS is not required for E911 service. Refer to Automatic Route Selection for additional information on setting up ARS. In 0905, put the trunks you want to use for E911 routing in the same Trunk Group (e.g., 2).
In 2108, for the Emergency Call option specify the Selection Number (e.g. 2) the system should use for E911 routing.
In 2108, choose a Dial Treatment for E911 routing (e.g., 2) and enter RE .
No
Yes
In 2108, choose a Dial Treatment for E911 routing (e.g., 2) and enter XRE .
In 2101, set up the Call Route Options Table for the E911 route as follows: - Enter the Selection Number specified in 2108 above (e.g., 2). - For each Rate Period, enter the ARS Class of Service (e.g., 27), the E911 Trunk Group (e.g., 2) and the Dial Treatment number (e.g., 2).
Stop
FEATURES 281
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 21: ARS Enable Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) ARS. E911 routing follows the routing specified in 2101 and 2108 below regardless of whether or not it is enabled in this option. For more information on Automatic Route Selection, refer to page 96. 0414 - System Timers (Part B), Item 8: E911 Alarm Ring Timer Use this option to set the duration of the E911Alarm Ring Time. If set for 0, the E911 Alarm rings for 60 seconds and then stops. 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 8, Display 911 Dialed Station Name and Number In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the the extensions ability to display the name and number of the extension that activated E911 service. If disabled (0), the E911 Alarm (set in 0419:9 below) will never occur. 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 9, E911 Alarm Ring In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extensions ability to play the Alarm Ring. This can only occur if 0419:8 above is also enabled (1). 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 10, Clear E911 Alarm Ring In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extensions ability to dial 886 to turn off the E911 alarm ring. 0420 - E911 Options, Item 1: Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access If enabled (1), extension users can dial 911 without first dialing a trunk access code or pressing a line key. This allows a user to go to any phone in an emergency, lift the handset and dial 911 for emergency service. If disabled (0), extension users must dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9) or press a line key before diaing 911. 0514 - Service Code Setup (Part B), Item 62: E911 Alarm Shut Off Select the Service Code (normally 886) that an extension user can dial to shut off the E911 Alarm Ring. 0905 - Trunk Groups Assign the outbound trunks you want to use for E911 service to the same Trunk Group (1-128). 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class of Service to an extension (1-15). 2101 - ARS Call Route Options Table Use this program to assign the call routing parameters for the Selection Number you specified in 2108 below. To make entries in this program: Enter the Selection Number you specified in 2108 below. Enter the Rate Period you want to program. There are three default Rate Periods (1-3) that corre spond to the normal work schedule. Be sure to program all three Rate Periods. See the table below for the default Rate Periods.
Rate Period1
1 2
Time/Day
Mon-Fri, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Mon-Fri, 5:00PM to 11:00 PM Sat, Sun, Holiday, 8:00 AM to 11:00 PM All days, 11 PM to 8:00 AM Not defined
3 4-8
1
Sundays and holidays use the same Rate Periods as Saturday. (Continued)
282 FEATURES
Enter the ARS Class of Service that should be able to access the E911 route you are programming. To give all extensions the ability to use the E911 route, enter 27. Enter the Trunk Group the system will use for routing E911 calls. This is the entry you made in Program 0905 above. Enter a Dial Treatment that the system will use exclusively for E911 routing. If your system doesnt use ARS, consider using Dial Treatment 2. The Dial Treatment data must must be XRE. 2107 - ARS Dial Treatments Use this option to enter the data for the ARS Dial Treatment you chose for the E911 route specified in 2101 above. The data should be XRE. If your system doesnt use ARS, consider using Dial Treatment 2. 2108 - Separate ARS Routing Options Use the Emergency Call option in this program to specify the Selection Number (1-64) the system will use for routing E911 calls. The system uses this assignment regardless of whether or not ARS is enabled. The system uses the Selection Number you choose in Program 2101 above. If your system doesnt use ARS, consider using Selection Number 2.
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection Refer to the ARS feature for more information on setting up Selection Numbers, Dial Treatments, Call Route Options and Work Periods.
Operation
To place an emergency 911 call: When Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is enabled . . . 1. Go to any phone. 2. Lift handset or press idle CALL key. 3. Dial 911. When Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is disabled . . . 1. Go to any phone. 2. Lift handset or press idle CALL key. 3. Dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9) or press a line key. 4. Dial 911.
To turn off the E911 Alarm at your telephone: 1. Lift handset or pres idle CALL key. 2. Dial 886. The alarm goes off. If the alarm does not turn off, your Class of Service prevents this option. OR (if you have a display telephone) 1. Press CLEAR once to turn of the alarm. 2. Press CLEAR again to clear the alarm display.
FEATURES 283
Description
124i Each PGDU PCB has 4 sensors, with 8 maximum per system (2 PCBs). All sensors set for alarm. Changing the Alarm Ring Tone frequencies requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Each PGDU has 8 sensors, with 16 maximum per system (2 PCBs). Sensors 1-4 and 9-12 as set for alarm. Sensors 5-8 and 13-16 set for fax. Changing the Alarm Ring Tone frequencies requires system software 3.04 or higher.
The system provides up to 16 alarm sensors that you can connect to customer-provided alarm contacts. When the alarm contact activates, designated extensions broadcast a unique alert tone. This lets the extension users know that the alarm has been activated. External Alarm Sensors could help a receptionist, for example, that frequently has to leave the reception desk to do some filing. When a visitor opens the companys door, an alarm contact on the door could signal a telephone in the filing area. When the receptionist hears the alarm alert tone, they know its time to return to the reception area and greet the visitor. The alarm alert tone continues as long as the door remains open. Conditions (A.) Each external alarm uses an alarm sensor circuit in the PGDU PCB. The PGDU alarm sensor circuit requires a 10-30 VDC power supply in series with the alarm contacts. Refer to the hardware manual for additional details. (B.) The alarm sensors in the 124i are polarity sensitive. Be sure to follow the instructions in the hardware manual when connecting alarm sensors. Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone If required, change the Alarm Ring Tone frequencies. This option requires system software 3.04 or higher. 0304 - PGDU PCB Alarm/Fax Sensor Setup For external alarm sensors, program the PGDU sensor for alarm (type 1) and alarm ring tone (1-3). 0305 - PGDU PCB Sensor Activation Mode Program each alarm sensor for normally closed (0) or normally open (1) operation. 1010 - External Alarm Extensions Determine which alarms should alert which extensions. For each sensor, enter 1 to ring extension or 0 to not ring extension.
284 FEATURES
Start Refer to the Fax Machine Compatibility feature for information on Bridged Fax Lines. In 0304, make sure PGDU sensors are type 0 (not used) or 2 (for bridged fax operation). In 0304, program PGDU sensors for type 1 (alarm).
No
Yes
In 0304 Additional Information for each sensor, assign the same alert tone to each sensor.
No
Yes
In 0304 Additional Information for each sensor, assign one of the three alert tones (1-3) to each sensor.
Normally Closed
Normally Open
In 1010, enter 0 for each sensor that should not alert extension.
No
Do you want extension to broadcast an alert tone when the alarm activates?
Yes
Yes
In 0112, change the frequencies assigned to the Alarm Ring Tone Types.
No
Stop
FEATURES 285
Operation
If you program an extension to activate for an alarm and the alarm occurs, the alarm alert tone continues at the extension until the alarm condition goes away.
286 FEATURES
Description
124i Each PGDU PCB has 4 sensors, with 8 maximum per system (2 PCBs). All sensors set for alarm. 384i Each PGDU has 8 sensors, with 16 maximum per system (2 PCBs). Sensors 1-4 and 9-12 as set for alarm. Sensors 5-8 and 13-16 set for fax.
Fax Machine Compatibility lets you integrate a customer-provided fax machine into your telephone system. You have the following options:
Transfer to Fax Transfer to Fax allows an extension user to Transfer their active voice call to a company fax machine. After the Transfer completes, the users outside caller can start their fax machine and send the fax. This would benefit a salesperson on the road, for example. The salesperson could call their secretary and give a general report - and then fax detailed figures when the conversation is over. Direct Inward Line to Fax DILs provide direct routing to fax machines installed as system extensions. Use a DIL for a "fax only" line for unattended sending and receiving of faxes. Bridged Fax Line With a Bridged Fax Line, a trunk is shared by the fax machine and the system. When a call comes in, both the system and the fax machine ring. If the fax machine answers the call, a relay closure in the fax machine (if provided) signals the system. The system then busies out the fax line to other users. Since a Bridged Fax Line is in front of the system, fax operation is not affected by a system power failure or programming.
Conditions The Bridged Fax Line feature uses a fax sensor circuit in the PGDU PCB. The PGDU fax sensor circuit requires a 10-30 VDC power supply in series with the fax machine relay contacts. Refer to the hardware manual for additional details. Default Setting Disabled.
FEATURES 287
Start
Yes
Make sure you have a circuit on an ASTU PCB or 2/OPX module for the fax machine.
System users can transfer calls to the fax machine without any additional programming.
In 0005, assign correct circuit type (type 3 for ASTU port and type 8 for OPX port).
Refer to the Direct Inward Line feature for more programming details. Should the system route specific trunks directly to the fax machine? No Yes For each trunk you want to directy route, assign the fax extension as the DIL destination.
To use this feature, the fax machine must have contacts that close when fax answers.
If fax machine bridges directly to a trunk, do you want to busy out trunk to system when trunk is in use? No
Yes
In 0304, program PGDU sensor for fax (type 2) and associate it with fax trunk.
Refer to the system hardware manual for more details. Connect fax machine alarm contacts to PGDU sensor.
Normally Closed
Normally Open
Stop
288 FEATURES
Related Features
Direct Inward Line Use DILs to route system trunks directly to fax machines installed as extensions. External Alarm Sensors External alarm sensors also use PGDU PCB sensor circuits. One-Touch Calling One-Touch Keys provide one-button transfer to fax machines installed as extensions.
Operation
To transfer a call to the fax machine: Keyset 1. Press HOLD. You hear Transfer dial tone. 2. Dial fax machine extension number. If you have Automatic On Hook Transfer and the extension you call is busy, pressing CONF (TRF) returns you to the call. If the called extension doesnt answer, you can dial another extension number or press CALL to return to the call. 3. Hang up. If you dont have Automatic On Hook Transfer, you must press CONF (TRF) to Transfer the call. Single Line Set Hookflash. Dial fax machine extension number. If the called extension doesnt answer, you can dial another extension number or hookflash to return to the call. Hang up.
1. 2.
3.
FEATURES 289
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting trunk loop current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected telco or PBX offers. You must set the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX. Conditions The system does not provide a ground flash. Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Note: See programming flow chart on the following page.
0114 - Analog Trunk Timers, Item 9: Flash (Hooking 1) Set the Flash duration (16-4080 mS) for analog trunk (ATRU PCB) circuits. 0114 - Analog Trunk Timers, Item 10: Flash (Hooking 2) Set the open loop disconnect duration (16-4080 mS) for analog trunk (ATRU PCB) circuits. 0402 - Tenant Group Options, Part B, Item 2: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part A) If CONF (TRF) key should access Flash, enter 2. Otherwise, enter 0 or 1. 0406 - COS Options, Item 1: Flash for Single Line Telephones In a single line (500/2500 type) telephones Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to hookflash for system feature access. 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 5: Flash Type Make sure this item is set for open loop Flash (0). 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 6: Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect For each trunk, indicate if Flash is for Flash (0) or open loop disconnect (1). 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
290 FEATURES
In Program 0901 Item 5, always set the Flash type for open loop (0).
In Program 0114 Item 10, set the open loop disconnect duration.
Disconnect Call
Trunk's Features
In Program 0901 Item 5, set trunk for open loop Flash (0).
No
Yes
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 291
Operation
To flash the trunk you are on: Keyset 1. Press FLASH. OR Single Line Set 1. Hookflash. 2. Dial #3.
292 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. Complete numbering flexibility requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available. Complete numbering flexibility requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Flexible System Numbering lets you reassign the systems port-to-extension assignments. This allows an employee to retain their extension number if they move to a different office. In addition, factory technicians can make comprehensive changes to your systems number plan. You can have factory technicians: Set the number of digits in internal (Intercom) functions. For example, extension numbers can be up to four digits long. Change your systems Service Code numbers Assign single digit access to selected Service Codes Talk to your sales representative to find out if this program is available to you. You can also use Flexible System Numbering to change the systems Trunk Group Routing code. Although the default code of 9 is suitable for most applications, you can alter the code if you have to. For more information on the systems standard numbering, refer to Tables 1-1, 1-2 and 1-5 at the beginning of this section. The system provides a completely flexible system numbering plan. Refer to the chart below and the Programming section for more details.
Flexible System Numbering Program Description
Set the systems internal (Intercom) numbering plan. The numbering plan includes the digits an extension user must dial to access features and other extensions. Assign the single-digit trunk access code (normally 9). This is the code users dial to access Automatic Route Selection or Trunk Group Routing. Customize the first set of Service Codes. Also see program 0514. Assign the Single Digit Service Codes. These are the postdialing codes a user can dial after placing an Intercom call to a co-worker. Customize the second set of Service Codes.
0511 - Service Code Setup ( Part A) 0512 - Single Digit Service Code Setup 0514 - Service Code Setup (Part B)
Conditions Programming follows a telephones port number, not the extension number. If you relocate a phone, you may need to change additional programming. Default Setting Extensions are numbered consecutively from 301 (port 001) to 556 (port 256) (Program 0502). Refer to Table 16 for the systems default numbering plan.
FEATURES 293
Start
Do you want to change the telephone port's extension number? Yes In 0502, select telephone port you want to change and then enter the new extension number.
No
The extension number you entered is in use by another port. You can only use available (unassigned) extension numbers.
Yes
Yes
Go to 0511 - Service Code Setup (Part A) and 0514 Service Code Setup (Part B).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Stop
294 FEATURES
Related Features
Tenant Service The system may allow tenant groups to use the same extension numbers.
Operation
Refer to Tables 1-1, 1-2 and 1-5 at the beginning of this section.
FEATURES 295
Description
124i Available 384i Available
Forced Trunk Disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another extensions active outside call. The user can then place a call on the released trunk. Forced Trunk Disconnect lets a user access a busy trunk in an emergency, when no other trunks are available. Maintenance technicians can also use Forced Trunk Disconnect to release a trunk on which there is no conversation. This can happen if a trunk does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up.
CAUTION
Forced Trunk Disconnect abruptly terminates the active call on the line. Only use this feature in an emergency and when no other lines are available. Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Start
No
Yes
Stop
0406 - COS Options, Item 120: Forced Trunk Disconnect In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
296 FEATURES
Operation
To disconnect a busy trunk: Keyset 1. Press line key for trunk. OR Dial trunk access code (#9 + trunk number). You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 001-128. 2. Dial *3. You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the trunk. You can now place a call on the free trunk.
1. 2. 3.
Single Line Telephone Dial trunk access code (#9 + trunk number) You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 001-128. Dial *3. You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the line. Hookflash. You hear dial tone. You can now place a call on the free line.
FEATURES 297
Description
124i Available eight Call Pickup Groups. 384i Available 32 Call Pickup Groups.
Group Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing an extension in a Pickup Group. This permits co-workers in the same work area to easily answer each others calls. The user can intercept the ringing call by dialing a code or pressing a programmed Group Call Pickup key. If several extensions within the group are ringing at the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the call based on the extensions priority within the Pickup Group. With Group Call Pickup, a user can intercept the following types of calls: A call ringing the users own pickup group A call ringing another pickup group when the user knows the group number A call ringing another pickup group when the user doesnt know the group number Conditions A Call Pickup Group cannot have an associated name. Default Setting Enabled.
298 FEATURES
No
Yes
In 1012, assign extensions to Pickup Groups (1-8 in 124i, 1-32 in 384i) and set each extension's priority within the group (1-96 in 124i, 1-384 in 384i).
No
Yes
No
Should extension be able to pick up a call ringing their own Pickup Group (Service Code 856 or 867)?
Yes
No
Should extension have onebutton pickup for calls ringing their own Pickup Group?
Yes
Use Service Code 869 when the ringing Pickup Group number is unknown.
No
Should extension be able to pick up a call ringing another (unknown) Pickup Group (Service Code 869)?
Yes
No
Should extension have one-button pickup for calls ringing another (unknown) Pickup Group?
Yes
FEATURES 299
Use Service Code 868 when the ringing group number is known. In 0406 Item 10, enter 0. No Should extension be able to pick up a call ringing in another (known) Pickup Group (Service Code 868)? Yes In 0406 Item 10, enter 1.
In 1006, do not assign a function key (code 1009 + Pickup Group number).
No
Should extension have one-button pickup for calls ringing another (known) Pickup Group?
Yes
After picking up a call, should extension's display show number of trunk intercepted or Pickup Group?
Pickup Group
Stop
300 FEATURES
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Group Call Pickup operation.
FEATURES 301
302 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. Enhanced operation is available in Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available. Enhanced operation available in system software 3.05.15 or higher.
Group Listen permits a keyset user to talk on the handset and have their callers voice broadcast over the telephone speaker. This lets the keyset users co-workers listen to the conversation. Group Listen turns off the keysets Handsfree microphone so the caller does not pick the coworkers voices during a Group Listen. Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Start
No
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 303
Related Features
Headset Operation An extension in the headset mode cannot use Group Listen. Single Line Telephones Group Listen is not available to single line telephones.
Operation
(Enhanced Operation) To initiate Group Listen: 1. Place or answer call using the handset. 2. Press SPK twice (but do not hang up). SPK flashes slowly. You can talk to the caller through your handset. Your co-workers hear your callers voice over your phones speaker. When you press SPK once, you turn your Speakerphone on and your handset off. The second press turns on Group Listen. To Talk Handsfree after initiating Group Listen: 1. Hang up. You must have a speakerphone for Handsfree operation. To cancel Group Listen (without hanging up your call): 1. Do not hang up. 2. Press flashing SPK. You can talk to your caller over your handset. Your co-workers can no longer hear your callers voice. (Operation in Older Systems) To initiate Group Listen: 1. Place or answer call using the handset. 2. Press SPK, but do not hang up. Your SPK key flashes slowly. You can talk to your caller through your handset. Your co-workers hear your callers voice over the speaker in your telephone. To talk to your caller Handsfree, just hang up the handset. (You must have a Speakerphone for Handsfree operation.) To cancel Group Listen (without hanging up your call): 1. Do not hang up. 2. Press flashing SPK. You can talk to your caller over your handset. Your co-workers can no longer hear your callers voice.
304 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Handsfree allows a keyset user to process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone (instead of the handset). Handsfree is a convenience for workers who dont have a free hand to pick up the handset. For example, a terminal operator could continue to enter data with both hands while talking on the phone. The system provides three variations of Handsfree operation: Handsfree Automatic Handsfree User can place and answer calls by pressing SPK instead of using the handset. User can press a line or line appearance key without first lifting the handset or pressing SPK. An extension can have Automatic Handsfree for just outgoing calls or both outgoing calls and incoming line/loop key calls. Normally, extensions without Speakerphones should have Automatic Handsfree for outgoing calls only. User can place a call without lifting the handset, but must lift the handset to speak.
Monitor
Conditions Handsfree is only available on keysets with Speakerphones. Keysets without Speakerphones have Handsfree Answerback for Intercom calls and Monitor.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 6: Automatic Handsfree Enable (1) or disable (0) Automatic Handsfree. If enabled, user can press a line or line appearance key without first lifting the handset. 0406 - COS Options, Item 125: Automatic Handsfree Incoming In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Automatic Handsfree for incoming calls on line/loop keys. 1005 - Class of Service Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
Related Features
Handsfree Answerback Answer Intercom calls without lifting the handset - just speak toward the phone. Microphone Cutoff For privacy, mute the phones microphone while on a call. Single Line Telephones Group Handsfree and Monitor are not available to single line telephones.
FEATURES 305
Monitor
Handsfree
Stop
Should extension also have Automatic Handsfree for incoming calls on line/loop keys?
Stop
Operation
To talk Handsfree: 1. Press SPK, CALL key or line key. 2. Place call. 3. Speak toward phone when called party answers. To change a handset call into a Handsfree call: 1. Press SPK. 2. Press SPK to hang up. To change a Handsfree call into a handset call: 1. Lift handset.
306 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for workers who dont have a free hand to pick up the handset. Conditions Handsfree Answerback does not require a Speakerphone. Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 10: Forced Intercom Ringing Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Intercom Ringing. If disabled (0), Intercom calls voice-announce. 0406 - COS Options, Item 68: Setting Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to set Handsfree Answerback (Service Code 821) and Forced Intercom Ringing (Service Code 823) for incoming Intercom calls. 0406 - COS Options, Item 72: Switching from Handsfree Answerback to Forced Intercom Ringing In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to toggle between Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls (dial 1 or Service Code 812). 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Handsfree and Monitor A keyset user can process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone (instead of the handset). Microphone Cutoff With Microphone Cutoff enabled, Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a single beep (instead of two). Single Line Telephones Incoming Intercom calls always ring single line telephones.
FEATURES 307
Start
Should extension be able to set Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming calls (Service Codes 821 and 823)?
Should extension be able to toggle between Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls (dial 1 or Service Code 812).
Voice-announce In 0401 Item 10, enter 0. Should incoming Intercom calls normally ring or voice-announce?
Stop
308 FEATURES
FEATURES 309
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
A keyset user can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using Handsfree, using the headset frees up the users hands for other work. However, Headset Operation provides privacy not available from Handsfree. An extension in the headset mode has two options for when it appears busy to incoming callers. The headset extension can be: Busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy (i.e., Off-Hook Signaling prevented) OR Busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy (i.e., Off Hook Signaling allowed) An example of a compatible headset is UNEX Model Pro-MP10A. Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Start
Should headset extension be busy when one appearance is busy or when both appearances are busy?
Stop
310 FEATURES
Related Features
Handsfree and Monitor While in the headset mode, do not use the Speakerphone for calls. Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing An extension with Headset Operation enabled can still receive voice-announced Intercom calls and respond Handsfree. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify enabling or disabling the headset mode. Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot use the Headset feature. While in the headset mode, the hook switch is not functional.
Operation
To enable the headset mode. 1. Unplug the telephone handset and set it aside. 2. Plug in the headset. 3. Press the Headset key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1028). OR Press idle CALL key and dial 834. You hear a confirmation beep. The Headset key lights when you enable headset mode. You can still receive and respond to voice-announced Intercom calls while in the headset mode. When in the headset mode: Press a line key to make a trunk call. OR Press SPK to get Intercom dial tone OR If on a call, press SPK to hang up. To disable the headset mode. 1. Unplug the headset. 2. Plug in the telephone handset. 3. Press the Headset key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1028). OR Press idle CALL key and dial 834. The Headset key goes out when you disable headset mode.
FEATURES 311
Description
124i Available. Hold Recall to Operator requires system software Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available. Hold Recall to Operator requires system software 3.06.14 or higher.
Hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary waiting state. The caller on Hold hears silence or Music on Hold, not conversation in the extension users work area. While the call waits on Hold, the extension user may process calls or use a system feature. Calls left on Hold too long recall the extension that placed them on Hold. There are four types of Hold: System Hold An outside call a user places on Hold flashes the line key (if programmed) at all other keysets. Any keyset user with the flashing line key can pick up the call. Exclusive Hold When a user places a call on Exclusive Hold, only that user can pick up the call from Hold. The trunk appears busy to all other keysets that have a key for the trunk. Exclusive hold is important if a user doesnt want a co-worker picking up their call on Hold. Group Hold If a user places a call on Group Hold, another user in the Department Group can dial a code to pick up the call. This lets members of a department easily pick up each others calls. Intercom Hold A user can place an Intercom call on Hold. The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other extension.
Hold Recall to Operator Hold Recall to Operator enhances how the system handles calls that have been left on hold too long. With Hold Recall to Operator: A trunk call recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall time. The recalling trunk will ring the extension that placed it on Hold for the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall Call back Time. After the Hold/ExclusiveHold Recall Callback Time, the trunk call will ring the operator. Hold Recall to Operator applies to trunk calls placed on System Hold, Exclusive Hold and Group Hold. It does not apply to Intercom calls. Conditions The called extension must lift the handset or press the SPK key before the call can be placed on hold. Default Setting Enabled.
312 FEATURES
System
Exclusive
When a call is left on System Hold too long and recalls, does the recall occur after an acceptable interval?
No
In 0405 Item 22, change the Hold Recall Time to meet the site requirements.
Yes
Do trunks on System Hold recalling an extension ring the extension for an acceptable interval?
No
In 0405 Item 27, set the Hold Recall Callback Time to meet the site requirements.
Yes
When a call is left on Exclusive Hold too long and recalls, does the recall occur after an acceptable interval?
No
In 0405 Item 2, set the Exclusive Hold Recall Time to meet the site requirements.
Yes
Do trunks on Exclusive Hold recalling an extension ring the extension for an acceptable interval?
No
In 0405 Item 3, set the Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time to meet the site requirements.
Yes
No
Should calls an extension leaves on Hold too long recall to the operator?
Yes
FEATURES 313
In 0901 Item 20, enter 0 to disable Forced Release of Held Call for trunk.
No
Yes
In 0901 Item 20, enter 1 to enable Forced Release of Held Call for trunk.
In 0405 Item 40, set the Forced Release of Held Calls Interval.
With Group Hold, another Department Group member can pick up the call.
No
Should an extension in a Department Group be able to put a call on Group Hold (Service Code 832)?
Yes
No
Should an extension in a Department Group be able to pick up a call on Group Hold (Service Code 862)?
Yes
314 FEATURES
If an extension puts a trunk call on Hold, should they be able to retrieve it from Hold?
Yes
In 0911 for each Access Map, select the access options for each trunk (3,4,5 or 7).
No
In 1006, do not assign a function key for Exclusive Hold (code 1044).
No
Yes
You may need to do this if you have reassiged Hold keys in 0402 Item 4. In 1006, do not assign a function key for System Hold (code 1043). No Does extension need one-button (function key) System Hold access? Yes In 1006, assign a function key for System Hold (code 1043).
Stop
FEATURES 315
316 FEATURES
Operation
System Hold To place an outside call on System Hold: 1. Press HOLD. A line key flashes slowly while on Hold; flashes fast when recalling. To pick up an outside call on System Hold: 1. Press flashing line key.
Exclusive Hold To place an outside call on Exclusive Hold: Keyset 1. Press Exclusive Hold key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1044). A line key flashes slowly while on Hold, flashes fast when recalling. Single Line Telephone Hookflash. Dial 849. Hang up.
1. 2. 3.
To pick up an outside call on Exclusive Hold: Keyset 1. Press flashing line key. Single Line Set Lift handset. Dial 859.
1. 2.
FEATURES 317
1. 2. 3.
To pick up a call on Group Hold: Keyset 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 862. Single Line Telephone Lift handset. Dial 862.
1. 2.
Intercom Hold To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold: 1. Press HOLD. The CALL key flashes. (In 384i, this requires system software 3.02 and higher.) 2. Press SPK to hang up. To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold: 1. Press SPK. 2. Press flashing CALL key.
318 FEATURES
Description
124i Consult your Sales Representative for availability. Year 2000 Compliance not available. 384i Available refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000HMT**) for additional information. Year 2000 Compliance requires system software 3.07.25 or higher.
The system can provide comprehensive hotel/motel services in addition to the features normally available to business users. Hotel/motel features include:
Do Not Disturb A guest can enable and disable Do Not Disturb for their room telephone. In addition, a hotel/motel employee with a keyset can enable and disable Do Not Disturb for a specific room telephone. Message Waiting A hotel/motel employee with a keyset can send a Message Waiting to a room telephone. The message lamp on the room telephone flashes until the guest answers the Message Waiting. Room Telephone Status To better manage room usage, an employee with a keyset can change the status of a room telephone, including: Room Available Room Occupied Room Ready to be Cleaned Room to Room Call Restriction To control inter-room guest calling, a hotel/motel employee with a keyset can enable and disable room-toroom calling. Room Status with Printout An employees DSS Console can indicate the status of the hotel/motel rooms. Optionally, a printer connected to a DCI Module can print out room status reports: Room Status (occupied, available, ready and to be cleaned) Room Telephone Call and Toll Restriction Information Do Not Disturb and Clean Up Extension List Message Waiting Report Wake-up Call No-Answer Report Single Digit Extension Access To simplify guest calling, room telephones can have single digit access to selected extensions. For example, this allows guests to dial 1 for the front desk, 2 for house cleaning etc. Toll Restriction Changing An employee can change the Toll Restriction for a guests telephone. For example, the receptionist can enable long distance calling for each room telephone as the guests check in. Wake-up Call A guest can set or cancel a wake-up call request. A hotel/motel employee with a keyset can also set or cancel a wake-up call for a room telephone.
For additional information on Hotel/Motel features, refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000MHT**).
FEATURES 319
Programming
Refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000HMT**).
Related Features
Year 2000 Compliance The Hotel Room Status banner shows four digits for the year (e.g., 2001). For additional information, refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000HMT**).
Operation
Refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000HMT**).
320 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Hotline gives a keyset user one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hotline partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer calls to each other just by pressing a single key. In addition, the Hotline key shows the status of the partners extension:
When the key is . . . The extension is . . .
Idle Busy or ringing DND All calls (option 3) or Intercom calls (option 2)
Conditions An extension user cannot use Hotline to pick up a call ringing their partners extension. Default Setting Disabled.
Programming 0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 20: BLF Control and
0406 - COS Options, Item 6: Automatic Off Hook Signaling Programs 0401 Item 20 and 0406 Item 6 set the conditions under which a Hotline, Reverse Voice Over or DSS Console key indicates that an extension is busy. With condition 1 in the following chart, the BLF LED is on only when both extension line appearances are busy. In conditions 2-4, the BLF LED is on when one line appearance is busy. Program 0406: Item 6 1 2 3 4
1
1 1 0 0
1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Hotline (code 1058 + partners extension number)
FEATURES 321
Operation
To place a call to your Hotline partner: 1. Press Hotline key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1058 + partners extension number) You can optionally lift handset after this step for privacy. To transfer your outside call to your Hotline partner: 1. Press Hotline key. 2. Announce call and hang up. OR Hang up to have the call wait at your Hotline partner unannounced. If unanswered, the call recalls like a regular transferred call. To answer a call from your Hotline partner: 1. If you hear two beeps, speak toward phone. Or 1. If your telephone rings, lift handset.
322 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
With External Hotline, an extension automatically dials a Common Abbreviated Dialing number when the user lifts the handset. External Hotline would be beneficial in an Airport Lobby, for example, to provide simplified access to an off-site Reservation Desk. A traveler need only lift the handset on the External Hotline phone to automatically ring for reservations. (If the Reservation Desk is an extension on the same system, use Ringdown Extension instead.) The system allows up to 10 External Hotline extensions. All extensions can share the same Common Abbreviated Dialing number, if desired. External Hotline is a variation of Ringdown. To find out more about Ringdown Extensions (which automatically call a co-worker when the user lifts the handset), refer to the "Ringdown Extension" feature. Conditions Ringdown Extension (Program 1013) has priority over External Hotline (Program 1024). Default Setting Disabled.
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing External Hotline uses the trunk routing set in Abbreviated Dialing. Ringdown Extension A Ringdown Extension automatically calls another extension when the user lifts the handset.
Operation
To use External Hotline: 1. Lift handset. Your phone automatically seizes an outgoing trunk and places a call using the Common Abbreviated Dialing number. To bypass External Hotline (keyset only): 1. Press SPK or CL1 before lifting the handset. You can process calls normally the External Hotline does not go through.
FEATURES 323
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available requires system software 3.07.18 or higher.
InDepth (P/N 94100) and inDepth+ (P/N 94105) are Windows-based Management Informatin Systems that work in conjunction with the built in 384i ACD. These ACD/MIS systems enhance the 384i ACD with real time statistics and reports on ACD group traffic patterns and usage. Communicating through the 384i Open Architecture Interface (OAI), inDepth and inDepth+ are an extensive set of user-configuratble Real Time Windows and Reporter subsystems. InDepth+ is the more comprehensive and capable of the ACD/MIS systems and offers:
Real Time Status Window This window displays ACD agent status, state and connection state. Real Time Statistics Window The statistics window provides a visual performance summary for lines, agents and ACD Groups. Call Queue and Wait Time Windows These windows show the number of calls in queue, the longest wait time, as well as the number of calls answered and abandoned. Wallboard Template Use the wallboard template display to motivate and inform ACD agents through a dynamic display of real time statistics and messages. Reporter ACD administrators can create fully-configurable reports for display and printing.
Similar in many respects to inDepth+, inDepth is streamlined for more modest ACD applications. InDepth provides a single real time screen template, up to seven reports and can track report data for up to one full month. InDepth includes ACD/MIS features like Report View/Print and Audible/Visual Alarms, but excludes the Sub-Supervisor Positions and the Wallboard Support.
324 FEATURES
Programming
Refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N 94105INS**) for the specifics.
Related Features
Refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N 94105INS**) for the specifics.
Operation
Refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N 94105INS**) for the specifics.
FEATURES 325
Description
124i Available. Changing the Intercom ring tone requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available. Changing the Intercom ring tone requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions. This provides the system with complete internal calling capability. Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for workers who dont have a free hand to pick up the handset. Refer to Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing feature on page 306 for more. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
326 FEATURES
In 0406:61 enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0406:61 enter 1.
In 1105, make sure each Tenant Group has the same operator extension port.
No
Yes
In 1105, assign the operator extension port for each Tenant Group.
Is the time allowed for users to dial Intercom numbers acceptable? Yes After getting Intercom dial tone, do users have adequate time to dial the first ICM digit? Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Do you want to change the way Intercom calls ring single line sets?
Yes
No Do you want to customize the Intercom Ring Tone? No Stop In 0112, change the frequencies assigned to each type.
Yes
FEATURES 327
Should extension be able to set Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming calls (Service Codes 821 and 823)?
No
Should extension be able to toggle between Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls (dial 1 or Service Code 812).
Yes
Stop
328 FEATURES
Related Features
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing Intercom calls can ring or be voice-announced at the called extension. Line Preference Ringing Line Preference can automatically answer ringing Intercom or trunk calls when the user lifts the handset. Name Storing An extension can have a name assigned that identifies the extension to callers. (384i Only) Tenant Service Tenant Service may restrict Intercom calling.
FEATURES 329
330 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Intercom Abandoned Call Display shows a display keyset user a list of Intercom calls placed to them that they did not answer. This is a convenience if a user has to temporarily leave their desk. When they return, they can display the list to find out who called while they were out. Conditions Intercom Abandon Call Display remembers the last five Intercom calls to an extension. Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Start
No
Should extension user be able to display list of Intercom calls they did not answer?
Yes
Stop
0406 - COS Options, Item 13: Intercom Abandoned Call Display In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to use Intercom Abandoned Call Display. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
FEATURES 331
Operation
To display the list of Intercom calls you did not answer. 1. Press CHECK. 2. Press CALL2. Repeatedly press CALL2 until no more calls display. 3. Press CLEAR to return to the normal Time and Date display.
332 FEATURES
Description
124i Currently not implemented. 384i Contact your sales representative for availability.
!! Important !!
ISDN is an emerging technology on the leading edge of international digital communications networking. Always check with your Nitsuko America Technical Service Representative before setting up your ISDN application. Working together will ensure maximum compatibility and reliable ISDN performance. Primary Rate Interface (PRI) The system is compatible with ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) services. PRI services currently supported include: Basic PRI Call Control (BCC) Display of incoming callers name and number Routing in the system based on the number the caller dialed ISDN maintenance functions (such as In Service/Out of Service Messaging) Speech and 3.1 KHz audio Capacity of 5 PRI circuits and 120 PRI channels PRI capability requires the installation of T1/PRI Interface PCBs (P/N 92190). Each PCB (also called a PRI circuit) provides 24 PRI channels (23B + D)1 with 64K Clear Channel response. The T1/PRI Interface PCB uses a single universal slot. Your can install up to five PCBs for a maximum of 120 PRI channels. When installed, the T1/PRI Interface PCB uses the first block of 24 consecutive trunks. For example, if you have an ATRU PCB installed for trunks 1-8, the T1/PRI Interface PCB will automatically use trunks 9-32. If you have ATRU PCBs installed for trunks 1-8 and 17-24, the T1/PRI PCB will use trunks 25-48. The T1/PRI Interface cannot use trunks 9-16 (even if available) since they are not part of a consecutive block of 24 trunks.
Notes: In addition to T1/PRI Interface PCBs, PRI also requires a CSU/DSU Unit and interconnecting cables to interface with the telco. Each T1/PRI Interface PCB is switch selectable between T1 and PRI operation. For more on T1 Trunking, go to "T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatiblity)".
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Your system also provides compatibility with ISDN Basic Rate (BRI) services, including: Basic BRI Call Control (BCC) Point-to-Point BRI Terminal Connection (no daisy-chaining) Multipoint BRI Terminal Connection (daisy-chaining) Capacity of 32 BRI circuits and 64 BRI channels BRI services require the installation of 2ISTU BRI Interface PCBs (P/N 92191). Each BRI Interface PCB has two BRI circuits. There are two channels (ports) per circuit (2B + D), providing 64K Clear B-Channel and 16K Clear D-Channel response. The BRI Interface PCB uses a single universal slot. You can install up to 16 BRI Interface PCBs for system maximums of 32 BRI circuits and 64 BRI channels. When installed, the BRI Interface PCB uses a block of eight consecutive trunks. Only the first four trunks in the block are available. For example, if your BRI Interface PCB is the first trunk PCB installed, it reserves trunks 18. Trunks 1-4 are available trunks 5-8 are not.
1
Each T1/PRI Interface PCB provides 23 voice (B) and 1 data (D) channel.
FEATURES 333
Programming
Refer to the ISDN-BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**) and ISDN-PRI Manual (92000PRI**) for the specifics.
Related Features
Refer to the ISDN-BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**) and ISDN-PRI Manual (92000PRI**) for the specifics.
Operation
Refer to the ISDN-BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**) and ISDN-PRI Manual (92000PRI**) for the specifics.
334 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
The 124i/384i Labelmaker provides template software and preprinted, precut forms for producing custom keyset labels. Use the software and forms to make unique keyset labels for each extension which can include key functions, Hotline names or your own companys imprinted logo. The 124i/384i Labelmaker requires: A Windows-compatible sheet fed printer (e.g., laser or ink jet) Microsoft Windows 3.1 or higher Microsoft Excel 3.0 or higher OR Lotus 123 Release 4 or higher OR Lotus AmiPro 3.0 or higher The 124i/384i Labelmaker is not compatible with Lotus WordPro. Conditions None Default Setting None
Programming
None
Related Features
None
Operation
None
FEATURES 335
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Last Number Redial allows an extension user to quickly redial the last number dialed. For example, a user may quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. Last Number Redial saves in system memory the last 24 digits a user dials. The number can be any combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call. However, the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Start
Yes
Stop
0406 - COS Options, Item 48: Last Number Redial In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to use Last Number Redial. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
336 FEATURES
Operation
To redial your last call: 1. (Optional at keyset) Press idle line key. If you skip this step, the system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call. 2. Press LND. 3. Press idle CALL key (if you skipped step 1). OR 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial #5. The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call. To check the number saved for Last Number Redial: 1. Press LND. The stored number displays for six seconds. The stored number dials out if you: - Lift the handset, - Press an idle line key, - Press an idle CALL key, or - Press SPK 2. Press CLEAR. To erase the stored number: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial 876.
FEATURES 337
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Line Preference determines how a keyset user places and answers calls. There are two types of Line Preference: Incoming Line Preference and Outgoing Line Preference. Incoming Line Preference Incoming Line Preference establishes how a keyset user answers calls. When a call rings the keyset, lifting the handset answers either the ringing call (for Ringing Line Preference) or seizes an idle line (for Idle Line Preference). The idle line can provide either Intercom or trunk dial tone (see Outgoing Line Preference below). Ringing Line Preference helps users whose primary function is to answer calls (such as a receptionist). Idle Line Preference is an aid to users whose primary function is to place calls (such as a telemarketer). Outgoing Line Preference Outgoing Line Preference sets how a keyset user places calls. If a keyset has Outgoing Intercom Line Preference, the user hears Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset. If a keyset has Outgoing Trunk Line Preference, the user hears trunk dial tone when they lift the handset. Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line Preference. The user hears either trunk ("dial 9") or Intercom dial tone. Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines With Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, an extension user can automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions (not their own). This would help a user that has to answer calls for co-workers that are away from their desks. When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming. The extension users own ringing calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing other co-workers extensions. Conditions If a keyset extension has more than one call ringing its line keys, Ringing Line Preference answers the calls on a first-in first-answered basis. Default Setting Enabled.
338 FEATURES
No
When users lift handset, should they answer ringing Intercom call?
Yes
No
When users lift handset, should they answer ringing trunk call?
Yes
Intercom
With both Intercom and trunk call ringing, which should have priority?
Trunk
Stop
FEATURES 339
Start Also see the Prime Line Selection feature. In Program 1008 Item 3, enter 0. Intercom dial tone When user lifts handset, should they get Intercom dial tone or trunk dial tone? Trunk dial tone In Program 1008 Item 3, enter 1.
In Program 1008 Item 2, enter 1. For additional interaction between Program 1008 Items 2 and 3, see the chart below.
Program Trunk Group Routing: - Assign trunks to groups in 0905. - Assign trunk groups to routes in 0906. - Assign routes to extensions in 0907.
Stop
340 FEATURES
Yes
In Programs 0909 and 0910, set trunk to not ring extension. Refer to the Ring Group feature.
In Programs 0911 and 0912, make sure extension has incoming access to non-ringing trunk.
No
In Program 0905, assign trunks to groups. Refer to the Trunk Group feature.
No
In Program 0906, program the Trunk Group Routing table. Refer to the Trunk Group Routing feature.
In Program 1015, select the routing sequence for auto-answer of non-ringing lines.
Choose from the routes you programmed in Trunk Group Routing (Program 0906). Make one entry for each Night Service mode.
Stop
FEATURES 341
Item 13
(Trunk Preference)
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 1, answers ringing trunk If Program 0401 Item 8 is 0, seizes idle line appearance. If Program 0401 Item 8 is 1, seizes idle line appearance. If Program 0401 Item 8 is 0, seizes line appearance. Answers ringing trunk.
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 1, answers ringing trunk. Intercom call then rings second line appearance. If Program 0401 item 8 is 0, answers Ringing line appearance. Answers ringing Intercom call (Line appearance). Answers ringing trunk.
1 1
1 1
Note: Program 0401 Item 8 sets Intercom (0) or trunk (1) call priority.
0905- Trunk Groups For Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, assign trunks to trunk groups. This is part of Trunk Group Routing programming.
342 FEATURES
Item 2
(Intercom Preference)
Item 3
(Trunk Preference)
After lifting handset at idle phone... You hear nothing. You hear trunk dial tone (follows "dial 9" routing). You hear intercom dial tone. You hear trunk dial tone (follows "dial 9" routing).
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
1015 - Universal Answer/Auto-Answer For each extension, select the route that it will use for Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines. The routes correspond to the Trunk Group Routing table set in Program 0906.
FEATURES 343
Operation
To answer a ringing call if your phone has Ringing Line Preference: 1. Refer to the chart on the previous page. To place a call if your phone has Outgoing Line Preference: 1. Refer to the chart above. To use Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines: 1. At keyset, lift handset. OR At single line telephone, lift handset and dial 872.
344 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Loop keys are uniquely programmed function keys that simplify placing and answering trunk calls. There are three types of loop keys: Incoming Only, Outgoing Only and Both Ways.
Incoming Only Loop Keys Incoming Only loop keys are for answering trunk calls. An extension can have an incoming loop key for a specific trunk group (fixed) or a "catch all" loop key for any trunk group (switched). Fixed loop keys allow an extension user to tell the type of call by the ringing key. Switched loop keys are ideal for an extension with a large number of feature keys. In addition, switched loop keys are a destination for any trunk not on a line key or fixed loop key. Without a switched loop key, calls not appearing on a line key or fixed loop key will ring only the CALL key. Incoming Only loop keys also receive Transferred trunk calls. Outgoing Only Loop Keys Outgoing Only loop keys are for placing trunk calls. An extension can have outgoing loop keys for a specific trunk group or for ARS access. When a user presses the loop key, they get dial tone from the first available trunk in the group (or from ARS if programmed). Outgoing Only loop keys help ensure that an extension will always have a key available for placing calls. Both Ways Loop Keys Both Ways loop keys combine the functions of both Incoming Only and Outgoing Only loop keys. Both Ways loop keys work well for extension users that handle a moderate amount of calls and dont separate keys for incoming and outgoing calls. Both Ways loop keys also receive Transferred trunk calls.
An extension can have many loop keys of any type. You can program an operator, for example, with four loop keys for incoming calls and four for outgoing calls. Once a loop key call is set up, the user can handle it like any other trunk call. For example, the user can place the call on Hold, Transfer it to a co-worker or send it to a Park Orbit. An incoming call will ring the first available loop key, beginning with the lowest numbered key. If keys 1-3 are loop keys, for example, the first incoming call rings key 1. If key 1 is busy, the next call rings key 2. If keys 1 and 2 are busy, the next call rings key 3. If all three keys are busy, additional incoming calls queue for the first available key. The telephone display will show "WAITING LOOP KEY" if the user presses a loop key when there are additional calls waiting. Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
FEATURES 345
Start
Outgoing
Do you want Incoming Only, Outgoing Only or Both Ways loop keys. Both Ways
Incoming
In 1026, for data 1 (outgoing options) enter trunk group number or 0 for ARS. For data 2 (incoming options), enter 0.
In 1026, for data 1 (outgoing options) enter 0. For data 2 (incoming options), enter trunk group number or 0 for all groups.
Loop keys use trunk group assignments when answering and placing calls.
In 1026, for data 1 (outgoing options) enter trunk group number or 0 for ARS. For data 2 (incoming options), enter trunk group number or 0 for all groups.
Program Ring Groups: In 0910, assign trunks to Ring Groups. In 0909, assign extensions to Ring Groups.
Incoming loop keys flash and ring for Ring Group calls.
Make sure the Trunk Access Map assignments match the loop key's requirements.
Program Trunk Access Maps: In 0911, set up the access options for Access Maps. In 0912, assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions.
Stop
346 FEATURES
Related Features
Off Hook Signaling If enabled, a user hears Call Waiting beeps if additional calls are waiting behind a loop key. Programmable Function Keys If you have a line and loop key for the same trunk, the line key has precedence. An incoming call rings the line key, not the loop key. When you press the loop key for an outgoing call, the line key lights. Ring Groups Trunks ring telephones according to their Ring Group assignments (Programs 0909 and 0910).
FEATURES 347
348 FEATURES
Description
124i The system allows either 8 fourparty conferences or 4 eight-party conferences. 384i Each DTU-A/C allows either 4 four-party conferences or 2 eightparty conferences per PCB.
With Meet Me Conference, an extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to six other inside parties. Each party joins the Conference by dialing a Meet Me Conference code. Meet Me Conference lets extension users have a telephone meeting -- without leaving the office. The system permits up to eight parties to join in a Meet Me Conference. Conditions (384i Only) Conference requires either a DTU-A or DTU-C PCB (eight PCBs maximum per system). Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page. Note: For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the Paging External and Paging Internal features.
0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup (124i Only) Set the Conference mode of the system. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences (0) or 4 eight-party conferences (1). (384i Only) Set the Conference mode of each DTU-A or DTU-C PCB. The system allows either 4 fourparty conferences (0) or 2 eight-party conferences (1) per PCB. (384i Only) 0308 - Conference Circuit Setup Assign the circuits on the DTU-A or DTU-C PCBs as Conference circuits (0). 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 9: Meet Me Conference Time Set the Meet Me Conference Time (0-64800 seconds). Once the user initiates Meet Me Conference, the system waits this interval for the Paged party to join the conversation. 0406 - COS Options, Item 14: Meet Me Conference and Paging In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to initiate a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for Conference (code 1016), External Zone Paging (code 1004 + zone), External All Call Paging (code 1005), Internal Zone Paging (code 1006 + zone) and Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup(code 1010).
FEATURES 349
Start
No
Yes
In 0308, assign the blocks on the CDTU PCB for Conference (entry 0).
Stop Two 8-party In 0302 Item 2, enter 1. Should each CDTU PCB allow four 4-party conferences or two 8-party conferences? Four 4-party In 0302 Item 2, enter 0.
No
Yes
Is the time users have to join a Meet Me Conference adequate? Yes Setting the Meet Me Conference Time too long can unnecessarily tie up Conference circuits.
No
In 0405 Item 9, set the Meet Me Conference Time to meet the application.
You can simplify Meet Me Conference operation by assigning the following function keys in 1006: External Zone Paging (code 1004), External All Call Paging (code 1005), Internal Zone Paging (code 1006) and Meet Me Conference/Paging pickup (code 1010).
Stop
350 FEATURES
Operation
Meet Me External Conference To make a Meet Me External Conference: Keyset 1. While on a call, press Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016). 2. Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call) OR Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call). OR Press Page key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 + zone & 1005). 3. Announce the zone. 4. When co-worker answers your page, press the Conference key twice. 5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add. Single Line Telephone While on a call, hookflash and dial #1. Dial 803 and the External Paging zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call). OR Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call). Announce the zone. When co-worker answers your page, hookflash twice. Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.
1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
To join a Meet Me External Conference: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial 865. 3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone code (0-8). You connect to the other parties.
FEATURES 351
1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
To join a Meet Me Internal Conference: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial 863 (if your extension is in the zone called). OR Dial 864 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called). OR Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1010) if your extension is in the zone called.
352 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Meet Me Paging allows an extension user to Page a co-worker and privately meet with them on a Page zone. The Paging zone is busy to other users while the meeting takes place. While the co-workers meet on the zone, no one else can hear the conversation, join in or make an announcement using that zone. Meet Me Paging is a good way to talk to a co-worker when their location is unknown. If the co-worker can hear the Page, they can join in the conversation. Conditions Meet Me Paging only permits two-party conversations. Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Start
No
Yes
You can simplifiy Meet Me Paging operation be assigning the following function keys in 1006: External Zone Paging (code 1004), External All Call Paging (code 1005) and Internal Zone Paging (code 1006) and Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup (code 1010).
No
Stop
FEATURES 353
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 11: Meet Me Paging Time Set the Meet Me Paging Time (0-64800 seconds). Once the user initiates Meet Me Page, the system waits this interval for the Paged party to join the conversation. 0406 - COS Options, Item 14: Meet Me Conference and Paging In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to initiate a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 1004 + zone), External All Call Paging (code 1005), Internal Zone Paging (code 1006 + zone) or Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup (code 1010).
Related Features
Meet Me Conference An extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to six other inside parties. Programmable Function Keys Internal and External Paging keys simplify Meet Me Paging operation.
354 FEATURES
FEATURES 355
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
If a user wants to Transfer a call to a co-worker but they dont know where the co-worker is, they can use Meet Me Paging Transfer. With Meet Me Paging Transfer, the user can Page the co-worker and have the call automatically Transfer when the co-worker answers the Page. Since Meet Me Paging Transfer works with both Internal and External Paging, a call can be quickly extended to a co-worker anywhere in the facility. Conditions Meet Me Paging Transfer only permits two-party conversations. Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page. Note: For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the Paging External and Paging Internal features.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 11: Meet Me Paging Time Set the Meet Me Paging Time (0-64800 seconds). Once the user initiates Meet Me Paging Transfer, the system waits this interval for the Paged party to join the conversation. 0406 - COS Options, Item 14: Meet Me Conference and Paging In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to initiate a Meet Me Paging Transfer. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 1004 + zone), External All Call Paging (code 1005), Internal Zone Paging (code 1006 + zone) and Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup (code 1010).
356 FEATURES
Start
Yes
Do you want to have Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer? No Be sure Meet Me Paging Time (Program 0405 Item 11) allows adeguate time for the transfers to complete.
Yes
In COS, enable/disable Meet Me Conference and Paging (Program 0406 Item 14). Assign COS in Program 1005.
Yes
In Program 1006, assign function keys for Paging: External Zone=1004, External All Call=1005, Internal Paging =1006 and Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup = 1010.
Stop
FEATURES 357
Operation
Meet Me External Paging Transfer To make a Meet Me External Paging Transfer: 1. At keyset, press HOLD. OR At single line telephone, hookflash. 2. Press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 + zone & 1005). OR Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call). OR Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call). 3. Announce the call. 4. When Paged party answers, hang up to Transfer the call to them. To join a Meet Me External Paging Transfer: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial 865. 3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0-8). You connect to the Paging party. 4. Stay on the line. After the Paging party hangs up, you connect to the transferred call.
358 FEATURES
FEATURES 359
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
While on an outside call, Memo Dial lets a display keyset user store an important number for easy redialing later on. The telephone can be like a notepad. For example, a user could dial Directory Assistance and ask for a clients telephone number. When Directory Assistance plays back the requested number, the caller can use Memo Dial to jot the number down in the telephones memory. They can quickly call the Memo Dial number after hanging up. When a user enters a Memo Dial number, the dialed digits do not output over the trunk. Dialing Memo Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress. Conditions When Memo Dial calls out, it outdials the entire stored number. Memo Dial does not automatically strip out trunk or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number. Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Start
No
Yes
Stop
360 FEATURES
Related Features
Last Number Redial Quickly redial the last outside number dialed. Save Number Dialed Save the last outside number dialed. Single Line Telephones Memo Dial is not available at single line telephones.
Operation
To store a number while you are on a call: 1. While on a call, press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015). 2. Dial number you want to store. 3. Press Memo Dial key again and continue with conversation. To call a stored Memo Dial number: 1. Do not lift the handset. 2. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015). 3. Press idle CALL key The stored number dials out only if you store a trunk access code before the number. OR Press line key. The stored number dials out. To check to see the stored Memo Dial number: 1. Do not lift handset. 2. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015). The stored number displays. To cancel (erase) a stored Memo Dial number: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015).
FEATURES 361
Description
124i Available. Single line telephones can leave and cancel Messages Waiting. Single line telephones cannot receive Messages Waiting. COS control for reminder messages requires system software 2.13 Base, 2.18 EXCPRU or higher. 384i Available. Single line telephones can leave, cancel and receive Messages Waiting. Prior to system software 3.02, single line telephones cannot receive a Message Waiting COS control for reminder messages requires system software 3.04 or higher.
An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered extension requesting a return call. The indication is a flashing MW lamp at the called extension and a steadily lit MW lamp on the calling extension. Answering the Message Waiting automatically calls the extension which left the indication. Message Waiting ensures that a user will not have to recall an unanswered extension. It also ensures that a user will not miss calls when their extension is busy or unattended. Additionally, Message Waiting lets extension users: View and selectively answer messages left at their extension (display keyset only) Cancel all messages left at their extension Cancel messages they left at other extensions An extension user can leave Messages Waiting at any number of extensions. Also, any number of extensions can leave a Message Waiting at the same extension. A periodic VAU announcement may remind users that they have Messages Waiting. Conditions Reminder messages require a Voice Announce Unit (VAU Module). Default Setting Enabled.
362 FEATURES
In 0406:15, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0406:15, enter 1.
In 1021, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 1021, enter 1.
In 0419:3, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0419:3, enter 1.
In 1006, do not assign a function key for Message Waiting (code 1023).
No
Yes
Stop
0406 - COS Options (Part A), Item 15: Message Waiting In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to leave Messages Waiting. 0419 COS Options (Part B), Item 3: VAU Reminder Message Enable (1) or disable (0) the VAU Reminder Messages. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension. (384i Only) 1021 - Hotel Telephone Setup Enter 1 for this option if Single Line Telephone should be able to receive Messages Waiting. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Message Waiting (code 1023).
FEATURES 363
Programming (Contd)
Operation
To leave a Message Waiting: 1. Call busy or unanswered extension. 2. Dial 0 or press Message Waiting key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1023) 3. Press SPK to hang up. Your MW LED lights. To answer a Message Waiting: When you have a message, your MW LED flashes fast. 1. Press idle CALL key and dial *0 OR Press Message Waiting key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1023). If the called extension doesnt answer, dial 0 or press your Message Waiting key to automatically leave them a message. Normally, your MW LED goes out. If it continues to flash, you have new messages in your "Voice Mail" mailbox or a new "General Message". Go to "To check your messages" below. To cancel all your Messages Waiting: This includes messages you have left for other extensions and messages other extension have left for you. 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial 873. 3. Press SPK to hang up.
364 FEATURES
To check your messages: 1. Press CHECK 2. Dial *0. You can have any combination of the message types in the table below on your phone.
If you see. . .
You have. . .
VOICE MESSAGE New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox n MESSAGES CHECK MESSAGE VAU GENERAL MESSAGE CHECK MESSAGE Not listened to the current General Message
3. 4.
Press VOL L or VOL M to scroll through your display. When you find the message you want to answer, press CALL1. Youll either: Go to your Voice Mail mailbox. Listen to the new General Message. Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting.
FEATURES 365
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Microphone Cutoff lets a keyset user turn off their phones handsfree or handset microphone at any time. When activated, Microphone Mute prevents the caller from hearing conversations in the users work area. The user may turn off the microphone while their telephone is idle, busy on a call or ringing. The microphone stays off until the user turns it back on. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled (using MIC key).
Programming
Start
No
Yes
No
Should extension have a Microphone Cutoff key for Handset Microphone Cutoff?
Yes
Stop
366 FEATURES
Related Features
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing Microphone Cutoff does not operate if the user calls another extension and the called extension responds without lifting the handset or pressing SPK. With Microphone Cutoff enabled, Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a single beep (instead of two). Programmable Function Keys Handset Microphone Cutoff requires a uniquely programmed function key. Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot use Microphone Cutoff.
Operation
To mute your telephones handset or Handsfree microphone while on a call: 1. Press MIC. This only turns off the Handsfree microphone. OR Press Microphone Cutoff key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1026). This turns off both the handset and Handsfree microphone. To turn your telephones microphone back on: 1. Press MIC. Use MIC only if you pressed it initially to turn off your Handsfree microphone. OR Press Microphone Cutoff key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1026). Use the Microphone Cutoff key only if you pressed it initially to turn off your handset or Handsfree microphone.
FEATURES 367
Description
124i Available. In Base 4.02 and EXCPRU 4.02 and higher, a Call Coverage key will flash when the covered extension has a second call waiting. 384i Available. In system software 3.07.10 and higher, a Call Coverage key will flash when the covered extension has a second call waiting.
Multiple Directory Numbers let a keyset have more than one extension number. Calls can route to the keysets installed number or to the keysets "virtual extension" Multiple Directory Number key. This helps users identify incoming calls. For example, an extension installed at 304 (Sales) could have a virtual extension for 460 (Service). Calls to 304 ring the extension normally. Calls to 460 ring the Multiple Directory Number key. This lets the user at extension 304 differentiate Sales calls from Service calls. Call Coverage A keyset can have Multiple Directory Number keys set up as Call Coverage keys for co-workers extensions. The Call Coverage key lights when the co-workers extension is busy and flashes slowly when the co-worker has an incoming call. The Call Coverage key can ring immediately when a call comes into the covered extension, ring after a delay or not ring at all. In addition, the keyset user can press the Call Coverage key to intercept their co-workers incoming call. The user can also go off hook and press the Call Coverage key to call the covered extension. If the covered extension is busy and they receive a second call, the covering extensions Call Coverage key will flash. The user just presses the flashing key to pick up the call. A keyset can have Multiple Directory Number/Call Coverage keys for may different extensions and virtual extensions. In addition, co-workers can share the same Multiple Directory Numbers. For example, everyone in the Service Department could have a key for the Sales Departments virtual extension. Conditions (A.) More than one extension can share the same Multiple Directory Number. (B.) An extension can have more than one Multiple Directory Number (limited only by the number of available function keys). Default Setting Disabled.
368 FEATURES
In 0502, assign unused extension numbers (e.g., 700) to virtual extension ports (73-96 in 124i, 257-384 in 384i).
In 1006, do not assign a function key for Multiple Directory Number (code 1036).
No
Should extension have function key appearance for Multiple Directory Number?
Yes
In 1006, assign function key for Multiple Directory Number (code 1036 + virtual or covered port's extension number).
Stop In 1016, select the Multiple Directory Number function key and enter 1. Should Multiple Directory Number key ring? No
Yes
In 1028, enter the Multiple Directory Number function key and enter 1.
Delayed
Immediate
In 1028, enter the Multiple Directory Number function key and enter 0.
No
Yes
FEATURES 369
In 1018, assign one of four ring tones to each extension and virtual extension port that appears under a Multiple Directory Number key.
Yes
Do you want an extension's Multiple Directory Number keys to ring with unique tones? No
In 1016, select the Multiple Directory Number function key and enter 0.
Do you want to change the ringing priority of simultaneous ringing Multiple Directory Number calls?
No
Yes
In 1019, change the priority of the Multiple Directory Number ring tones.
Stop
370 FEATURES
Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Extensions can have Call Coverage Keys for ACD Groups. Refer to Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage for ACD Groups in the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**) for the specifics. Class of Service Class of Service options apply to Multiple Extension Appearances. Department Calling Multiple Extension Appearances can be in Department Calling Groups. Group Call Pickup Multiple Extension Appearances can be in Call Pickup Groups. Programmable Function Keys This feature requires uniquely programmed function keys. Toll Restriction The system restricts calls made from Multiple Extension Appearance keys.
FEATURES 371
372 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Music on Hold (MOH) sends music to calls on Hold and parked calls. The music lets the caller know that his call is waiting, not forgotten. Without Music on Hold, the system provides silence to these types of calls. The Music on Hold source can be internal (synthesized) or from a customer-provided music source (i.e., tape deck, receiver, etc.). The customer-provided source can connect to an ACI port or to a connector on the CPRU PCB. There is a switch on the CPRU PCB to determine which CPRU source is active: the connector or the internally synthesized music. The method the system uses to provide Music on Hold (and Background Music) depends on the setting of a jumper on the CPRU PCB, how the music source is connected and the setting in program 0914. The table below shows how these settings interact.
BGM/MOH Operation Matrix To get this result . . . CPRU "S" Jumper INT EXT Set these options . . . External Music Source MOH (1&2) BGM (5&6) Program 0914
MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls None Background Music None MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls Internally synthesized 1 Background Music None MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls None Background Music None MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls From connected music source Background Music From connected music source MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls Internally synthesized 1 Background Music None
255
254
255
255
254
FEATURES 373
MOH for Intercom Calls Internally synthesized 1 MOH for Trunk Calls Internally synthesized 1 Background Music From connected music source MOH for Intercom Calls From connected music source MOH for Trunk Calls From connected music source Background Music None MOH for Intercom Calls None MOH for Trunk Calls None Background Music From connected music source MOH for Intercom Calls From connected music source MOH for Trunk Calls None Background Music None MOH for Intercom Calls None MOH for Trunk Calls From connected music source Background Music From connected music source
1
254
254
254
255
255
If Program 0302, Item 1: MOH Tone is set to 0, Music on Hold will not be provided.
Note: In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be required from the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers (ASCAP) or other similar organizations, if radio, television broadcasts or music other than material not in the public domain are transmitted through the Music on Hold feature of telecommunications systems. Nitsuko America hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled (internally synthesized).
374 FEATURES
ACI
In 0914, assign ACI software port (1-192 in 384i, 1-6 in 124i) to selected trunk.
External Terminals
No need to change 0302 - entering an ACI software port in 0914 overrides it.
Should extension user be able to change the Music on Hold tone (by dialing Service Code 881)?
Yes
No
Stop
FEATURES 375
Note: When connecting your music source to an ACI port, additional ACI programming is required. Refer to the "Analog Communications Interface (ACI)" feature for the specifics on setting up a 3-ACI Module
Related Features
Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot change the Music on Hold tone.
Operation
To change the Music on Hold tone: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 881. 3. Dial the password (normally 0000). 4. Dial Music on Hold tone code: 0 No tone 1 Minuet 2 Nocturne 5. Press SPK to hang up.
376 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Extensions and trunks can have names instead of just circuit numbers. These names show on a keysets display when the user places or answers calls. Extension and trunk names make it easier to identify callers. The user does not have to refer to a directory when processing calls. A name can be up to 10 digits long, consisting of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks and spaces. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowcharts on the following pages.
0406 - COS Options, Item 37: Trunk Name Display, Seizing In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a trunks name/number when the user seizes the trunk (incoming or outgoing). 0406 - COS Options, Item 38: Trunk Name Display, Incoming In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a trunks name/number when the trunk is ringing. 0406 - COS Options, Item 39: Extension Name Display, Answer In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of the incoming Intercom callers name/number after the extension user answers the call. (The user answers by pressing SPK or lifting the handset.) 0406 - COS Options, Item 40: Intercom Name Display, Incoming In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of the incoming Intercom callers name/number. This is for the pre-answer and Handsfree Answerback display. 0406 - COS Options, Item 85: Extension Names In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to program their name. 0502 - Extension Numbers and Names Program names for system extensions (ports 001-256). 0903 - Trunk Names Program names for system trunks (001-128). 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
FEATURES 377
Start
No
Yes
Do you want a trunk's name/number displayed when a user seizes the trunk?
No
Yes
No
Yes
378 FEATURES
Continued from previous page. Answering the call means the called user presses SPK or lifts the handset.
No
Yes
This is for the pre-answer and Handsfree Answerback display. Should extension user see the name/number of an incoming Intercom caller before answering the call?
No
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 379
Operation
To program your extensions name: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 800 3. Enter name (see below). Your name can be up to 10 digits maximum. When entering a letter, press DND to toggle between upper and lower case. When entering names, use the One-Touch Keys and dial pad keys as shown below. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press DSS1 three times. DSS1 = A-D DSS2 = E-H DSS3 = I-L DSS4 = M-P DSS5 = Q-T DSS6 = U-Z DSS7 = -- (hyphen) DSS8 = - (space) DSS9 = Extended ASCII characters DSS10 = Punctuation marks CHECK saves text entry after you select it. Dial pad digits = 1-9, # and * CONF (TRF) deletes entries (i.e., backspaces over previous entries)
Note: You dont have to press CHECK after numerical entries or after your last entry. 4. 5. Press HOLD. Press SPK to hang up.
380 FEATURES
Description
124i Not Available. 384i Available requires system software 3.07.15 or higher.
Use the built in networking feature to integrate multiple phone systems into a single "virtual" communications system. Interconnected with T1 tie lines, each phone system becomes a node on the network that can communicate with any other phone system node.
Centralized Network Attendant Centralized Network Attendant allows multiple networked systems to share a single centralized attendant. This centralized attendant can receive calls from and transfer calls to any destination in any network node. Unanswered calls recall and route as if they were part of a single, much larger system. Shared (Common) Voice Mail (NVM-2000) With Shared Voice Mail, a single NVM-2000 (version 7.0 or higher) can handle the voice messaging requirements of an entrie network. Many powerful Voice Mail integration features are available over the network, including: - Voice Mail key operation (including message lamps) - Call Forward to Voice Mail - Personal Answering Machine Emulation - Conversation Record Optionally, up to four Voice Mail systems can share the voice messaging requirements of an entire network. Each of the Voice Mail systems is dedicated to a portion of the total network and is responsible only for supporting that portion
FEATURES 381
Flexible Network Routing Use network routes to set up "single channel" networking between many separate systems or use multiple networking channels per system for greater network performance. Data tables in the system program define the routing for each extension in each network node. These tables are easily customized to meet the requirements of each networking configuration.
For additional information on Networking, refer to the 384i Networking Guide (P/N 92000LAN**). Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Refer to the 384i Networking Guide (P/N 92000LAN**).
Related Features
Refer to the 384i Networking Guide (P/N 92000LAN**).
Operation
Refer to the 384i Networking Guide (P/N 92000LAN**).
382 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Night Service lets system users activate one of the Night Service modes. Night Service redirects calls to their night mode destination, as determined by Assigned and Universal Night Answer programming. A user typically activates Night Service after normal working hours, when most employees are unavailable to answer calls. The system also provides external contacts to enable Night Service. There are four Night Service modes: Day Mode -for normal working hours Night Mode - after hours (usually evening) Midnight Mode - late at night to early in the morning Rest mode - interval usually used for lunch Assigned Night Answer (ANA) With Assigned Night Answer, Night Service has calls ring extensions directly. Assigned Night Answer provides an answering point for Night Service calls. For certain applications, this may be more appropriate than Universal Night Answer. For example, you could program trunks to ring the security station telephone during off hours. Universal Night Answer (UNA) Universal Night Answer makes incoming calls ring over the External Paging speakers. With UNA, an employee can go to a telephone and press the flashing line key or use "Universal Answer" to pick up the call. For more on setting up Universal Answer, turn to the "Central Office Calls, Answering" feature. Conditions The CPRU PCB has connections for a Night Mode switch. During installation, you connect a mechanical switch to these contacts to provide an additional method of Night Mode switching. Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details. Default Setting System is always in the Day Mode.
FEATURES 383
Start
In 0910, assign trunks to Ring Groups that you won't use for night ringing. Trunks that ring the same way should be in the same Ring Group.
No
Yes
In 0910, assign trunks to Ring Groups for night ringing. Trunks that ring the same way at night should be in the same Ring Group.
In 0909, select night ringing Ring Group (e.g., 120), assign extensions to that group and make them ring (1).
No
Yes
In 0911, make sure UNA trunks are in Access Maps that allow incoming access.
In 0912, make sure the Access Maps the extension uses at night allow incoming access for the UNA trunks.
384 FEATURES
No
Yes
In 0401:2, enter 0.
In 0401:1, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0401:1, enter 1.
In 0406:2, enter 0.
No
Should extensions be able to switch the Night Mode (i.e., dial Service Code 818 or press function key)?
Yes
In 0406:2, enter 1.
FEATURES 385
Should extension user be able to change the Night Mode by pressing a function key? No
Yes
For Day Mode switching, in 1006 assign a function key code 1039 (plus password).
For Night Mode switching, in 1006 assign a function key code 1040 (plus password).
For Midnight Mode switching, in 1006 assign a function key code 1041 (plus password).
For Rest Mode switching, in 1006 assign a function key code 1042 (plus password).
The system requires the password for function keys 1039-1042 and Service code 818.
Stop
386 FEATURES
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering and Placing/Ring Groups There are separate Access Map and Ring Group programming entries for each Night Service mode (Day, Night, Midnight, and Rest). Also, "Universal Answer" allows an extension user to pick up a UNA call. Paging, External With Universal Night Answer, outside calls can ring External Paging Zones. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify activating Night Service.
FEATURES 387
388 FEATURES
telemanuals.com
Features N-Z Off Hook Signaling
Description
124i Available. Off Hook Signaling Enhancements are not available. 384i Available. Off Hook Signaling Enhancements require system software 3.07.24 or higher.
When a user calls an extension busy on a call, they can send an off hook signal indicating they are trying to get through. The signal is either off hook ringing or a voice announcement over the idle (second ) line appearance. Off Hook Signaling helps important callers get through, without waiting in line for the called extension to become free. Note that a voice announcement over the idle (second) line appearance can only occur if the called extension is busy on a handset call. The system provides the following Off Hook Signaling options: Called Extension Block The called extensions Class of Service may block incoming Off Hook Signaling attempts. This is beneficial to users that dont want interruptions while on a call. Automatic Signaling Calling a busy extension automatically initiates Off Hook Signaling. This option is useful to receptionists, operators and others that must quickly process calls. This is set in the calling extensions Class of Service. Manual Signaling After reaching a busy extension, manual signaling gives the caller the choice of using Off Hook Signaling or activating other features. Extensions without automatic signaling have manual signaling. Selectable Off Hook Signaling Mode The Off Hook Signal can be idle channel ringing, a single beep in the handset, two beeps in the speaker or a voice announcement at the callers discretion.
Off Hook Signaling Enhancements The system enhances Off Hook Signaling with the following four Class of Service options: DID Off Hook Ringing Use this option to enable or disable an extensions Off Hook Signaling for incoming DID calls. If enabled, Off Hook Signaling occurs normally. If disabled, DID calls queue behind the extensions busy line appearance and the user gets no Off Hook Signaling indication. The second line appearance stays idle. The DID caller hears ringback tone while their call waits. DID Call Waiting An extension can optionally have a visual indication for waiting DID calls. If DID Call Waiting is enabled, the busy user will see a flashing line/loop key for the incoming incoming DID call. If disabled, the user will have no indication that a DID call is waiting. This option is used when DID Off Hook Ringing is also disabled (see above). Block Manual Off Hook Signals This option enables/disables a busy extensions ability to block off hook signals manually sent from a coworker. If disabled (not blocked), callers can dial 7 at busy or busy/ring to signal the extension. If enabled (blocked), nothing happens when the caller dials 7 to off hook signal. Block Camp On If an extension has Block Camp On enabled, callers to the extension cannot dial 2 to Camp On after hearing busy or busy/ring. If the extension has Block Camp On disabled, callers are not prevented from dialing 2 to Camp on after hearing busy or busy/ring.
FEATURES 389
390 FEATURES
Ring
No
Yes
Manually
Automatically
Set 0419:12 to 0.
No
Should an extension be able to receive Off Hook Signals from DID callers?
Yes
Set 0419:12 to 1.
Set 0419:13 to 1.
No
Yes
Set 0419:14 to 1.
No
Yes
Set 0419:14 to 0.
Set 0419:15 to 0.
Light Steady
When DID calls queue, should line key flash or light steady?
Flash
Set 0419:15 to 1.
FEATURES 391
Is the interval between Off Hook Signaling alerts (normally 10 seconds) adequate? Yes Should extension have one-button sending for Off Hook Signaling? No In Program 1008 Item 5, enter 2. The setting of 0401:11 toggles between normal ringing and Voice Announce. Should Off Hook Signaling alert extension with normal ringing, muted ringing, no ringing, one beep in handset or two beeps over speaker?
No
Yes
In Program 1006, assign a function key for Off Hook Signaling (code 1018).
Normal
None
In Program 1008 Item 5, enter 0. The setting of 0401:11 toggles between muted ringing and Voice Announce.
Stop
392 FEATURES
FEATURES 393
Operation
To send Off Hook Signals to an extension busy on a call: Your extension may send Off Hook Signals automatically. 1. Dial 7. OR Press Off Hook Signaling key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1018). You hear ringback. To have your call voice-announce, dial 1. To have Off Hook Signals ring your extension: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 893. To answer the signal, you must first hang up your current call or place it on Hold. To have Off Hook Signals voice-announce at your extension: You can only receive voice-announce while you are busy on a handset call. 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 892. If your extension has Handsfree, you can respond to an off-hook voice announcement by using Handsfree Answerback. If your extension doesnt have Handsfree, you must first place your initial call on Hold before responding.
394 FEATURES
Description
124i Available Entering names at a keyset requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Storing a Flash command requires system software Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i. Available Entering names at a keyset requires system software 3.06.02 or higher. Storing a Flash command requires system software 3.06.14 or higher.
One-Touch Calling gives a keyset user one button access to extensions, trunks and selected system features. This saves users time when accessing co-workers, clients and features they use most often. Instead of dialing a series of codes, the user need only press the One-Touch Key. An extension user can have One-Touch Keys programmed for: Direct Station Selection - one button access to extensions Personal Speed Dial - one button access to stored numbers (up to 25 digits long) Abbreviated Dialing - one button access to stored Abbreviated Dialing numbers Trunk Calling - one button access to trunks or trunk groups Service Codes - one button access to specific Service Codes
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
1 6 7
2 8
3 9
4 10
An extension user can chain dial with One-Touch Keys. For example, a user can store the number for a companys Automated Attendant in key 1 and employee extension numbers in keys 2-5. The user presses key 1 to call the company, then one of keys 2-5 to ring the employee want to speak with. An extension user or system administrator can optionally store a Flash command under a One-Touch Key. This is helpful for One-Touch Keys used as Personal Speed Dial bins. The stored Flash may be helpful to access features of the connected telco, PBX or Centrex. One-Touch Calling is the first level of operation of One-Touch Keys. In other words, One-Touch Calling occurs when the user just presses the key. There is a second level of One-Touch Key operation called One-Touch Serial Calling. The user accesses these functions by first pressing the Serial Operation key. Refer to the One-Touch Serial Operation feature.
92 0
-1
55
FEATURES 395
Related Features
One-Touch Serial Operation An extension user can use One-Touch Keys to store a series of operations. Programmable Function Keys Function keys can also give an extension user one-touch access to selected system features. Transfer When transferring a call, an extension user can press a Once-Touch Key instead of dialing the extension number.
Operation
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be up to 8 digits long.
When entering names, use the One-Touch Keys and dial pad keys as shown below. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press DSS1 three times. Press DND to toggle between upper and lower case letters. DSS1 = A-D DSS2 = E-H DSS3 = I-L DSS4 = M-P DSS5 = Q-T DSS6 = U-Z DSS7 = -- (hyphen) DSS8 = - (space) DSS9 = Extended ASCII characters DSS10 = Punctuation marks CHECK saves text entry after you select it. Dial pad digits = 1-9, # and * CONF (TRF) deletes entries (i.e., backspaces over previous entries)
Note: You dont have to press CHECK after numerical entries or after your last entry.
396 FEATURES
FEATURES 397
398 FEATURES
FEATURES 399
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
An extension user can have One-Touch Serial Operation store a series of feature steps under a One-Touch Key. This simplifies extension operation by giving each user the ability to have customized feature keys. For example, an extension user could have a One-Touch Serial Operations Key automatically forward all their calls to extension 310. One-Touch Serial Operation can store up to 24 of the following operations:
Allowed Serial Operations
Service Codes Digits 0-9, # and* One-Touch Keys Function Keys Pause (by pressing MIC)
SPK, DND, VOLUME L and VOLUME M, CALL, HOLD, DIAL, FLASH, LND, CONF (TRF), CHECK, and CLEAR keys
One-Touch Serial Operation is the second level of operation of One-Touch Keys. The user must press the Serial Operation key before the One-Touch Key. The first level of operation is One-Touch Calling, which occurs when the user just presses the key. Refer to the One-Touch Calling feature. Conditions (A.) One-Touch Serial Operation does not provide a Busy Lamp Field (BLF). (B.) If a user stores a One-Touch Key as part of a serial operation, the system uses the first level (One-Touch function). If there is a serial operation stored under the key selected, the system ignores it.
Related Features
One-Touch Calling Once-Touch Calling gives an extension user one button access to extensions, trunks and selected system features. Programmable Function Keys One-Touch Serial Operation requires a uniquely programmed function key.
400 FEATURES
1 If you store a One-Touch Key as part of a serial operation, the system uses first level (One-Touch) function.
FEATURES 401
Description
124i Available eight External Paging zones and eight alarm circuits maximum. Combined Paging is always available. 384i Available eight External Paging zones and 16 alarm circuits maximum. Combined Paging is available prior to system software 3.04 only if a PGDU is installed.
With External Paging, a user can broadcast announcements over paging equipment connected to external Paging zones. When a user pages on of these external zones, the system broadcasts the announcement over the speakers. Like Internal Paging, External Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement without calling each extension individually. The system allows up to eight External Paging zones. Each zone requires a port on a PGDU PCB, with a maximum of four external paging circuits per PCB. You must have two PGDU PCBs to get all eight external zones. In addition, each external zone has an associated relay contact. When a user pages to a zone, the corresponding contact activates (closes). This provides for Paging amplifier control. Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details. Combined Paging Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and corresponding external zone. For example, you can Page your companys warehouse and outside loading dock at the same time. Combined Paging is available for Paging zones 1-8 and All Call. Refer to page 406 for more on setting up Combined Paging. In 384i system software 3.04 or higher and 124i, Combined Paging is available even without a PGDU PCB installed. Conditions External Paging requires PGDU PCBs and customer-provided Paging equipment. Default Setting External Paging functions once connected.
402 FEATURES
Stop
No
Yes
In 1606, assign the External Zones set in 1603 to External Paging Groups 1-8.
(384i Only) In 1603, assign an External Paging zone (PGDU port 1-8) to a Tenant Group (1-4).
No
Should two beeps (i.e., splash tone) precede External Paging announcements?
Yes
No
Yes
(384i Only) In 1604 Items 3-18, enter 0. (124i Only) In 1604 Items 3-10, enter 0.
No
Yes
(384i Only) In 1604 Items 3-18, enter 1. (124i Only) In 1604 Items 3-10, enter 1.
Continued on next page. To have outside calls ring External Paging at night, refer to the Night Service feature and Program 1605.
FEATURES 403
In 0120, select a different CODEC gain type for the PGDU ports.
No
Yes
In 1006, do not assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 1004 + zone) and External All Call Paging (code 1005).
No
Yes
In 1006, assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 1004 + zone) and External All Call Paging (code 1005).
Stop
404 FEATURES
Related Features
Door Box If a PGDU PCB has a Door Box connected, you cannot use that port for External Paging. Night Service (Universal Night Answer) To have outside calls ring External Paging Zones at night, refer to the Night Service feature and Program 1605. Paging, Internal Internal Paging broadcasts announcements to extensions in programmed Internal Paging Zones. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify External Paging operation. Tenant Service The system does not allow cross-tenant External Paging.
Operation
To Page into an external zone: 1. Press External Paging key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 + zone for External Paging zones or 1005 for External All Call Paging). 2. Make Announcement. OR 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call). OR Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call). 3. Make Announcement.
FEATURES 405
Description
124i Available eight Internal Paging Groups (Zones). 384i Available 32 Internal Paging Groups (Zones).
Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keyset users. The 384i system allows All Call (all zone) Paging and up to 32 separate Internal Paging Zones in each tenant group. The 124i system allows up to eight Internal Paging Zones. When a user makes a Zone Paging announcement, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions in the zone dialed. With All Call Paging, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions programmed to receive All Call Paging. An extension can be a member of only one Internal Paging Zone. Like External Paging, Internal Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement without calling each extension individually. Combined Paging Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and corresponding external zone. For example, you can Page your companys warehouse and outside loading dock at the same time. Combined Paging is available for Paging zones 1-8 and All Call. Optionally, you can change the Combined Paging assignments. For example, you can associate External Paging Zone 1 with Internal Paging Zone 4. In 384i system software 3.04 or higher and 124i, Combined Paging is available even without a PGDU PCB installed. Conditions (A.) Internal Paging does not require a PGDU PCB. (B.) You can assign any number of extensions to an Internal or All Call Paging Zone. Default Setting Enabled.
406 FEATURES
In 1601, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 1601, assign an extension to an Internal Paging zone (1-8 in 124i, 01-32 in 384i).
In 1602, do not program names for the Internal Paging zones (1-8 in 124i, 01-32 in 384i).
Number
When Paging, should user see a Paging zone name or the zone number on the telephone display?
Name
In 1602, program names for the Internal Paging zones (1-8 in 124i, 01-32 in 384i).
Turned Off
Should the tones that precede an Internal Page be normal volume, muted or turned off?
Normal
The system mutes the tones only if the user sets the telephone volume control switch to medium or high.
Muted
If the interval is too short, Internal Paging announcements may be cut off. Is the maximum duration setting for Internal Paging adequate? No In 0405 Item 18, set the Page Announcement Duration.
Yes
FEATURES 407
No
Yes
Paging zones are 1-8 in 124i, 01-32 in 384i). In 1006, do not assign function keys for Internal Paging zones or Internal All Call. Should extension have one-button Internal Zone Paging? In 1006, assign function keys for Internal Paging zones (code 1006 + zone) and Internal All Call (code 1076).
No
Yes
No
Should extension be able to receive All Call (All Zone) Internal Paging?
Yes
In 1609, do not assign a name to the All Call Internal Paging Zone.
Standard Display
When All Call Paging, should extension paging see All Call Paging name or standard display?
Name
Enter 0 for All Call. For the default assignments, turn back to the chart under the Default Setting heading. Are the default Combined Paging assignments acceptable? In 1610, for each External Zone (Zone No.) enter a corresponding Internal Zone (Group No.).
No
Yes
Stop
408 FEATURES
FEATURES 409
Operation
To make an Internal Page announcement: Keyset 1. Press the zones Internal Paging key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1006 + 1-9 or 01-32 for zones, 1076 for All Call). OR 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 801 and the Paging Zone number (0-9 or 00-32). Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging. OR Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call). 3. Make announcement. 4. Press SPK to hang up. Single Line Telephone Lift handset. Dial 801 and the Paging Zone number (0-9 or 00-32). Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging. Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call). Make announcement. Hang up.
1. 2.
3. 4.
410 FEATURES
Description
124i Available 8 System Park orbits. Personal Park requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Enhanced Dial Buffering not implemented. Splitting between calls on Park keys not available. 384i Available 32 System Park orbits. Personal Park requires system software 3.04 or higher. Enhanced Dial Buffering requires system software 3.06.06 or higher. Splitting between calls on Park keys requires system software 3.06.14 or higher.
Park places a call in a waiting state (called a Park Orbit) so that an extension user may pick it up. There are two types of Park: System and Personal. Use System Park when you want to have the call wait in a system orbit. (The 384i system has up to 32 System Park Orbits; the 124i has eight.) Personal Park allows a user to Park a call at their extension so a co-worker can pick it up. After parking a call in orbit, a user can Page the person receiving the call and hang up. The paged party dials a code or presses a programmed Park key to pick up the call. With Park, it is not necessary to locate a person to handle their calls. A call parked for too long will recall the extension that initially parked it. Enhanced Dial Bufferingg The system can optionally provide additional dial buffering. In certain high traffic sites, (e.g., with a high volume of dialed paging and parking), standard dial buffering can occasionally lose digits that a user dials. By enabling enhanced buffering, an additional level of buffering occurs which helps ensure that the system processes all digits a user dials. Splitting Between Parked Calls A keyset user can retrieve two calls from Park Orbit (for which they dont have line appearances) and easily split (alternate) between them. The split operation brings the calls to the users telephone and frees up the Park Orbits. Conditions (A.) An extension can park a call in any Park Orbit. However, an extension can only pick up a call Parked by a member of its own Park group (see Program 1014). (B.) When a DSL user parks a call, they must wait the Interdigit Time (normally 10 seconds) before trying to retrieve it. Default Setting Enabled.
FEATURES 411
No
Yes
In 1006, do not assign function keys for Park Orbits (code 1033 + orbit number).
No
Yes
In 1006, assign function keys for Park Orbits (code 1033 + orbit number).
If the Park Hold Time is too short, calls recall before the paged callers can pick them up. Is the time that unretrieved calls remain parked adequate? No In 0405 item 66, change the Park Hold Time.
Yes
If a parked call recalls, does it ring the extension that parked it for an adequate time?
No
Yes
In 0419 Item 6, enter 0 for each extension that should use the standard Dial Buffering.
Standard
(384i 3.06.06 or higher) Should the system use Enhanced Dial Buffering or the standard dial buffering?
Enhanced
In 0419 Item 6, enter 1 for each extension that should use Enhanced Dial Buffering.
Stop
412 FEATURES
Related Features
Hold A user can place a call in a temporary waiting state without putting it in orbit. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Park operation.
Operation
To Park a call in a system orbit: You can Park Intercom or trunk calls. 1. Press Park key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1033 + orbit). The Park key LED lights. If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit. 2. Use Paging to announce call. 3. Press SPK to hang up. If not picked up, the call will recall to you. OR 1. At keyset, press HOLD. OR At single line telephone, hookflash. 2. Dial #6 and the Park orbit (01-32 in 384i, 1-8 in 124i). If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit. 3. Use Paging to announce call. 4. Press SPK to hang up. If not picked up, the call will recall to you. Note: The parked call recalls after the Park Hold Time (Program 0405, Item 66). The call rings the extension to which it recalled for the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program 0405, Item 27). The call then goes on Hold for the Park Hold Time - then recalls again for the Hold Recall Callback Time. The call continues to cycle between Hold and recall until the extension user answers the call or the outside party hangs up.
FEATURES 413
414 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
You can connect your phone system trunks to Centrex/PBX lines, rather than to telco trunk circuits. This makes the trunk inputs into the system 500/2500 type compatible Centrex/PBX extensions, rather than telco circuits. PBX Compatibility lets the system be a node (i.e., satellite) in a larger private telephone network. To place outside calls when the system is behind a PBX, phone system users must first dial the PBXs trunk access code (usually 9). The system provides the following PBX Compatibility options:
PBX Trunk Access Code Screening The system can monitor the numbers users dial and screen for PBX trunk access codes. The system can screen for up to 10 trunk access codes. The codes can be one or two digits long, consisting of the digits 0-9, # and *. (You use the FLASH key as a wild card entry.) PBX Trunk Toll Restriction The system can provide the Toll Restriction for the PBX trunk, or restriction can be handled solely by the connected PBX. If the phone system provides the restriction, it restricts the digits dialed after the PBX access code. PBX Call Restriction When the phone system does the Toll Restriction, it can further restrict users from dialing PBX extensions. In this case, the only valid numbers are those dialed after the PBX trunk access code. The only PBX facility phone system users can access are the PBXs outside trunks. Automatic Pause The system automatically pauses when it sees a PBX trunk access code during manual dialing, Abbreviated Dialing, Last Number Redial, Repeat Redial and Save Number Dialed. This gives the connected PBX time to set up its trunk circuits.
FEATURES 415
0114 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers, Item 9: Flash If the CONF (TRF) key is set for transfer (in Program 0402, Item 2), use this program to set the duration of the flash that occurs when a user presses the CONF (TRF) key. 0402 - Tenant Group Options, Part B, Item 2: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part A) To simplify PBX Transfer, assign the CONF (TRF) key for flash (entry 2). Set the duration of the flash in Program 0114 Item 9. 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 10: PBX Call Restriction For each Toll Restriction Class, enter 1 to restrict calls on the PBX trunk to outside calls only. Enter 0 to allow users to dial PBX extensions. 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 9: PBX Access Code Enter the system PBX access codes. The system can have up to 10 codes. A code can be one or two digits long. Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. Use the FLASH key as a "dont care" digit. 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 1 (Signaling Type), 2 (Ring Detect Type) and 3 (CODEC Gain Type) Set these options for compatibility with the connected PBX. 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 7-10: Behind PBX For each PBX trunk port, enter 1. You make a separate entry for each Night Service mode. 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 19: Toll Restriction For each PBX trunk port, enable (0) or disable (1) Toll Restriction. 1004 - Toll Restriction Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each extension.
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing The system automatically pauses after it finds a PBX access code in an Abbreviated Dialing bin. If Abbreviated Dialing routes a call to a PBX trunk, it does not automatically insert a PBX access code. It outdials the digits just as they are stored. Central Office Calls, Answering and Ring Groups Users answer incoming calls on PBX trunks just like other trunks. All of the relevant access and Ring Group programming applies. Refer to these features for more details. Central Office Calls, Placing Except for dialing the PBX access code, users place calls on PBX trunks just like other trunks. All of the relevant access programming applies. Refer to the Central Office Calls Placing feature for more details. Direct Inward Lines You can have DILs route from the connected PBX. Users can access these trunks for outgoing PBX calls. All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply. Direct Inward System Access You can program incoming DISA trunks to be outgoing PBX trunks. All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply. Flash Flash may allow access to certain PBX features - like Transfer. Make sure you program Flash for compatibility with the connected PBX Optionally, the CONF (TRF) key on a keyset can be a Flash key (see Program 0402 Item 2). Pulse to Tone Conversion The system does not provide automatic Pulse to Tone Conversion after outdialing the PBX trunk access code.
416 FEATURES
Start
Check Program 0901 Items 1, 2 and 3 for compatibility with the connected PBX.
System
PBX
Go to A User must dial access code. User cannot call PBX extensions. Yes In Program 0701 Item 10, enter 1. Restriction begins after user dials PBX access code.
In Program 0701 Item 10, enter 0. Restriction begins after user dials PBX access code.
No
Yes
In 0402 Item 2, assign the TRFR key for flash (entry 2).
Stop
FEATURES 417
Operation
To place a call over a PBX trunk: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial 804. OR At single line telephone, lift handset and dial 804. 2. Dial PBX trunk group number (1-9, 01-32 or 001-128). 3. Dial PBX access code and number OR 1. (Keyset only) Press PBX trunk group key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1012 + group). 2. Dial PBX access code and number. OR 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial 9. OR At single line telephone, lift handset and dial 9. 2. Dial PBX access code and number. OR 1. Press PBX Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1011). 2. Dial PBX access code and number OR 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, Lift handset. 2. Dial #9. 3. Dial PBX trunk number (e.g., 005 for line 5). 4. Dial PBX access code and number. OR 1. Press PBX trunk key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1 to 128). 2. Dial PBX access code and number. Note: In all cases above, Toll Restriction may prevent your call.
418 FEATURES
Description
124i Not available. 384i Consult your sales representative for availability.
The PC Attendant Console is a Windows-based call processing workstation for the systems "power users" your attendants and receptionists. The intuitive graphical interface combined with tightly integrated keyboard and mouse operation ease the burden of handling high call volumes. Unique features of the PC Attendant include: On-screen DSS/BLF display Transfer by name Incoming calls grouped by type User programmable function keys Tab metaphor internal, external , feature and function key directories Text messaging Multi-tasking operation The PC Attendant Console is available in two configurations: turnkey (P/N 92590) and kit (P/N 92690). The turnkey unit is a complete package that consists of a PC with monitor, mouse and keyboard with PC Attendant software and hardware installed. The PC Attendant kit contains PC Attendant software and the PC Interface PCB. You install the kit in a PC of your choosing which meets the following minimum requirements: Windows 3.1 or higher 486/66 processor 8 MByte RAM VGA video card with 2 MByte VRAM 8 MByte free disk space 1 full length ISA slot available on the PCs mother board Conditions The PC Attendant is not currently available in 124i. Default Setting Refer to the PC Attendant Console User Guide (P/N 92600ATT**).
Programming
Refer to the PC Attendant Console User Guide (P/N 92600ATT**).
Related Features
Refer to the PC Attendant Console User Guide (P/N 92600ATT**).
Operation
Refer to the PC Attendant Console User Guide (P/N 92600ATT**).
FEATURES 419
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Prime Line Selection allows an extension user to place or answer a call over a specific trunk by just lifting the handset. The user does not have to first press keys or dial codes. This simplifies handling calls on a frequently used trunk. Prime Line Selection has the following two modes of operation:
Outgoing Prime Line Preference Lifting the handset seizes the Prime Line. Outgoing Prime Line Preference would help a telemarketer who always needs a free line to call prospective clients. The telemarketer just lifts the handset and the Prime Line is always available. (Outgoing Prime Line Preference may be affected by Incoming Prime Line Preference -- see Programming below.) Incoming Prime Line Preference When the Prime Line rings the extension, lifting the handset answers the call. Incoming Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly answer customers service calls and then dispatch repair technicians. The dispatcher would have the assurance than whenever a customer calls in, the dispatcher just lifts the handset get their call. (Incoming Prime Line Preference can optionally seize an idle line appearance -- see Programming below.)
Conditions The Nitsuko 900 cordless telephone does not support Prime Line Preference. Default Setting Disabled.
420 FEATURES
Start
No
Program Trunk Group Routing: - Assign trunks to groups in 0905. - Assign trunk groups to routes in 0906. - Assign routes to extensions in 0907.
In Program 0911, assign each Prime Line trunk to a different access map.
In Program 0912, assign each extension with a Prime Line to a different access map.
No
Yes
In Program 0912, assign more than one extension to the same access map.
In Program 0912, deny outbound access to all trunks except the Prime Line trunk.
If users phone is idle, they get dial tone on the programmed Prime Line trunk when they lift the handset.
Stop
FEATURES 421
In Program 0910, assign each Prime Line trunk to a different ring group.
In Program 0909, assign more than one extension to the same Prime Line ring group.
Yes
No
In Program 0909, assign each extension with an incoming Prime Line to a different Prime Line ring group.
Check other Program 0909 ring groups. If extension rings for other ring group calls, user can't indentify Prime Line calls.
Yes
When Prime Line rings, should lifting the handset answer the call?
No
With both Intercom and Prime Line ringing, should lifting the handset answer Intercom or Prime Line?
Stop
422 FEATURES
Related Features
Direct Inward Lines/Direct Inward System Access DILs and DISA calls also ring extensions directly, even if not allowed in ring group programming. Line Preference Prime Line Selection directly interacts with Line Preference.
Operation
To place a call on your Prime Line: 1. Lift handset. You hear dial tone on your Prime Line. To answer a call on your Prime Line: 1. Lift handset. Depending on your Line Preference programming, youll either answer the Prime Line or get dial tone on the idle line appearance.
FEATURES 423
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
While on a data call using an acoustic coupler, an extension user can implement Privacy to block incoming Off Hook Signals and Barge In attempts. The system establishes Privacy for the extension when the user presses the programmed Privacy key. It cancels Privacy when the user presses the Privacy key a second time or hangs up. Privacy assures the user that they will not be interrupted during an important call. Conditions This feature only pertains to data calls set up using a keyset and an acoustic coupler. It does not pertain to data calls using a DCI. (Privacy is automatic for these types of calls.) Default Setting Disabled.
Distant Modem
Trunk Call
PC
424 FEATURES
92
00
14
Modem
Coupler
Yes
No
Stop
0406 - COS Options, Item 7: Privacy In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use a Privacy key. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a Privacy key (code 1030).
Related Features
Barge In Enabling Data Privacy prevents Barge In and other off-hook tones from interrupting the data call. Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release A keyset user can release Privacy on their outside call so a co-worker can join in the conversation. Programmable Function Keys Data Privacy requires a uniquely programmed function key. Single Line Telephones Data Privacy does not apply to single line telephones.
FEATURES 425
426 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
A Private Line is a trunk reserved for a keyset for placing and answering calls. A user with a Private Line always knows when important calls are for them. Additionally, the user has their own trunk for placing calls that is not available to others in the system.
Incoming only The keyset has a Private Line only for incoming calls. The user cannot place calls on the Private Line. Outgoing only The keyset has a Private Line only for outgoing calls. The Private Line does not ring for incoming calls. Both ways The keyset has a Private Line for both incoming and outgoing calls.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 14-17: Trunk Service Type Set the Trunk Service Type to 4 if routing unanswered Private Lines to voice mail or 0 if not routing to voice mail. 0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extension to Private Lines ring group. Use option 1 for Incoming or Both Ways Private Lines. Use option 0 for Outgoing Private Lines. Do not assign any other extensions to the Private Line ring group. 0910 - Trunk Ring Group Assignment Assign Private Line to an unused "Private Line" ring group (1-128) (i.e., a ring group just for the Private Line). 0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup Assign Private Line to the Private Line Access Map (1-128) (see Program 0912 below). Use option 5 for Incoming, option 7 for Both Ways and option 4 for Outgoing. In all other Access Maps, give option 3 to the Private Line. 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment Assign extension to have Private Line to an unused "Private Line" Access Map. 0917 - DIL Assignment If routing unanswered Private Lines to voice mail, assign DILs to the extensions. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Make sure extension has a line key (e.g., 0012) for the Private Line.
FEATURES 427
In Program 1006, make sure extension's Private Line is assigned to a key. Remove the key assignment for all other extensions.
Yes
No
In Program 0910, assign Private Line to an unused "Private Line" ring group (i.e., just for the Private Line).
In Program 0909, assign the extension (with option 1) to Private Line's ring group (see step 4).
In Program 0911, assign Private Line to the "Private Line" access map (see step 3). Use option 5 (incoming and Hold access).
Yes
No
In Program 0909, assign extension (with option 1) to Private Line's ring group (see step 4).
In Program 0911, assign Private Line to the Private Line access map (see step 3). Use option 7 (incoming, outgoing, and Hold access).
Yes
No
In Program 0909, assign extension (with option 0) to Private Line's ring group.
In Program 0911, assign Private Line to a unique access map (i.e., one member). Use option 4 (outgoing and Hold access).
Yes
No
Stop In all other access maps, give access 3 (Hold) to Private Lines. Do not assign any other extensions to the Private Line ring groups.
Operation
To place a call on your Private Line: 1. Press Private Line key. 2. Dial number. To answer a call on your Private Line: 1. Press Private Line key.
FEATURES 429
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Each keyset has Programmable Function Keys. Programmable Function Keys simplify placing calls, answering calls and using certain features. You can customize the function of a keysets programmable keys from your administration telephone, or the extension user can do it themselves. Depending on your telephone, you either have 16, 24 or 32 Programmable Function Keys. Refer to Tables 1-4 and 1-5 for the Programmable Function Key functions.
Conditions None Default Setting The first 16 keys on a telephone are line keys (e.g., key 1 = line 0001). The remaining keys are unassigned.
430 FEATURES
92
-2
00
Start
Extension users dial Service Code 851 to program their function keys.
In 1006, you can optionally customize an extension's function keys from the system program.
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 431
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing/One-Touch Calling Abbreviated Dialing and One-Touch Calling also offer quick access to calls and features.
Operation
To change the function of a programmable key: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 851. 3. Press the key you want to program. 4. Enter the 4-digit key function. Available functions are 1000-1082 (refer to chart) and line keys 0001-0128. To undefine a key, enter 0000. To check the function of a programmable key: 1. Press CHECK. 2. Press the programmable key. The programmed function displays.
432 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
An extension can use Pulse to Tone Conversion on trunk calls. Pulse to Tone Conversion lets a user change their extensions dialing mode while placing a call. For systems in a Dial Pulse area, this permits users to access dialup OCCs (such as MCI) from their DP area. The user can, for example: Place a call to an OCC over a DP trunk. Depending on programming: Manually implement Pulse to Tone Conversion OR Wait 10 seconds. Dial the OCC security code and desired number. The system dials the digits after the conversion as DTMF. Conditions Pulse to Tone Conversion is only valid for Dial Pulse trunks (Program 0901 Item 1, options 0 or 1). Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Start
Manual
At an extension, should DP to DTMF conversion be automatic, manual or both? Both In 0104, enter 1 for both.
Automatic
Stop
FEATURES 433
Related Features
None
Operation
To convert your phones dialing to tone after placing your call on a pulse line: 1. Place call over pulse line. 2. Dial # to switch the DP trunk to DTMF dialing.
434 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
If a keyset user places a trunk call that is busy or unanswered, they can have Repeat Redial try it again later on. The user doesnt continually have to try the number again -- hoping it will go through. Repeat Redial automatically retries it (up to three times) until the called party answers. Conditions Lifting the handset will cancel Repeat Redial. Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 36: Repeat Redial Time Set the interval between Repeat Redial attempts (0-64800 seconds). 0405 -System Timers (Part A), Item 37: Repeat Redial Enable Time Set how long the system waits (0-64800 seconds) for the called party to answer after a Repeat Redial. If the called party doesnt answer within this interval, the system hangs up and tries again (after the Repeat Redial Time). For unanswered calls, the total time between retries in the sum of Items 36 and 37. 0406 - COS Options, Item 74: Repeat Redial In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to use Repeat Redial. 0415 - Repeat Redial Count Set how many times Repeat Redial will automatically repeat if the call does not go through. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Repeat Redial (code 1075).
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection For systems with Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the Repeat Redial call. Last Number Redial/Save Number Dialed An extension user can quickly redial their last call. Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot use Repeat Redial.
FEATURES 435
Start
No
Yes
When Repeat Redial retries a call and the called party is busy or doesn't answer, does the system wait an adequate interval before hanging up and trying again? Yes
No
No
Yes
Does Repeat Redial repeat an adequate number of times before canceling? Yes
No
Stop
436 FEATURES
FEATURES 437
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
While on a handset call, Reverse Voice Over lets a busy keyset user make a private Intercom call to an idle coworker. The idle co-worker can be at a keyset or 500/2500 set. The busy user just presses and holds down a programmed Reverse Voice Over key to make a private call to a specified co-worker. The initial caller cannot hear the Reverse Voice Over conversation. The private Intercom call continues until the Reverse Voice Over caller releases the key again. The initial call can be an outside call or an Intercom call. Reverse Voice Over could help a salesman, for example, when placing a call to an important client. The salesman can talk with the client and give special instructions to a secretary - without interrupting the initial call. When the keyset is idle, the Reverse Voice Over key functions the same as a Hotline key. A keysets Reverse Voice Over key also shows at a glance the status of the associated extension:
When the key is. . . The associated extension is . . .
Note: When the keyset is idle, the Reverse Voice Over provides one button calling to the associated extension (like a Hotline key). An extension user cannot, however, use the Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls. Conditions (A.) (384i Only) While active, Reverse Voice Over uses a circuit on a DTU-A or DTU-C PCB. Refer to the Conference feature for DTUA/C PCB programming. (B.) An extension can have Reverse Voice Over keys for more than one extension (limited only by the number of available function keys). Default Setting Disabled.
Programming 0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 20: BLF Control and
0406 - COS Options, Item 6: Automatic Off Hook Signaling Programs 0401 Item 20 and 0406 Item 6 set the conditions under which a Hotline, Reverse Voice Over or DSS Console key indicates that an extension is busy. With condition 1 in the following chart, the BLF LED is on only when both extension line appearances are busy. In conditions 2-4, the BLF LED is on when one line appearance is busy. Program 0406: Item 6 1 2 3 4
1
1 1 0 0
438 FEATURES
1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Reverse Voice Over (code 1056 + dest. ext.). 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Operation
WHEN YOURE ON A CALL . . . To place a Reverse Voice Over call: 1. Press and hold your Reverse Voice Over key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1056 + dest. ext.). Your Reverse Voice Over key lights steadily (green) and you can talk with the programmed Reverse Voice Over destination. To return to your initial caller: 1. Release the Reverse Voice Over key. If the co-worker you call hangs up, you return to the initial call automatically.
WHEN YOUR PHONE IS IDLE . . . To place a call to your Reverse Voice Over destination: 1. Press your Reverse Voice Over key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1056 + dest. ext.). You can optionally lift handset after this step for privacy.
FEATURES 439
Description
124i Available 16 Ring Groups. 384i Available 128 Ring Groups.
Ring Groups determine how trunks ring extensions. Generally, trunks ring extensions only if Ring Group programming allows. For example, to make a trunk ring an extension: Assign the trunk and the extension to the same Ring Group In the extensions Ring Group programming, assign ringing for the trunk. The 384i system allows up to 128 Ring Groups; the 124i allows up to 16. Any number of extensions and trunks can be in a specific group. Extensions and trunks can be in only one Ring Group at a time. If an extension has a line key for the trunk, Ring Group calls ring the line key. If the extension doesnt have a line key, the trunk rings the line appearance key. If an extension has a key for a trunk that is not in its ring group, the trunk follows Access Map programming. Conditions None Default Setting All extensions and trunks are in Ring Group 1, extension 301 rings for trunk calls and all other exten sions only flash.
440 FEATURES
Start
See the example on the following page. In 0910, assign trunks with the same ringing patterns to the same Ring Group. Does trunk ring all extensions the same way, for each Night Service mode? In 0910, assign all trunks to the same Ring Group.
No
Yes
In 0909, assign each extension to the Ring Group that has the trunks that should ring that phone.
Transferred calls will ring the CALL keys. In 1006, do not assign line keys to extensions (code 0001-0128). Should extensions have one-button access to ringing trunks? In 1006, assign line keys to extensions (code 0001-0128).
No
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 441
Note: For incoming calls, Ring Group programming (0909/0910) overrides Access Map programming (0911/0912) Use the charts below to program the following example: For this extension ...1 301 302 303
1
1 X -
2 X -
3 X
Ring Group > Ext. 301 Ext. 302 Ext 303 1 = Extension rings 0 = Extension doesnt ring
1
1 1 01 01
2 0
1
3 01 01 1
1 01
To allow extension user to answer flashing line, be sure to give extension incoming access to the trunk in Programs 0911 and 0912.
442 FEATURES
Operation
Refer to Central Office Calls, Answering.
FEATURES 443
Description
124i Available 96 extensions/virtual extensions and 24 Hotline assignments. 384i Available 384 extensions/virtual extensions and 50 Hotline assignments (in each Tenant Group).
With a Ringdown Extension, a user can call another extension by just lifting the handset. The call automatically goes through there is no need for the user to dial digits or press additional keys. Ringdown Extensions are frequently used for lobby phones, where the caller just lifts the handset to get the information desk. After the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset, ringdown occurs after a programmable interval. Depending on the setting of this interval, the extension user may be able to place other calls before the ringdown goes through. External Hotline is a variation of Ringdown. With External Hotline, an extension automatically dials a Common Abbreviated Dialing number when the user lifts the handset. Turn to "Hotline, External" for more. Conditions (A.) Ringdown extension has no effect on an extensions current (active) call. (B.) The Ringdown Extension user must lift the handset for ringdown to work. (C.) Ringdown Extension (Program 1013) has priority over External Hotline (Program 1024). Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 16: Ringdown Extension Timer After the user lifts the handset, the extension automatically calls the ringdown destination after this interval (0-64800 seconds). 0406 - COS Options, Item 41: Extension Ringdown In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) ringdown. If disabled in Class of Service, the settings in Program 1013 below have no effect. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension. 1013 - Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignments Program the ringdown (Hotline) source and destination (target) extension numbers. The 384i allows up to 50 source/target pairs in each Tenant Group. The 124i allows up to 24 source/target pairs.
444 FEATURES
Start
No
Yes
Immediate
Delayed
In Program 0405 Item 16, set the Ringdown Extension Timer to desired delay interval (64800 seconds max.).
In Program 1013, assign ringdown (Hotline) number, originator extension number and target extension number.
384i allows 50 Hotline assignments per Tenant Group. 124i allows 24 Hotline assignments.
Stop
FEATURES 445
Operation
To place a call if your extension has ringdown programmed: 1. Lift handset. If you want to place a trunk call, press a line key before lifting the handset. Depending on the setting of your ringdown timer, you may be able to dial an Intercom call before your ringdown goes through. If the destination has Handsfree Answerback enabled, your call will voice announce. If the destination has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled, your call will ring. To bypass ringdown (if enabled for your keyset): 1. Do not lift handset. 2. Press CALL. 3. Place Intercom or trunk call. To answer a call if you are another extensions ringdown destination: 1. Speak toward phone to answer incoming voice-announcement. OR Lift handset to answer ringing Intercom call.
446 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Room Monitor lets a keyset extension user listen to the sounds in a co-workers area. For example, the receptionist could listen for sounds in the warehouse when its left unattended. To use Room Monitor, the initiating extension and the receiving extension must activate it. An extension user can only Monitor one extension at a time. However, many extensions can Monitor the same extension at the same time. Conditions (A.) Room Monitor is for listening only. It does not allow for conversation between the monitoring and monitored extensions. (B.) An extension user cannot monitor an Attendant. (C.) The Nitsuko 900 cordless telephone does not support Room Monitor. Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Refer to Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0406 - COS Options, Item 54: Room Monitor, Initiating Extension In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to initiate Room Monitor. 0406 - COS Options, Item 55: Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to be monitored. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a function key as a Room Monitor key (code 1025) for both the extension being monitored and the extension initiating Room Monitor.
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys Room Monitor requires uniquely programmed function keys. Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot use Room Monitor.
FEATURES 447
Start
No
Yes
No
Yes
In 1006, assign a Room Monitor key (code 1025) to both the monitoring and monitored extension.
Stop
448 FEATURES
FEATURES 449
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Save Number Dialed permits an extension user to save their last outside number and easily redial it later on. For example, an extension user can recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. The system retains the saved number until the user stores a new one in its place. Save Number Dialed saves in system memory a dialed number up to 24 digits. The number can be any combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call. However, the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0406 - COS Options, Item 49: Save Number Dialed In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to use Save Number Dialed. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a function key as a Save key (code 1014).
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection For systems with Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects. Dial Tone Detection Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection. Last Number Redial An extension user can quickly redial the last number placed. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Save Number Dialed operation. Repeat Redial The system can automatically retry a trunk call that was unanswered or busy.
450 FEATURES
No
Yes
A keyset can not save numbers without a Save Number Dialed function key.
In 1006, assign a function key for Save Number Dialed (code 1014).
Stop
FEATURES 451
1. 2.
To redial a saved number: Keyset 1. (Optional) Press line key. This selects a specific trunk for the call. 2. Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1014). The stored number dials out. OR 1. Press idle CALL key 2. Dial 815. OR Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1014). Save Number Dialed automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call. The stored number dials out. Single Line Telephone Lift handset. Dial 815.
1. 2.
To check to see the number you have saved: 1. Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1014). The stored number displays for six seconds. The stored number dials out if you: - Lift the handset, - Press an idle line key, - Press an idle CALL key, or - Press SPK 2. Press CLEAR. To clear your saved number: Keyset 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 885. 3. Press SPK to hang up. Single Line Telephone Lift handset and dial 885. Hang up.
1. 2.
452 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Secretary Call lets two co-workers alert each other without disturbing their work. To have Secretary Call, both co-workers must have keysets with Secretary Call buzzer keys. When a user presses their buzzer key, the system alerts the called extension by sending a splash tone and flashing the called extensions buzzer key. The called user can respond by placing an Intercom call to the calling party. The called extensions buzzer key continues to flash until either user cancels the Secretary Call. A secretary could use this feature, for example, to get a message through to the boss in an important meeting. After being alerted, the boss could call the secretary when its most convenient. An extension can have Secretary Call keys for any number of extensions, limited only by the available number of programmable keys. Conditions (A.) Secretary Call is not available to single line telephone users. (B.) Secretary Call does not set up an Intercom call. (C.) When assigning Secretary Call from their own extension, a user enters the associated extension numbers. When assigning Secretary Call from system programming, use the associated extension port numbers. Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0406 - COS Options, Item 67: Secretary Call In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to use Secretary Call. 1005 - Class of Service Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign function keys for Secretary Call buzzer (code 1031 plus the destination extension port number). Both co-workers must have buzzer keys for each other.
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys Secretary Call requires a uniquely programmed function key. Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot use Secretary Call.
FEATURES 453
Start
No
Yes
In 1006, assign a function key as a Secretary Call key (code 1031 + extension port number).
Stop
454 FEATURES
FEATURES 455
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Secretary Call Pickup lets a keyset user easily reroute calls intended for a co-worker to themselves. By pressing a Secretary Call Pickup key, the user can have all calls to a co-workers phone ring or voice-announce theirs instead. Secretary Call Pickup is a simplified type of Call Forward with Follow Me for employees that work closely together. This feature could be helpful to customer service representatives that must frequently cover each others clients. When a representative leaves their desk, an associate could press the Secretary Call Pickup key to intercept all their calls. An extension can have Secretary Call Pickup keys for any number of extensions, limited only by the available number of programmable keys. Conditions Secretary Call Pickup is not available to single line telephone users. Default Setting Disabled.
Related Features
Call Forwarding with Follow Me An extension user can also have Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroute a co-workers calls to themselves. Programmable Function Keys Secretary Call pickup requires a uniquely programmed function key. Secretary Call (Buzzer) Co-workers can alert each other without disturbing their work. Single Line Telephones A keyset can have a Secretary Call Pickup key for a single line telephone.
Operation
To activate Secretary Call Pickup: 1. Press your Secretary Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1032 + boss ext.). You hear a splash tone and your Secretary Call Pickup key lights. Calls intended for covered extension ring your phone instead. To cancel Secretary Call Pickup: 1. Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1032 + boss ext.). To check a keys Secretary Call Pickup assignment. 1. Press CHECK. 2. Press your Secretary Call Coverage key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1032 + boss ext.). 3. Press CLEAR.
456 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available system software prior to 3.04 uses different procedures and programmable keys.
An extension user can select a preprogrammed Selectable Display Message for their extension. Display keyset callers see the selected message when they call the users extension. Selectable Display Messaging provides personalized messaging. For example, an extension user could select the message "GONE FOR THE DAY". Any display keyset user calling the extension would see the message. Other than displaying the message, the system puts the call through normally. See table below for a list of the standard messages. Each tenant group has 20 Selectable Display Messages. An extension user can add digits for date, time or phone number after messages 1-8 and 10 (up to 24 characters). For example, an extension user could select the message "ON VACATION UNTIL" and then enter the date. Callers see the original message followed by the appended date. They would then be able to tell when the user was coming back from vacation. The default messages are:
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11-20 Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Message
IN MEETING UNTIL OUT UNTIL OUT-PLEASE CALL PLEASE CALL ME ON BUSY CALL AFTER OUT FOR LUNCH BACK AT BUSINESS TRIP UNTIL BUSINESS TRIP CALL GONE FOR THE DAY ON VACATION UNTIL MESSAGE 11-20
Appended with...
Time (when meeting done) Time (when returning) 8 digits (phone number) 8 digits (phone number) 8 digits Time (when returning) Date (when returning) 8 digits (where reached)
FEATURES 457
No
Yes
In 1006, do not assign a function key for Selectable Display Messaging (code 1027).
No
Yes
In 1006, assign a function key for Selectable Display Messaging (code 1027).
Stop
458 FEATURES
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Selectable Display Messaging operation.
Operation
To select a message: 1. Press idle CALL key + dial *4. OR Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1081). 2. Dial 3 + Message number (01-20). Use VOL M or VOL L to scroll through the messages. 3. (Optional for messages 1-8 and 10) Dial the digits you want to append to the message. You can append messages 1-8 and 10 with digits (e.g., the time when you will be back). You enter the time in 24-hour format, but it displays in 12-hour format. 4. Press SPK to select the message and hang up (if you dialed *4 in step 1). To cancel a message: 1. Press idle CALL key + dial *4. OR Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1081). 2. Dial 3. 3. Press SPK to hang up (if you dialed *4 in step 1).
FEATURES 459
1. 2.
3.
To cancel Selectable Display Messaging: Keyset 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial *43. OR Press Selectable Display Messaging key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1027 + msg). 3. Press SPK to hang up. Single Line Telephone Lift handset. Dial *43 and the message number (01-20). Hang up.
1. 2. 3.
460 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
An extension user can change the way calls ring their phone. Selectable Ring Tones allows an extension user to set up unique ringing for their calls. This is important in a crowded work area where several phones are close together. Because their phone has a characteristic ring, the user always can tell when its their phone ringing. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Start
No
Yes
No
Should extension be able to check (listen to) the incoming ring tones?
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 461
Related Features
Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot use Selectable Ring Tones.
Operation
To change your extensions incoming ring tones: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 820. 3. Dial 1 to set Intercom ring; 2 to set trunk ring. 4. Dial code for the desired ring pattern. 1 High pitch 2 Medium pitch 3 Low pitch 5. Press SPK to hang up. To listen to the incoming ring choices: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 811. 3. Dial 1 to listen to Intercom ring; 2 to listen to trunk ring. For trunk ring, enter the tone you want to listen to followed by the tenant group. 4. Dial code for the ring pattern you want to hear. 1 High pitch 2 Medium pitch 3 Low pitch 5. Press SPK to hang up.
462 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Serial Call is a method of transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring extension. Serial Calling saves transferring steps between users. For example, a Customer Service Representative (CSR) has a client on the phone who needs technical advice. The CSR wants to send the call to Tech Service, but needs to advise the client of certain costs when Tech Service is done. Rather than transferring the call back and forth, the CSR can use Serial Call to Technical Service and announce, "I have Ted on the phone. I need to talk to him again. Just hang up when youre done and Ill get him back." Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Start Refer to the Transfer and Flash features for additional information. In 0402 Item 2, enter 0 (for Transfer) or 2 (for Flash). Do not enter 1. No Should extension be able to use the TRFR key as a Serial Call key? Yes In 0402 Item 2, enter 1 to make the extension TRFR keys Serial Call keys.
If the TRFR key is for Serial Call, extensions don't need a Serial Call function key. In 1006, do not assign a function key as a Serial Call key (code 1035). No Should extension have a function key assigned as a Serial Call key? Yes In 1006, assign a function key as a Serial Call key (code 1035).
Stop
0402 - Tenant Group Options, Part B, Item 2: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part A) For each tenant, enter 1 for this option to assign the CONF (TRF) key as a Serial Call key. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a programmable key as a Serial Call key (code 1035).
FEATURES 463
Operation
To place a Serial Call to a co-worker: 1. Place or answer trunk call. 2. Press HOLD. 3. Dial co-workers extension number. Co-worker must lift handset to respond to your announcement. 4. Press Serial Call key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1035) but do not hang up. When your co-worker hangs up the call, the system makes an automatic live transfer back to your extension.
464 FEATURES
Description
124i Available 72 single line telephones maximum. Install 2-OPX Modules in odd numbered ports only. The system automatically disables the next adjacent port. Analog Message Waiting lamping not available. Setting the DTMF criteria requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Adjusting the sidetone level is not available. Loop Disconnect Supervision for 2OPX Modules not available. 384i Available 255 single line telephones maximum. Install 2-OPX Modules in any port. The system automatically disables the next adjacent port. Analog Message Waiting lamping is available. Setting the DTMF criteria requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Loop Disconnect Supervision for 2OPX Modules requires system software 3.06.02.
The system is compatible with 500 type (Dial Pulse) and 2500 type (DTMF) analog single line telephones (SLTs). You can install single line telephones as On-Premise or Off-Premise extensions. Single line telephone users can dial codes to access many of the features available to keyset users. With Single Line Telephones, you can have your system simulate PBX type operation. When installing single line telephones as On-Premise (ONS) Extensions, you must have: A port on an ASTU PCB for each single line telephone installed. (384i Only) If the telephones have Message Waiting lamps, a port on an ASTU/MW PCB for each telephone installed. You must also have a Message Wait Power Supply PCB installed to provide lamp voltage. A customer-provided ring generator (refer to the Hardware Manual for installation details). (If you have 2500 sets) A CDTU PCB with at least one block reserved for analog extension DTMF reception.
If setting up single line telephones as Off-Premise (OPX) Extensions, you must install a 2-OPX Module. Each 2OPX Module provides two OPX ports: the physical port to which the module is connected and the next adjacent physical port. In addition, the 2-OPX Module has its own DTMF receivers (one for each port), internal ring generator and power supply. In 124i, install a DTDU PCB if you want outbound dial tone detection for Off-Premise Extensions. Refer to the Hardware Manual for installation details. Conditions (A.) 2-OPX Module circuits meet the requirements o EIA Specification RS-464-A for OPS class C (loop resistance to 3,300 ohms, loop current = 16 mA or greater). In 384i system software 3.06.02 and higher, the 2OPX Module (with updated firmware) provides far end loop disconnect supervision for the connected circuits. Set the interval in 0115 Item 10: Loop Disconnect Time. (B.) Dial Pulse (500 type) single line telephones cannot access any features that require the user to dial # or *. Default Setting In 124i, Single Line Telephones and 2-OPX Modules auto-ID as soon as they are installed. In 384i, Single Line Telephones and 2-OPX Modules function as soon as they are installed and properly programmed.
FEATURES 465
For ONS extension, connect to ASTU port programmed with circuit type 3.
ONS
Is single line phone an ONS or OPX extension? (Skip this decision for 124i.)
OPX
For OPX extension, connect to 2-OPX Module programmed with circuit type 9.
Are single line telephones 500 type (dial pulse) or 2500 type (DTMF)?
(384i Only) For ONS extensions, in Program 0303 make sure one CDTU block is type 1.
Do you want to change the way the single line telephones ring?
Yes
No
Refer to the Single Line Ring Options chart provided with the Single Line Telephone Compatibility feature.
466 FEATURES
Yes
Yes
Do you want to change the transmit and receive levels for a single line telephone?
No Yes
Do you want to change the sidetone level for a single line telephone? No
Yes
In 0118, change the gains for the standard settings selected in 1001:4.
No
No
Yes
In 0116:1-10 check the criteria for DTMF tones received at the SLT.
Stop
FEATURES 467
468 FEATURES
Related Features
Single line telephone users have access to the following features: Department Step Calling Abbreviated Dialing Directed Call Pickup Account Codes Do Not Disturb Alarm Door Box Automatic Route Selection Flash Barge In Forced Trunk Disconnect Call Forwarding Group Call Pickup Call Forwarding with Follow Hold Me Intercom Call Forwarding/DND Override Handsfree Answerback/ Call Waiting/Camp On with Forced Intercom Ringing Split Last Number Redial Callback Line Preference Central Office Calls, Answering Meet Me Conference Central Office Calls, Placing Meet Me Paging Conference Meet Me Paging Transfer Department Calling Message Waiting Night Service Off Hook Signaling Paging PBX Compatibility Pulse to Tone Conversion Ringdown Extension Save Number Dialed Selectable Display Messages Toll Restriction Transfer Trunk Queuing and Camp On Voice Mail Voice Over Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Refer to the individual features for additional descriptive, programming and operational information.
Operation
Refer to the individual features listed in the Related Features chart above.
FEATURES 469
Description
124i Available. The RD/COST field and Call Costing is only available in Base or EXCPRU software prior to 4.02. Expanded ACCOUNT column is expanded to 16 digits in Base or EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Year 2000 Compliance: 124i is unaffected by the Year 2000 date change as the system uses a 2-digit date code entry. Future releases will use a 4-digit date code entry. 384i Available. The RD/COST field and Call Costing is only available in system software prior to 3.07.10. The ACCOUNT column is expanded to 16 digits in 3.07.10 or higher. Year 2000 Compliance: 384i is unaffected by the Year 2000 date change as prior to 3.07.25, a 2-digit date code entry is used. With 3.07.25 or higher, a 4-digit date code entry is used.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of the systems trunk calls. Typically, the record outputs to a customer-provided printer, terminal or SMDR data collection device. SMDR allows you to monitor the usage at each extension and trunk. This makes charge-back and traffic management easier.
SMDR provides the following options: Abandoned Call Reporting The SMDR report includes calls that rang into the system but were unanswered (i.e., abandoned). SMDR can include all abandoned calls or only those abandoned calls that rang longer than the specified duration. The Abandoned Call Report helps you keep track of lost business. Blocked Call Reporting When Toll Restriction blocks a call, you can have SMDR print the blocked call information. Or, you can have SMDR exclude these types of calls. With Blocked Call Reporting, you can better customize Toll Restriction for the sites application. Call Costing For systems with Automatic Route Selection, the SMDR report can show costing information for long distance calls. Call costing does not apply to systems without ARS. Use costing when you need to set up call accounting. Customized Date Format The SMDR header can show the report date in one of three formats: American, European or Japanese. Set the format for your preference. Transferred Call Tracking SMDR shows each extensions share of a transferred call. If an outside call is transferred among four extensions, SMDR shows how long each of the callers stayed on the call. Data Call Tracking Data Call Tracking can log the systems internal data calls. Since SMDR normally logs external (trunk) data calls, Data Call Tracking lets you get a complete picture of data terminal activity. Digit Counting With Digit Counting, SMDR can selectively keep track of toll calls. For example, if the digit count is nine, SMDR wont include toll calls within the home area code. Digit Counting permits SMDR to include only the types of calls you want to monitor.
470 FEATURES
Digit Masking Digit Masking lets you "X" out portions of the number dialed on the SMDR report. A digit mask of seven, for example, masks out all exchange codes (NNXs) and local addresses. Digit Masking makes it easier to keep track of calling patterns, without having to interpret each individual number. You can also use Digit Masking to block out access and security codes. Duration Monitoring SMDR can include calls of any duration, or only those that last longer than the interval you specify. If you want to keep track of all trunk activity, use a short duration. To keep track of only significant usage, use a longer duration. Extension Exclusion You can selectively exclude extensions from the SMDR report. This ensures privacy for high-profile callers. For example, the company attorney negotiating a merger may not want his calls to show up on an inhouse report. PBX Call Reporting If you system is behind a PBX, you can have SMDR monitor all traffic into the PBX or just calls placed over PBX trunks. The SMDR record can include all PBX calls (including calls to PBX extensions) or just calls that include the PBX trunk access code. Serial and Parallel SMDR Communication The system is compatible with both serial and parallel SMDR devices. This gives you many SMDR output options. For example, you can output the SMDR report to a high speed parallel printer or send it to disk through a PCs serial port. Trunk Exclusion Use Trunk Exclusion to exclude certain trunks not subject to per-call charges (like WATS lines) from the SMDR report. This makes call accounting easier, since you review only those calls with variable costs. Usage Summaries SMDR can automatically print daily, weekly and monthly call activity summaries. Each summary includes the total number of regular trunk calls and ISDN trunk calls, and the costs for each type. The daily report prints every day at midnight. The weekly report prints every Sunday night at midnight. The monthly report prints at midnight on the last day of the month. Extension Name or Number The SMDR report can include an extensions name or extension number. Choose the method that makes it easier for you to track call usage.
FEATURES 471
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
STA 324 STA 324 STA 324 STA 324 120366541233 181477445236
0 0 0 0
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
STA 324 STA 324 STA 324 STA 324 120366541233 181477445236
0 0 0 0
472 FEATURES
DIALLED No. OR DIALLED No./CLI COST OR ACOUNT Class Definitions POT POTA PIN ALB BRD PTRS
FEATURES 473
474 FEATURES
FEATURES 475
COST: COST:
0 0
49 0 0 0
COST: COST:
0 0
OUTGOING CALL/COST SUMMARY FOR MONTH ENDING nn/nn/nn TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS
49 0 0 0
COST: COST:
0 0
Conditions (A.) The SMDR report does not include voice Intercom calls. (B.) SMDR requires the installation of a DCI (Data Communications Interface). Once you designate a DCI for SMDR, you cannot use that extension for placing and answering other data calls. SMDR and the Traffic Management Reports should not use the same DCI. (C.) The SMDR call buffer stores 320 calls. The buffer stores calls when the SMDR device is unavailable. When the buffer fills, each new call is not recorded. The alarm display telephone assigned in Program 0011 (normally extension 301) shows "SMDR Buffer Full," indicating that the buffer is full. The 124i also includes a Buffer Overflow message on the SMDR report. Default Setting Disabled.
476 FEATURES
Is DCI installed, programmed and functional? No Install DCI. First DCI module installed is number 1. First 3DCI installed is number 145. See Data Communications Interface feature.
Yes
(384i Only) In Program 0005, use circuit type 2 for keyset with DCI or type 4 for 3DCI.
In Program 1201, Type 1, Item 1, register 65, set DCI communications parameters to match the SMDR device.
Parallel
Serial (DTE)
In Program 0503, assign an unused extension number (e.g., 500) to the DCI port. By default, port 1 = 601.
Yes
In Program 0007, enter the SMDR DCI port number as the system report port number.
Yes
In Program 0008, enter the SMDR DCI port number as the alarm report port number.
FEATURES 477
Do you want American, European or Japanese Japanese date format in the SMDR header? Japanese
In Program 0901 Item 13 for each trunk, enter 0 to include trunk on SMDR; 1 to exclude trunk from SMDR.
Selected
Should SMDR record include information for all trunks or just selected trunks?
All
In Program 1008 Item 1 for each extension, enter 1 to include extension on SMDR; 0 to exclude extension from SMDR.
Selected
Should SMDR record include information for all extensions or just selected extensions?
All
478 FEATURES
In Program 0404 Item 4, enter minimum duration of call that will print on the SMDR report (1-65535 seconds).
No
Yes
In Program 0404 Item 5, enter how long an unanswered call must ring (1-65535 seconds) before SMDR logs it as "NO ANSWER."
No
Should all unanswered (i.e., "NO ANSWER" ) calls print on the SMDR report?
To have only long distance calls print, for example, enter 8. In Program 0404 Item 2, enter the minimum number of digits a user must dial (1-24) before system will include call on SMDR report. No Should all outgoing calls print on the SMDR report, regardless of the number of digits dialed? Yes In Program 0404 Item 2, enter 0.
For example, you can use this feature to block the printing of security codes. In Program 0404 Item 1, enter the number of digits you want to block. If you enter 8, for example, SMDR Xs out the last 8 digits dialed. Yes Do you want to block (i.e., "X" out) any of the digits on the SMDR report. No In Program 0404 Item 1, enter 0.
FEATURES 479
No
Do you want the SMDR report to include calls blocked by Toll Restriction?
Yes
If your system is behind a PBX, do you want SMDR to include all calls to the PBX or just calls using the PBX trunk access code?
All Calls
No
Yes
In 0404:6, enter 0 to disable the following reports: Print Item 4 - Daily Summary Print Item 5 - Weekly Summary Print Item 6 - Monthly Summary
No
Yes
In 0404:6, enter 1 to enable the following reports: Print Item 4 - Daily Summary Print Item 5 - Weekly Summary Print Item 6 - Monthly Summary
No
Yes
Extension name
Extension number
Stop
480 FEATURES
FEATURES 481
Related Features
PBX Compatibility To use the PBX Call Reporting option, program system for behind PBX operation. Traffic Management Report (TMS) Traffic Management Reports and SMDR should not use the sameDCI port. Transfer The extension that initially answers or places a call "owns" the SMDR record for the call. For example, if extension 318 transfers a trunk call to extension 320, the SMDR record assigns the entire call to extension 318. Extension 320 does not show on the SMDR record as part of the transferred call. Year 2000 Compliance The SMDR page and summary banners show four digis for the year (e.g., 2001).
Operation
Once installed and programmed, SMDR operation is automatic.
482 FEATURES
Description
124i Available Basic T1 capabilities require EXCPRU version 2.18 or higher. T1 DID and tie lines require a DTDU PCB. ANI/DNIS Compatibility requires EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. It is not available in Base software. ANI/DNIS routing to the VAU Automated Attendant requires EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Routing by trunk to a specific VAU messages is also available with EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Enhanced Answer Supervision for T1 tie trunks requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. See page 844. Voice Mail Caller ID with ANI/DNIS requires EXCPRU version 2.18 or higher. 384i Available Customizing the CODEC Gain Types requires system software 3.04 or higher. ANI/DNIS Compatibility requires system software 3.06.02 or higher. ANI/DNIS routing to the VAU Automated Attendant (page 493) requires system software 3.06.09 or higher. Routing by trunk to a specific VAU message requires system software 3.07.10 or higher. Enhanced Answer Supervision for T1 tie trunks requires system software 3.05.15 or higher. See page 844. Voice Mail Caller ID with ANI/DNIS requires system software 3.06.14 or higher.
The T1/PRI Interface PCB gives the system T1 trunking capability. This PCB uses a single universal slot and provides up to 24 trunk circuits. In additional to providing digital-quality trunking, the T1/PRI Interface PCB allows you to have maximum trunking capability with fewer PCBs. This in turn makes more universal slots available for other functions.
You can program each T1/PRI PCB for any combination of the following trunks: CO loop start CO ground start Direct Inward Dialing1 Tie lines2
When installed in 384i, the T1/PRI Interface PCB uses the first block of 24 consecutive trunks. For example, if you have an ATRU PCB installed for trunks 1-8, the T1/PRI Interface PCB will automatically use trunks 9-32. If you have ATRU PCBs installed for trunks 1-8 and 17-24, the T1/PRI PCB will use trunks 25-48. The T1/PRI Interface cannot use trunks 9-16 (even if available) since they are not part of a consecutive block of 24 trunks.
FEATURES 483
484 FEATURES
Ground start
Loop start
External
Should the T1/PRI Interface PCB use internal or external (telco) clock?
Internal
Yes
Do the T1/PRI Interface PCBs timing parameters match the requirements of the telco?
No
Yes
No
Check 0901 Items 14-17 for compatibility with the connected telco service.
No
If required, customize the CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels in 0117.
Yes
No
Stop
FEATURES 485
(384i Only) Are any DTMF receivers reserved for DTMF reception?
No
IN 0303, reserve at least one CDTU DTMF receiver for DTMF reception (entry 2).
Yes ANI/DNIS trunks must be immediate start or wink start T1 trunks with E&M signaling.
No
In 2404, review the data for each item and configure the service options (1-15).
Under the Programming heading in the text, check: 0136: T1 Trunk Timers and 0901: Additional ANI/DNIS Recommended Settings
Yes
If using the Caller ID Table, you'll use programs 2401 and 2402. If using the DID Table, you'll use programs 1805, 1806 and 1808.
Yes
No
Stop
486 FEATURES
DID Table
Do you want to route to the Automated Attendant using the Caller ID Table, the DID Table or directly?
Directly
Caller ID
Should VAU routing be based on the number dialed, or the number dialed and the incoming trunk used?
Number Dialed
In 2404:3, enter 1.
In 2404:4, enter 0.
In 2404:7, define which portion of the Caller ID table (programmed in 2402) ANI/DNIS will use.
Stop
FEATURES 487
Directly
Do you want to route to the Automated Attendant using the DID Table or directly?
DID Table
Should VAU routing be based on the number dialed, or the number dialed and the incoming trunk used?
Number Dialed
In 2403:3, enter 1.
In 2404:4, enter 2.
Stop
488 FEATURES
telemanuals.com
Features N-Z T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Programming (Contd) 0009 - Loop Back Testing, Item 10: T1 Test
Once installed, use this program to test the T1 trunks. 0117 - Trunk CODEC Gain Type Settings Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types assigned in 0901 Item 3. 0136 - T1 Trunk Timers Set various T1 trunk timers for compatibility with the local telco. For ANI/DNIS, the following settings in Program 0136 are recommended: Item 59: Clock Select = 2 (External - provided by Central Office) Item 60: Distance Between PCB and SCU = 0 Item 61: Frame Type = 1 (D3/D4) Item 62: Zero Suppression = 2 (AMI/ZCS) 0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Setup For ANI/DNIS, reserve at least one CTDU DTMF receiver for DTMF reception (entry 2). Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers (i.e., DTU blocks): - In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them. - In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them. 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 3: CODEC Gain Type Assign a CODEC Gain Type to each trunk. This sets the amount of gain (amplification) for the selected trunk. Customize the Gain Type transmit and receive levels in 0117. 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 14-17: Trunk Service Type For each T1 trunk, set the Trunk Service Type to match the telcos connected T1 service. For each T1 trunk that should support ANI/DNIS service, enter 6. (ANI/DNIS trunks must be immediate start or wink start T1 trunks with E&M signaling.) 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A): Additonal ANI/DNIS Recommended Settings For ANI/DNIS, the following additional settings in Program 0901 are recommended: Item 1: Signaling Type (DP/DTMF) = 2 (DTMF) Item 2: Ring Detect Type = 1 (Immediate) Item 5: Flash Type = 0 (Open Loop Flash) Item 6: Flash for Time Flash or Disconnect = 0 (Timed Flash) Items 7-10: Behind PBX = 0 (Stand alone) Item 11: Dial Tone Detection for Manually Dialed Calls = 1 (Outgoing calls allowed) Item 18: Outgoing Calls = 1 (Allowed) Item 25: Tie Line Dial Tone (Immediate Start) = 1 (Enabled) Item 26: Tie Line Dial Tone (Wink Start) = 1 (Enabled) Item 27: DID Signaling Type = 1 (DTMF) 0905 - Trunk Groups For ANI/DNIS, place all your ANI/DNIS trunks in Trunk Groups as required. 0924 - ANI/DNIS Service Option Number Assignment For each ANI/DNIS trunk, assign a Service Option Number (1-115) for each Night Service mode. You define ANI/DNIS Service Option Numbers in 2404. 2301 - DID/E&M Start Signaling For each ANI/DNIS trunk, set the start signaling mode to 1 (wink start). 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options For each ANI/DNIS Service Option (1-15), program the option data from the table below.
FEATURES 489
Item 1
ANI/DNIS Receive Format Use this option to specify the format of the ANI/DNIS data received from the telco. Make sure your entry is compatible with the service the telco provides. (The character * indicates a delimiter.) 0 = Address (called number without delimiters) 1 = *ANI*1 2 = *DNIS* 3 = *ANI*Address*1 4 = *ANI*DNIS*1 5 = *DNIS*ANI*1 1 Select one of these options for Voice Mail Caller ID. Delimiter Dial Code This option defines the character telco uses as a delimiter (see entries 1-9 in Item 1 above). Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. Routing Search Criteria (Data Source) This option specifies the source of the data the system uses to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. The choices are: 0 = No Routing. The system assumes an error has occurred and routes according to the setting in Item 8. 1 = Routes on Received DNIS or Address Data. The data source is the received DNIS or address data. This option requires that Item 1 be 0 or 2-5. 2 = Routes on Received ANI Data. The data source is the received ANI data. This option requires that Item 1 be 1 or 3-5.
0-5
0 (Address)
Item 2
0-9, # and *
Item 3
0-2
0 (No routing)
490 FEATURES
Item 4
Route Data The option sets how the system uses the route data (gathered in Item 3) to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. The choices are: 0 = Dial Data (From Caller ID Table Name Field) The system uses the Caller ID Table specified in Item 7 below for inbound routing. The data in the Caller ID Table Name field is used as dial data for routing. For this entry, the Name field entry can be an extension number, a Department Group pilot number or the Voice Mail or ACD master number. 1 = Trunk Ring Group (From Caller ID Table Name Field) Like entry 0 above, the system uses the Caller ID Table specified in Items 6 and 7 below for inbound routing. The data in the Caller ID Table Name field is used as dial data for routing. For this entry, the Name field entry must be a Trunk Ring Group number (1-128). 2 = DID Translation Table With this option, the system uses the DID Translation Tables set up in Programs 1805 and 1806 for inbound ANI/DNIS routing. In addition, use Program 1808 to associate the ANI/DNIS Trunk Group with the DID Translation Table you want to use. Refer to the Direct Inward Dialing feature for more on setting up DID Translation Tables.
0-2
Item 5
ANI Displayed as Caller ID Use this option to set if ANI data should appear on telephone displays as part of Caller ID display. The options are: 0 = Caller ID Off The system does not search the Caller ID table for a name. Instead, the telephone display will show the name programmed into the DID Translation Table (Program 1806) used if Item 4 above is 2. Otherwise, no name displays. 1 = Caller ID On The telephones display will show the ANI name as Caller ID data for the incoming ANI/DNIS call. This can occur if: The ANI number received has a name associated with it entered into the Caller ID Table addresses specified in Item 6. The format selected in Item 1 must include an ANI number. Program 0406 Item 123 (Caller ID Display) must be 1 (enabled). Also select this option to enable Voice Mail Caller ID.
0, 1
FEATURES 491
Item 6
ANI Caller ID Table Setup Use this option to define which part of the Caller ID Table set up in Program 2402 the system will use for ANI/DNIS Caller ID lookups. This is required if Items 4 and 5 above are 1 (Caller ID On). When you specify a starting address and length, the system uses that part of the table for lookups. ANI Routing Table Setup Use this option to define which part of the Caller ID Table set up in Program 2402 the system will use for ANI/DNIS routing. When you specify a starting address and length, the system uses that part of the table for routing. If the incoming ANI/DNIS number data matches the Number entry in the table, the system routes according to the associated Name data. That data can be an extension, Department Group pilot number, the Voice Mail master number or a Trunk Ring Group (depending on the setting in Item 4). Routing on ANI/DNIS Error This option lets you determine how the system will handle an ANI/DNIS call if a data error is detected in the incoming data string. The options are: 0 = Play busy tone to caller 1 = Route the caller to the Ring Group specified in Program 1803 Routing when Destination Busy or Unanswered This option lets you determine how the system will handle an ANI/DNIS call if the destination is busy or doesnt answer. The options are: 0 = System will play ringback or busy tone to the caller - whichever is required. 1 = System will route the caller to the Ring Group specified in Program 1803. Calling Number Address Length When Item 1 = 0 (ANI/DNIS receive format is address), use this option to specify the address length. The choices are from 1 to 8 digits in length.
Item 7
Item 8
0 or 1
Item 9
0 or 1
Item 10
1-8
492 FEATURES
ANI/DNIS Routing to the VAU Automated Attendant Beginning with 384i software version 3.06.09 and 124i EXCPRU 4.02 software, ANI/DNIS calls can route to the VAU Automated Attendant. In addition, you can specify the VAU message the ANI/DNIS caller hears when the Automated Attendant answers. To program this option, choose either Methods A, B or C below. Method A 2402 - Caller ID Table Entries - VAU Routing Based on the Number Dialed For the bins (addresses) used by ANI/DNIS, in the name portion enter 882 followed by the number of the VAU Message the caller should hear (01-16). For example, to have ANI/DNIS route to the VAU Automated Attendant and play message 10 to callers, select an available address and enter 88210 in the name portion. The bins you use must correspond to the addresses specified in 2404 Item 7. - VAU Routing Based on the Number Dialed and the Incoming Trunk Used For the bins (addresses) used by ANI/DNIS, in the name portion enter 127 for 384i or 15 for 124i. For each trunk in Program 2205 - OPA Message Assignment, enter the number of the VAU Message the caller should hear (01-16) when the VAU Automated Attendant answers. Also, enter 127 for 384i or 15 for 124i for each trunk in 1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination. The bins you use must correspond to the addresses specified in 2404 Item 7. 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 3: Routing Search Criteria (Data Source) Enter 1 to set the data source as the received DNIS or address data. 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 4: Route Data Enter 0 to have the system use the Caller ID Table specified in 2404 Item 7. 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 7: ANI Routing Table Setup Define which part of the Caller ID Table (programmed in 2402) the system will use for ANI/DNIS routing. Method B 1806 - DID Translation Table Number Conversion - VAU Routing Based on the Number Dialed For the bins (addresses) used by ANI/DNIS, in the TRF portion enter 882 followed by the number of the VAU Message the caller should hear (01-16). For example, to have ANI/DNIS route to the VAU Automated Attendant and play message 10 to callers, select an available address and enter 88210 in the name portion. - VAU Routing Based on the Number Dialed and the Incoming Trunk Used For the bins (addresses) used by ANI/DNIS, in the TRF portion enter 127 for 384i or 15 for 124i. For each trunk in Program 2205 - OPA Message Assignment, enter the number of the VAU Message the caller should hear (01-16) when the VAU Automated Attendant answers. Also, enter 127 for 384i or 15 for 124i for each trunk in 1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination. 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 3: Routing Search Criteria (Data Source) Enter 1 to set the data source as the received DNIS or address data. 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 4: Route Data Enter 2 to have the system use the DID Translation Tables set up in 1806 for routing.
FEATURES 493
Related Features
"Central Office Calls, Answering" and "Central Office Calls, Placing" You can use T1 trunks in place of standard analog trunks. The procedures for placing and answering calls are the same for both types of trunks. Dial Tone Detection Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection. "Direct Inward Dialing (DID)" The T1/PRI Interface PCB provides DID service. All programming parameters are the same as those used for analog DID trunks (except for the additional T1/PRI Interface PCB settings). "Tie Lines" The T1/PRI Interface PCB provides tie line service. All programming parameters are the same as those used for analog tie lines (except for the additional T1/PRI Interface PCB settings).
Operation
Refer to the following features: "Central Office Calls, Answering" "Central Office Calls, Placing" "Direct Inward Dialing (DID)" "Tie Lines"
494 FEATURES
Description
124i The system allows either 8 fourparty conferences or 4 eight-party conferences. Enhanced Tandem Trunking requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Each DTU-A/C allows either 4 four-party conferences or 2 eightparty conferences per PCB. Enhanced Tandem Trunking requires system software 3.05.10 or higher.
Tandem Trunking allows an extension user to join two outside callers in a trunk-to-trunk Conference. The extension user can then drop out of the call, leaving the trunks in an Unsupervised Conference. The extension user that established the Conference is not part of the conversation. The Conference continues until either outside party hangs up. In addition, the extension user that set up the Conference can end the tandem call at any time. Tandem Trunking could help an office manager, for example, put two outside sales people in touch. The office manager could: Answer a call from one salesperson Place a call to the second salesperson Set up the trunk-to-trunk Conference Drop out of the call The office manager could rejoin or terminate the Conference at any time. In 384i system software 3.05.10 or higher, there are two methods for Tandem Trunking: Method A Set Up Without Transfer Key An extension user can set up Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) by using the CONF (TRF) key for by dialing a two-digit service code (#8) instead. Method B Tandem Trunking on Hang Up This method allows an extension user to easily set up an Unsupervised Conference with a call they have placed on Hold. It uses a uniquely programmed Transfer key to set up a tandem call. Conditions (A.) Tandem Trunking requires either loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or ground start trunks. (B.) The maximum number of trunk-to-trunk conferences allowed is determined by the Conference feature setup. See Programming below. Default Setting Disabled.
FEATURES 495
No
Yes
In 0308, assign the blocks on the CDTU PCB for Conference (entry 0).
Stop Two 8-party In 0302 Item 2, enter 1. Should each CDTU PCB allow four 4-party conferences or two 8-party conferences? Four 4-party In 0302 Item 2, enter 0.
In 0406 Item 16, enter 0 to prevent initiating Conference. In 1005, assign Class of Service to extensions.
No
Yes
Stop
(Optional for Method A) In 1006, assign a function key for Transfer (code 1077).
In 0901 Item 31, enable (1) loop supervision for each trunk that should be able to use Tandem Trunking.
In 0901 Item 23, assign a new CODEC Gain Type for Unsupervised Conference calls.
No
Yes Stop
If required, change the CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels in 0131.
496 FEATURES
Start
No
Yes
In 0308, assign the blocks on the CDTU PCB for Conference (entry 0).
Stop Two 8-party In 0302 Item 2, enter 1. Should each CDTU PCB allow four 4-party conferences or two 8-party conferences? Four 4-party In 0302 Item 2, enter 0.
In 0406 Item 16, enter 0 to prevent initiating Conference. In 1005, assign Class of Service to extensions.
No
Yes
In 0406 Item 16, enter 1 to allow initiating Conference. In 1005, assign Class of Service extensions.
Tandem Trunking Section In 0901 Item 31, enable (1) loop supervision for each trunk that should be able to use Tandem Trunking.
In 0901 Item 23, assign a new CODEC Gain Type for Unsupervised Conference calls.
No
Yes Stop
If required, change the CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels in 0131.
FEATURES 497
498 FEATURES
Related Features
Conference, Voice Call Set up a Conference with a co-worker in your immediate work area. Meet Me Conference Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging. Meet Me Paging Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two-party meeting via Paging.
FEATURES 499
Method B Tandem Trunking on Hang up (384i 3.05.10 or Higher) To set up a Tandem Call: 1. Place or answer first trunk call. 2. Press HOLD to place the first trunk call on Hold. 3. Place or answer second trunk call. 4. Press Transfer key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1077) or hang up. This sets up an Unsupervised Conference with both outside parties. The line keys for the trunks light steadily (red). To disconnect the Conference, use Forced Trunk Disconnect (i.e., Press line key + *3).
500 FEATURES
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
FEATURES 501
Description
124i Available. Basic TAPI Commands require the Nitsuko TAPI Service Provider 1.02.02. TAPI Enhancements require Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Additional TAPI Commands require 124i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver and system software for Base 4.02 and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Compatibility with the Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver requires Base 4.02 or EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Available requires system software 3.04 or higher. Basic TAPI Commands available in both Nitsuko TAPI Driver versions. TAPI Enhancements require system software 3.06.02. Additional TAPI Commands require 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver.
System software 3.07.12 or higher provides compatibility with the Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver through Program 0419:11.
The system has Telephony Programming Applications Interface (TAPI) capability. TAPI capability provides: Reduced TAPI Feature Set (see the Supported TAPI Commands chart below). Caller ID data to the PC for data base lookups and screen pops (see the Caller ID Data chart below). Telephone control (off-hook, on-hook and dialing).
In addition to a compatible system software version, you must also have: 32-Button Display or Super Display Telephone containing an RS-232-C DCI Module (P/N 92266) with TAPI compliant firmware. PC running Windows 3.x or higher with one of the following Nitsuko TAPI Drivers installed. - Nitsuko TAPI Service Provider 1.02.02 - Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) A TAPI compatible Windows application
(Continued)
502 FEATURES
TSPI_LINECLOSE
TSPI_LINECONDITIONALMEDIADETECTION
TSPI_LINEDIAL TSPI_LINEGETCALLADDRESSID TSPI_LINEGETCALLSTATUS TSPI_LINEGETID TSPI_LINEGETNUMADDRESSIDS TSPI_LINENEGOTIATETSPIVERSION TSPI_LINESETAPPSPECIFIC TSPI_LINEDROP TSPI_LINEGETADDRESSID TSPI_LINESETSTATUSMESSAGES TSPI_PROVIDERINIT TSPI_PROVIDERREMOVE
FEATURES 503
Trunk Call
1st Ring Signal NMBR=XXX XXXXXXX 2nd Ring Signal Callers number = XXX XXXXXXX
Intercom Call
1st Ring Signal NMBR=XXXX 2nd Ring Signal Callers number = XXXX
TAPI Enhancements When a DCI keyset answers a call, it provides the following data to the connected device: If the incoming call data contains the Caller ID number . . . NMBR=XXX (XXX = Caller ID number data) If the incoming call data does not contain the Caller ID number . . . NUMBR= UNAVAILABLE, OUT OF AREA, or PRIVATE
To place a call on Hold, the DCI provides the following data to the connected device: ATD! When the DCI keyset becomes busy, the DCI provides the following data to the connected device: BUSY
Conditions (A.) The Nitsuko TAPI Driver 1.02.02 does not fully support the Hold and Transfer features. (B.) The DCI Module requires updated TAPI compliant firmware. Default Setting Disabled.
504 FEATURES
Start
In 0419:11, enter 0.
TAPI
Which driver are you using: Nitsuko TAPI Service Provider OR Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV?
Telephone SPV
In 0419:11, enter 1.
In 1006, assign a Telemarketing Dial key (code 1045) to the DCI keyset.
Stop
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 11: TAPI Auto Idle Mode (Driver ID) For this option: - Enter 0 if you are installing the Nitsuko TAPI Service Provider 1.02.02 driver. - Enter 1 if you are installing the Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver. 1005 - Class of Service Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a Telemarketing Dial key (code 1045) to the DCI keyset. The TAPI driver is active only after the keyset user presses this key and the key lights.
FEATURES 505
Operation
TAPI operation is automatic once programmed in the phone system and enabled in the PCs TAPI application.
506 FEATURES
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available four Tenant Groups.
Tenant Service lets you partition the system into tenant groups so several businesses can share the same common equipment. Each tenant group has their own trunks, extensions, operator and other features (see the table below). When an extension user dials 0, for example, they reach their own operator. In addition, trunk calls in one tenant dont interfere with trunk calls in the other tenant. An extension user in one tenant may be able to call a user in another tenant, or the system may restrict inter-tenant calling. The system allows up to four tenant groups. The following table shows the features that interact with Tenant Service. Refer to the feature description in this section for more details on feature programming and operation.
Tenant Service Feature Interaction This feature.. And this program... Affect Tenant Service in the following way...
Abbreviated Dialing
0601
Common Abbreviated Dialing Bins Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins DIAL Key Control Class of Service Options Account Codes ACI Group Numbers
Each tenant can have a different set of Common Abbreviated Dialing bins. Optionally, tenants may share bins. Each tenant can have a different set of Group Abbreviated Dialing bins. Optionally, tenants may share bins. Set the DIAL key to access Common or Group Abbreviated Dialing for each tenant. In each of the four Tenant Groups, one of the 15 Classes of Service can allow (1) or prevent (0) an extensions ability to use Account Codes. Each of the four Tenant Groups can either disable (0), enable (1) or require (2) Account Codes. ACI software ports in different tenants can be in the same group, but the groups always have different pilot numbers. An extension in one tenant cannot dial an ACI Group pilot number belonging to another tenant. Enable/disable the Barge In tone for each tenant group. Enable/disable Callback automatic answer for each tenant. Assign trunks to tenant groups. An extension in one group cannot place or answer calls on another groups trunks. An extension may, however, be able to answer a trunk transferred from another tenant. In each tenant group, enable/disable the alarm for calls that ring too long without being answered. The system allows 15 different Classes of Service for each tenant group.
0407 Analog Communications Interface Barge In Callback Central Office Calls 0508
DCI Group Numbers DCI software ports in different tenants can be in the same group, but the groups always have different pilot numbers. An extension in one tenant cannot dial a DCI Group pilot number belonging to another tenant. FEATURES 507
Department Calling
0410
Customize each tenants Department Calling dialing options. Extensions in different tenants can be in the same Department Group, but the Department Groups always have different pilot numbers. An extension in one tenant cannot dial a Department Group pilot number belonging to another tenant. Assign a Door Box to a tenant group.
0506
Automatic Handsfree Enable/disable Automatic Handsfree for each tenant group. Handsfree Mic Control Forced Intercom Ringing Automatic Hold Hold Key Operating Mode Operators Extension Incoming Call Priority Night Service, Manual Night Mode Switch Operating Mode Night Service, Automatic Night Service Patterns Off Hook Signaling Mode External Paging Zone Tenant Internal Paging Zone Names For each tenant group, enable/disable an extensions microphone for Handsfree calls. Enable Forced Intercom Ringing or Handsfree Answerback for each Intercom call. Enable/disable Automatic Hold for each tenant group. Customize the function of the HOLD key for each tenant group. Designate an operator for each tenant group. For each tenant group, determine if ringing Intercom or trunk calls have answer priority. Allow/prevent tenant group members from activating Night Service Program the function of the Night Mode service switch sensors for each tenant group. Enable/disable Automatic Night Mode Switching for each tenant group. Each tenant group can have its own Automatic Night Service patterns, Weekly Night Service Switching and Holiday Night Service Switching. Set Off Hook Signaling to ring or voice-announce for each tenant group. Assign an External Paging zone to a tenant group. Each zone can only be in one tenant. Assign names to each tenants Internal Paging zones. There are 32 zones in each tenant group.
1105 0401 Item 8 0401 Item 1 0402 Item 3 0401 Item 2 0801, 0802 and 0803
Extension Ringdown The system allows system 50 Extension Ringdown Assignments (hotline) assignments per tenant group.
508 FEATURES
For each tenant group, select between Idle and Ringing Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Line Preference for trunk calls. Calls Ringing Line Preference for Intercom Calls Selectable Display Messages SMDR Options Setting the User Passwords Setting the Programming Passwords System Timers (Part A) Inter-Tenant Calling Extension Tenant Group Toll Restriction Tables Toll Restriction Class CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode Trunk Group Key Operating Mode Trunk Service Type DISA and OPA Operating Mode Operator Assistance VAU Message Length General Message Number VAU No Answer Destination For each tenant group, select between Idle and Ringing Line Preference for Intercom calls. The system allows up to 20 Selectable Display Messages per tenant. Each tenant group can have their own set of SMDR options. You can assign user passwords to each tenant. If you want, you can have different user passwords for each tenant. The 384i system has eight users for password entry. You can assign users to a specific tenant or to all tenants universally. Program various system timers for each tenant group. With this option, you can allow or prevent inter-tenant Intercom calling and trunk Transfer. Assign extensions to tenant groups. Each tenant can have a different set of Toll Restriction tables. The system has 15 Toll Restriction Classes for each tenant. For each tenant group, set the CONF (TRF) key operating mode. Set the Trunk Group key operating mode for each tenant group. Each tenant groups trunks can be answered by the VAU Module Incomplete Automated Attendant calls can by handled differently in each tenant group You can individually choose which trunks in which tenant groups you want the Automated Attendant to answer The VAU Message Length option applies to all tenant groups Each tenant group can have a different General Message The VAU No Answer Destination can be different for each tenant group
Selectable Display Messaging Station Message Detail Recording System Programming Password Protection
Toll Restriction
0702 0701
0402 Item 2 0402 Item 1 0901 Item 14-17 1802 Items 1-3 1804 Item 1 2202 2203 2204
FEATURES 509
OPA Message Assignment OPA Fax Line Ring Group 900 Preamble VAU Password OPA Error Message Assignment
You can assign any available OPA message to any trunk in any one of the systems tenant groups You can have any fax call route to any Ring Group in any one of the systems tenant groups You can assign different 900 Preambles to the trunks in each tenant group All tenant groups share the same VAU password You can assign different error messages to the trunks en each tenant group
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page. 0301 - Inter-Tenant Calling Allow (1) or prevent (0) system-wide inter-tenant calling. 0904 - Trunk Tenant Assign trunks to tenant groups (1-4). 1002 - Extension Tenant Assign extensions to tenant groups (1-4). Note: For additional programming information, refer to the features listed in the Tenant Service Feature Interaction table on the previous pages.
510 FEATURES
Start
An extension in one tenant group can have the same number as an extension in another group. In Program 0301, enter 0. No Should user in one tenant be able to place Intercom calls and transfer trunk calls to another tenant? Yes In Program 0301, enter 1.
Stop
Related Features
Refer to the Tenant Service Feature Interaction table on the previous pages.
Operation
Refer to the features listed in the Tenant Service Feature Interaction table.
FEATURES 511
Description
124i Available with EXCPRU PCB only. DTMF tie lines require a DTDU PCB. Customizing CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels and Tone Detection Setup requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Enhanced Answer Supervision requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. See page 844. 384i Available. Customizing CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels and Tone Detection Setup require system software 3.04 or higher. Enhanced Answer Supervision requires system software 3.05.15 or higher. See page 844.
Tie lines directly link a local telephone system with one or more remote systems. The link is independent of the telcos switched network. When a local system user seizes a tie line, they hear Intercom dial tone from the remote system. The user may then be able to: Dial extensions in the remote system Use the remote systems trunks for outgoing calls Access Common Abbreviated Dialing bins in the remote system Use the remote systems Internal and External Paging The system provides connection for 4 TL11M E&M tie line circuits (4 conductors, 2 voice and 2 signaling), 4 TL12M E&M tie line circuits (6 conductors, 2 voice and 4 voice signaling), or 4 four-wire E&M tie line circuits (4 conductors, 4 voice/signaling). Tie Line Class of Service Tie Line Class of Service provides features and dialing restrictions for incoming tie lines. This allows you to control the capabilities of callers dialing into your system. The tie line Class of Service options are:
First Digit Absorption A tie line can ignore (absorb) the first digit received, which helps when setting up a tie line network. For example, your system can have tie lines to two other systems with the same extension numbering plan. Use the first digit to differentiate between the systems. Tie line callers can dial 3200-3456 for the first systems extensions and 4200-4456 for the second systems extensions. The receiving system ignores the first digit and routes calls correctly to the extension dialed (i.e., 4301 is received as 301). Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access When a tie line user calls the remote system, they may be able to dial 9 and place outside calls through the remote system. Any toll charges are incurred by the remote system. The call follows the remote systems Trunk Group Access or Automatic Route Selection - whichever is enabled. Trunk GroupAccess Tie line callers may be able to access trunk groups in the remote system by dialing Service Code 804 and the trunk group number. This allows the callers to select a specific trunk group for an outgoing call. Trunk Group Access bypasses the remote systems Trunk Group Routing/ARS. As with dial 9 access, any toll charges are incurred by the remote system. Common Abbreviated Dialing The remote systems Common Abbreviated Dialing bins may be available to tie line callers. Use this capability to set up centralized Abbreviated Dialing control - or just save time when dialing. Operator Calling A tie line caller may be able to dial 0 for the remote systems operator. Paging Internal and External Paging may be available to tie line callers. This allows co-workers in adjacent facilities connected by tie lines, for example, to broadcast announcements to each other. 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
512 FEATURES
Direct Trunk Access This option allows tie line callers to directly access a trunk for an outside call by dialing #9 and the trunks number. Like Trunk Group Access, this bypasses the remote systems Trunk Group Routing/ARS. Any toll charges are incurred by the remote system. Forced Trunk Disconnect The Forced Trunk Disconnect option allows a tie line caller to disconnect (release) another extensions active outside call. The tie line caller can then place a call on the released trunk. Tie line callers should use Forced Trunk Disconnect only in an emergency, when no other trunks are available.
Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction You can selectively deny incoming tie lines access to your systems outgoing trunk groups. Incoming tie line callers could be able to access your outgoing WATS lines, for example, but not your DDD trunks. The system allows you to set up a restriction matrix for each of your incoming tie lines - for each of your outgoing trunk groups. Tie Line Toll Restriction Class Incoming tie lines can have a Toll Restriction Class and be subject to the systems toll restriction. For example, Toll Restriction can prevent users from dialing 1-900 calls. When an incoming tie line caller tries to use system trunks to dial a 1-900 service, Toll Restriction will deny the call. Flexible Tie Line Service Compatibility You can individually program tie lines for Dial Pulse (DP) or DTMF incoming or outgoing signaling. Outgoing tie lines can be either wink start or immediate start. Conditions (A.) Tie lines require the installation of a 4ATRU-EM PCB. Each PCB provides four tie line ports but uses eight trunk software ports. For example, a tie line PCB that provides trunks 1-4 automatically disables trunks 5-8. (B.) The 4ATRU-EM PCB requires a customer provided 48 VDC battery supply. Refer to the hardware manual for additional details. (C.) Tie line service must be purchased from your local telephone company. Default Setting Disabled.
FEATURES 513
In 0905, assign each unique type of tie trunk to its own trunk group.
No
Are all your tie trunks of the same type - with the same signaling requirements?
Yes
In 0905, assign all tie trunks to the same group. No other trunks should be in the group.
DP
DTMF
In 0133, make sure the Tie Line Timers are compatible with the local telco.
(384i Only) In 0303, reserve at least one CDTU block for DTMF reception (type 2).
In 0901:1, enter 0 for 10 pps DP outbound signaling; enter 1 for 20 pps DP outbound signaling.
DP
DTMF
Imm.
Wink
Should immediate start tie line send dial tone once call is set up?
No
Set 0901:25 to 0.
Set 0901:26 to 0.
No
Should wink start tie line send dial tone once call is set up?
Yes
Set 0901:25 to 1.
Set 0901:26 to 1.
514 FEATURES
In 0412:1, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0412:1, enter 1.
In 0412:2, enter 0.
No
Should tie line user be able to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS?
Yes
In 0412:2, enter 1.
In 0412:3, enter 0.
No
Should tie line user be able access a trunk group by dialing 804 and the group's number?
Yes
In 0412:3, enter 1.
In 0412:4, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0412:4, enter 1.
In 0412:5, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0412:5, enter 1.
In 0412:6, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0412:6, enter 1.
In 0412:7, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0412:7, enter 1.
In 0412:8, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0412:8, enter 1.
In 0412:9, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0412:9, enter 1.
FEATURES 515
Is the DTMF Receiver Active Time adequate? Yes In 2302, assign a tie line's Class of Service (1-16) for options in 0412.
No
Did you enable dial 9 trunk access for tie line in 0412 Item 27?
Yes
In 2304, set the trunk group route (1-64, set in 0906) the tie line seizes when the user dials 9.
No
In 0906, program Trunk Group Routing (1-64). (If the system has ARS enabled, dialing 9 accesses ARS instead.)
Do you want to restrict tie line users from accessing certain trunk groups for outgoing calls?
Yes
In 2305, select the tie line trunk group (1-128) you want to program.
No
Select the trunk group (1128) you want to restrict. Enter 0 to allow calls; enter 1 to restrict calls.
In 2306, be sure to assign the tie line to a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) that does not restrict calls.
No
Do you want calls tie line users place over system trunks subject to Toll Restriction?
Yes
In 0701 and 0702, be sure the Toll Restriction Class you select does not restrict calls.
516 FEATURES
In 0116 Items 1-10, set the DTMF criteria for tie line calls for compatibility with the telco.
No
Yes
If required, in 0117 customize the CODEC Gain Type transmit and receive levels.
Yes
No
Stop
FEATURES 517
518 FEATURES
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection/Trunk Group Routing In a system with ARS enabled: When a tie line user dials 9 for an outside call, the system routes the call via ARS. In a system with ARS disabled: When a tie line user dials 9 for an outside call, the system uses the routes programmed for Trunk Group Routing. Central Office Calls, Placing Depending on programming, you can seize a tie line by: Pressing a line key Pressing a One-Touch Key Dialing a trunk group code Dial codes which directly accessing a specific tie line Dial Tone Detection Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection. Trunk Groups To simplify placing calls over your tie lines, you can put the tie lines in a trunk group.
Operation
To place a call over a tie line group: 1. Press idle CALL key and dial 804. 2. Dial tie line group number (1-9, 01-32 or 001-128). 3. Dial number. OR 1. Press tie line group key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1012 + group). 2. Dial number. To place a tie line call using Trunk Group Routing: 1. Press idle CALL key and dial 9. 2. Dial number. OR 1. Press tie line Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1011). 2. Dial number
FEATURES 519
After calling the remote system, you may be able to: Dial 9 to place an outside call through the remote system. Dial Service Code #9 + a trunk number to place outside calls over a specific trunk. Use the remote systems Common Abbreviated Dialing. Call the remote systems operator. Use the remote systems Internal and/or External Paging.
520 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. Year 2000 Compliance is not avaiable 384i Available. Year 2000 Compliance requires system software 3.07.25 or higher.
The system uses Time and Date for: Central Office Calls (Access Maps) Class of Service (Class) Direct Inward Lines Display Telephones Fax Machine Compatibility Night Service (Automatic) Programmable Trunk Parameters
Ring Groups Station Message Detail Recording System Reports Toll Restriction (Class) Trunk Group Routing Voice Announce Unit
Conditions The system retains the Time and Date after a power failure or system reset. Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0003 - Time and Date Set the system Time and Date from your administrators telephone. 0103 - Time and Date Display Mode Select the display mode (type 1-8) for Time and Date (i.e., Time and Date format). 0202 - Setting User Passwords, Item 1: Time and Date and MOH Password Set the password used for setting the Time and Date (i.e., with Service Code 828). 0406 - COS Options, Item 71: Time and Date In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extensions ability to set the Time and Date. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Single Line Telephones Single line telephones cannot set the Time and Date. Year 2000 Compliance When setting the Time and Date from the telephone, the extension user enters 00 for 2000, 01 for 2001, etc.
FEATURES 521
Start
Should extension user be able to set the Time and Date (Service Code 828)?
Do you want to change the default password users dial when changing the Time and Date?
In 0202 Item 1, change the Time and Date and MOH password.
If the system prevents all extensions from dialing Service Code 828, this is the only way to change the Time and Date.
Do you want to set the system Time and Date from system programming?
You have 8 different formats from which to choose. Do you want to change the way Time and Date displays on telephone displays? In 0103, select the new Time and Date format (1-8).
Stop
522 FEATURES
FEATURES 523
Description
124i Available eight Toll Restriction classes and 72 extensions. Digit counting (0702:4) not required in order to use the Permit and Restrict Code Tables. 384i Available 15 Toll Restriction Classes in each Tenant Group and 256 extensions. In system software 3.05.15 and earlier, you must enable digit counting (0702:4) in order to use the Permit and Restrict Code Tables.
Toll Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place only certain types of calls, you can better control long distance costs. The system applies Toll Restriction according to an extensions Toll Restriction Class. The 384i has 15 Toll Restriction Classes per Tenant Group. The 124i has eight Toll Restriction Classes. Toll Restriction offers the following capabilities:
Common Permit Code Table Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Toll Restriction Classes to dial. To let all users dial 911, for example, put 911 in the Common Permit Code Table. The Common Permit Code Table overrides the Restrict Code and Common Restrict Code Tables. Each tenant has one table, with 10 entries in each table. Each code is 4 digits max., using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card). Common Restrict Code Table The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Toll Restriction Classes. To prevent all users from dialing directory assistance (411), for example, put 411 in the Common Restrict Code Table. Be sure you dont allow the codes you want to restrict in the Permit Code Table or the Common Permit Code Table. Each tenant has one table, with 10 entries in each table. Each code is 4 digits max., using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card). Restrict Code Table When you want Toll Restriction to allow most calls and restrict only selected calls, use the Restrict Code Table. To block only 1-900 calls, for example, enter 1900 in the Restrict Code Table. (If the same Toll Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the system restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables are not restricted.) Each tenant has four tables, with 60 entries (restricted codes) in each table. A restricted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card). Permit Code Table The Permit Code Table lets you set up Toll Restriction so that users can dial only selected (permitted) telephone numbers. Use this table when you want to restrict most calls. To allow all users to dial only area code 203, for example, enter 1203 in the Permit Code Table. 1 + 203 + NNX + nnnn are the only numbers users can dial. (If the same Toll Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the system restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables are not restricted.) Each tenant has four tables, with 60 entries (permitted codes) in each table. A permitted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card). International Call Restriction International Call Restriction lets you limit the international calls an extension user may dial. You can build a restrict table to prevent only certain calls, or you can build a permit table to allow only certain calls. To allow most international calls, use the International Call Restrict Table. To prevent most international calls, use the International Call Allow Table. Each Tenant can have one International Call Restrict table and one International Call Allow table, with up to 10 digits in each table entry. Valid entries are 0-9, #,* and FLASH (for a wild card).
524 FEATURES
Toll Restriction for Abbreviated Dialing Abbreviated Dialing can bypass or follow Toll Restriction. If you allow many users to program Abbreviated Dialing, consider Toll Restricting the numbers they dial. If only administrators can program Abbreviated Dialing, Toll Restriction may not be necessary. You can separately restrict Group and Common Abbreviated Dialing. Local Call Digit Counting Use Local Call Digit Counting to limit the number of digits local callers can dial. You can use this option to prevent users from accessing local dial-up services. For example, set the Maximum Number of Digits in Local Calls to 7 to limit local callers to dialing the exchange code (NNX) and local address (nnnn) only. You can make four entries for this option in each tenant group. The range is 4-8 digits. Toll Call Digit Counting With Toll Call Digit Counting, you can limit the number of digits long distance callers can dial. This lets you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial-up services. You can make four entries ( 4-30 digits) for each tenant. Toll Free Trunks Certain trunks can be completely unrestricted, such as the company presidents Private Line. Users can place calls on Toll Free Trunks anytime -- to anywhere, without inadvertently being toll restricted. PBX Call Restriction Toll Restriction programming lets you enable/disable PBX Call Restriction and enter PBX access codes. You only need to do this if your system is behind a PBX and you have trunks programmed for behind PBX operation. Refer to PBX Compatibility feature for the specifics.
Toll Restriction Overview The following chart shows the basic Toll Restriction process. Refer to Programming below for the specifics. Conditions (A.) If a Toll Restriction Class has the same entries in both a permit and restriction table, the system does not restrict the call. (B.) Toll Call Digit counting may prevent users from taking advantage of long distance automated services like ACD and automated Technical Service. Default Setting Disabled.
FEATURES 525
No
Yes
Yes
In Program 0702 Item 7, enter data into the Common Permit Codes Table. There is one table per tenant.
Yes
Do you want to allow all users within a Tenant Group to dial certain calls (such as 911)?
No
In Program 0701 Item 5, enable (1) the Common Permit Code Table.
In Program 0701 Item 5, disable (0) the Common Permit Code Table.
If you enable just the Common Permit Codes Table but don't make any entries, you can't place any trunk calls.
Do you want to prevent all users within a tenant from dialing certain calls (such as 1-900)?
Yes
In Program 0702 Item 8, enter data into the Common Restrict Codes Table. There is one table per tenant.
No
In Program 0701 Item 6, disable (0) the Common Restrict Codes Table.
In Program 0701 Item 6, enable (1) the Common Restrict Codes Table.
526 FEATURES
In 0702:6, program the Restrict Codes Tables. Each tenant group has four tables, with 60 entries in each table.
Allow
For a Toll Restriction Class, do you want to allow most calls or restrict most calls?
Restrict
In 0702:5, program the Permit Codes Tables. Each tenant group has four tables, with 60 entries in each table.
In 0701:12, enable the Restrict Code Table (1-4) you want to use.
In 0701:11, enable the Permit Code Table (1-4) you want to use.
In 0702:1, program the International Call Restrict Table. Each tenant group has one table, with ten entries in each table.
Allow
For a Toll Restriction Class, do you want to allow most international calls or restrict most international calls?
Restrict
In 0702:2, program the International Call Permit Table. Each tenant group has one table, with ten entries in each table.
FEATURES 527
In 0701:7 enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0701:7 enter 1.
In 0701:8 enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0701:8 enter 1.
In 0701:3 enter 0.
No
Do you want to restrict the number of digits local callers can dial?
Yes
In 0702:3 program the maximum number of local call digits dialed table. Each tenant has one table, with four entries in each table.
In 0701:4 enter 0.
No
Do you want to restrict the number of digits long distance callers can dial?
Yes
In 0702:4 program the maximum number of toll call digits dialed table. Each tenant has one table, with four entries in each table.
In 1004 assign a Toll Restriction Class to each extension for each Night Service Mode.
No
Yes
Stop
528 FEATURES
Are digits dialed in a Permit Table? No No Are digits dialed in a Restrict Table? Yes Has maximum local digit length been exceeded? No Digits sent out over trunk. Yes Toll violation occurs system drops call.
Yes
Yes
FEATURES 529
530 FEATURES
Related Features
Toll Restriction Override A user can temporarily override an extensions Toll Restriction.
Operation
To place a trunk call if your system is Toll Restricted: 1. Place call normally. If your Toll Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial, your call will be cut off.
FEATURES 531
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Toll Restriction Override lets a user temporarily bypass an extensions Toll Restriction. This helps a user that must place an important call that Toll Restriction normally prevents. For example, you could set up Toll Restriction to block 900 calls and then provide a Toll Restriction Override code to your attendant and executives. When the attendant or executive needs to place a 900 call, they just: Press CALL1 and dial their override code. Press a line key or dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9 or #9 002). Place the 900 call without restriction. You can assign a different Toll Restriction Override code to each extension. Or, extensions can share the same override code. Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Start
In 0406:33, enter 0.
No
Yes
In 0406:33, enter 1.
In 1025, enter the Toll Restriction Override code (4 digits) for each extension port.
After the system implements Toll Restriction Override, do users have adequate time to dial their number?
No
Yes
Stop
532 FEATURES
Related Features
Station Message Detail Recording In the Class heading in the SMDR report, POTA indicates that the call was placed using Toll Restriction Override. Toll Restriction Toll Restriction Override temporarily overrides an extensions Toll Restriction. Voice Announce Unit If the system has a Voice Announce Unit, users hear, "Your call cannot go through. Please call the operator" when they dial a number that Toll Restriction prevents.
Operation
To temporarily override a restricted extensions Toll Restriction: You can override restriction for only one call at a time. 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial 875. 3. Dial Toll Restriction Override code. If you wait too long before going to the next step, you may have to repeat the procedure. Youll hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly. 4. Press idle line key or dial trunk access code. 5. Dial number without restriction.
FEATURES 533
Description
124i Available requires EXCPRU 2.10 or higher and an LAPB PCB. Not available in Base software. Year 2000 Compliance: 124i is unaffected by the Year 2000 date change as the system uses a 2-digit date code entry. Future releases will use a 4-digit date code entry. 384i Available requires system software 3.04 or higher. Year 2000 Compliance: 384i is unaffected by the Year 2000 date change as prior to 3.07.25, a 2-digit date code entry is used. With 3.07.25 or higher, a 4-digit date code entry is used.
The system provides comprehensive Traffic Management (TMS) Reports that help when analyzing system usage and calling patterns. The TMS report is in five sections (shown below): 1. Trunk Calls Sorted by Extension 2. Trunk Calls Sorted by Trunk 3. ACD Calls Sorted by Agent 4. ACD Calls Sorted by ACD Group 5. All Trunks Busy Report 1. Trunk Calls Sorted By Extension Output Format -------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sample Report 10/03/95 PAGE 001
|===== INBOUND CALLS =====|===== OUTBOUND CALLS =======| STA | TOTAL | ANSRD | IN USE | TRIED | ABORTED | IN USE | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------301 4 1 00:01:40 3 2 00:00:01 305 0 2 00:02:44 0 0 00:00:00 307 0 0 00:00:00 1 1 00:00:00 311 0 1 00:01:15 0 0 00:00:00
Heading
STA INBOUND CALLS TOTAL ANSRD IN USE OUTBOUND CALLS TRIED Extension number Incoming trunk calls
Description
The total of all incoming trunk calls that rang the extension The total of all incoming trunk calls that the extension answered The time the extension was in use on incoming trunk calls Outgoing trunk calls The total of all trunk calls the extension tried to place
534 FEATURES
Sample Report
10/03/95 PAGE 002 |===================== INBOUND CALLS =======================|OUTBOUND CALLS| | | |RING-ANS| LONG| | | UNANSRD |ABAN-| | | TRK |TOTAL|ANSRD| DELAY | WAIT| IN USE |TRMNATD| WAIT |DONED|TOTAL| IN USE | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------001 2 2 00:00:13 0 00:02:30 0 00:00:00 0 4 00:00:02 002 2 2 00:00:05 0 00:03:09 0 00:00:00 0 0 00:00:00
Heading
TRK INBOUND CALLS TOTAL ANSRD RING-ANS DELAY LONG WAIT IN USE TRMNATD UNANSRD WAIT ABONDONED OUTBOUND CALLS TOTAL IN USE Trunk number Incoming trunk calls
Description
The total of all incoming calls that rang the trunk The total of all incoming calls on the trunk answered in the system The length of time calls on the trunk rang before being answered The number of calls that ring longer than 0414:6 (TMS Report Wait Time) before being answered. The time that unanswered incoming calls rang The number of calls that were terminated ;by the caller before being answered in the system The time that unanswered incoming calls rang The number incoming calls that the outside caller hung up while the calls were on hold or being transferred Outgoing trunk calls
The time the extension was in use for outgoing trunk calls
FEATURES 535
Sample Report
10/03/95 PAGE 003 ACD |== INBOUND CALLS ===|=== OUTBOUND CALLS ===|== OFF-DUTY ==| AGENT|TOTAL|ANSRD| IN USE |TRIED|ABORTED| IN USE |TIMES|DURATION| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------339 5 5 00:00:34 0 0 00:00:00 0 00:00:00
Heading
ACD AGENT INBOUND CALLS TOTAL ANSRD IN USE OUTBOUND CALLS TRIED ABORTED IN USE OFF DUTY TIMES DURATION
Description
Each extension/agent that is in an ACD Group Incoming trunk calls to ACD agents The number of trunk calls routed to the agent (answered or unanswered) The total of the incoming trunk calls answered by the agent The total time the member was in use for incoming trunk calls Outgoing trunk calls from ACD agents The number of times the agent seized trunks for outgoing calls The number of times the agent aborted before the called party answered The time the agent was in use for outgoing trunk calls Off-duty status of ACD agent The number of times the agent was in off-duty mode (i.e., logged out of their ACD Group) The length of time the agent was in off-duty mode, incremented when the agent returns to service
536 FEATURES
Heading
ACD GROUPS ACD MASTER AGENTS INBND CALLS ALL AGENTS BUSY
Description
The ACD Group number (001-008) The master number for each ACD Group The extension number of each ACD agent in each ACD Group Total number incoming trunk calls to ACD agent Report of the All Agents Busy condition. This occurs when there are no idle extensions in an ACD Group to receive calls to the ACD master number. The cumulative length of time of the All Agents Busy condition The number of times the All All Agents Busy condition occurred The number of trunk calls received by the ACD group while all agents were busy The number of trunk calls the outside caller aborted while waiting for an agent to answer (excluding trunk calls to which an overflow announcement is sent)
FEATURES 537
Sample Report
10/03/95 PAGE 005 | |========= ALL TRUNKS BUSY ==========| GROUPS| TRUNKS | TOTAL | DURATION | CALLS ATTEMPTED | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------002 001 3 00:01:28 2 002
Heading
GROUPS TRUNKS ALL AGENTS BUSY TOTAL DURATION CALLS ATTEMPTED
Description
The associated Trunk Group number The trunk port number the associated Trunk Group Report of the All Trunks Busy condition The number of times all trunks in the associated group were busy at the same time The commutative length of the All Trunks Busy condition The number of outgoing trunk group calls attempted while all trunks in the group were busy. This field does not include trunk calls placed using a line key or Trunk Group codes (e.g., 804 + 1 for Trunk Group 1).
538 FEATURES
Stop
No
Do you want to set up and print the TMS Reports? Refer to your Software and Hardware Manuals for more on setting up DCIs. In 0417:1, assign the DCI Software Port to which the TMS Report printer is connected.
Yes
No
Yes
In 0417:2, set From(EXT) and To(EXT) to include just the range of extensions you want to print.
A range of extensions
Should the TMS Report include all extensions or just a range of extensions?
All extensions
In 0417:2, set From(TRK) and To(TRK) to include just the range of trunks you want to print.
A range of trunks
Should the TMS Report include all trunks or just a range of trunks?
All trunks
Manually
Do you want to print the TMS Report manually or automatically at a preset time?
Automatically
Accumulate
When the report runs, do you want the TMS data to clear (erase) or accumulate?
Clear
FEATURES 539
Do you want the automatically printed report to include trunk data, trunk and ACD data, or all data? All data In 0417:4, enter 3 for Mode.
Trunk data
In 0417:4, enter the start time for the automatic report (Hour and MIN).
Are the LONG WAIT calls in TMS Report Section 2 logging correctly?
No
In 0414:6, change the TMS Report Wait Time to meet the site's requirements.
Yes
Stop
540 FEATURES
Prompt
Mode
Entry
0 1
Description
Manual printing enabled. Manual printing will occur immediately when requested by Program 0417 Item 3. Automatic printing (at a preset time) enabled for trunk data only. The TMS report will include only sections 2 and 5. Use the prompts Hour and MIN below to select the automatic print time. The TMS data clears after the report prints. Automatic printing (at a preset time) enabled for trunk and ACD data only. The TMS report will provide data in sections 2-5 only. Use the prompts Hour and MIN below to select the automatic print time. The TMS data clears after the report prints. Automatic printing (at a preset time) enabled for all data. Use the prompts Hour and MIN below to select the automatic print time. The TMS data clears after the report prints.
Hour MIN
This option selects the start hour (1-23) for automatic printing. Use a 24-hour clock (e.g., 13 = 1:00 PM). This option selects the start minute (1-59) for the hour selected in the previous option.
Related Features
Data Communications Interface (DCI) TMS Reports require a DCI Module or 3-DCI Unit, in addition to additional programming and a customer-provided printer. Refer to the system Software Manual and Hardware Manual for more on setting up and connecting to DCIs. Station Message Detail Recording SMDR provides additional information about the systems trunk calling patterns. Refer to the Software Manual for more.
FEATURES 541
To run the Traffic Management Report: 1. Enter the programming mode 2. 0417 + HOLD Tenant No? 3. Enter the number of the Tenant Group you want to program (1-4) + HOLD Menu No? 4. 3 + HOLD Print All?(Yes:1) The previously programmed value displays. 5. 1 + HOLD to enable printing. OR HOLD to go back to step 3. Data Clear?(Yes:1) 6. 1 + HOLD to run the TMS Report and clear (erase) the data after the report is run. OR HOLD to run the TMS Report without clearing the data. Use this option if you want data to accumulate in the TMS Report. Print O.K. If you see PRINT N.G. instead, there is a problem with the TMS printer or the software assignment. 7. HOLD + Return to step 4 to select another menu item. OR HOLD + HOLD + Return to step 3 to select another Tenant Group. OR HOLD three times to exit. Note: For additional programming options, refer to Program 0417 - Traffic Management Report Options on page 769.
542 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. MOH or ringback on Transfer requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i
Transfer permits an extension user to send (i.e., extend) an active Intercom or outside call to any other extension in the system. With Transfer, any extension user can quickly send a call to the desired co-worker. A call a user transfers automatically recalls if not picked up at the destination extension. This assures that users do not lose or inadvertently abandon their transfers. In 384i system software 3.04 and higher and 124i, while a transferred call is ringing an extension the system can optionally play ringback tone or Music on Hold to the caller. The system allows the following types of transfers: Screened Transfer The transferring user announces the call to the destination before hanging up Unscreened Transfer The transferring party extends the call without an announcement. Extension (Department) Groups Transfer The Transferring party sends the call to a Department instead of an extension. Transfer Without Holding A user presses a busy line key and waits for the call to complete. The system automatically sends them the call when the internal caller hangs up.
Automatic On-Hook Transfer Operation With Automatic On-Hook Transfer, a Transfer goes through as soon as the transferring user hangs up. For example, extension 304 can answer a trunk, press HOLD, dial 305 and hang up. The system extends the call to extension 305. Without Automatic On-Hook Transfer, the call would stay on Hold at extension 304 when the user hangs up. To extend the call, the user at extension 304 would have to press CONF (TRF) or a Transfer function key before hanging up. Each method has advantages. Automatic On-Hook Transfer makes transferring calls easier. However, users have to be more aware of how they handle their calls on Hold. Without Automatic On-Hook Transfer, extending a call becomes a two-step operation but separate from placing calls on Hold. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
FEATURES 543
No
Yes
If disabled, extension user cannot press a busy line key and wait for the internal caller to hang up. In 0406 Item 34, emter 0. No Should extension be allowed to use Transfer Without Holding? Yes In 0406 Item 34, emter 1.
If disabled, extension user must additionally press TRFR to Transfer a call. No In 0406 Item 76, enter 0. Should extension have Automatic On-Hook Transfer? Yes In 0406 Item 76, enter 1.
Function key
Do you want to use the CONF/TRF key or a function key to extend calls? CONF/TRF
In 0402 Item 6, enter 0. In 0402 Item 2, enter 0. The pre-answer display shows "TRANSFER<<," the incoming trunk and the transferring extension. No In 0406 Item 42, enter 0. Should extension be able to see the incoming pre-answer display? Yes In 0406 Item 42, enter 1.
544 FEATURES
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Hookswitch + *7
For single line telephones, should hookswitch or hookswitch + *7 answer camped on trunk call?
Hookswitch
Ringback
While a Transfer is ringing the destination, should system play MOH or ringback to caller?
MOH
Stop
FEATURES 545
546 FEATURES
Operation
Transferring Trunk Calls To Transfer a trunk call to a co-workers extension: 1. At keyset, press HOLD. OR At single line telephone, hookflash. You hear Transfer dial tone. 2. Dial co-workers extension number. If the extension is busy or doesnt answer, you can dial another extension number or press the flashing line key to return to the call. In addition, you may be able to hang up and have the call Camp-On. 3. Announce call and hang up. If you dont have Automatic On Hook Transfer, you must press CONF (TRF) or your Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call. If your co-worker doesnt want the call, press the flashing line key to return to the call. If you dont want to screen the call, hang up without making an announcement. To answer a call transferred to your extension: 1. Lift the handset when a co-worker announces the call.
FEATURES 547
Transferring Intercom Calls To Transfer your Intercom call: 1. At keyset, press HOLD. OR At single line telephone, hookflash. 2. Dial extension to receive your call. If the extension is busy or doesnt answer, you can dial another extension number or press the flashing CALL key to return to the call. In addition, you may be able to hang up and have the call Camp-On. 3. Announce your call and hang up. If your co-worker doesnt want the call, press the flashing CALL key to return to it. With Automatic On Hook Transfer If your co-worker just speaks toward their phone to answer, the transferred Intercom call goes on Hold at your phone when you hang up. Without Automatic On Hook Transfer You must press CONF (TRF) or your Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call. If your co-worker just speaks toward their phone to answer, the transferred Intercom call disconnects when you hang up. To Transfer the call unscreened, press CONF (TRF) or your Transfer Programmable Function Key and hang up without making an announcement.
548 FEATURES
Description
124i Available 16 trunk groups and 36 routes. Changing the Trunk Access Code requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available 128 trunk groups and 64 routes. Changing the Trunk Access Code requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Trunk Group Routing sets outbound call routing options for users that dial the Trunk Group Routing code (9) for trunk calls. Trunk Group Routing routes calls in the order specified by system programming. If a user dials 9 and all trunks in the first group are busy, the system may route the call to another group. When youre setting up your system, Trunk Group Routing will help you minimize the expense of toll calls. For example, if your system has outbound WATS lines, OCC lines and DDD lines, use Trunk Group Routing to route calls to the WATS lines first.
Route 2
OCC Moderately Expensive Second Choice
Route 3
DDD Most Expensive Third Choice
FEATURES 549
In this case, Trunk Group Routing is not required. In 0905, put all trunks in the same Trunk Group. Are all trunks of the same carrier/cost type?
For example, put DDD trunks in group 1 and WATS trunks in group 2. In 0905, program trunks of the same type into the same group.
Yes
No
Stop
Using Trunk Groups from 0905, in 0906 set up an outbound routing table (1-64 in 384i, 1-36 in 124i).
Normally, the least expensive carriers should be the first routes chosen.
In 0907, enter 0 for extensions that you want to prevent from dialing 9.
No
Yes
In 0912, assign extensions that should use Trunk Group Routing to the Access Maps set in the previous step.
In 0911, assign all the trunks in a specific route to the same Access Map. Use options 1, 4, or 7.
Caution: Be sure the assignments made in 0911 don't interfere with your incoming call Access Map programming. This may restrict your Trunk Group Routing choices.
In 1006, do not assign a function key for Trunk Group Routing (code 1011).
No
Yes
In 1006, assign a function key for Trunk Group Routing access (code 1011).
Yes
In 0510, select a new Trunk Access Code. You must also carefully review 0501.
No
Stop
550 FEATURES
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing Instead of using Trunk Group Routing, an extension user can place a trunk call by: Pressing a line key Dialing a trunk service code Pressing a trunk group key (refer to the Trunk Group feature) Dialing a trunk group service code (refer to the Trunk Group feature). Dial Tone Detection Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection. Programmable Function Keys Programmable Function Keys simplify placing calls using Trunk Group Routing. Ringing Line Preference The system uses Trunk Group Routing programming (Program 0906) when setting up Ringing Line Preference. Tenant Service Each tenant group can have a different trunk group routing code. Trunk Groups Use trunk group programming to set the order in which users access trunks within a specific trunk group.
Operation
To place a call using Trunk Group Routing: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial 9. 3. Dial number. OR 1. Press Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1011). 2. Dial number.
FEATURES 551
Description
124i Available 16 trunk groups. 384i Available 128 trunk groups.
Trunk Groups let you optimize trunk usage for incoming and outgoing calls. With Trunk Groups, users can have loop (rotary) keys for trunk calls. Incoming trunk group calls ring these loop keys. For outgoing calls, the user presses a loop key to access the first available trunk within the group. You set the access order in trunk group programming. The system allows 128 trunk groups. Loop keys give an extension user more available function keys, since the user doesnt need a separate line key for each trunk. The user only needs one loop key for each trunk group. This simplifies placing and answering calls. Like Trunk Group Routing, Trunk Groups help you minimize the expense of toll calls. For example, if your system has outbound WATS lines, OCC lines and DDD lines, program the trunk group to route to the WATS lines first.
Priority Type of Trunk
552 FEATURES
Yes
Each trunk with unique access requirements should be in its own Access Map. In 0912, assign extensions to Access Maps whose trunks do not use options 1, 4, 6 or 7. No Should extension be able to place outgoing calls on Trunk Groups? Yes In 0911, assign trunks to Access Maps. Use access option 1, 4, 6 or 7.
Stop
In 1006, do not assign function keys for Trunk Group access (code 1012 + group).
No
Yes
In 1006, assign function keys for Trunk Group access (code 1012 + group).
Incoming
Should Trunk Group function key be for Outgoing Access, Incoming Access or both? Both In 0402 Item 1, enter 0 for both Incoming and Outgoing Access.
Outgoing
Stop
FEATURES 553
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing Instead of using Trunk Groups, an extension user can place a trunk call by: Pressing a line key Dialing a trunk access code Dialing a Trunk Group Routing code (9) - refer to the Trunk Group Routing feature Dial Tone Detection Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify placing and answering trunk group calls. Ring Groups Trunks ring extensions according to Ring Group programming. Trunk Group Routing Trunk Group Routing sets outbound call routing options for users that dial the Trunk Group Routing code (9) for trunk calls.
Operation
To place a call over a trunk group: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial 804. 3. Dial trunk group number (1-9, 01-99 or 001-128) 4. Dial number. OR 1. Press trunk group key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1012 + group) 2. Dial number To answer an incoming trunk group call: 1. Lift handset. 2. Press flashing trunk group key.
554 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Trunk Queuing permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on hook for a busy trunk or trunk group to become free. The system recalls the queued extension as soon as the trunk is available. The user does not have to manually retry the trunk later. Trunk Queuing lets the caller know when the call can go through. If the extension user does not answer the Trunk Queuing ring, the system cancels the queue request. With Trunk Camp On, an extension user can queue (wait in line) off hook for a busy trunk or trunk group to become free. The caller connects to the trunk when the trunk becomes free. As with Trunk Queuing, the user does not have to manually retry the trunk later. Any number of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp On for the same trunk or trunk group. When a trunk becomes free, the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests were left. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
FEATURES 555
Start
In 1006, do not assign a function key for Trunk Queuing/Camp On (code 1020).
No
Yes
When Trunk Queuing calls an extension back, does it ring for an adequate time? Yes
No
Does the system wait an adequate time before canceling Callbacks/Camp Ons that cannot go through? Yes
No
Stop
556 FEATURES
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection With Automatic Route Selection, Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route. Call Waiting/Camp On and Callback A user can Camp On or leave a Callback request for an extension. Programmable Function Keys Function keys simplify Trunk Queuing operation.
Operation
To queue for a busy trunk: 1. Try to access busy trunk. 2. Dial 2 or press Trunk Queuing/Camp On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020). 3. Hang up to leave a Trunk Queuing request. OR Wait off hook to Camp On to the trunk. To answer when Trunk Queuing calls you back: 1. Lift handset. To cancel a Trunk Queueing/Camp On request: 1. At keyset, press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial 870. 3. At keyset, press SPK to hang up. OR At single line telephone, hang up.
FEATURES 557
Description
124i Available install VAU in odd numbered ports only. The system reserves the next adjacent port for the expansion module (if installed). If not installed, the adjacent port is disabled. When a user presses 8 with system software 2.13 Base, 2.18 EXCPRU or higher, they hear the date immediately after the time. The Voice Announce Unit is Year 2000 Compliant and will announce the year 2000 and above. 384i Available. Park and Page and Personal Greeting have different procedures prior to system software 3.04. When a user presses 8 with system software 3.06.02 or higher, they hear the date immediately after the time. The Voice Announce Unit is Year 2000 Compliant and will announce the year 2000 and above.
The Voice Announce Unit (VAU) Module gives the system voice recording and playback capability. This enhances the system with: VAU Messages - are 16 system messages used for the General Message, Automated Attendant greetings and the 900 Preamble General Message - provides a prerecorded message to which any user can listen Personal Greeting - lets an extension user record a message and forward their calls. Callers to the exten sion hear the recorded message and are then redirected. Park and Page - parks a call at an extension and automatically pages the user to pick it up Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance) - answers incoming calls, plays a greeting to the caller and then lets the caller directly dial a system extension Voice Prompting Messages - plays call and feature status messages to users 900 Preamble - alerts callers using 900 lines of the cost and features of the "pay-per-call" service Time, Date and Station Number Check - lets a keyset extension user quickly hear a recording for the time, date, or the extensions number. The Main VAU Module (P/N 92136) has three channels, 128 seconds of VAU Message storage and 256 seconds of Personal Greeting storage. By adding the Plug-in Expansion Board (P/N 92137), the VAU capacity increases to six channels and 512 seconds of Personal Greeting storage capacity. Each VAU channel has its own integral DTMF receiver. The Main VAU Module and Plug-in Expansion Board do not require the use of system (i.e., CDTU PCB) DTMF receivers. In the Main VAU Module, all three channels can play messages simultaneously, or users can record on two while the third plays a message. By installing the Plug-in Expansion Board, six channels can play messages simultaneously, or users can record on four while the fifth and sixth play messages.1 With Automated Attendant, for example, a system with a Main VAU Module can answer and route three calls at the same time. A system with the Plug-in Expansion Board installed can answer and route six calls at the same time. VAU Messages The VAU Module allows you to record up to 16 VAU messages. You allocate these messages for Automated Attendant greetings, the General Message and the 900 Preamble message. The total storage time for all 16 messages is 128 seconds. The maximum duration of any one VAU message is programmable, but normally limited to 16 seconds . VAU messages are battery backed up. Once recorded, the VAU Module will retain the VAU Messages in memory for up to 14 days provided the battery in the module is fully charged. (To fully charge the battery, plug the VAU Module into a working system for about 24 hours.)
1 The Main VAU Module allows recording on two channels simultaneously. The Main Module with the Plug-in Expansion Board allows recording on four channels simultaneously.
558 FEATURES
FEATURES 559
If a call comes into the extension when there are no VAU ports available to play the Personal Greeting, the system forwards the call without playing the recorded message to the caller. If an extension has Personal Greeting (RNA) enabled, Intercom calls that voice announce are not subject to Personal Greeting rerouting. Personal Greeting does not reroute normal Ring Group calls. Calls transferred from a co-worker or Voice Mail Automated Attendant route to the forwarding destination without listening to the Personal Greeting. Park and Page When an extension user is away from their phone, Park and Page can let them know when they have a call waiting to be answered. To enable Park and Page, the user records a Personal Greeting along with an additional Paging announcement. Park and Page will then answer an incoming call and play the Personal Greeting to the caller. The caller then listens to Music on Hold (if available) while the system broadcasts the prerecorded Paging announcement. When the extension user hears the Page, they can go to any telephone and use Directed Call Pickup to intercept up the call. For example, John Smith could record a Personal Greeting that says: "Hello, this is John Smith. I am away from my phone right now but please hold on while I am automatically paged." The prerecorded Paging announcement could say: "John Smith, you have a call waiting on your line." The incoming caller hears the first message and listens to Music on Hold while the system broadcasts the second message. John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call. If John doesnt pick up the call, the Page periodically repeats. Park and Page follows the rules for Personal Greeting for All Calls, immediately rerouted. This means that Park and Page will activate for ringing Intercom calls, DID calls and DISA calls. It will also activate for calls transferred from the Automated Attendant. Additionally, calls from the Automated Attendant follow Automatic Overflow routing if not picked up. Park and Page will activate for transferred outside calls but not play the Personal Greeting to the caller. If a call comes in when the specified Page zone is busy, the system broadcasts the announcement when the zone becomes free.
560 FEATURES
FEATURES 561
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Oh Zero 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A user dials 6 for the extension number or 8 for the time, or as part of a spoken code (e.g., 804). Not currently used A user dials 3 for the date, 6 for the extension number, 8 for the time or as part of a spoken code (e.g., 114).
562 FEATURES
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Hundred Thousand Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday This is station The date is The time is AM PM Dial Star Pound Station Is busy, for callback dial
Not currently used. Not currently used. A user dials 3 for the date.
A user dials 6 for the extension number. A user dials 3 for the date. A user dials 8 for the time. A user dials 8 for the time. A user dials 8 for the time. A command is spoken (e.g., "dial 2"). Not currently used.
A user dials 6 for the extension number. A user is calling a busy extension. FEATURES 563
49 50 51
All lines are busy, for callback dial Please do not disturb Please hold on, all lines are busy, your call will be answered when a line becomes free Please hold on, your call is being rerouted The lowest cost line is busy, please wait for the next one The number you have dialed is not in service You have a message Your call cannot go through, please call the operator Your calls have been forwarded Vacant number Is unavailable Please dial a new station Or dial To wait To leave your number Dial # to call you back at Please enter your area code and telephone number Please enter your password Please enter an account code Please start recording Recording finished
A user dials 9 or 804 (+ trunk group) and all trunks are busy A user calls an extension that has enabled Do Not Disturb. ACD message - refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**). Call Forwarding Off-Premise is rerouting your call ARS tries to reroute the users call and the least costly route is busy. User dials a Service Code that Class of Service prevents. An extension user has a Message Waiting to which they have not responded. Toll Restriction has denied a call. An extension user has forwarded their calls. An extension user has dialed an extension that does not exit. An outside caller dials an extension through the Automated Attendant and the extension is busy.
52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
Not currently used. An outside caller dials an extension through the Automated Attendant and the extension is busy. Not currently used. A user tries to place a trunk call and Forced Account Codes are enabled. A user has dialed the code to record a VAU message or Personal Greeting A user is recording a VAU message or Personal Greeting and they have exceeded the maximum allowed recording length. There is no more space available in the VAU for storing messages.
70
564 FEATURES
telemanuals.com
Voice Prompting Messages Message No. Message This message will play when . . .
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
To listen dial To erase dial To re-record dial To save dial To leave a message Just a moment Hello Thank you Good-by
A user is trying to record a VAU message or Personal Greeting and the recording already exists.
900 Preamble If the system has trunks that are part of a 900 (caller paid) service, the VAU Module can automatically play a prerecorded message when a user answers the call. This prerecorded message should describe the 900 service features and cost. The 900 Preamble ensures that the caller is always aware that they have accessed a 900 "pay-per-call" service. A system user cannot converse with the caller until the preamble message ends. If the caller hangs up before the message completes, they are not charged for the call. If the caller waits for the message to end, they can talk to a system user and call charging begins. The system will answer as many 900 calls as there are available VAU ports. If a 900 calls comes in when all VAU ports are busy, the call will not appear on an extension until a VAU port is available. You can also use the 900 Preamble message to set up an Auto-Answer with Greeting application. When a receptionist answers a call, the VAU can play a preamble message such as, "Welcome to ABC Company. How can I help you?" When the caller replies, the receptionist answers, "One moment please," and quickly extends the call to the desired party. This ensures that all incoming calls are answered quickly, courteously and consistently.
FEATURES 565
566 FEATURES
Start
In 0005, enter circuit type 8 for the VAU Module. (Skip this action and the following decision in 124i.)
Expansion
Main
You must initialze the VAU Module when you install it for the first time.
Yes
Do you want to initialize (erase) all VAU Messages and Personal Greetings? No
Yes
In 2201, select Item 1 to initialize all VAU Messages and Personal Greetings.
Yes
No
Yes
FEATURES 567
The system uses VAU Messages for the General Message, Automated Attendant Greetings and the 900 Preamble. No
Start
Yes
This sets the maximum length of Automated Attendant Greetings, the General Message and the 900 Preamble.
Yes
In 2202 Item 1, change the maximum allowed length of the VAU Message.
No
Yes
In 2208, set the password DISA callers must dial before recording VAU Messages.
568 FEATURES
Start
No
Yes
In 2203, enter the number of the VAU Message you want to use for the General Message.
FEATURES 569
No
Should extension be allowed to use Personal Greeting? Changing this option also affects Park and Page.
Yes
Should a call to an extension with Personal Greeting options 2 and 6 enabled ring 10 seconds before rerouting? Yes If all VAU ports are busy, should DIL and DISA calls to an extension with Personal Greeting enabled reroute? No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
For one-button access to the Call Forwarding Device code (*4), in 1006 assign a Call Forwarding Device key (code 1081).
570 FEATURES
Start
No Should extension be able to use Park and Page? Changing this option also affects Personal Greeting.
Yes
If a Park and Page is not picked up, is the repeat interval (18 seconds) adequate? Yes
No
In 0405 Item 64, change the Park and Page Repeat Timer.
For one-button access to the Call Forwarding Device code (*4), in 1006 assign a Call Forwarding (Device( key (code 1081).
Start
In 2207 for the specified trunk, enter 0 to disable the 900 Preamble.
No
Yes
In 2207 for the specified trunk, enter the VAU Message number (1-16) that should play as the 900 preamble.
FEATURES 571
In 0901 Items 14-17 for each trunk, enter a circuit type other than 1.
No
Yes
In 0901 Item 14-17 for each trunk, enter 1 if Automated Attendant should automatically answer incoming calls.
Stop
In 2205 for each trunk, enter the VAU Message the caller hears after answer.
Error Recording
In 2209 for each trunk, enter the VAU Message the caller hears if they misdial.
Reroute or Disconnect
In 1802, enter 0 for each item that should disconnect: Item 1 = Timeout w/o dialing Item 2 = Unanswered or busy Item 3 = Misdial
Disconnect
If caller misdials, waits too long or dials an extension that doesn't answer, does call reroute or disconnect?
Reroute
In 1802, enter 1 for each item that should reroute: Item 1 = Timeout w/o dialing Item 2 = Unanswered or busy Item 3 = Misdial
This also sets options for DISA calls. In 1803, set the Ring Group to which the incomplete call reroutes. (1-126 in 384i, 1-15 in 124i)
in 0909, assign extensions to the Ring Group programmed in 1803 that should receive the rerouted calls.
572 FEATURES
If an extension doesn't answer, does the Automated Attendant wait an adequate time before rerouting?
No
In 0405 Item 35, change the DISA and OPA No Answer Time.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
In 2210 for each VAU Message used by the Automated Attendant, set the destination for each single digit dialed.
No
Stop
FEATURES 573
574 FEATURES
Related Features
(384i Only) Tenant Service One VAU Module is shared among all Tenant Groups. Year 2000 Compliance The Voice Announce Unit will properly announce the year 2000 and above.
FEATURES 575
576 FEATURES
GENERAL MESSAGE To listen to the General Message: Keyset Your MW LED flashes when there is a new General Message. A voice message periodically reminds you 1. Do not lift the handset or press CALL. 2. Dial 4 (General). You will hear the General Message for your own Tenant Group. Normally, your MW LED goes out. If it continues to flash, you have unanswered "Message Waiting" requests or new messages in your "Voice Mail" mailbox. Single Line Telephone 1. Lift handset. 2. Dial 111. You will hear the General Message for your own Tenant Group. To record, listen to or erase the General Message for your own Tenant Group: 1. Press idle CALL key. OR At single line telephone, lift handset. 2. Dial 112. 3. Dial the function you want. 7 = Record 5 = Listen 3 = Erase If you dialed 7 to record, you can dial # to listen to the message you just recorded. If you dialed 5 to listen, you can dial # to listen to the message again. To Record or listen to the General Message again, go back to step 3. If you dialed 3 to erase the General Message, you must go to step 4 (hang up). To cancel without erasing, press HOLD instead and go back to step 3. 4. Hang up when you are done.
FEATURES 577
578 FEATURES
FEATURES 579
580 FEATURES
FEATURES 581
582 FEATURES
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT The review the phone numbers left on your display by the Automated Attendant: 1. Press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 143. 3. To scroll through the list of numbers left on your display, press VOL L or VOLM. OR To erase the displayed number, dial 3 (for Erase). OR To automatically dial out the displayed number, dial 2 (for Call). The erases the number from the display after it dials out.
TIME, DATE AND STATION NUMBER CHECK To check the extension number of any keyset: 1. Do not lift the handset or press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 6 for extension Number. To check the system time and date from any keyset extension: 1. Do not lift the handset or press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 8 for Time and date. To hear the date in 384i with system software prior to 3.06.02, see the procedure below. (Older 384i Systems) To check the system date from any keyset extension: 1. Do not lift the handset or press idle CALL key. 2. Dial 3 for Date.
FEATURES 583
584 FEATURES
Description
124i Available COS control over the reminder message requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Changing the DTMF tone detection criteria requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. To accomodate customer-provided pagers, Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18 or higher can accept Park and Page strings containing any valid DTMF digits. In Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher, a line key changes from red to green when an AME users presses CALL1 to intercept the call. Voice Mail Caller ID with ANI/DNIS requires EXCPRU version 2.18 or higher. Message Center Mailbox requires Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Voice Mail key flashes red when there are messages waiting. 384i Available COS control over the reminder message and requires system software 3.04 or higher. Changing the DTMF tone detection criteria setup requires system software 3.04 or higher. To accomodate customer-provided pagers, system software 3.05.09 and higher can accept Park and Page strings containing any valid DTMF digits. In system software 3.06.02 or higher, a line key changes from red to green when an AME users presses CALL1 to intercept the call. Voice Mail Caller ID with ANI/DNIS requires system software 3.06.14 or higher. Message Center Mailbox requires system software 3.07.10. In system software 3.07.10 and higher, Voice Mail key flashes green when subscriber mailbox has messages waiting. Year 2000 Compliance requires system software 3.07.25 or higher. Consult your Sales Representative for applicable NVM-Series Voice Mail software.
The system is fully compatible with Nitsukos NVM-Series Voice Mail with Automated Attendant Systems. These systems provide telephone users with comprehensive Voice Mail and Automated Attendant features. Voice Mail ends the frustration and cost of missed calls, inaccurate written messages and telephone tag. This frees a companys busy receptionists and secretaries for more productive work. Automated Attendant automatically answers the systems incoming calls. After listening to a customized message, an outside caller can dial a system extension or use Voice Mail. Integrated Voice Mail enhances the telephone system with the following features:
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail An extension user can forward their calls to Voice Mail. Once forwarded, calls to the extension connect to that extensions mailbox. The caller can leave a message in the mailbox instead of calling back later. Forwarding can occur for all calls immediately, for unanswered calls or only when the extension is busy. When a user transfers a call to an extension forwarded to Voice Mail, the call waits for the Delayed Call Forwarding time before routing to the called extensions mailbox. This gives the transferring party the option of retrieving the call instead of having it go directly to the mailbox.
FEATURES 585
Leaving a Message Voice Mail lets a keyset extension user easily leave a message at an extension that is unanswered, busy or in Do Not Disturb. The caller just presses their Voice Mail key to leave a message in the called extensions mailbox. There is no need to call back later. A VAU announcement can periodically remind users that they messages waiting to which they have not responded. Transferring to Voice Mail By using Transfer to Voice Mail, a keyset extension user can Transfer a call to the users own or a coworkers mailbox. After the Transfer goes through, the caller can leave a message in the mailbox. Conversation Record While on a call, an extension user can have Voice Mail record the conversation. The keyset user just presses the Voice Mail Record key; the ESL user dials a code. Once recorded, the Voice Messaging System stores the conversation as a new message in the users mailbox. After calling their mailbox, a user can save, edit or delete the recorded conversation. Personal Answering Machine Emulation A keyset user can have their idle extension emulate a personal answering machine. This lets Voice Mail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the extensions incoming calls route to the users subscriber mailbox. Once the mailbox answers, the user hears two alert tones followed by the callers incoming message. The keyset user can then: Let the call go through to their mailbox Intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox Reject the call before it goes to their mailbox Voice Mail Overflow If Voice Mail automatically answers trunks, Voice Mail Overflow can reroute those trunks to other extensions when all Voice Mail ports are busy. During periods of high traffic, this prevents the outside calls from ringing Voice Mail for an inordinate amount of time. There are two types of Voice Mail Overflow: Immediate and Delayed. With immediate overflow, calls immediately reroute to other extensions when all Voice Mail ports are busy. With delayed overflow, calls reroute after a preset interval. Without any type of overflow, the outside calls ring Voice Mail until a port becomes available or the outside caller hangs up. Voice Mail Caller ID NVM-Series Voice Mail can use ANI/DNIS information to identify the outside caller that left a message in a users mailbox. When the message recipient presses TI after hearing a message, they hear the time the message was sent and the outside telephone number of the message sender. Refer to ANI/DNIS Compatibility on page 484 for more information on setting up this feature. Message Center Mailbox A Message Center Mailbox is a mailbox shared by more than one extension. Any keyset that has a Message Center Key for the shared mailbox can: - Listen to the messages stored in the shared mailbox. - Transfer calls to the shared mailbox. - Use many other Voice Mail features previously available only at an extensions individual mailbox. A Message Center Mailbox helps co-workers that work together closely such as members of the same Department Hunt Group or ACD Group. For example, an ACD Group Supervisor can send important messages to the shared Message Center Mailbox, to which any ACD Group member can respond when time allows. Each ACD AGents Message Center Key flashes (red) when messages are waiting. (The Message Center Mailbox can be a mailbox for an installed, uninstalled or virtual extension.)
586 FEATURES
FEATURES 587
(384i Only) In 0005, assign circuit type 3 to each Voice Mail port.
In 1001 Item 5 (Terminal Type), set all Voice Mail ports as type 1.
(384i Only) In 0303, reserve at least one CDTU block for DTMF reception (type 1).
Normally, use a number outside the extension numbering range (e.g., 500. Do not use 1, 8, or 9 as the first digit.
In 0406 Item 57, make sure all extensions that will use Voice Mail have Continued Dialing enabled (1).
No
Should reminder message periodically play when user has a message to which they have not responded?
Yes
In 1006, assign a Voice Mail key (code 1059) for each extension that will use Voice Mail.
No
Yes
In 1006, assign a Voice Mail key (code 1059) followed by: - Your own extension number if you are setting up your own Voice Mail key. - A virtual extension number if you are setting up a Message Center key for a virtual extension. - A co-worker's extension number if you are setting up a Message Center key for an installed extension. - An uninstalled extension's number if you are setting up a Message Center key for an uninstalled extension.
588 FEATURES
Yes
No Should DSL set have Conversation Record capability? No Is the interval between Conversation Record alerts (30 seconds) acceptable? Yes
Yes
No
In 0405 Item 65, set the interval between the Conversation Record alerts.
Is the criteria for DTMF dial, ringback and busy tones correct?
No
Yes Does the system wait an adequate time (normally 10 seconds) before forwarding a transferred call to Voice Mail? Yes
No
In 0405 Item 1 (Delayed Call Forwarding Time), change the value as required.
FEATURES 589
Yes
In 0901 Items 14-17, program each trunk that should ring into Auto Attendant as type 4 (Direct Inward Line).
No
Should a trunk ring another idle Voice Mail port when its assigned port is busy?
Yes
In 1003, program all Voice Mail ports into the same Extension (Department) Group.
No
Yes
In 0909, assign extensions to the Ring Group programmed in 0910. Enter 1 to enable ringing.
Immediate
Delayed
In 0919, enter the Ring Group that Immediate Voice Mail Overflow should ring. See also 0909 and 0910.
In 0919, enter the Ring Group that Delayed Voice Mail Overflow should ring. See also 0909 and 0910.
590 FEATURES
No
Do you have extension numbers that begin with 1 (e.g., 101, 102, etc.)?
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 591
592 FEATURES
FEATURES 593
594 FEATURES
LEAVING A MESSAGE (Keyset Only) To leave a message in the mailbox of an unanswered extension: The extension you call can be busy, in DND or unanswered. 1. Press Voice Mail key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1059) OR Dial 8. The Voice Mail system will prompt you to leave a message. FORWARDING CALLS TO YOUR MAILBOX To activate or cancel Call Forwarding: 1. Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT) and dial *2. OR Press your Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1080). 2. Dial Call Forwarding condition: 2 = Busy or not answered 4 = Immediate 6 = Not answered 0 = Cancel 3. Dial Voice Mail master number or press Voice Mail key. 4. Dial Call Forwarding type: 2 = All calls 3 = Outside calls only 4 = Intercom calls only 5. Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed *2 in step 1. Your DND or Call Forwarding (Station ) key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated. 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0 FEATURES 595
TRANSFERRING CALLS TO A MAILBOX To Transfer your active call to a mailbox: Keyset 1. Press HOLD . 2. Press Voice Mail key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1059). 3. Dial number of mailbox to receive Transfer. This number can be your mailbox number or a co-workers mailbox number. OR Press DSS Console or One Touch key for extension whos mailbox will receive the Transfer. If the Transfer destination is an extension forwarded to Voice Mail, the call waits before routing the called users mailbox. This gives you the option of retrieving the call instead of having it picked up by Voice Mail. In 384i, pressing a DSS Console key requires system software 3.04 or higher. 4. Hang up. Voice Mail will prompt your caller to leave a message in the mailbox you selected. OR 1. Press DSS Console key for extension whos mailbox will receive the Transfer. 2. Press Voice Mail key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1059). 3. Hang up. Voice Mail will prompt your caller to leave a message in the mailbox you selected.
596 FEATURES
PERSONAL ANSWERING MACHINE EMULATION (Keyset Only) To enable or cancel Personal Answering Machine Emulation: 1. Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT) and dial *2. OR Press your Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1080). 2. Dial 1 and the Call Forwarding type: 2 = All calls 3 = Outside calls only 4 = Intercom calls only 3. Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed *2 in step 1. Your DND or Call Forwarding (Station ) key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated. (384i Prior to System Software 3.04) To enable or cancel Personal Answering Machine Emulation: 1. Press Personal Answering Machine Emulation key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1072). 2. Dial 1 to enable emulation for all calls. OR Dial 2 to enable emulation for just trunk (outside) calls. OR Dial 0 to cancel emulation.
FEATURES 597
CHECKING YOUR MESSAGES (Keyset Only) To check your messages: 1. Press CHECK 2. Dial *0. You can have any combination of the message types in the table below on your phone.
If you see. . .
You have. . .
VOICE MESSAGE New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox n MESSAGES CHECK MESSAGE VAU GENERAL MESSAGE CHECK MESSAGE Not listened to the current General Message
3. 4.
Press VOL L or VOL M to scroll through your display. When you find the message you want to answer, press CALL1. Youll either: Go to your Voice Mail mailbox. Listen to the new General Message. Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting.
598 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Voice Over lets a user interrupt a keyset extension user busy on another call. With Voice Over, the busy keyset extension user hears an alert tone followed by the voice of the interrupting party. The keyset extension user can respond to the interrupting party without being heard by the original caller. If desired, the keyset extension user can easily switch between their original caller and the interrupting co-worker. The original caller and the interrupting party can never hear each others conversation. Voice Over could help a lawyer, for example, waiting for an urgent call. While on a call with another client, the lawyers paralegal could announce the urgent call as soon as it comes in. The lawyer could then give the paralegal instructions how to handle the situation - all without the original client hearing the conversation. Either a keyset or 500/2500 set user can initiate a Voice Over, but only a keyset user can receive a Voice Over. To enable Voice Over, a keyset should have a function key programmed for Voice Over. In addition to onetouch Voice Over operation, the key shows the Voice Over status as follows:
You are . . .
Off Flashing On
Not using Voice Over Listening to the interrupting party Responding to the interrupting party
Conditions (A.) While active, Voice Over uses a circuit on a DTU-A or DTU-C PCB. Refer to the Conference feature for DTU-A/C PCB programming. (B.) Voice Over can interrupt a trunk call only if the trunk has been set up for at least six second. Default Setting Disabled.
FEATURES 599
No
Yes
No
Yes
Busy
When calling a busy extension, should caller hear busy tone or Voice Over (busy/ring) tone?
After hearing busy, caller can dial 7 for busy/ring tone and then dial 6 to Voice Over. In 1005, assign Class of Service to extensions.
After hearing Voice Over (busy/ring) tone, caller can dial 6 to Voice Over.
Yes
In 1006, assign code 1057 to the function key you want to program.
No
Stop
600 FEATURES
Busy on a handset call with the second channel idle Busy on a handset call with the second channel busy Busy on a handsfree call with the second channel idle Busy on a handsfree call with the second channel busy
Voice Announces to the second channel Hears busy tone and cannot Voice Over Hears Voice Over tone and can initiate a Voice Over Hears busy tone and cannot Voice Over
Busy on a handset call with the second channel idle Busy on a handset call with the second channel busy Busy on a handsfree call with the second channel idle Busy on a handsfree call with the second channel busy
Rings second channel but hears Voice Over tone and can initiate a Voice Over Busy tone and cannot voice over Hears Voice Over tone and can initiate Voice Over Hears busy tone and cannot initiate Voice Over
0406 - COS Options, Item 6: Off-Hook Signals (Receiving) In an extensions Class of Service, enter 1 if you want callers to a busy extension to hear Voice Over (busy/ring) tone. Enter 0 if you want callers to hear busy tone. (The caller must then dial 7 to hear Voice/Over tone.) 0406 - COS Options, Item 100: Voice Over Initiate In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extensions ability to initiate Voice Over. 0406 - COS Options, Item 101: Voice Over Receive In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) and extensions ability to receive Voice Over. If disabled, extension will never receive Voice Over. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension. 1006 - Programming Function Keys Assign a function key for Voice Over (code 1057).
FEATURES 601
Operation
To initiate a Voice Over to a busy extension: You can only leave a Voice Over if you hear Voice Over (busy/ring) tone. If you hear busy instead, you may be able to dial 7 and hear Voice Over (busy/ring) tone. 1. Dial 6. OR Press Voice Over key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1057) You hear an alert tone and the Voice Over key flashes. You can talk to the called party after the alert tone ends.
To respond to a Voice Over alert tone to your extension: You can only respond if you have a Voice Over key. 1. Press and hold flashing Voice Over key. The Voice Over key lights steadily (green) and you can talk to the interrupting party. You cannot respond by dialing the Voice Over Service Code (6). To return to your original call: 1. Release Voice Over key. Your Voice Over key flashes when you are talking to your original call. To switch between your original call and the interrupting party, just keep pressing the Voice Over key.
602 FEATURES
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
Each keyset user can control the volume of incoming ringing, splash tone, Paging, Background Music, Handsfree and your handset. Some keysets have two separate volume controls: a slide switch on the left side for ringing and tones, and volume buttons for Background Music, Paging, Handsfree and the handset. Other keysets consolidate all adjustments into the volume buttons. In either case, the user can adjust these volumes anytime while on a call or when their phone is idle. The users should set the volumes for their most confortable levels. Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
None
Related Features
None
Operation
To adjust the volume of incoming ringing and splash tone: 1. Slide volume control switch. OR Press VOL L or VOL M (if the phone doesnt have a control switch). To adjust the volume of incoming Paging announcements, Handsfree, the handset or Background Music: 1. Press VOLUME L or VOLUME M. You can press the volume keys while on a call or when your phone is idle.
FEATURES 603
Description
124i Available 384i Available.
The system can broadcast warning tones to a trunk caller warning them that they have been on the call too long. The tones are just a reminder -- the user can disregard the tones and continue talking if they choose. The outside caller does not hear the warning tones. In addition, warning tones do not occur for Intercom calls and incoming trunk calls. Warning tones are not available to analog single line telephone (SLT) users. There are two types of warning tones: Alarm Tone 1 and Alarm Tone 2. Alarm Tone 1 is the first set of tones that occur after the user initially places a trunk call. Alarm Tone 2 broadcasts periodically after Alarm Tone 1 as a continued reminder. Each alarm tone consists of three short beeps. Conditions None Default Setting Disabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Timer 24: Long Conversation Alarm 1 After a user places a trunk call, the system sends the first warning tone to their extension after this interval (0-64800 seconds). 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Timer 25: Long Conversation Alarm 2 After hearing the first warning tone, the system sends additional warning tones after this interval (064800 seconds). The warning tones continue, spaced by this interval, until the user hangs up. 0406 - COS Options, Item 3: Long Conversation Alarm In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Warning Tone for Long Conversation. 1005 - Class of Service Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
604 FEATURES
Start
Entering 0 disables the timer which also disables Long Conversation Alarm 2.
In Program 0405 TImer 24, set the Long Conversation Alarm 1 interval (0-64800 seconds).
In Program 0405 Timer 25, enter the Long Conversation Alarm 2 interval (1-64800 seconds).
No
Stop
FEATURES 605
Operation
Warning Tone for Long Conversation is automatic if programmed.
606 FEATURES
Description
124i Available unaffected by the date change to the year 2000. The system uses a two-digit date code entry. Future releases will use a four-digit date code enty. 384i Available software prior to 3.07.25 are unaffected by the date change to the year 2000. The system uses a two-digit date code entry. System software 3.07.25 or higher use a four-digit date code entry.
The system provides Year 2000 Compliance. The change of the date from one century to the next is handled by the system software and is no different than the change from one year to the next. The day following 12/31/99 will be 01/01/00. The system will process the leap year correctly and will not require an upgrade or reprogramming. The Voice Announce Unit voice prompts will correctly announce the year. In addition, all date sensitive reports will properly show the years in the 21st century as 20xx. These reports include: Station Message Detail Recording SMDR page banner SMDR summary banner Hotel Motel Hotel Room Status banner System Reports Alarm Report page banner System Information page banner Traffic Management Reports (TMS) Traffic Management Report page banner Conditions None Default Setting Enabled.
Programming
None
Related Features
Hotel/Motel The Hotel Room Status banner shows four digits for the year (e.g., 2001). Station Message Detail Recording The SMDR page and summary banners show four digits for the year (e.g., 2001). Time and Date When setting the Time and Date from the telephone, the extension user enters 00 for 2000, 01 for 2001, etc. Traffic Management Report (TMS) The Traffic Management Report page banner shows four digits for the year (e.g., 2001). Voice Announce Unit The Voice Announce Unit will properly announce the year 2000 and above. Voice Mail The latest releases of the NVM-Series Voice Mail systems are Year 2000 compliant. Consult with your Sales Representative for the specifics.
FEATURES 607
608 FEATURES
Section 2 Programming
PROGRAMMING 609
610 PROGRAMMING
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
0200 - Programming Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
0201 - Setting the Programming Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 0202 - Setting User Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
ii
Table of Contents
0700- Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
0701 - Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
Table of Contents
1025 - Toll Restriction Override Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 - Loop Key Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 - Fixed Call Forwarding Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028 - Multiple Directory Number Key Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029 - Fixed Call Forwarding When Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030 - Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101 - DSS Console Extension Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102 - DSS Console Key Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103 - DSS Console Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104 - DSS Console Alternate Answering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105 - Operators Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106 - Direct Line Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107 - DSS Console Lamp Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201 - DCI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202 - DCI Port Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203 - DCI Tenant Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204 - DCI Department Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205 - DCI Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206 - Initialize DCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207 - DCI Hotline Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913 914 916 918 919 920 921 922 922 924 925 926 927 931 936 937 938 939 941 942
1700 - Pooled Modem Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967 1800 - DISA, OPA and DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
1801 - DISA Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802 - DISA and OPA Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1804 - VAU Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1805 - DID Translation Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1806 - DID Translation Table Number Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807 - DID Translation Table Expected Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1808 - DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1809 - DID Intercept Ring Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1810 - DID Intercept Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv 969 971 973 975 977 978 981 982 983 985
Table of Contents
1811 - DISA Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 1812 - DISA Toll Restriction Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 1813 - Alternate Trunk Routing for DISA Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
1900 - Automatic Call Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993 2000 - Copy and Clear Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
2001 - Copy Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995 2002 - Initialize Extension Numbers and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 2003 - Initialize Service Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
Table of Contents
3000 - Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
3001 - Account Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049 3002 - Verified Account Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
vi
Section 2 Programming
Before Reading This Section
This section provides you with detailed information about the system programs. By changing a program, you change the way the feature associated with that program works. In this section, you find out about each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the program data into system memory.
Do not start customizing your system without first reading Section 1, Features.
When you want to customize a feature, find it in Section 1 and learn about it. (If you have trouble finding the feature, try cross-referencing it in the Index at the back of this book.) Section 1 will tell you what programs you have to change to get the operation you want. Then, look the program up in this section if you have any questions about how to enter the data. 384i vs. 124i This section covers both the 384 and 124i systems. The programming and operation of these two systems is similar; however, there is a difference in system capacity and numbering. For example, the 384i system has four Tenant Groups while the 124i has one. If you are programming a 124i, you should skip any references or procedures in this section regarding Tenant Groups. Refer to the System Number Plan/Capacities chart on page 617 for more on other important differences.
PROGRAMMING 611
Sorts Data - After you enter data for a program, the system spends several seconds sorting the systems database. Program 1012 (Call Pickup Group) is an example of a program that sorts data. You can continue programming normally after the sort completes. Sorting may momentarily affect the systems performance. Updates CEU - The system updates PCBs in the CEU after you change the programs data. The update may occur a minute or so after you change the data, depending on system traffic. Updating may briefly affect the normal operation of the system. Can be Copied - You can use Program 2001 to copy the programs data. For example, you can copy many of the trunk (0900 series) and extension (1000 series) programs. This will save you a lot of time during initial system programming.
12345678 0000
2 (IN) 3 (SA)
All programs in this section not listed below for SA and SB 0003, 0403, 0604, 1023, 1024, 1025, 1104, 1206, 1610, 1901-1915, 1917, 1919, 1921-1923 0000, 0603, 1007, 1202, 1206
0 1
4 (SB)
612 PROGRAMMING
1.
2.
To back up your data to a second disk (384i only): In system software 3.06.02 or higher, use Program 0015 - Automatic Backup to have your system automatically back up the programmed data to the CPRU floppy disk. 1. Replace the system disk in your CPU with your backup system disk. 2. Enter the programming mode (using the procedure on the previous page). USER: Enter Command> 3. DIAL 0000:EXIT O/M MODE Data Save?(Yes:1) 4. 1 + HOLD to save and exit.
PROGRAMMING 613
Enter data into a program Complete the programming step you just made (like pressing Enter on a PC keyboard). When a program entry displays, press HOLD to bypass the entry without changing it. Delete the entry to the left (like pressing Backspace on a PC keyboard) Erase the entire command line you just entered - or erase an entry in a table (e.g., a Permit Code entry) Program a pause into an Abbreviated Dialing bin Scroll forward through a list of programs (e.g., from 0503 to 0504), through a list of items (e.g., from Program 0405 Item 15 to Item 16) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table). If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data before scrolling forward. If you see the & character when programming, the entered data is longer than 20 characters. Press this key to see the remainder of the entry.
VOL M
Scroll backward through a list of programs (e.g., from 0504 to 0503), through a list of items (e.g., from Program 0405 Item 16 to Item 15) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table). If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data before scrolling backward.
614 PROGRAMMING
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *). Clear the text entry if you want to start over. Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
DSS10
CHECK
PROGRAMMING 615
>
Enter a program number (e.g., 0405). You can press VOLUME L or VOLUME M to scroll forwards or backwards through a list of commands.
Enter data. If the program has multiple item numbers, you can press VOLUME L or VOLUME M to scroll forwards or backwards through the items.
&
Press VOLUME L to see rest of the entry. This prompt only appears when the entire entry cannot fit in the display window. Select a category (e.g., Tenant Group, extension port number, Class of Service) you want to program.
616 PROGRAMMING
384i
124i
1 10 8 200
1-128 1-128 1-128 1-64 1-128 1000 (0-999) 8 1500 16 15 per Tenant 15 per Tenant
618 PROGRAMMING
384i
124i
Count toward total number of allowed hardware ports (124 or 384 depending on the system). These devices share the same pool of extension numbers. Extension numbers cannot overlap.
Extension numbers can be three or four digits long. See Flexible System Numbering.
PROGRAMMING 619
620 PROGRAMMING
Options
Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i
Not available. 124i uses battery backed-up RAM for storing data, not a disk.
384i
IN
Use Program 0001 - Save Data to save the programmed system data to the CPRU floppy disk. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 621
Description
124i Not available. 124i uses battery backed-up RAM for storing data, not a disk. 384i Available from telephone programming only.
IN
Use Program 0002 - Load Data to load the stored customer database from the CPRU floppy disk into system memory. Conditions None.
622 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available from telephone programming only. 384i Available from telephone programming only.
SA
Use Program 0003 - Time and Date to change the system Time and Date through system programming. Extension users can also dial Service Code 828 to change the Time and Date. Conditions None
Setting the Time and Date if Class of Service prevents users from dialing Service Code 828.
PROGRAMMING 623
Description
124i Not available circuit types autoID. 384i Available from telephone programming only.
IN
Program 0004 - Automatic Extension Circuit Type Setup automatically sets the circuit type for each extension port (1-256). This program identifies the devices at each extension port and then sets the appropriate circuit type. Program 0004 can automatically install a keyset (circuit type 1), keyset with DCI Module (circuit type 2) and ACI Module (circuit type 5). This program only sets the circuit type - it does not affect the port assignment. Use Program 0004 to save time when assigning circuit types to extension ports. If you use Program 0005 instead, youll have to set each circuit type individually. Conditions None
624 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available circuit types autoID. This option is in the 124i PC Program for reference only. 384i Available
IN
Use Program 0005 - Extension Circuit Type Setup to set the circuit type for the device at each extension port (1-256). The following table shows the available circuit types:
This device . . .
Use this circuit type . . . 0 1 2 3 4 5 8 Assign Order 1 to the Main VAU Module Assign Order 2 to the Plug-in Expansion Board 9
Not set Keyset Keyset with DCI Module 500/2500 set 3-DCI Module 3-ACI Module VAU Module
2-OPX Module
Conditions None
4. 5. 6.
Setting the Installation Order Number Use the following table when assigning the Order Number in step 5 above. Also keep the following in mind: The system capacity is 384 physical ports The total of extensions ports, trunk ports, 3-ACI units, 3-DCI units and 2-OPX ports cannot exceed 384. The system assigns a separate set of software ports to DCIs, 3-DCIs and 3-ACIs. The software port as signments are for programming only. The ports do not overlap. For example, 3-ACI software port 150 is not the same as 3-DCI software port 150. Each 2-OPX uses up two physical ports - the one it is plugged into and the next consecutive physical port. All 2-OPX ports must be on the same DSTU PCB. If you use the last port on a DSTU PCB for a 2OPX, the second 2-OPX port doesnt work. Each trunk circuit uses one physical port. Software trunk ports are numbered 1-128.
Understanding Port Assignments Device Physical Port Circuit Type Installation Order Number Software Port System Capacity
Keyset
1-256
Not used
1-256 Same as physical port number 1-144 Used in Series 1200 Programs Not used 145 146 147 148 149 150 286 287 288 Used in Series 1300 Programs
256
DCI Module
Same as keyset in which DCI is installed 17-256 Same as station port into which 3-DCI is plugged
1-1441
144
3 4
240 48 144 separate DCI ports, with 3 ports on each 3-DCI. The 3-DCI software port numbering begins where DCI software port numbering ends
626 PROGRAMMING
3-ACI Module
11 2 through 64
VAU Module
Assign Order 1 to the Main VAU Module Assign Order 2 to the Plug-in Expansion Board Not used
2-OPX
2-256 Each 2-OPX uses up two physical ports: the port into which it is plugged and the next adjacent port Uses 1 physical port
1273
Trunk
N/A
1-128
128
1 2 3
The Order Number in Program 0005 assigns the Software Port Number. If you plug a keyset into a physical port that was previously assigned as the second port of a 2-OPX, the 2-OPX port will work - the keyset will not. The system must have at least one display keyset for data entry, installed in port 1.
PROGRAMMING 627
Description
124i Not available 384i Available from telephone programming only.
IN
Use Program 0006 - Slot Control to close (turn off) or delete (uninstall) circuit boards (slots 1-25). Close lets you block a PCB (just like placing the PCB switch down). Once closed, none of the ports on the PCB can be used for new calls. Existing calls, however, are not torn down. You can cancel the close command by placing the PCB switch to the up position. Delete allows you to completely uninstall the PCB. You might want to do this if you want to remove a PCB and plug it into a different slot - and still retain the port assignments. If a PCB has an active call, you must first Close the PCB before you can delete it. Conditions When you uninstall a PCB, you must remove it from its slot and plug it in again (or into a different slot) before the system will use it again.
628 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i The 124i system has an enhanced system report. This program assigns the system report printer and additional report options. Items 2-6 are available from telephone programming only. 384i Assigns only the system report printer.
IN
384i Use Program 0007 - System Report Port Setup to indicate to which DCI software port (1-288) you have connected the system printer. After selecting the DCI port, you can also use this program to print the system report. To view an abbreviated system report from within the PC program, refer to 0091 - View System Report. To upload the system report from the system to the PC program, use PC program option Main Menu -> Communication -> O/M Command -> 03 Read System Information. 124i Use Program 0007 - System Report Port Setup to: Assign the DCI software port (1-72) for the enhanced report printer (Item 1) Print out the entire enhanced report (Item 2) OR Print out selected sections of the enhanced report (Items 3-6).
Program 0007 124i System Report Port Setup This menu item . . . Lets you . . . With this data . . .1
Assign the DCI software port the system uses for the system report printer. For DCI Modules, this is the same number as the DSTU station port. For 3DCI Units, the software port is either the DSTU station port or one of the next two consecutive ports (depending on the installation). Have the printer designated in Item 1 output all the system reports. Have the printer designated in Item 1 output just the PCB Board section of the system report (see below).
DCI software port number + HOLD to assign OR HOLD to cancel without changing
1 + HOLD for Yes OR HOLD to cancel without changing 1 + HOLD for Yes OR HOLD to cancel without changing
This section shows: CPRU type BASIC vs. EXPANDED) and software level. The location (slot number) and software level of each board in each system cabinet. The location (port number) and type of each telephone installed: KST = Keyset LCD = Two line alphanumeric display HP-LCD = Super Display KST + DCI = Keyset with DCI Unit DSS = DSS Console
PROGRAMMING 629
Program 0007 124i System Report Port Setup (Contd) This menu item . . . Lets you . . . With this data . . .1
Have the printer designated in Item 1 output just the Trunk section of the system report (see below).
This section shows (for each trunk port [1-52]): The cabinet number, slot and trunk location on PCB (e.g., 1-6-1 is the Main cabinet, slot six, first trunk on the PCB). Trunk dialing type (e.g., PB for DTMF from Program 0901 Item 1). Trunk Service Type for each Night Service Mode (from Program 0901 Items 14-17) Trunk Information (Item 4)
<< SYSTEM INFORMATION >> 03/16/94 00:41 Software assignment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Trunk port No. Port Type Day Night Mid Rest 1 1-6-1 PB Normal Normal Normal Normal 2 1-6-2 PB Normal Normal Normal Normal 3 1-6-3 PB Normal Normal Normal Normal 4 1-6-4 PB Normal Normal Normal Normal 5 none PB Normal Normal Normal Normal 6 none PB Normal Normal Normal Normal
630 PROGRAMMING
Program 0007 124i System Report Port Setup (Contd) This menu item . . . Lets you . . . With this data . . .1
Have the printer designated in Item 1 output just the Station and DCI section of the system report (see below).
For each station port (1-72), this section shows: The cabinet number, slot and station location on PCB (e.g., 1-1-1 is the Main cabinet, slot one, first station on the PCB). Extension number and name For each DCI software port (1-72), this section shows: The cabinet number, slot and station location on PCB (e.g., 1-1-1 is the Main cabinet, slot one, first station on the PCB). DCI type (e.g., built-in = DCI Module) DCI extension number Station Information (Item 5)
<< SYSTEM INFORMATION >> 03/16/94 00:41 Software assignment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Station port No. Port Dial Name No. Port Dial Name No. Port Dial Name 1 1-1-1 301 STA 301 25 none 325 STA 325 49 none 349 STA 349 * 2 1-1-2 302 STA 302 26 none 326 STA 326 50 none 350 STA 350 3 1-1-3 303 STA 303 27 none 327 STA 327 51 none 351 STA 351 * 4 1-1-4 304 STA 304 28 none 328 STA 328 52 none 352 STA 352 * 5 1-1-5 305 STA 305 29 none 329 STA 329 53 none 353 STA 353 * 6 1-1-6 306 STA 306 30 none 330 STA 330 54 none 354 STA 354 * 7 1-1-7 307 STA 307 31 none 331 STA 331 55 none 355 STA 355 * 8 1-1-8 308 STA 308 32 none 332 STA 332 56 none 356 STA 356 9 1-4-1 309 STA 309 33 none 333 STA 333 57 none 357 STA 357 10 1-4-2 310 STA 310 34 none 334 STA 334 58 none 358 STA 358 11 1-4-3 311 STA 311 35 none 335 STA 335 59 none 359 STA 359 12 1-4-4 312 STA 312 36 none 336 STA 336 60 none 360 STA 360 13 none 313 STA 313 37 none 337 STA 337 61 none 361 STA 361 14 none 314 STA 314 38 none 338 STA 338 62 none 362 STA 362 15 none 315 STA 315 39 none 339 STA 339 63 none 363 STA 363 16 none 316 STA 316 40 none 340 STA 340 64 none 364 STA 364 17 none 317 STA 317 41 none 341 STA 341 65 none 365 STA 365 18 none 318 STA 318 42 none 342 STA 342 66 none 366 STA 366 19 none 319 STA 319 43 none 343 STA 343 67 none 367 STA 367 20 none 320 STA 320 44 none 344 STA 344 68 none 368 STA 368 21 none 321 STA 321 45 none 345 STA 345 69 none 369 STA 369 22 none 322 STA 322 46 none 346 STA 346 70 none 370 STA 370 23 none 323 STA 323 47 none 347 STA 347 71 none 371 STA 371 24 none 324 STA 324 48 none 348 STA 348 72 none 372 STA 372
PROGRAMMING 631
- DCI port No. Port Kind Dial 1 1-1-1 built-in 601 2 Not assigned 3 Not assigned 4 Not assigned 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 8 Not assigned 9 Not assigned 10 Not assigned 11 Not assigned 12 Not assigned 13 Not assigned 14 Not assigned 15 Not assigned 16 Not assigned 17 Not assigned 18 Not assigned 19 Not assigned 20 Not assigned 21 Not assigned 22 Not assigned 23 Not assigned 24 Not assigned
No. Port Kind 25 Not assigned 26 Not assigned 27 Not assigned 28 Not assigned 29 Not assigned 30 Not assigned 31 Not assigned 32 Not assigned 33 Not assigned 34 Not assigned 35 Not assigned 36 Not assigned 37 Not assigned 38 Not assigned 39 Not assigned 40 Not assigned 41 Not assigned 42 Not assigned 43 Not assigned 44 Not assigned 45 Not assigned 46 Not assigned 47 Not assigned 48 Not assigned
Dial
No. Port Kind 49 Not assigned 50 Not assigned 51 Not assigned 52 Not assigned 53 Not assigned 54 Not assigned 55 Not assigned 56 Not assigned 57 Not assigned 58 Not assigned 59 Not assigned 60 Not assigned 61 Not assigned 62 Not assigned 63 Not assigned 64 Not assigned 65 Not assigned 66 Not assigned 67 Not assigned 68 Not assigned 69 Not assigned 70 Not assigned 71 Not assigned 72 Not assigned
Dial
Program 0007 124i System Report Port Setup (Contd) This menu item . . . Lets you . . . With this data . . .1
Have the printer designated in Item 1 output just the Other Information section of the system report (see below).
For each 3ACI Unit (1-6), this section shows: The cabinet number, slot and location on station PCB (e.g., 1-1-4 is the Main cabinet, slot one, fourth station on the PCB). The extension number and type (1=input, 2=output) for each channel on the 3ACI Unit. For each VAU Module, Door Box, External Paging port, alarm sensor and DSS Console, this section shows: The cabinet number, slot and station location on PCB (e.g., 1-1-5 is the Main cabinet, slot one, fifth station on the PCB).
Other Information (Item 6) << SYSTEM INFORMATION >> 03/16/94 00:41 Software assignment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ACI port No.Port CH Dial Kind 1 Not assigned No setting 2 Not assigned No setting 3 Not assigned No setting 4 Not assigned No setting 5 Not assigned No setting 6 Not assigned No setting
632 PROGRAMMING
- VAU port Unit Slot Port Master Not assigned Slave Not assigned - Door phone port No.Unit Slot Port 1 1 7 1 2 1 7 2 3 1 7 3 4 1 7 4 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 8 Not assigned - DSS console port No. 1 2 Port 1-1-1 ----- Speaker port No.Unit Slot Port *1 1 7 1 *2 1 7 2 *3 1 7 3 *4 1 7 4 5 Not assigned 6 Not assigned 7 Not assigned 8 Not assigned - Sensor port No.Unit Slot Port Kind 1 1 7 5 Alarm 2 1 7 6 Alarm 3 1 7 7 Alarm 4 1 7 8 Alarm 5 Not assigned FAX 6 Not assigned FAX 7 Not assigned FAX 8 Not assigned FAX
3 -----
4 -----
Conditions You cannot place a data call to a DCI port dedicated to the system report, alarm report or SMDR.
PROGRAMMING 633
(384i Only) 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. 0007 + HOLD Print Port: 3. Enter the system report printer DCI port number (System Report Port ) Print?(Yes:1) 4. Press 1 + HOLD to print the report. OR Press HOLD to skip printing. (124i Only) 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. 0007 + HOLD Menu No? 3. Enter the menu number you want to program (1-6) + HOLD 4. For Item 1 Enter the system report printer DCI port number + HOLD.
For Items 2-6 Press 1 + HOLD to activate the option. OR Press HOLD to cancel without implementing the option. When you see "Menu NO?," Repeat from step 5 to select another menu number OR HOLD exit.
5.
634 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0008 - Alarm Report Port Setup to set the options for the alarm report. This program has 5 separate menu options (see the following chart). Items 2-4 are available only from the telephone programming. To view the alarm report from within the PC program, refer to 0092 - View Alarm Report. To upload the alarm report from the system to the PC program, use PC program option Main Menu -> Communication -> O/M Command -> 04 Read Alarm Report.
Program 0008 Menu Items This menu item . . . Lets you . . . With this data . . .1
Assign the DCI software port the system uses for the alarm report printer
DCI software port number + HOLD to assign OR HOLD to cancel without changing 1 + HOLD for Yes OR HOLD to cancel without changing 1 + HOLD for Yes OR HOLD to cancel without changing 1 + HOLD for Yes OR HOLD to cancel without changing 0 + HOLD for manual OR 1 + HOLD for automatic(as alarms occur)
Indicate that the alarm report printer should print all alarms Allow the alarm report printer to print only the alarms that the system logged since you last printed the report Initialize (clear) the alarm report record. This removes all old alarms from the record. Print the alarm report manually (0) or automatically as alarms occur (1)
See Telephone Programming Instructions below. Conditions You cannot place a data call to a DCI port dedicated to the system report, alarm report or SMDR.
PROGRAMMING 635
636 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available from telephone programming only.
IN
Use Program 0009 - Loop Back Testing to perform a loop back diagnostic test on telephones and system PCBs. This program has 9 separate menu options (see the following chart).
Program 0009 Menu Items This menu item . . . Lets you . . . With this data . . . 1
1 - Analog Set Loopback (CEU to ASTU PCB) 2 - Keyset Circuit Loopback (CEU to DSTU circuit) 3 - Keyset Loopback (CEU to keyset) 4 - Trunk Loopback (CEU to ATRU circuit) 5 - DTMF Receiver Test 6 - Conference Path Test 7 - Not used 8 - Door Box Test 9 - External Paging Circuit Test 10- T1 Test
Perform a loopback test from the CEU to the selected ASTU PCB circuit Perform a loopback test from the CEU to the selected DSTU circuit Perform a loopback test from the CEU to the selected keyset Perform a loopback test from the CEU to the selected ATRU circuit Perform a DTMF test on the selected DTMF receiver (see Program 0303) Test the specified Conference path (see Program 0308)
1 (for menu 1) + HOLD + 500/2500 extension port number to test (1-256) + HOLD 2 (for menu 2) + HOLD + DSTU extension port to test + HOLD 3 (for menu 3) + HOLD + DSTU extension port to test + HOLD 4 (for menu 4) + HOLD + trunk port to test + HOLD 5 (for menu 5) + HOLD + DTMF receiver to test + HOLD 6 (for menu 6) + HOLD + Conference circuit to test (1-32) + HOLD
Test the specified Door Box Test the specified External Paging circuit Test the specified T1 circuits
8 (for menu 8) + HOLD + Door Box to test (1-8) + HOLD 9 (for menu 9) + HOLD + External Paging circuit to test (1-8) + HOLD 10 (for menu 10) + HOLD + Test Type (1 = Local, 2 = Remote and 3 = Local Channel) + HOLD + Test trunk port (1-128) + HOLD
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 637
638 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not Available. The CPRU PCB does not have alarm LEDs. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0010 - Alarm LED Setup to assign a status to each of the system alarms. You can designate an alarm as Major (MAJ) or Minor (MIN). This determines which alarm LED indicates on the CPRU PCB and CEU if the alarm occurs. In addition, you can also assign an alarm to Alarm LEDs 1-5 on the CPRU PCB (AL1AL5). For example, designate alarm 0105 (Loop Back Test Failure) as a major alarm indicating also on AL5. If you have a failure during a loop back test, the MAJ LEDs on the CPRU PCB, CEU and DSS Consoles will light. AL5 on the CPRU PCB will also light.
DETAIL C
Normal Operation MAJ - Off MIN - Off RUN - Flashing AL1 - Off AL2 - Off AL3 - Off AL4 - Off AL5 - Off
92000 - 12
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 639
640 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. System has 72 station ports (1-72). 384i Available. System has 256 station ports (1-256).
IN
Use Program 0011 - Alarm Display Telephone to assign the display keyset port that should receive system alarms. The keyset you select will display an alarm if: The battery on the CPRU PCB is low The periodic maintenance program encounters a disk error (384i only) The periodic program disk maintenance fails If you dont make an assignment in this program, alarms display at the operators extension assigned in Program 1105 - Operators Extension. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 641
Description
124i Currently not implemented. 384i Currently not implemented.
IN
Use Program 0012 - Remote Service Center Phone Number to define the Remote Service Center telephone number. This is the number the system dials for Automatic Fault Reporting. The number can be up to 24 digits long, using the characters 0-9, # and *.
This option is currently not used.
Conditions None
642 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Currently not implemented. 384i Currently not implemented.
IN
Program 0013 - Remote Service Center Trunk Group defines the trunk group used when placing calls to the Service Center for Automatic Fault Reporting.
This option is currently not used.
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 643
Description
124i Currently not implemented. 384i Currently not implemented.
IN
Use Program 0014 - Remote Service Center Users Data to define the site identification data sent to the Service Center when automatically reporting a fault. The data can consist of alphanumeric characters up to 16 digits long.
This option is currently not used.
Conditions None
644 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not applicable. 384i Available requires system software 3.06.02 or higher.
IN
Use Program 0015 - Automatic Backup to automatically back up program data to the CPRU floppy disk. This helps ensure that the system will retain site-specific data in the event of a power failure or system reset. You can set the Automatic Backup to occur: On a specific day of the month at a preset time. OR On selected day(s) of the week (Sunday through Saturday) at a preset time. Conditions If an error occurs while the system is doing an Automatic Backup, an alarm message will display on the telephone designated in Program 0011 - Alarm Display Telephone.
PROGRAMMING 645
Description
124i Available from PC program only. 384i Available from PC program only.
IN
Use Program 0091 - View System Report to display an abbreviated system report. To have the entire system report output on the report printer, refer to 0007 - System Report Port Setup. To upload the system report from the system to the PC program, use PC program option Main Menu -> Communication -> O/M Command > 03 Read System Information.
384i Abbreviated System Report
Conditions None
646 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available from PC program only. 384i Available from PC program only.
IN
Use Program 0092 - View Alarm Report to display the alarm report. To have the alarm report output on the report printer, refer to 0008 - Alarm Report Port Setup. To upload the alarm report from the system to the PC program, use PC program option Main Menu -> Communication -> O/M Command -> 04 Read Alarm Report. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 647
648 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0101 - DTMF Tone Duty Cycle
0101 DTMF Tone Duty Cycle 0100- Basic Hardware Setup Sorts Data
(Part A)
Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0101 - DTMF Tone Duty Cycle to set the DTMF tone duration (on time) and pause (off time) for all trunk calls. This option affects all trunk calls system wide. You make separate entries for duration and pause. Each entry is in 10 mS increments (e.g., entry 10 = 100 mS). The range is 1 (10 mS) to 255 (2.55 seconds). Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 649
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0103 - Time and Date Display Mode
0103 - Time and Date Display Mode Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0103 - Time and Date Display to set how the Time and Date appear on display telephones. There are eight display modes (see the following chart):
Time and Date Display Modes Mode Type Sample
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10 MAR TUE 3:15PM 3:15PM MAR 10 TUE 3-10 TUE 3:15 PM 3:15PM TUE 10 MAR 10 MAR TUE 15:15 15:15 MAR 10 TUE 3-10 TUE 15:15 15:15 TUE 10 MAR
Conditions None
650 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. System has 52 trunk ports (1-52). 384i Available. System has 128 trunk ports (1-128).
IN
Use Program 0104 - DP to DTMF Conversion Options to determine how a user can convert a Dial Pulse (DP) call to a DTMF call. for each trunk, set the type of DP to DTMF conversion required. There are three conversion options: 0 - Automatic DP to DTMF conversion occurs automatically if the extension user waits more than 10 seconds before dialing the next digit.
1 - Automatic and Manual DP to DTMF conversion occurs automatically if the extension user waits more than 10 seconds before dialing the next digit. In addition, the user can dial # to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dialing. 2 - Manual User can dial # to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dialing.
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 651
Description
124i Available. 384i Available. After you change this program and exit programming, the system will reset for about thirty seconds. Requires system software 3.04 or higher.
IN
Use this program to set the frequency of the systems splash tone. This is the tone the system uses, for example, to alert the user of an incoming voice-announced Intercom call. When changing a tone, refer to the System Tones table below.
System Tones - A
No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
3200.00 2909.09 2666.67 2461.54 2285.71 2133.33 2000.00 1882.35 1777.78 1684.21 1600.00 1523.81 1454.54 1391.30 1333.33 1280.00 1230.77 1185.19 1142.86 1103.45 1066.67 1032.26 1000.00 969.70 941.18 914.29 888.89 864.86 ----820.51 800.00 780.49 761.90
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74
744.19 727.27 711.11 695.65 680.85 666.67 653.06 640.00 627.45 615.38 603.77 592.59 581.82 571.43 561.40 551.72 542.37 533.33 524.59 516.13 507.94 500.00 492.31 484.85 477.61 470.59 463.77 457.14 450.80 444.44 438.36 432.43 426.67
421.05 415.58 410.26 405.06 400.00 395.06 390.24 385.84 380.95 376.47 372.09 367.82 363.64 359.55 355.56 351.65 347.83 344.09 340.43 336.84 333.33 329.90 326.53 323.23 320.00 316.83 313.73 310.68 307.69 304.76 301.89
Conditions Do not use entry 37. The system saves entry 37 as 36 (864.86). 652 PROGRAMMING 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
PROGRAMMING 653
Description
124i Available. 384i Available. After you change this program and exit programming, the system will reset for about thirty seconds. Requires system software 3.04 or higher.
IN
Use this program to set the frequency and duration of the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone. When an extension user enables Dial Pad Confirmation Tone (Service Code 824), they hear this tone each time they press a telephone key. When changing a tone, refer to the System Tones table below. The duration settings are from 2-25 in 5 mS intervals (e.g., 2 = 10 mS, 4 = 20 mS, etc.).
System Tones - A
No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
3200.00 2909.09 2666.67 2461.54 2285.71 2133.33 2000.00 1882.35 1777.78 1684.21 1600.00 1523.81 1454.54 1391.30 1333.33 1280.00 1230.77 1185.19 1142.86 1103.45 1066.67 1032.26 1000.00 969.70 941.18 914.29 888.89 864.86 ----820.51 800.00 780.49 761.90
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74
744.19 727.27 711.11 695.65 680.85 666.67 653.06 640.00 627.45 615.38 603.77 592.59 581.82 571.43 561.40 551.72 542.37 533.33 524.59 516.13 507.94 500.00 492.31 484.85 477.61 470.59 463.77 457.14 450.80 444.44 438.36 432.43 426.67
421.05 415.58 410.26 405.06 400.00 395.06 390.24 385.84 380.95 376.47 372.09 367.82 363.64 359.55 355.56 351.65 347.83 344.09 340.43 336.84 333.33 329.90 326.53 323.23 320.00 316.83 313.73 310.68 307.69 304.76 301.89
Conditions Do not use Frequency entry 37. The system saves entry 37 as 36 (864.86).
654 PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING 655
Description
124i Available. 384i Available. After you change this program and exit programming, the system will reset for about thirty seconds. Requires system software 3.04 or higher.
IN
Use this program to set the trunk ring tones, which are the tones a user hears when a trunk rings an extension. These tones are grouped into four trunk ring tone Ranges (1-4), also called patterns, that consist of a combination of frequencies. (You assign a specific Range to trunks in Program 0902.) Within each Range there are three frequency Types: High, Middle and Low. (Service Code 820 allows users to choose the Type for their incoming calls.) Each Type in turn consists of three frequencies "played" simultaneously to make up the tone. These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number (see the System Tones A and B tables beginning on the next page). In this program, you assign the three Frequency Numbers for each Type, for each of the four Ranges. The chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each Type in each Range. If you change the Frequency Numbers for a Type, be sure to write them in the New column for future reference.
656 PROGRAMMING
System Tones - A
No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
3200.00 2909.09 2666.67 2461.54 2285.71 2133.33 2000.00 1882.35 1777.78 1684.21 1600.00 1523.81 1454.54 1391.30 1333.33 1280.00 1230.77 1185.19 1142.86 1103.45 1066.67 1032.26 1000.00 969.70 941.18 914.29 888.89 864.86 ----820.51 800.00 780.49 761.90
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74
744.19 727.27 711.11 695.65 680.85 666.67 653.06 640.00 627.45 615.38 603.77 592.59 581.82 571.43 561.40 551.72 542.37 533.33 524.59 516.13 507.94 500.00 492.31 484.85 477.61 470.59 463.77 457.14 450.80 444.44 438.36 432.43 426.67
421.05 415.58 410.26 405.06 400.00 395.06 390.24 385.84 380.95 376.47 372.09 367.82 363.64 359.55 355.56 351.65 347.83 344.09 340.43 336.84 333.33 329.90 326.53 323.23 320.00 316.83 313.73 310.68 307.69 304.76 301.89
PROGRAMMING 657
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1000.00 667.67 500.00 400.00 333.33 285.71 250.00 222.22 200.00 181.82 166.67 153.85 142.86 133.33 125.00 117.65 111.11 105.26 100.00 95.24 90.91 86.96 83.33 80.00 76.92 74.07 71.43 68.97 66.67 64.52 62.50 60.61 58.82 57.14 55.56 54.05 52.63 51.28 50.00 48.78 47.62 46.51 45.45
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
44.44 43.48 42.55 41.67 40.82 40.00 39.22 38.46 37.74 37.04 36.36 35.71 35.09 34.48 33.90 33.33 32.79 32.36 31.75 31.25 30.77 30.30 29.85 29.41 28.99 28.57 28.17 27.78 27.40 27.03 26.67 26.32 25.97 25.64 25.32 25.00 24.69 24.39 24.10 23.81 23.53 23.26 22.99
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128
22.73 22.47 22.22 21.98 21.74 21.51 21.28 21.05 20.83 20.62 20.41 20.20 20.00 19.80 19.61 19.42 19.23 19.05 18.87 18.69 18.52 18.35 18.18 18.02 17.86 17.70 17.54 17.39 17.24 17.09 16.95 16.81 16.67 16.53 16.39 16.26 16.13 16.00 15.87 15.75 15.63 15.50
658 PROGRAMMING
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171
15.38 15.27 15.15 15.04 14.93 14.81 14.71 14.60 14.49 14.39 14.29 14.18 14.08 13.99 13.89 13.79 13.70 13.61 13.51 13.42 13.33 13.25 13.16 13.07 12.99 12.90 12.82 12.74 12.66 12.58 12.50 12.42 12.35 12.27 12.20 12.12 12.05 11.98 11.90 11.83 11.76 11.70 11.63
172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214
11.56 11.49 11.43 11.36 11.30 11.24 11.17 11.11 11.05 10.99 10.93 10.87 10.81 10.75 10.70 10.64 10.58 10.53 10.47 10.42 10.36 10.31 10.26 10.20 10.15 10.10 10.05 10.00 9.95 9.90 9.85 9.80 9.76 9.71 9.66 9.62 9.57 9.52 9.48 9.43 9.39 9.35 9.30
215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
9.26 9.22 9.17 9.13 9.09 9.05 9.01 8.97 8.93 8.89 8.85 8.81 8.77 8.73 8.70 8.66 8.62 8.58 8.55 8.51 8.47 8.44 8.40 8.37 8.33 8.30 8.26 8.23 8.20 8.16 8.13 8.10 8.06 8.03 8.00 7.97 7.94 7.91 7.87 7.84 7.81
Conditions Do not use Frequency entry 37. The system saves entry 37 as 36 (864.86).
PROGRAMMING 659
660 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone
0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available. After you change this program and exit programming, the system will reset for about thirty seconds. Requires system software 3.04 or higher.
IN
Use this program to set the Intercom and External Alarm Sensor ring tones. Each ring tone consists of a combination of frequencies, grouped into three frequency Types: High, Middle and Low. (Service Code 820 allows users to choose the Type for their incoming Intercom calls.) Each Type in turn consists of three frequencies "played" simultaneously to make up the tone. These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number (see the System Tones A and B tables beginning on the next page). In this program, you assign the three Frequency Numbers for each Type for both the Intercom and External Alarm Sensor ring tones. The chart below shows the default Frequency Numbers for each Type, for both tones. If you change the Frequency Numbers for a Type, be sure to write them in the New column for future reference.
PROGRAMMING 661
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone
System Tones - A
No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
3200.00 2909.09 2666.67 2461.54 2285.71 2133.33 2000.00 1882.35 1777.78 1684.21 1600.00 1523.81 1454.54 1391.30 1333.33 1280.00 1230.77 1185.19 1142.86 1103.45 1066.67 1032.26 1000.00 969.70 941.18 914.29 888.89 864.86 ----820.51 800.00 780.49 761.90
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74
744.19 727.27 711.11 695.65 680.85 666.67 653.06 640.00 627.45 615.38 603.77 592.59 581.82 571.43 561.40 551.72 542.37 533.33 524.59 516.13 507.94 500.00 492.31 484.85 477.61 470.59 463.77 457.14 450.80 444.44 438.36 432.43 426.67
421.05 415.58 410.26 405.06 400.00 395.06 390.24 385.84 380.95 376.47 372.09 367.82 363.64 359.55 355.56 351.65 347.83 344.09 340.43 336.84 333.33 329.90 326.53 323.23 320.00 316.83 313.73 310.68 307.69 304.76 301.89
662 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone
System Tones - B
No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
1000.00 667.67 500.00 400.00 333.33 285.71 250.00 222.22 200.00 181.82 166.67 153.85 142.86 133.33 125.00 117.65 111.11 105.26 100.00 95.24 90.91 86.96 83.33 80.00 76.92 74.07 71.43 68.97 66.67 64.52 62.50 60.61 58.82 57.14 55.56 54.05 52.63 51.28 50.00 48.78 47.62 46.51 45.45
44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
44.44 43.48 42.55 41.67 40.82 40.00 39.22 38.46 37.74 37.04 36.36 35.71 35.09 34.48 33.90 33.33 32.79 32.36 31.75 31.25 30.77 30.30 29.85 29.41 28.99 28.57 28.17 27.78 27.40 27.03 26.67 26.32 25.97 25.64 25.32 25.00 24.69 24.39 24.10 23.81 23.53 23.26 22.99
87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128
22.73 22.47 22.22 21.98 21.74 21.51 21.28 21.05 20.83 20.62 20.41 20.20 20.00 19.80 19.61 19.42 19.23 19.05 18.87 18.69 18.52 18.35 18.18 18.02 17.86 17.70 17.54 17.39 17.24 17.09 16.95 16.81 16.67 16.53 16.39 16.26 16.13 16.00 15.87 15.75 15.63 15.50
PROGRAMMING 663
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone
System Tones - B (Contd)
No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz) No. Frequency (Hz)
129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171
15.38 15.27 15.15 15.04 14.93 14.81 14.71 14.60 14.49 14.39 14.29 14.18 14.08 13.99 13.89 13.79 13.70 13.61 13.51 13.42 13.33 13.25 13.16 13.07 12.99 12.90 12.82 12.74 12.66 12.58 12.50 12.42 12.35 12.27 12.20 12.12 12.05 11.98 11.90 11.83 11.76 11.70 11.63
172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214
11.56 11.49 11.43 11.36 11.30 11.24 11.17 11.11 11.05 10.99 10.93 10.87 10.81 10.75 10.70 10.64 10.58 10.53 10.47 10.42 10.36 10.31 10.26 10.20 10.15 10.10 10.05 10.00 9.95 9.90 9.85 9.80 9.76 9.71 9.66 9.62 9.57 9.52 9.48 9.43 9.39 9.35 9.30
215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255
9.26 9.22 9.17 9.13 9.09 9.05 9.01 8.97 8.93 8.89 8.85 8.81 8.77 8.73 8.70 8.66 8.62 8.58 8.55 8.51 8.47 8.44 8.40 8.37 8.33 8.30 8.26 8.23 8.20 8.16 8.13 8.10 8.06 8.03 8.00 7.97 7.94 7.91 7.87 7.84 7.81
Conditions Do not use Frequency entry 37. The system saves entry 37 as 36 (864.86).
664 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone
Telephone Programming Instructions
To enter data for Program 0112 (Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone): 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. 0112 + HOLD Pattern No? 3. To set the Intercom ring tone, enter 1 + HOLD OR To set the External Alarm Sensor ring tone, enter 2 + HOLD Type No? 4. Enter the number of the Type (1-3) you want to program + HOLD 1 = High, 2 = Middle and 3 = Low Frequency No? 5. Enter the frequency you want to program (1-3) + HOLD Refer to the Intercom and Alarm Ring Tones chart if necessary. 6. For the frequency selected in the previous step, enter the Frequency Number + HOLD For frequencies 1 and 2, select from System Tones - Part A. For frequency 3, select from System Tones - Part B. 7. Repeat from step 5 to program another frequency. OR HOLD + Repeat from step 4 to program another Type. 8. OR HOLD + HOLD + Repeat from step 3 to select either the Intercom (1) or Alarm (2) ring tone. OR HOLD + HOLD + HOLD to exit.
PROGRAMMING 665
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0114 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part A)
0114 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part A) Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. System has 52 trunk ports (1-52). 384i Available. System has 128 trunk ports (1-128).
IN
Use Program 0114 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part A) to set the critical timing for the Analog Trunk (ATRU) PCB. The system uses the entries you make in this program for all ATRU PCBs. Refer to the following chart for a description of each timer, its range and default setting. For additional ATRU PCB timers, also see 0135 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part B) on page 701.
Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers Item (Timer No.) Description Range Default
Item 1
Loop Current Detection Time (LOOP-Detect) For loop start trunks, loop current must be present for this interval before the system seizes the trunk. Loop Disconnect/Abandoned Call Time (H&D-Detect) This timer sets the Loop Disconnect (loop current interruption) interval for trunks. If the system detects a loop disconnect longer than this interval, it assumes the CO has disconnected. The system then returns the trunk to idle. The system also uses this timer to supervise outside calls on Hold. If the system senses a loop current interruption from a held call that exceeds this interval, it assumes the outside party has hung up and terminates the call. The Flash interval (set in Item 9 below) should be less than this interval. If not, flashing a line could immediately disconnect it.
(384i) 150 (600 mS) (124i) 75 (300 mS) (384i) 50 (200 mS) in 3.05 or higher 12 (48 mS) prior to 3.05 (124i) 12 (48 mS)
Item 2
Item 3
10 PPS DP Break Time (DP-Break [10])] For 10 PPS Dial Pulse trunks, this sets the digit break time. 10 PPS DP Make Time (DP-Make [10]) For 10 PPS Dial Pulse trunks, this sets the digit make time. 10 PPS DP Interdigit Time (DP-Intdt [10]) For 10 PPS Dial Pulse Trunks, this sets the interdigit time (i.e., the quiet time between DP digits). 20 PPS DP Break Time (DP-Break [20]) For 20 PPS Dial Pulse trunks, this sets the digit break time.
1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps)
15 (60 mS)
Item 4
10 (40 mS)
Item 5
8 (800 mS)
Item 6
8 (32 mS)
666 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0114 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part A)
Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers Item (Timer No.) Description Range Default
Item 7
20 PPS DP Make Time (DP-Make [20]) For 20 PPS Dial Pulse trunks, this sets the digit make time. 20 PPS DP Interdigit Time (DP-Intdt [20]) For 20 PPS Dial Pulse trunks, this sets the interdigit time (i.e., the quiet time between DP digits). Flash (Hooking 1) This sets the flash (Hooking 1) duration for analog trunk calls. See Program 0901, Item 6. Flash (Hooking 2) This sets the flash (Hooking 2) duration for analog trunk calls. See Program 0901, Item 6. Ground Start Time (Ground) Before the system can start a ground start trunk, the telcos tip ground signal must be present for longer than this interval. Pause Time (Pause) This sets the length of the system pause (e.g., the pause in dialing after a PBX access code).
1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (16-4080 mS in 16 mS steps) 1-255 (16-4080 mS in 16 mS steps) 1-255 (16-4080 mS in 16 mS steps) 1-255 (seconds)
4 (16 mS)
Item 8
5 (500 mS)
Item 9
50 (800 mS)
Item 10
Item 11
Item 12
(384i) 1 (1 second) in 3.05 or higher 3 (3 seconds) prior to 3.05 (124i) 3 (3 seconds) 13 (104 mS)
Item 13
CES Incoming Detection Time 1 (tsrd 0) (CES-Detect 1) Not Used in North America CES Incoming Detection Time 2 (tsrd 1) (DES-Detect 2) Not used in North America Immediate Ring Detect Time (IMM-Detect) See the illustration on page 701. Extended Ring Detect Time (EXT-Detect) See the illustration on page 701. Call Disconnect Time (INC-Stop) If the loop current on a trunk call is interrupted for longer than this interval, the system terminates the call. See the illustration on page 701. (384i Only) Power Recovery Loop Current Detection Time Not used.
1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps)
Item 14
38 (304 mS)
Item 15
13 (104 mS)
Item 16 Item 17
Item 18
30 (3000 mS)
PROGRAMMING 667
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0114 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part A)
Ring On
Ring Off
Set trunk for Immediate or Extended Ring Detect in Program 0901 Item 2.
Conditions None
668 PROGRAMMING
92000 - 143
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0115 - Analog Station (ASTU) Timers
0115 - Analog Station (ASTU) Timers Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available (except for Item 9). 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0115 - Analog Station (ASTU) Timers to set various timing parameters for the Analog Station (ASTU) PCB. The system uses the entries you make in this program for all ASTU PCBs. Refer to the following chart for a description of each timer, its range and default setting.
Analog Station (ASTU PCB) Timers Item (Timer No.) Description Range Default
Item 1
1-255 (10-1280 mS in 5 mS steps) 1-255 (10-1280 mS in 5 mS steps) 1-255 (10-1280 mS in 5 mS steps) 1-255 (10-1280 mS in 5 mS steps) 1-255 (10-1280 mS in 5 mS steps) 1-255 (10-1280 mS in 5 mS steps) 1-255 (10-1280 mS in 5 mS steps) 1-255 (10-1280 mS in 5 mS steps) 1-255 (10-1280 mS in 5 mS steps)
1 (10 mS)
Item 2
1 (10 mS)
Item 3
20 (120 mS)
Item 4
59 (300 mS)
Item 5
19 (100 mS)
Item 6
Item 7
Item 8
69 (350 mS)
Item 9
Minimum Grounding Time (MIN-Ground) Note: This item is not available in 124i.
19 (100 mS)
Conditions None
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0115 - Analog Station (ASTU) Timers
670 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. Requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i
IN
Use this program to set the criteria for DTMF signaling, dial tone detection, and dial, busy and ringback tones. The system uses this program to filter out invalid tones from connected telco or PBX. For example, an incoming DTMF tone can only be accepted as valid by the system if it meets the criteria in Items 1-10.
DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Setup Item DTMF Tone Criteria (Items 1-10) Description Range Default
Item 1
DTMF On Time (SIGNAL_DUR) This option sets the minimum on time for DTMF tones. Valid DTMF tones must be longer than this interval. DTMF Off Time (PAUSE_DUR) This option sets the minimum off time for DTMF tones over trunks. If the break in the DTMF tone is than this interval, the system assumes the DTMF tone has stopped. Maximum DTMF Detection Level for Trunks (MAXLEV[EXT]) Valid DTMF tones from trunks cannot exceed this level. Maximum DTMF Detection Level for OPXs (MAXLEV[INT]) Valid DTMF tones for analog extensions cannot exceed this level.
1-255 (20-5100 mS in 20 mS steps) 1-255 (20-5100 mS in 20 mS steps) 1-6 (0 dBm to -5 dBm in 1 dBm steps) 1-6 (0 dBm to -5 dBm in 1 dBm steps)
1 (20 mS)
Item 2
1 (20 mS)
Item 3
1 (-4 dBm)
Item 4
5 (0 dBm)
Item 5
1-6 (-32 to -37 Minimum DTMF Detection Level for Trunks dBm in - dBm (MINLEV[EXT]) steps), or Valid DTMF tones from trunks cannot be below this level. 11-16 (-50 to -55 dBm in 1 dBm steps) Minimum DTMF Detection Level for OPXs (MINLEV[INT]) Valid DTMF tones from analog extensions cannot be below this level. 1-6 (-32 to -37 dBm in - dBm steps), or 11-16 (-50 to -55 dBm in 1 dBm steps) 1-6 (+ 5 to + 10 in 1 dB steps)
6 (-37 dBm)
Item 6
1 (-32 dBm)
Item 7
Twist Level for Trunks (TWISTLEV[EXT]) The level of the two tones in a DTMF burst cannot vary my more than this setting. If variance in the tone levels exceed this setting, the system considers the tone invalid.
6 (+ 10 dB)
PROGRAMMING 671
Item 8
Twist Level for OPXs (TWISTLEV[INT]) The level of the two tones in a DTMF burst cannot vary by more than this setting. If variance in the tone levels exceeds this setting, the system considers the tone invalid. Guard Time for Trunks (GUARDLEV[EXT]) After seizing an outgoing trunk, the system waits this interval before outputting DTMF digits. Guard Time for OPXs (GUARDLEV[INT]) After seizing an OPX circuit, the system waits this interval before outputting DTMF digits.
6 (+ 10 dB)
Item 9
4 (22 mS)
Item 10
4 (22 mS)
Item 11
Minimum Dial Tone Detection Level for Trunks (DET_MIN[EXT]) Incoming dial tone on trunks must be this level before the system will detect it. Minimum Dial Tone Detection Level for OPXs (DET_MIN[INT]) Incoming dial tone on OPX circuits must be this level before the system will detect it. Dial Tone Detection On Time (DTON_DETECT) Incoming dial tone must last for this interval before the system will detect it. The system ignores dial tone Dial Tone Detection Off Time (DTOF_DETECT) Once the system detects dial tone, it uses this option to filter out momentary interruptions. If the interruptions are shorter than this interval, the system ignores them. If the interruptions are this interval, the system assumes dial tone has stopped. Out-of-Band Signal Elimination Ratio for Trunks (OUTBAND[EXT]) This option sets the limits for frequency variations in dial tone on trunks. Dial tone is normally composed of a 350 Hz and 440 Hz signal. This option allows dial tone frequencies to be either 25% or 50% out-of-band (i.e., 2550% higher or lower than normal). Out-of-Band Signal Elimination Ratio for OPXs (OUTBAND[INT]) This option sets the limits for frequency variations in dial tone on OPX circuits. Dial tone is normally composed of a 350 Hz and 440 Hz signal. This option allows dial tone frequencies to be either 25% or 50% out-of-band (i.e., 2550% higher or lower than normal). Signal-to-Noise Ratio for Trunks (S/N[EXT]) This option sets the ratio of dial tone to the trunks idle channel noise.
1-9 (-5 to -45 dBm in 5 dBm steps) 1-9 (-5 to -45 dBm in 5 dBm steps) 1-255 (20-5100 mS in 20 mS steps) 1-255 (20-5100 mS in 20 mS steps)
7 (-39 dBm)
Item 12
4 (-24 dBm)
Item 13
10 (200 mS)
Item 14
8 (160 mS)
Item 15
1 or 2 (1=50%, 2=25%)
1 (50%)
Item 16
1 or 2 (1=50%, 2=25%)
1 (50%)
Item 17
2 (-20 dB)
672 PROGRAMMING
Item 18
Signal to Noise Ratio for OPX Circuits (S/N[INT]) This option sets the ratio of dial tone to the OPX circuits idle channel noise.
2 (-20 dB)
Dial, Busy and Ringback Tone Criteria For Items 19-32 below, make an entry for each of the three tone types. Each tone type has two frequencies: Tone A and Tone B. Tone Type 1 = RBT (Ringback Tone) Tone Type 2 = BT (Busy Tone) Tone Type 3 = SDT (Standard Dial Tone)
Item 19
Minimum Cycle Time (CYCLE_MIN) This option sets the minimum duration for the tones cycle. Tone cycles less than this setting are invalid.
RBT=132 (2.64 sec) BT=132 (2.64 sec) SDT=42 (840 mS) RBT=167 (3.34 sec) BT=167 (3.34 sec) SDT=57 (1.14 sec) RBT=42 (840 mS) BT=20 (400 mS) SDT=3 (60 mS) RBT=0 BT=0 SDT=0 RBT=57 (1.14 sec) BT=29 (580 mS) SDT=8 (160 mS) RBT=0 BT=0 SDT=0 RBT=87 (1.74 sec) BT=20 (400 mS) SDT=3 (60 mS)
Item 20
Maximum Cycle Time (CYCLE_MAX) This option sets the maximum duration for the tones cycle. Tone cycles greater than this setting are invalid.
Item 21
Dial Tone 1 Minimum On Time for Tone A (DTON_MIN_A) Set the minimum duration of Tone A for the tone type you are programming. Tones less than this interval are invalid.
Item 22
Dial Tone 1 Minimum On Time for Tone B (DTON_MIN_B) Set the minimum duration of Tone B for the tone type you are programming. Tones less than this interval are invalid.
Item 23
Dial Tone 1Maximum On Time for Tone A 1-255 (DTON_MAX_A) (20-5100 mS in 20 mS steps) Set the maximum duration of Tone A for the tone type you are programming. Tones longer than this duration are invalid.
Item 24
1-255 Dial Tone 1 Maximum On Time for Tone B (20-5100 mS (DTON_MAX_B_) in 20 mS steps) Set the maximum duration for Tone B for the tone type you are programming. Tones longer than this duration are invalid. Dial Tone 1 Minimum Off Time for Tone A (DTOF_MIN_A) For the tone type you are programming, set the Tone A cycle minimum off time. If the cycle off time is less than this interval, the tone is invalid. 1-255 (20-5100 mS in 20 mS steps)
Item 25
PROGRAMMING 673
Item 26
Dial Tone 1 Minimum Off Time for Tone B (DTOF_MIN_B) For the tone type you are programming, set the Tone B cycle minimum off time. If the cycle off time is less than this interval, the tone is invalid. Dial Tone 1 Maximum On Time for Tone A (DTOF_MAX_A) For the tone type you are programming, set the Tone A cucle maximum off time. If the cycle off time is greater than this interval, the tone is invalid. Dial Tone 1 Maximum On Time for Tone B (DTOF_MAX_B) For the tone type you are programming, set the Tone B cycle maximum off time. If the cycle off time is greater than this interval, the tone is invalid. Dial Tone 1 On Count Time for Tone A (DTON_CNT_A) For the tone type you are programming, this option sets the number of On Time repetitions for Tone A. Tones with more than this number of On Repetitions are invalid. Dial Tone 1 On Count Time for Tone B (DTON_CNT_B) For the tone type you are programming, this option sets the number of On Time repetitions for Tone B. Tones with more than this number of On Repetitions are invalid. Dial Tone Off Count Time for Tone A (DTOF_CNT_A) For the tone type you are programming, this option sets the number of Off Time repetitions for Tone A. Tones with more than this number of Off Repetitions are invalid.
Item 27
RBT=112 (2.24 sec) BT=29 (580 mS) SDT=8 (160 mS) RBT=0 BT=0 SDT=0
Item 28
Item 29
0-255 Seconds
Item 30
0-255 Seconds
Item 31
0-255 Seconds
Item 32
Dial Tone Off Count Time for Tone B (DTOF_CNT_B) For the tone type you are programming, this option sets the number of Off Time repetitions for Tone B. Tones with more than this number of Off Repetitions are invalid.
0-255 Seconds
Conditions None
Items 19-32 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. 0116 + HOLD Item No? 3. Enter the number of the item (19-32) you want to program + HOLD Tone Type No? 4. For the item selected, enter the Tone Type (1-3) you want to program + HOLD Tone 1 = Ringback (RBT), Tone 2 = Busy Tone (BT), and Tone 3 = Standard Dial Tone (SDT) 5. Enter the value for the item selected from the table above + HOLD Tone Type No? 6. Repeat from step 4 to select another tone type (1-3). OR HOLD + Repeat from step 3 to select another item (19-32). OR HOLD + HOLD to exit.
PROGRAMMING 675
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0117 - Trunk CODEC Gain Type Settings
0117 - Trunk CODEC Gain Type Settings Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. Requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available. Requires system software 3.04 or higher.
IN
Use this program to customize the five CODEC gain types for trunks. Each type has a unique CODEC transmit and receive level. Use Program 0901 Item 3 to assign gain types to trunk circuits. Available entries are: 0-31 = 0 to + 15.5 dB in .5 dB steps 32-63 = 0 to -15.5 dB in .5 dB steps Following are the default settings for this option:
Type 384i 124i
Type 1: Transmit and Receive Type 2: Transmit and Receive Type 3: Transmit and Receive Type 4: Transmit and Receive Type 5: Transmit and Receive Conditions None
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0118 - Extension CODEC Gain Type Setup
0118 - Extension CODEC Gain Type Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0118 - Extension Codec Gain Type Setup to set the five CODEC gain types for 500/2500 type extensions. Each type has a unique CODEC transmit (from system to phone) and receive (from phone to system) level (called the gain value). Youll assign CODEC gain types to extensions in Program 1001. The following chart shows the relative gain (in dB) for each gain value.
Enter this gain value . . . For this gain level . . .
0-31 32-63
Type 1: Transmit and Receive Type 2: Transmit and Receive Type 3: Transmit and Receive Type 4: Transmit and Receive Type 5: Transmit and Receive Conditions None
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0118 - Extension CODEC Gain Type Setup
9. Repeat from step 3 to make additional entries OR HOLD to exit
678 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0119 - External Page/Door Box CODEC Gain Types
0119 - External Page/Door Box CODEC Gain Types Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0119 - External Page/Door Box CODEC Gain Types to set up the five CODEC gain types for External Paging and Door Box ports. Each type has a unique CODEC transmit and receive level (called the gain value). Youll assign CODEC gain types to External Paging and Door Box ports in Program 0120. The following chart shows the relative gain (in dB) for each gain value.
Enter this gain value . . . For this gain level . . .
0-31 32-63
Type 1: Transmit and Receive Type 2: Transmit and Receive Type 3: Transmit and Receive Type 4: Transmit and Receive Type 5: Transmit and Receive Conditions None
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0119 - External Page/Door Box CODEC Gain Types
8. Repeat from step 3 to make additional entries. OR HOLD to exit
680 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0120 - External Page/Door Box CODEC Gain Setup
0120 - External Page/Door Box CODEC Gain Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0120 - External Page/Door Box CODEC Gain Setup to assign a CODEC gain type (set in Program 0119) to the External Paging and Door Box ports. Assign a gain number to each Paging/Door Box PCB port. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 681
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0121 - ISDN Layer 1 Operation Mode Setup
0121 - ISDN Layer 1 Operation Mode Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the system PRI (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI (P/N 92000BRI**) Manual.
682 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0122 - ISDN Layer 1 Timer Setup
0122 - ISDN Layer 1 Timer Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the system PRI (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI (P/N 92000BRI**) Manual.
PROGRAMMING 683
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0123 - ISDN Layer 2 Operation Mode Setup
0123 - ISDN Layer 2 Operation Mode Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the system PRI (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI (P/N 92000BRI**) Manual.
684 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0124 - ISDN Layer 2 Timer Setup
0124 - ISDN Layer 2 Timer Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the system PRI (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI (P/N 92000BRI**) Manual.
PROGRAMMING 685
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0125 - ISDN Layer 3 Operation Mode Setup
0125 - ISDN Layer 3 Operation Mode Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the system PRI (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI (P/N 92000BRI**) Manual.
686 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0126 - ISDN Layer 3 Timer Setup
0126 - ISDN Layer 3 Timer Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the system PRI (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI (P/N 92000BRI**) Manual.
PROGRAMMING 687
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0127 - ITSU Operation Mode Setup
0127 - ITSU Operation Mode Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the system PRI (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI (P/N 92000BRI**) Manual.
688 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0128 - Analog Station (ASTU PCB) Sidetone Level
0128 - Analog Station (ASTU PCB) Sidetone Level Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0128 - Analog Station (ASTU PCB) Sidetone Level to set the sidetone level for single line telephones connected to ASTU PCBs. In Program 0128 Item 1, you can choose among the four preset sidetone levels or up to eight additional levels calibrated to specific telephones. Use Program 0128 Item 2 to calibrate levels for individual phones.
0128 Item 1 Entry Description
0 1 2 3 4-7 8-15
Highest preset sidetone level Upper mid range preset sidetone level Lower mid range preset sidetone level Lowest mid range preset sidetone level Not used (Same level as entry 0) Eight additional levels calibrated to certain telephones
Conditions None
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0128 - Analog Station (ASTU PCB) Sidetone Level
To calibrate the sidetone for a specific single line extension in Program 0128 Item 2: 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. 0128 + HOLD STA PORT No? 3. Enter the number of the ASTU single line station port you want to program +HOLD Item No? 4. 2 + HOLD ADF DSP Type 5. Lift the handset on the single line telephone that you want to automatically calibrate. 6. Remove the handset modular line cord. If the handset doesnt have a modular line cord, disassemble the handset earpiece and remove the wires connected to the receiver element. 7. Enter the number that the system will use to store your calibrated sidetone level (8-15). The number you select will store the calibrated levels that this procedure generates. You can assign this number to extensions in the procedure for Item 1. 8. HOLD Testing. . . DSP ADF Complete If you see "Error," hand up the handset and repeat from step 5. You must be listening to dial tone at the single line set when the test begins. 9. HOLD to repeat from step 4 OR HOLD + HOLD to repeat from step 3 OR HOLD three times to exit
690 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0129 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Sidetone Setting
0129 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Sidetone Setting Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0129 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Sidetone Setting to set the sidetone level for analog trunks connected to ATRU PCB ports. In Program 0129, you can choose among the four preset sidetone levels or up to eight additional levels calibrated to specific trunks. Use Program 0129 Item 2 to calibrate levels for individual trunks.
0129 Item 1 Entry Description Loss
Highest preset sidetone level Upper mid range preset sidetone level Lower mid range preset sidetone level Lowest mid range preset sidetone level Not used (Same level as entry 0) Eight additional levels calibrated to certain trunks
0 dB 3 dB 5 dB 7 dB
PROGRAMMING 691
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0129 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Sidetone Setting
To calibrate the sidetone for a specific trunk in Program 0129 Item 2: 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. 0129 + HOLD TRK No? 3. Enter the number of the ATRU trunk port you want to program + HOLD Item No? 4. 2 + HOLD ADF DSP Type 5. At a different telephone, use Handsfree (i.e., press SPK) to place or answer a call on the trunk you want to automatically calibrate. 6. Press the MIC key to enable Microphone Mute. The microphone must be muted before going to the next step. For an accurate calibration, the trunk should be on a call and not listening to dial tone. 7. Enter the number that the system will use to store your calibrated sidetone level (8-15). The number you select will store the calibrated levels that this procedure generates. You can assign this number to trunks in the procedure for Item 1. 8. HOLD Testing. . . DSP ADF Complete If you see "Error," hand up the handset and repeat from step 5. You must be listening to dial tone at the single line set when the test begins. 9. HOLD to repeat from step 4 OR HOLD + HOLD to repeat from step 3 OR HOLD three times to exit
692 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0130 - Date Format for SMDR and System Reports
0130 - Date Format for SMDR and System Reports Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0130 - Date Format for SMDR and System Reports to set the date format that appears on the SMDR printout and various system reports. The options are: 0 (U.S.A. format - month/date/year) 1 (Japanese format - year/month/date) 2 (European format - date/month/year) Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 693
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0131 - Unsupervised Conf. CODEC Gain Setup
0131 - Unsupervised Conf. CODEC Gain Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0131 - Unsupervised Conference CODEC Gain Setup to set up the five CODEC gain types for trunk circuits in an Unsupervised Conference. Each type has a unique CODEC transmit and receive level (called the gain value). You assign CODEC gain types to trunks for Unsupervised Conference in Program 0901, Item 23. The following chart shows the relative gain (in dB) for each gain value.
Enter this gain value . . . For this gain level . . .
0-31 32-63 Following are the default settings for this option:
Type
Setting
Type 1: Transmit and Receive Type 2: Transmit and Receive Type 3: Transmit and Receive Type 4: Transmit and Receive Type 5: Transmit and Receive Conditions First condition Default Setting
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0131 - Unsupervised Conf. CODEC Gain Setup
9. Repeat from step 3 to make additional entries OR HOLD to exit
PROGRAMMING 695
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0132 - DID Trunk Timers to set the Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunk Timers. The settings you make in this program affect all DID trunks in all Tenant Groups. Make sure the DID Trunk Timers are compatible with you local telco. Refer to the following chart for a description of each timer, its range and default setting.
DID Trunk Timers Item Description Range Default
Item 1
1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (100-2550 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (100-2550 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (100-2550 mS in 100 mS steps)
3 (24 mS)
Item 2
6 (600 mS)
Item 3
30 (3000 mS)
Item 4
25 (200 mS)
Item 5
3 (300 mS)
Conditions None
696 PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING 697
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Program 0133 - Tie Line Timers sets various timers for Tie Lines. The settings you make in this program affect all tie lines in all Tenant Groups. Be sure to set the Tie Line Timers for compatibility with the local telco. Refer to the following chart for a description of each timer, its range and default setting.
Tie Line Timers Timer Description Range Default
Item 1
1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (1-255 seconds)
15 (60 mS)
Item 2
7 (700 mS)
Item 3
20 (160 mS)
Item 4
7 (700 mS)
Item 5
15 (60 mS)
Item 6
10 (40 mS)
Item 7
8 (800 mS)
Item 8
8 (32mS)
Item 9
4 (16 mS)
Item 10
5 (500 mS)
Item 11
25 (200 mS)
Item 12
Pause Time
3 (3 seconds)
698 PROGRAMMING
Item 13
1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps)
25 (200 mS)
Item 14
10 (1000mS)
Item 15
48 (4800 mS)
Item 16
12 (96 mS)
Item 17
44 (352mS)
Item 18
3 (12 mS)
Item 19
19 (76 mS)
Item 20
8 (32 mS)
Item 21
27 (108 mS)
Item 22
13 (104 mS)
Conditions None
5.
700 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0135 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part B)
0135 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part B) Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. System has 52 trunk ports (1-52). 384i Available. System has 128 trunk ports (1-128).
IN
Use Program 0135 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part A) to set critical timing for the Analog Trunk (ATRU) PCB. The system uses the entries you make in this program for all ATRU PCBs. Refer to the following chart for a description of each timer, its range and default setting. For additional ATRU PCB timers, also see 0114 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part A) on page 666.
Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part B) Item (Timer No.) Description Range Default
Item 1
0-15 (0-1.5 secs in 100 mS steps) 0-15 (0-750 mS in 50 mS steps) 0-15 0-10=500-1000 mS in 50 mS steps) 11=1200 mS 12=1400 mS 13=1600 mS 14=1800 mS 15=3000 mS
2 (200 mS)
Item 2
7 (350 mS)
Item 3
6 (800 mS)
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 701
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0135 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part B)
Telephone Programming Instructions
To enter data for Program 0135 (Analog Trunk Timers [Part B]): 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. 0135 + HOLD Item No? 3. Enter the number of the timer (Item) you want to program + HOLD 4. Enter the desired timer duration + HOLD 5. Repeat from step 3 to make additional entries OR HOLD to exit
702 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0136 - T1 Trunk Timers to set various timers for T1 Trunks. Refer to the following chart for a description of each timer, its range and default setting.
T1 Trunk Timers Timer Description Range Default
Item 1
1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps)
15 (60 mS)
Item 2
15 (60 mS)
Item 3
Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time for Loop Start Trunks) Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time for Ground Start Trunks Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time for DID Trunks Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time for Tie Trunks Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time for OPX Trunks Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time for Loop Start Trunks Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time for Ground Start Trunks Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time for DID Trunks Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time for Tie Trunks Ringing Signal Detection Minimum Time for OPX Trunks
6 (600 mS)
Item 4
6 (600 mS)
Item 5
6 (600 mS)
Item 6
6 (600 mS)
Item 7
6 (600 mS)
Item 8
10 (80 mS)
Item 9
10 (80 mS)
Item 10
7 (56 mS)
Item 11
7 (56 mS)
Item 12
10 (80 mS)
PROGRAMMING 703
Item 13
Ringing Signal Stop Detection Minimum Time for Loop Start Trunks Ringing Signal Stop Detection Minimum Time for Ground Start Trunks Open Loop Time for DID Trunks
1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps)
50 (5 S)
Item 14
10 (1 S)
Item 15
6 (600 mS)
Item 16
18 (72 mS)
Item 17
18 (72 mS)
Item 18
13 (52 mS)
Item 19
15 (60 mS)
Item 20
10 (40 mS)
Item 21
7 (700 mS)
Item 22
Pause Time
3 (24 mS)
Item 23
25 (200 mS)
Item 24
25 (200 mS)
Item 25
3 (300 mS)
Item 26
3 (300 mS)
704 PROGRAMMING
Item 27
1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (8-2040 mS in 8 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1=Single ring 2=Double ring 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps)
12 (96 mS)
Item 28
45 (360 mS)
Item 29
13 (104 mS)
Item 30
3 (12 mS)
Item 31
19 (76 mS)
Item 32
8 (32 mS)
Item 33
27 (216 mS)
Item 34
9 (900 mS)
Item 35
9 (900 mS)
Item 36
9 (900 mS)
Item 37
9 (900 mS)
Item 38
9 (900 mS)
Item 39
Guard Time 2
3 (12 mS)
Item 40 Item 41
PROGRAMMING 705
Item 42
1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps)
5 (500 mS)
Item 43
5 (500 mS)
Item 44
25 (2.5 S)
Item 45
30 (3 S)
Item 46
10 (1 S)
Item 47
Receive Flash Duration Minimum Time for Tie Trunks Receive Flash Duration Minimum Time for OPX Trunks Receive Flash Duration Maximum Time for Tie Trunks Receive Flash Duration Maximum Time for OPX Trunks Flash Send Time for Loop Start Trunks
3 (300 mS)
Item 48
3 (300 mS)
Item 49
6 (600 mS)
Item 50
6 (600 mS)
Item 51
5 (500 mS)
Item 52
5 (500 mS)
Item 53
5 (500 mS)
Item 54
5 (500 mS)
Item 55
5 (500 mS)
706 PROGRAMMING
Item 56
1-255 (100-25500 mS in 100mS steps) 1-255 1-255 (4-1020 mS in 4 mS steps) 1=Internal 2=External 1-5 (133 feet to 665 feet, in 133 foot steps) 1=D3/D4 2=ESF 1=B8ZS 2=AMI/ZCS
20 (2 mS)
Item 57 Item 58
40 (4 S) 27 (108 mS)
Item 59 Item 60
Item 61 Item 62
1 (D3/D4) 1 (B8ZS)
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 707
708 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0137 - ISDN Primary Interface Layer 2 Operating Mode Setup
0137 - ISDN Primary Interface Layer 2 Operating Mode Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the system PRI (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI (P/N 92000BRI**) Manual.
PROGRAMMING 709
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0138 - ISDN Primary Interface Layer 3 Operating Mode Setup
0138 - ISDN Primary Interface Layer 3 Operating Mode Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the system PRI (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI (P/N 92000BRI**) Manual.
710 PROGRAMMING
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0139 - BRI ISDN Line TEI Assignment
0139 - BRI ISDN Line TEI Assignment Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the system PRI (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI (P/N 92000BRI**) Manual.
PROGRAMMING 711
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) 0139 - BRI ISDN Line TEI Assignment
712 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available four users and one Tenant Group. 384i Available eight users and four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 0201 - Setting the Programming Passwords to set the system passwords. For password entry purposes, the system allows multiple users (4 in the 124i and 8 in the 384i). Each user can have a: Unique alphanumeric name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters long). While in the programming mode, the user name shows on the telephone display. Password entry of up to 10 digits (using 0-9, # and *) (384i Only) Tenant assignment (1-4, 0 = access to all Tenant Groups)1 Password level While in the programming mode, the Abbreviation shows on the telephone display.
Level Password Default Name 384i Tenant Description
0 1 1
Blocked User (cannot program) Installer Level - Access to all programs in this manual System Administrator Level 1 Restricted access System Administrator Level 2 More restricted access
Refer to the following table when entering password data. Press DND to toggle between upper and lower case.
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it.
A user in one tenant group can program extensions in another tenant group if the password level allows.
PROGRAMMING 713
Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *). Clear the text entry if you want to start over. Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
DSS10
CHECK
Conditions Only one extension can be in the programming mode at any one time.
PROGRAMMING 715
Description
124i Available one Tenant Group. An extensions Class of Service cannot be changed via Service Code. 384i Available four Tenant Groups. Allowing an extension to change Class of Service via Service Code 177 requires system software 3.07.31.
IN
Use Program 0202 - Setting User Passwords to set the password a user must dial before: Setting the system Time and Date, changing the Music on Hold tone and changing an extensions Class of Service via Service Code 177 (Item 1) Activating/deactivating Night Service (Item 2) In 384i, you can make a separate set of entries for each Tenant Group. Conditions None
716 PROGRAMMING
Setup (Part B)
Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i
Available.
IN
Use Program 0301 - Inter-Tenant Calling to set the parameters for Inter-Tenant Calling. If enabled: Intercom calling between tenants is allowed An extension port in one Tenant Group cannot have the same extension number as an extension port in another group An extension user can Transfer one of their Tenant Groups trunks to an extension in another Tenant Group If disabled: An extension user in one Tenant Group cannot place an Intercom call to an extension in a different group An extension user cannot Transfer one of their Tenant Groups trunks to an extension in another group. An extension port in one tenant group can have the same extension number as an extension in a different group Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 717
0300 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part B) 0302 - Music on Hold and Conference SetUp
0302 - Music on Hold and Conference SetUp Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i
384i
IN
Use Program 0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup to set the Music on Hold selection and the system Conference mode. For MOH, the system can provide silence to callers on Hold or one of two synthesized selections. The 124i system allows either 8 four-party conferences or 4 eight-party conferences. The 384i system allows either 4 four-party conferences or 2 eight-party conferences per CDTU PCB. Conditions (384i) The system allows up to eight CDTU PCBs.
718 PROGRAMMING
0300 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part B) 0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on the CDTU PCBs for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. Each CDTU PCB has 16 individual circuits, grouped into 4 four-circuit blocks. You assign a function to each block. Since the system allows a total of eight CDTU PCBs, you can program a total of 32 blocks (128 circuits). Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers (i.e., DTU blocks): In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them. In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them. You can make five different types of CDTU PCB circuit allocations: 0 (Not connected) 1 (DTMF receiver for analog extensions) 2 (DTMF receiver for analog trunks) 3 (Dial tone detection for OPX trunks) 4 (Dial tone detection for analog trunks) Refer to the following illustration when allocating CDTU circuits.
BLOCK BLOCK 1 2
DTU 1
BLOCK BLOCK 5 6
DTU 2
BLOCK BLOCK 9 10
4 Circuits per IC
BLOCK BLOCK 3 4
DTU 3
BLOCK BLOCK 13 14
BLOCK BLOCK 7 8
DTU 4
BLOCK BLOCK 17 18
BLOCK BLOCK 11 12
DTU 5
BLOCK 22 BLOCK 21
BLOCK BLOCK 15 16
DTU 6
BLOCK 26 BLOCK 25
BLOCK BLOCK 19 20
DTU 7
BLOCK 30 BLOCK 29
BLOCK 24
BLOCK 23
DTU 8
BLOCK 28
BLOCK 27
BLOCK 32
BLOCK 31
92000 - 32
Conditions Any changes you make in Program 0303 take effect in about 30 seconds or after you reset the system.
PROGRAMMING 719
0300 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part B) 0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Feature Cross Reference
TBD
720 PROGRAMMING
0300 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part B) 0304 - PGDU PCB Alarm/Fax Sensor Setup
0304 - PGDU PCB Alarm/Fax Sensor Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i 4 sensors per PGDU PCB 8 max per system (2 PCBs). System has 52 trunk ports. 384i 8 sensors per PGDU PCB 16 max per system (2 PCBs). System has 128 trunk ports.
IN
Use Program 0304 - PGDU PCB Alarm/Fax Sensor Setup to set the function of the sensors on the PGDU PCBs. Each PCB has sensors which you can set as fax sensors or alarm sensors. The system allows up to two PGDU PCBs. The alarm sensors connect to external alarm relays. The sensor detects the external alarm activation and sends an alarm tone to all extensions programmed to receive alarm tones. Fax sensors connect to relay contacts on the fax machine (usually on the B Pair). When the fax answers an incoming call, the associated PGDU PCB sensor detects the fax relay activation and busies out the trunk to the system. The trunk is available only to the fax machine - not the system. Conditions The sensor circuits on the PGDU PCB require a 10-30 V DC power supply in series with the sensor contacts. Refer to the hardware manual for additional details.
0300 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part B) 0305 - PGDU PCB Sensor Activation Mode
0305 - PGDU PCB Sensor Activation Mode Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i 4 sensors per PGDU PCB 8 max per system (2 PCBs). System has 52 trunk ports. 384i 8 sensors per PGDU PCB 16 max per system (2 PCBs). System has 128 trunk ports.
IN
Use Program 0305 - PGDU PCB Sensor Activation Mode to have the PGDU sensors activate for either normally open or normally closed alarm or fax relay contacts. Conditions The sensor circuits on the PGDU PCB require a 10-30 V DC power supply in series with the sensor contacts. Refer to the hardware manual for additional details.
722 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0306 - Pre-ringing Enable to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk calls. This sets how a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of ringing occurs as soon as the trunks LED flashes. The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle. Without pre-ringing, the call starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs. this may cause a ring delay, depending on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 723
0300 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part B) 0307 - Setting the ISDN Line Operating Mode
0307 - Setting the ISDN Line Operating Mode Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the system PRI (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI (P/N 92000BRI**) Manual.
724 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0308 - Conference Circuit Setup to define the function of the Conference circuits on the CDTU PCBs. Each CDTU PCB has two Conference circuits (called blocks) which you can program for Conference or Speech Recording. Since the system accepts up to 8 CDTU PCBs, there are 16 programmable Conference blocks (32 Conference circuits). Conditions (A.) Speech Recording is currently not used. (B.) Any changes you make in Program 0303 take effect in about 30 seconds or after you reset the system.
PROGRAMMING 725
0300 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part B) 0309 - DSS Console Operating Mode
0309 - DSS Console Operating Mode Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Regular Mode available only. 384i Regular Mode and Hotel Mode available.
IN
Use Program 0309 - DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the systems DSS Consoles. The entry you make in this option applies to all the systems DSS Consoles. The available options are: Regular (Business) Mode (0) (384i Only) Hotel Mode (3) Conditions None
726 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A)
0401 Tenant Group Options (Part A)Tenant 0400- Extension Options (For Sorts Data
Groups)
Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available one Tenant Group. 384i Available four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 0401 - Tenant Group Options Part A to set up various options for each tenant group. You can set the options differently for each of the four tenant groups. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Tenant Group Options (Part A) Item Description Feature Range Default
Item 1
Manual Night Service Enable Allows/prevents tenant group members from activating Night Service. Not used. Incoming Call Ring No Answer Alarm If enabled, an incoming call that rings longer than the Ring No Answer Alarm interval (Program 0405 Item 7) will change to a unique ring cadence to indicate that the call has been ringing too long. If disabled, this will not occur. Automatic Hold Enable/disable Automatic Hold. If enabled, the system places a trunk call on Hold when the user presses another line key. If disabled, the system disconnects a trunk call when the user presses another line key. Barge In Tone Use this option to enable/disable the Barge In tone. If enabled, callers hear an alert tone when another extension barges into their conversation. If disabled, there is no alert tone. Automatic Handsfree Use this option to enable/disable Automatic Handsfree. If enabled, user can press a line or line appearance key without first lifting the handset or pressing SPK. If disabled, user must lift the handset or press SPK before placing a call. User may, however, preselect for an outside line.
"Night Service"
0 = Prevent 1 = Allow
1 (Allow)
Item 2 Item 3
0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
Item 4
"Hold"
0 = Enabled 1 = Disabled
1 (Disabled)
Item 5
"Barge In"
0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled
0 (Disabled)
Item 6
0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled
1 (Enabled)
PROGRAMMING 727
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A)
Tenant Group Options (Part A) Item Description Feature Range Default
Item 7
Handsfree Microphone Control Use this option to enable or disable a keysets Handsfree microphone. If enabled, a user can place a call Handsfree without lifting the handset. If disabled, a user can place a call Handsfree but must lift the handset to talk. Incoming Call Priority Use this option to determine if Intercom calls or trunk calls have answer priority when both are ringing simultaneously. Not used
0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled
1 (Enabled)
Item 8
"Line Preference"
Item 9
Item 10 Forced Intercom Ringing Use this option to enable or disable Forced Intercom Ringing. If enabled, incoming Intercom calls normally ring. If disabled, Intercom calls voiceannounce. Item 11 Off Hook Signaling Mode Use this option to select between ringing and voice-announced OffHook Signaling. Item 12 Ringing Line Preference for Intercom Calls Use this option to select between Idle and Ringing Line Preference for Intercom calls.
0 = Disabled (Voice-announce) 1 = Enabled (Intercom calls only) 0 = (Voiceannounced) 1 = Ringing 0 = Idle Line Preference 1 = Ringing Line Preference
0 (Voice-announce)
0 (Voice-announced) 1 (Ringing Line Preference) 0 (Idle Line Preference) in 384i prior to 3.05 1 (Ringing Line Preference) 0 (Idle Line Preference) in 384i prior to 3.05 1(Callback Automatic Answer enabled) 0 (disabled) in 384i prior to 3.05
"Line Preference"
Item 13 Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls Use this option to select between Idle and Ringing Line Preference for trunk calls.
"Line Preference"
Item 14 Callback Automatic Answer Use this option to enable or disable automatic answer for Callback. If enabled, extension automatically answers Callback ring when user lifts the handset. If disabled, use must press line appearance key to answer Callback.
"Callback"
728 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A)
Tenant Group Options (Part A) Item Description Feature Range Default
Item 15 Abbreviated Dialing DIAL Key Control Use this option to control the function of the extensions DIAL key when used with Abbreviated Dialing. The DIAL key can access either the Common or Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers. Items 16 and 17 Not used
"Abbreviated Dialing"
Item 18 SLT Answering Mode For a busy single line (500/2500 type) telephone, set the mode used to answer a camped-on trunk call. For ESL sets, enabling this option (1) allows the user to dial Service Code 154 for Voice Mail Conversation Record. Item 19 Busy Transfer Use this option to prevent or allow extensions to Transfer calls to busy extensions.
0 = Hookflash to pick up camped-on call 1 = Hookflash + Service Code 894 to answer camped-on call 0 = Prevent busy Transfer (calls transferred to busy extensions recall immediately) 1 = Allow busy Transfer 0 = BLF is on only when both line appearances are busy (if 0406 Item 6=1) 1 = BLF on when only one line appearance busy 0 = ARS Disabled 1 = ARS Enabled
"Transfer"
Item 20 BLF Control Set the conditions under which a Hotline, Reverse Voice Over or DSS Console key indicates that an extension is busy. Refer to the Reverse Voice Over feature for more information. Item 21 ARS Enable Use this option to enable or disable Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
0 (ARS disabled)
PROGRAMMING 729
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A)
Tenant Group Options (Part A) Item Description Feature Range Default
Item 22 Headset Busy Mode Set the conditions under which a headset extension is busy to incoming callers.
"Headset Operation"
0 = Headset extension is busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy 1 = Headset extension is busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy. 0 = Immediate Voice Mail Overflow enabled 1 = Delayed Voice Mail Overflow enabled
Item 23 DIL Call Waiting Use this option to set Voice Mail Overflow operation.
"Voice Mail"
Item 24 Not used Item 25 MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls Use this option to enable or diable MOH on Transfer. If enabled (0), a transferred caller hears MOH while their call rings the destination extension. If disabled (1), a transferred caller hears ringback while their call rings the destination extension. Items 26-27 Not used "Hotel/Motel" Refer to the Hotel/Motel Services Guide (P/N xoxoxoxo) 0 = Store and Forward 1 = Direct "Caller ID" 0 = Allow 1 = Block 0 (Store and Forward) 1 (Outgoing Caller ID Blocked) "Transfer" 0 = Enabled (Caller hears Music on Hold) 1 = Disabled (Caller hears ringback) 0 (Caller hears Music on Hold)
Item 28 (384i Only) Hotel Wake Up Call No Answer Procedure Item 29 SLT Trunk Dial (Store & Forward or Direct) Item 30 Block Outgoing Caller ID Allow (1) or prevent (0) the system from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call. If allowed (i.e., block enabled), the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code *67 before the user dialed digits. If prevented (i.e., block disabled), the system outdials the call just as it was dialed by the user.
730 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A)
Tenant Group Options (Part A) Item Description Feature Range Default
Item 31 VAU Fixed Message Item 32 Restriction for Incoming Answer Conditions None
TBD TBD
0 0
PROGRAMMING 731
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B)
0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B) Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available one Tenant Group. 384i Available four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 0402 - Tenant Group Options Part B to set up additional options for each tenant group. You can set the options differently for each of the four tenant groups. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Tenant Group Options (Part B) Item Description Feature Range Default
Item 1
Trunk Group Key Operating Mode Use this option to set the operating mode of the extensions trunk group keys. The keys can be for incoming access, outgoing access or both. CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part A) Use this option to set the operating mode of the extensions CONF (TRF) key. The keys can be for Call Transfer, Serial Calling or Flash. When selecting the Flash option (selection 2), refer also to Program 0114 Item 9. If programmed for Transfer (0), you must also enter 0 in Item 6 below. Night Mode Switch Operating Mode Use this option to set the function of the CPU Night Service mode switch sensors. The Night Service mode affects trunk inbound and outbound routing.
"Trunk Groups"
0 = Incoming and outgoing access 1 = Outgoing only 2 = Incoming only 0 = Transfer 1 = Series call 2 = Flash
Item 2
0 (Transfer)
Item 3
"Night Service"
0 = Not used 1 = Day Mode activated 2 = Night Mode activated 3 = Midnight Mode activated 4 = Rest Mode activated 0 = Normal Hold 1 = Exclusive Hold 2 = Park
0 (Not used)
Item 4
Hold Key Operating Mode Use this option to set the function of the keyset Hold key. The Hold key can activate normal Hold, Exclusive Hold or Park. Hotel Wake-Up Call Message
"Hold" "Park"
0 (Normal Hold)
Item 5
"Hotel/Motel"
732 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B)
Tenant Group Options (Part B) Item Description Feature Range Default
Item 6
CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part B) Use this option to assign the CONF (TRF) key for Transfer (0) or Conference (1). If set for Transfer (0), you must also enter 0 for Item 2 above. ARS Misdialed Number Handling If a user dials a call not programmed in ARS, this option determines if the system should route over trunk group 1 or play error tone.
"Conference" "Transfer"
0 = Transfer 1 = Conference
Item 7
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 733
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0403 - Selectable Display Messages
0403 - Selectable Display Messages Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
SA
Use Program 0403 - Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display Messages. Each tenant has 20 alphanumeric messages, up to 29 characters long. Use the following chart when programming messages.
Keys for Entering Messages Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press CHECK to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press CHECK to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press CHECK to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press CHECK to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press CHECK to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press CHECK to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press CHECK to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press CHECK to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press CHECK to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press CHECK to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *). Clear the text entry if you want to start over.
DSS10
CHECK
CLEAR Dialpad digits 0-9, # and *. Conditions None Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
734 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0403 - Selectable Display Messages
Default Setting
No Message
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IN MEETING UNTIL (Appended time) OUT UNTIL (Appended time) OUT-PLEASE CALL (9 appended digits) PLEASE CALL ME ON (9 appended digits) BUSY CALL AFTER (9 appended digits) OUT FOR LUNCH BACK (Appended time) BUSINESS TRIP UNTIL (Appended date) BUSINESS TRIP CALL (9 appended digits) GONE FOR THE DAY ON VACATION UNTIL (Appended date)
PROGRAMMING 735
Description
124i Available one Tenant Group. 384i Available four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 0404 - SMDR Options to set the SMDR report options for each tenant. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
SMDR Options Item Description Range Default
Item 1
Omit (Mask) Digits (MASK_DIGIT) The number of digits entered in this option do not print on the SMDR report. For example, if the entry is 10, the first 10 digits a user dials do not appear on the SMDR report. Minimum Number of SMDR Digits (MIN_DIGIT) Outgoing calls must be at least this number of digits for inclusion in the SMDR report. SMDR Printer Output Port (PRINT_PORT) This option specifies the SMDR printer output port (DCI port number). Minimum Call Duration (MIN_DUR) The duration of a call must be at least this interval to be included on the SMDR report. Minimum Ringing Time (MIN_RNG) A call must ring for at least this interval to be included on the SMDR report. SMDR Report Printing Options The SMDR report can include any combination of the following options. Item 1: Toll Restricted Call (Blocked) SMDR can include or exclude calls blocked by Toll Restriction Item 2: Extension Calls When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR can include all calls or just calls dialed using the PBX trunk access code. Item 3: Extension data call SMDR can include or exclude internal system data calls. Item 4: Daily Summary Enable this option to have the SMDR report provide a daily summary (at midnight every night).
0 (No limit)
Item 2
0 (No limit)
Item 3
0-288 (384i) or 0-72 (124i) (0 = No port assigned) 0 - 65535 seconds (0 = Calls of any duration print) 0-65535 seconds (0 = Calls ringing for any interval print) 0 (option disabled) or 1 (option enabled) 0 (option disabled) or 1 (option enabled) 0 (option disabled) or 1 (option enabled)
0 (Not assigned) 0 (Calls of any duration print) 0 (Calls of any duration print) 1 (option enabled) 1 (option enabled) 1 (option enabled)
Item 4
Item 5
Item 6
736 PROGRAMMING
Item 5: Weekly Summary Enable this option to have the SMDR report provide a weekly summary (every Saturday at midnight). Item 6: Monthly Summary Enable this option to have the SMDR report provide a monthly summary (at midnight on the last day of the month). Item 7: Telephone toll charge (with ARS only) Enable this option to have the SMDR report include toll charges. Item 8: Print Incoming Calls Enable this option (0) to have the SMDR report include incoming calls. If you disable this option (1), incoming calls will not print. Item 9: Print Name or Number Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR report include extension numbers. Disable this option (0) to have the SMDR report include extension names. Items 10-16: Not used Conditions None
1 (option enabled)
1 (option enabled)
PROGRAMMING 737
738 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0405 - System Timers (Part A)
0405 - System Timers (Part A) Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. Department Hunting No Answer Time (Item 80) requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available. Deparment Hunting No Answer Time (Item 80) requires system software 3.06.02 or higher.
IN
Use Program 0405 - System Timers (Part A) to set the value for the system timers. Each tenant group can have different timer settings. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Also see Program 0414 - System Timers (Part B) on page 764.
System Timers (Part A) Timer Description Range Default
Timer 1
Delayed Call Forwarding Time If activated at an extension, Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this interval. This also sets how long a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extensions mailbox. Exclusive Hold Recall Time A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this interval. Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for this interval. If not picked up, the call goes back on System Hold. Call Waiting Tone Timer This option sets the interval between Call Waiting tones. This timer also sets the interval between Off Hook Signaling alerts. Transfer Recall Time An unanswered transferred call recalls to the extension that initially transferred it after this interval. Callback Ring Duration Time Callback rings an extension for this interval. Ring No Answer Alarm Time If a trunk rings a keyset longer than this interval, the system changes the ring cadence. This indicates to the user that the call has been ringing too long. Busy Tone Time Meet Me Conference Time Once the user initiates a Meet Me Conference, the system waits this interval for the Paged party to join the call.
0-64800 seconds
10 seconds
Timer 2
0-64800 seconds
90 seconds
Timer 3
0-64800 seconds
30 seconds
Timer 4
0 - 64800 seconds
10 seconds
Timer 5
0 - 64800 seconds
30 seconds
Timer 6 Timer 7
15 seconds 60 seconds
Timer 8 Timer 9
15 seconds 90 seconds
PROGRAMMING 739
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0405 - System Timers (Part A)
System Timers (Part A) Timer Description Range Default
Timer 10
Intercom Interdigit Time When placing Intercom calls, extension users must dial each digit within this interval. Meet Me Paging Time When a user initiates a Meet Me Page, the paged party must join within this interval. Dial Tone Detection Pause Before Outdialing First Digit the system waits this interval before outdialing a keyset users first manually-dialed digit. Additional digits outdial without delay. Refer to Program 0901, Item 12. Door Box Answer Time A keyset user must answer Door Box chimes within this interval. Preselection Time When a keyset user preselects a line key, the system remembers the preselection for this interval. Ringdown Extension Timer A Ringdown extension automatically calls its programmed destination after this interval. DTMF Receiver Active Time For OPXs, analog telephones and certain analog trunks (like DISA), the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the port for this interval. The system releases the receiver after the interval expires. Page Announcement Duration This timer sets the maximum length of Page announcements. Congestion Tone Warning Tone Confirmation Tone Hold Recall Time A call on Hold recall the extension that placed it on Hold after this interval. This timer works with timer 27 (Hold Recall Callback). Alarm Duration This interval sets the duration or the alarm signal.
0-64800 seconds
10 seconds
Timer 11
0-64800 seconds
0 (disabled)
Timer 12 Timer 13
Timer 14
0-64800 seconds
30 seconds
Timer 15
0-64800 seconds
5 seconds
Timer 16
0-64800 seconds
5 seconds
Timer 17
0-64800 seconds
10 seconds
Timer 18
0-64800 seconds
120 seconds
Timer 23
0-64800 seconds
30 seconds
740 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0405 - System Timers (Part A)
System Timers (Part A) Timer Description Range Default
Timer 24
Long Conversation Alarm 1 The warning tone for long toll calls sounds after this interval. Long Conversation Alarm 2 After the initial long toll call warning tone, additional warning tones sound after this interval. Trunk Queuing Callback Time Trunk Queuing callback rings an extension for this interval. Hold Recall Callback Time A trunk recalling from Hold rings an extension for this interval. This timer works with timer 22 (Hold Recall Time). After this interval, the system invokes the Hold recall time again. Cycling between timer 22 and 27 continues until a user answers the call. Extension Dial Tone Time After getting Intercom dial tone, a keyset user has this interval to dial the first digit of the Intercom call. Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time The system cancels an extensions Callback or Trunk Queueing request after this interval. Trunk Interdigit Time The system waits for this timer to expire before placing the call in a talk state (call isnt timed until then, Voice Over and Barge-In are not allowed until after timer expires). DID Ring-No-Answer Time In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer Intercept, this interval sets the Ring-No-Answer time. This interval is how long a DID call rings the destination extension before rerouting to the intercept ring group. In systems with DID Camp-On, it also sets how long a DID call camps-on to a busy extension. Trunk Guard Time This interval is the guard time for trunks. After a user terminates a trunk call, the system denies other users access to the trunk for this time. LCD Display Hold DISA Dial Tone Time After answering a DISA trunk, the system waits this interval for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA password. If the caller fails to dial within this interval, the system drops the call.
0-64800 seconds
170 seconds
Timer 25
0-64800 seconds
180 seconds
Timer 26
0-64800 seconds
15 seconds
Timer 27
0 - 64800 seconds
30 seconds
Timer 28
0 - 64800 seconds
30 seconds
Timer 29
0 - 64800 seconds
64800 seconds
Timer 30
0-64800 seconds
Timer 31
0-64800 seconds
Timer 32
0-64800 seconds
1 second
Timer 33 Timer 34
5 seconds 10 seconds
PROGRAMMING 741
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0405 - System Timers (Part A)
System Timers (Part A) Timer Description Range Default
Timer 35
DISA No Answer Time A DISA caller can ring an extension for this interval before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer. After this interval expires, the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing (set in Program 1802). Repeat Redial Time This timer sets the interval between Repeat Redial attempts. Repeat Dial Enable Time After dialing the trunk call, Repeat Redial maintains the call after this interval. After this interval, the system terminates the call, waits the Repeat Redial Time (Timer 36) and tries again. Toll Restriction Override Time After dialing the Toll Restriction Override codes, the system removes Toll Restriction from the extension for this interval. Dial Number Preview Time Forced Release of Held Call Depending on Program 0901:20 entry, the system disconnects calls on Hold longer than this interval. Not used Not used DID Trunk Disconnect After Transfer ACK Supervison by WS Server Information Transmission from WS to ACD PC ACD No Answer Skip Time ACD Overflow Transfer Time ACD 1st Delay Announce Start ACD 2nd Delay Announce Start Dial Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS When ARS or an analog extension user accesses a trunk and dials an outside call, the system waits this interval before outdialing the first digit (For SLTs, Program 0401:29 must be set to 0). Conference Mode Call Back ACD Forced Disconnect Time Not used
0-64800 seconds
10 seconds
Timer 36
0-64800 seconds
60 seconds
Timer 37
0-64800 seconds
30 seconds
Timer 38
0-64800 seconds
10 seconds
Timer 39 Timer 40
Timer 41 Timer 42 Timer 43 Timer 44 Timer 45 Timer 46 Timer 47 Timer 48 Timer 49 Timer 50
0-64800 seconds
60 seconds
0-64800 seconds
3 seconds
0-64800 seconds
2 seconds
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0405 - System Timers (Part A)
System Timers (Part A) Timer Description Range Default
Timer 58
Refer to the ISDN PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**) 0-64800 seconds 10 seconds
Timer 59
Door Lock Cancel Time When a single line (2500 type) telephone user hook flashes while talking to a Door Box, the strike stays open for this interval. Dial Tone Detection Time If dial tone detection is enabled, the system will wait this interval for the telco to return dial tone. When the interval expires, the system assumes dial tone is not present. To disable this timer (and have the system wait continuously), enter 0. Barge In Tone Repeat Time After a user Barges In, the system repeats the Barge In Tone after this interval. Normally, you should enter 0 to disable this interval. DIL No Answer Recall Time A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer than this interval diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring Group (set in Program 0919). VAU No-Answer Time If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all VAU ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call to the extension will wait this interval for a VAU port to become free. Park and Page Repeat Timer If a Park and Page is not picked up within this interval, the Paging announcement repeats. Record Alert Tone Interval Time This timer sets the interval between Voice Mail Conversation Record alerts. Park Hold Time A call left parked longer than this interval recalls the extension that initially parked it. Not used ACD Enhance Guard Time (Computer Dialed Calls) Outgoing ACD Call Cut Through Delay Outgoing ACD Call Ringback Tone Detection Time Outgoing ACD Call Waiting for Answer Detection Conference Tone Interval
Timer 60
0-64800 seconds
3 (disabled)
Timer 61
0-64800 seconds
Timer 62
0-64800 seconds
Timer 63
0-64800 seconds
Timer 64
0-64800 seconds
18 seconds
Timer 65
0-64800 seconds
30 seconds
Timer 66
0-64800 seconds
30 seconds
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0405 - System Timers (Part A)
System Timers (Part A) Timer Description Range Default
DISA Conversation DISA Long Conversation Disconnect DISA Internal Paging Time This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this interval, the system terminates the DISA call. DISA External Paging Time This is the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer than this interval, the system terminates the DISA call. Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Long Conversation Cutoff for Outgoing DISA Answer Delay Timer Department Hunting No Answer Time Set how long a call will ring a Department Group extension before hunting occurs.
Timer 76
0-64800 seconds
30 seconds
Conditions None
744 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0405 - System Timers (Part A)
Telephone Programming Instructions
To enter data for Program 0405 (System Timers [Part A]): 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. 0405 + HOLD. Tenant No? 3. Enter the number of the Tenant Group you want to program. 4. HOLD Timer No? 5. Enter the number of the timer you want to program. 6. HOLD Timer_nn: 7. Enter data for the timer you selected + HOLD Refer to the chart above when entering data. Timer No? 8. Repeat from step 5 to program another timer. OR HOLD to return to the Tenant No? prompt.
PROGRAMMING 745
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A)
0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A) Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i
384i
IN
Use Program 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A) to set the Extension Class of Service (COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 1005 - Class of Service. The 384i has 15 Classes of Service in each of four Tenant Groups. The 124i has 10 Classes of Service. Refer to the following chart for a description of each COS option, its range and default setting. For additional Class of Service options, refer to 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B) on page 772.
Name
Flash for Single Line Telephones Manual Night Service Enable Long Conversation Alarm
This option...
Enables/disables Flash for single line (500/2500 type) telephones Enables/disables an extensions ability to use manual Night Service Switching Enables/disables the Warning Tone for Long Conversation (not for SLTs) Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Call Forwarding/DND Override Allows/prevents an extension busy on a call from receiving off-hook signaling Allows an extension to manually (0) or automatically (1) send off hook signals to a busy extension. Enables/disables an extensions ability to switch privacy at their extension Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extensions own Pickup Group (Service Code *#) Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group (Service Code 869)
Is used with...
"Flash" "Night Service"
"Warning Tone for Long Conversation" "Call Forwarding/DND Override" "Off-Hook Signaling" "Off-Hook Signaling"
(384i) (Enabled [1] prior to 3.05 - disabled [0] 3.05 or higher) (124i) 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
Call Forwarding/DND Override Off Hook Signaling Receive Automatic Off Hook Signaling
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
0 (Manual)
1 (Automatic)
Data Privacy
"Privacy"
1 (Enabled)
1 (Enabled)
1 (Enabled)
746 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A)
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406 Default Item
10
Name
Group Call Pickup for Specific Group
This option...
Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing a specific group (Service Code 868) Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Unscreened Transfer Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Do Not Disturb Enables/disables an extensions Intercom Abandoned Call display Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Meet Me Conference and Paging Enables/disables an extensions ability to leave Messages Waiting Enables/disables an extensions ability to initiate a Conference or Meet Me Conference Enables/disables an extensions ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference Enables/disables an extensions ability to store Abbreviated Dialing numbers Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Common Abbreviated Dialing Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Group Abbreviated Dialing Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Department Group Step Calling Enables/disables an extensions ability to make an External Page Enables/disables an extensions ability to activate Call Forwarding with Both Ringing (Service Code *27)
Is used with...
"Group Call Pickup"
1 (Enabled)
11
Unscreened Transfer
"Transfer"
1 (Enabled)
12 13
Do Not Disturb Intercom Abandoned Call Display Meet Me Conference and Paging Message Waiting
"Do Not Disturb" "Intercom Abandoned Call Display" "Meet Me Conference Meet Me Paging" "Message Waiting"
1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
14
1 (Enabled)
15
1 (Enabled)
16
Conference
"Conference Meet Me Conference" "Voice Call Conference" "Abbreviated Dialing "Abbreviated Dialing" "Abbreviated Dialing" "Department Group Step Calling" "Paging, External" "Call Forwarding"
1 (Enabled)
17
Voice Call Conference Storing Abbreviated Dialing Entries Common Abbreviated Dialing Group Abbreviated Dialing Department Group Step Calling External Paging Call Forwarding (Both Ringing)
1 (Enabled)
18
1 (Enabled)
19
1 (Enabled)
20
1 (Enabled)
21
1 (Enabled)
22 23
1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
PROGRAMMING 747
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A)
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406 Default Item
24
Name
Extension Camp On /Callback Trunk Queuing (Camp On) Call Forwarding with Follow Me Alarm DSS Console Alternate Answer Long Toll Call Alert Call Transfer Call Forward When Busy Call Forwarding When Unanswered
This option...
Enables/disables an extensions ability to dial Service Code 2 for a Camp On or Callback Enable/disable an extensions ability to Camp On to a busy trunk Enables/disables an extensions ability to initiate Call Forwarding with Follow Me Enables/disables an extensions ability to set an alarm Enables/disables an extensions ability to use DSS Console Alternate Answer TBD TBD Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Call Forward When Busy (Service Code *22) Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Call Forward When Unanswered (Service Code *26) Enables/disables Toll Restriction Override (Service Code 875) Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Transfer Without Holding Enables/disables an extensions ability to initiate a Group Hold Enables/disables an extensions ability to pick up a call on Group Hold Enables/disables the displaying of a trunks name/number when the user seizes the trunk Enables/disables the displaying of a trunks name/number when the trunk is ringing
Is used with...
"Call Waiting / Camp On Callback" "Trunk Queuing"
1 (Enabled)
25
1 (Enabled)
26
"Call Forwarding with Follow Me" "Alarm" "Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console" TBD TBD "Call Forwarding"
1 (Enabled)
27 28
1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
29 30 31
32
"Call Forwarding"
1 (Enabled)
33 34
Toll Restriction Override Transfer Without Holding Group Hold Initiate Group Hold Answer Trunk Name Display, Seizing Trunk Name Display, Incoming
1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled)
35 36
"Hold" "Hold"
1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
37
"Central Office Calls, Placing" "Name Storing" "Central Office Calls, Answering" "Name Storing"
1 (Enabled)
38
1 (Enabled)
748 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A)
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406 Default Item
39
Name
Extension Name Display, Answer
This option...
Enables/disables the displaying of the incoming Intercom callers name/number after answer Enables/disables the pre-answer display of the incoming Intercom callers name and number Enables/disables Ringdown Extension for extensions with this COS Enables/disables an extensions incoming Transfer pre-answer display
Is used with...
"Intercom" "Name Storing"
1 (Enabled)
40
1 (Enabled)
41
0 (Disabled)
42
1 (Enabled)
43 44 Barge In Mode
Not used Enables the extensions Barge In speech mode (0) or Monitor mode (1). Enable/disable an extensions ability to change the Music on Hold tone Enable/disable an extensions Call Timer Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Memo Dial Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Last Number Redial Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Save Number Dial Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Dial Number Preview Enable/disable an extensions Group Call Pickup display Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Internal Paging Enable/disable an extensions ability to turn Background Music on and off (Service Code 825) "Barge In" 0 (Speech)
45
Changing the Music on Hold Tone Call Timer Memo Dial Last Number Redial
"Music on Hold"
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
46 47 48
"Call Timer" "Memo Dial" "Last Number Redial" "Save Number Dial" "Dial Number Preview" "Group Call Pickup" "Paging, Internal" "Background Music"
49 50
Save Number Redial Dial Number Preview Group Call Pickup Information Display Internal Paging Background Music
1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
51 52 53
PROGRAMMING 749
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A)
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406 Default Item
54 55
Name
Room Monitor, Initiating Extension Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored Dial Pad Confirmation Tone Continued Dialing ISDN Connected Line Identification Selectable Ring Tone Selection
This option...
Enable/disable an extensions ability to initiate Room Monitor Enable/disable an extensions ability to be monitored Allow/prevent an extension from enabling/disabling the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone Enable/disable an extensions ability to use Continued Dialing
Is used with...
"Room Monitor" "Room Monitor"
0 (Disabled) 0 (Disabled)
56
0 (Prevented)
57 58 59
1 (Enabled)
Refer to the ISDN PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**) Enable/disable an extensions ability to change the incoming ring tones Not used "Selectable Ring Tones" 1 (Enabled)
Enable/disable Intercom calling for the extension Enable/disable trunk calling for the extension Enable/disable an extensions ability to pick up a call ringing into a Pickup Group (Service Codes *# and 868) Enable/disable an extensions ability to call a department number Enables/disables Barge In at initiating extension Blocks/allows Barge In at the receiving extension Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Secretary Call Allows/prevents an extension from enabling Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming Intercom calls
64
Department Calling
"Department Calling" "Barge In" "Barge In" "Secretary Call" "Handsfree Answerback / Forced Intercom Ringing"
1 (Enabled)
65 66 67 68
Barge In, Initiate Barge In, Receive Secretary Call Setting Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing
750 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A)
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406 Default Item
69
Name
Programmable Function Key Programming DCI Auto Answer
This option...
Enables/disables an extensions ability to program their function keys Enables/disables an extensions ability to set the DCI Auto Answer Mode (Service Code 883) Enables/disables an extensions ability to set the Time and Date and an extensions Class of Service via Service Code 177. Enables/disables an extensions ability to force Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls Enables/disables and extensions ability to use Microphone Cutoff Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Repeat Redial Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Selectable Display Messaging Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Automatic On Hook Transfer Not used
Is used with...
"Programmable Function Keys" "Data Communications" "Time and Date" "Class of Service"
1 (Enabled)
70
1 (Enabled)
71
1 (Enabled)
72
"Handsfree Answerback / Forced Intercom Ringing" "Microphone Cutoff" "Repeat Redial" "Selectable Display Messaging" "Transfer"
1 (Enabled)
73
1 (Enabled)
74 75
1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
76
1 (Enabled)
77-79 80 81,82 83 84 ISDN Calling Party Subaddress (384i prior to 3.07.10 and 124i) Account Codes (384i 3.07.10 or higher and 124i Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher) Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert ISDN Calling Party Number
Refer to the ISDN PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**) Not used Refer to the ISDN PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**) Enables/disables an extensions ability to enter Account Codes Enables/disables operator alert when an extension improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll Restriction. "Account Codes" 0 (Disabled)
84
0 (Disabled)
PROGRAMMING 751
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A)
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406 Default Item
85 86
Name
Extension Name Checking Selectable Ring Tones
This option...
Enables/disables an extensions ability to program its name Enables/disables an extensions ability to check the Selectable Ring Tones
Is used with...
"Name Storing" "Selectable Ring Tones"
1 (Enabled) 1 (Enabled)
87-90 91 92 93 94 95 Operator Transfer After Hold Callback Directed Call Pickup E-Hold (2nd) E-Hold Answer (2nd) Transfer Callback Display
Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Enables/disables the Transfer Callback display. If enabled, second line of display shows recall source. Enables/disables extensions ability to record, erase and listen to VAU messages Enables/disables extensions ability to dial 4 or Service Code 111 and listen to the General Message Enables/disables extensions ability to dial Service Code 112 and record, listen to or erase the General Message Enables/disables extensions ability to dial Service Code *47 to record, listen to or erase a Personal Greeting. This option also affects Park and Page. Enables/disables an extensions ability to initiate Voice Over Enables/disables an extensions ability to receive Voice Over Not used "Transfer" 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
96
VAU Record
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
97
1 (Enabled)
98
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
99
Personal Greeting
0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
1 (Enabled) 0 (Disabled)
752 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A)
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406 Default Item
105 106 107 108 109 110 111 Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming) Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing) Hotel DND Set Other Phone Hotel Wake Up Call - Other Phone Hotel Set Call Restriction Between Rooms Hotel Set Toll Restriction of Other Rooms Hotel Check-in Operation Hotel Check-out Operation Hotel Clean Room Set - Own Phone Hotel Clean Room Set - Other Phone Hotel Room Status Printer Control Hotel DND Set Own Phone Hotel Wake Up Call - Own Phone Forced Trunk Disconnect Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect Not used Caller ID Display Enables/disables the Caller ID display at an extension "Caller ID" 1 (Enabled) "Forced Trunk Disconnect" 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
Name
Group Listen
This option...
Enables/disables an extensions ability to use Group Listen
Is used with...
"Group Listen"
0 (Disabled)
Not used Not used Not used Refer to the Hotel/Motel Guide (P/N 92000HMT**)
112
121,122 123
PROGRAMMING 753
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A)
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406 Default Item
124
Name
Edit Caller ID
This option...
Enables/disables an extensions ability to edit the stored Caller ID information Enables/disables Automatic Handsfree for incoming calls on line/loop keys Enables/disables an extensions ability to dial the Universal Answer code (#0)
Is used with...
"Caller ID"
1 (Enabled)
125
126
Universal Answer
"Universal Answer"
0 (Disabled)
Not used Enables/disables an extensions ability to set up Call Forwarding Off-Premise for their phone "Call Forwarding, Off-Premise" 0 (Disabled)
Conditions None
754 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A)
Telephone Programming Instructions
To enter data for Program 0406 (Class of Service Options [Part B]): 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. 0406 + HOLD Tenant No? 3. Enter the number of the Tenant Group you want to program (1-4). 4. HOLD Class No? 5. Enter the number of the Class of Service (1-15) you want to program. 6. HOLD Item No? 7. Enter the COS item number you want to program. 8. HOLD Item_nnn: 9. Enter the data for the item selected + HOLD Refer to the chart above. Item No? 10. Repeat from step 6 to program another timer. OR HOLD to return to the Class No? prompt.
PROGRAMMING 755
Description
124i Available one Tenant Group. This program does not exist in Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Use Program 3001 instead. 384i Available four Tenant Groups. This program does not exist in system software 3.07.10 or higher. Use Program 3001 instead.
IN
Use Program 0407 - Account Codes to set the Account Code mode. In 124i, this option sets the Account Code mode for the entire system. In 384i, you can have a different Account Code mode for each of the four Tenant Groups. Account Codes can be disabled (0), enabled but not required (1) or required (2). Valid Account Codes are from 1-8 digits, using 0-9 and #. Conditions None
756 PROGRAMMING
Description
These programs are currently not available.
PROGRAMMING 757
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0410 - Extension (Department) Group Options
0410 - Extension (Department) Group Options Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available eight Department Groups. Item 4 requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available 32 Department Groups in each of four Tenant Groups. Item 4 requires system software 3.06.02.
IN
Use Program 0410 - Extension (Department) Group Options to set the options for Department Calling. You can set the calling sequence and the call routing pattern. Make an assignment for each programmed department in each Tenant Group. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Department Group Options Item Description Range Default
Department Calling Cycle Use this option to set the call routing for Department Calling. Routing can be either circular (cycles to all phones in group) or priority (cycles to highest priority extensions first). Department Routing When Busy Use this option to set how the system routes an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member. Intercom callers to the extension can either hear busy or route to the first available department number. This only occurs for calls to the extension directly, not the department number. Not used Hunt Type Set the type of hunting for each Extension (Department) Group: 0 = Hunting when busy 1 = Hunting when not answered 2 = Hunting when busy or not answered 3 = Simultaneous ringing (all members)
0 (Priority Routing)
0 (Intercom caller to busy department member hears busy) 1 (Intercom callers to busy department member routes to idle member)
3 4
0-3
Conditions None
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0410 - Extension (Department) Group Options
STA Group No? Enter the number of the Department Group you want to program (1-32). HOLD Item No? Enter the Item you want to program (1 or 2) + HOLD Item_nn: Enter the data for the item selected + HOLD Item No? Repeat from step 6 to program another item. OR HOLD to return to the STA Group No? prompt.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
PROGRAMMING 759
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0411 0411 Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Not available.
760 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0412 - DISA and Tie Trunk Class of Service Options
0412 - DISA and Tie Trunk Class of Service Options Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available with EXCPRU only. 10 DISA Classes of Service (1-10). 384i Available. 15 Classes of Service (1-15) in each of four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 0412 - DISA and Tie Trunk Class of Service to enable/disable DISA Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to DISA users in Program 1801. Assign tie line Classes of Service in 2302. In 384i, there are up to 15 DISA Classes of Service in each of the four Tenant Groups. In 124i, there are up to 10 DISA Classes of Service. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
DISA and Tie Trunk Class of Service Options Item Description Range Default
Item 1
First Digit Absorption For tie lines, enable or disable the ability to absorb (ignore) the first incoming digit. Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with 3and 4-digit tie line service. This option does not apply to DISA. Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk callers ability to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection (ARS). Trunk Group Access This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk callers ability to access trunk groups for outside calls (Service Code 804). Common Abbreviated Dialing This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk callers ability to use the systems Common Abbreviated Dialing. Operator Calling This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk callers ability to dial 0 for the telephone system operator. Internal Paging This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk callers ability to use the telephone systems Internal Paging. External Paging This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk callers ability to use the telephone systems External Paging.
0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
Item 2
0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
Item 3
0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
Item 4
0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
Item 5
0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
Item 6
0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
Item 7
0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
PROGRAMMING 761
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0412 - DISA and Tie Trunk Class of Service Options
DISA and Tie Trunk Class of Service Options Item Description Range Default
Item 8
Direct Trunk Access This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk callers ability to use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code #9). Forced Trunk Disconnect This option enables or disables a tie trunk callers ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service Code *3). This option is not available to DISA callers. Not used
0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
Item 9
0 (disabled) or 1 (enabled)
0 (disabled)
762 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0413 - Hotel Mode Printer Port
0413 - Hotel Mode Printer Port Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
PROGRAMMING 763
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0414 - System Timers (Part B)
0414 - System Timers (Part B) Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. Refer to the required system software levels for each item. 384i Available four Tenant Groups. Refer to the required system software levels for each item.
IN
Use Program 0414 - System Timers (Part B) to set the value for additional system timers. In 384i, each tenant group can have different timer settings. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Also refer to Program 0405 - System Timers (Part A) on page 739.
System Timers (Part B) Timer Description Range Default
Not used Not used DISA Busy Tone Interval If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program 1803 Item 2 = 0), the system plays busy tone for this interval before disconnecting. VAU ACD Overflow Message Delay Time (T1) Refer to the ACD Manual P/N 92000ACD**. This option is also used when setting up an overflow message for DISA calls to Department Group pilot numbers (with VAU installed). Call Coverage Delay Interval Multiple Directory Number/Call Coverage Keys set for Delayed Ringing (see Program 1028) ring the covering extension after this interval. Traffic Management Report Wait Time Only calls longer than this interval are included in the TMS report. To include all calls regardless of duration, enter 0. Requires 384i system software 3.04 or higher. ACD Wrapup Time Auto Turn-off An ACD Agents phone is temporarily busied out so they can work uninterrupted for the duration of this timer. Requires 384i system software 3.07.10 or higher or 124i Base and EXCPRI 4.02 or higher. Alarm Ring Timer Use this option to set the duration of the E911 Alarm Ring Time. If set for 0, the E911 Alarm rings for 60 seconds and then stops. Requires 384i system software 3.07.10 or higher or 124i Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Not used 0-64800 seconds 5 seconds
Timer 4
0-64899 seconds
20 seconds
Timer 5
0-64800 seconds
10 seconds
Timer 6
0-64800 seconds
(384i) 0 (124i) 60
Timer 7
0-64800 seconds
Timer 8
0-64800 seconds
0 (60 seconds)
764 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0414 - System Timers (Part B)
10 Voice Mail/VAU ACD Announcement Repeat Time This option is used to set the Repeat Time for the ACD Announcement. This allows different timers for answering an ACD call with the first announcement and another timer for the repeat announcement. Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**). Requires 384i 3.07.24 or higher or 124i Base or EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Forced Account Code Interdigit Time The system waits this interval for a user to enter a Forced Account Code. Not used 0-64800 seconds 60 seconds
11
0-64800 seconds
3 (3 seconds)
Timers 12-80
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 765
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0415 - Repeat Redial Count
0415 - Repeat Redial Count Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available separate entry for each Tenant Group.
IN
Use Program 0415 - Repeat Redial Count to set how many a Repeat Redial will automatically repeat if the call does not go through. In 384i, you can make a separate entry for each of the four Tenant Groups. The range is 0-255. Conditions None
766 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0416 - Voice Mail Integration Options
0416 - Voice Mail Integration Options Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available separate entries for each Tenant Group.
IN
Use Program 0416, Voice Mail Integration to customize certain Voice Mail integration options. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting. In 384i, you can make separate entires for each of the four Tenant Groups.
Voice Mail Integration Options Item Description Range Default
Voice Mail Call Screening Enable/disable the systems ability to process the Call Screening commands (1 + extension number) sent from the Voice Mail. You should normally enable this option to allow for Voice Mail Call Screening. Disable this option if your system has been modified so that extensions begin with the digit 1 (e.g., 101, 102, etc.). Also see the "Flexible System Numbering" feature. Park and Page Enable/disable the systems ability to process the Voice Mails Park and Page (*) commands. You should normally enable this option. Message Wait Enable/disable the systems ability to process the Voice Mails Message Wait (#) commands. You should normally enable this option. In enabled, be sure that the programmed Message Notification strings dont contain the code #9 for trunk access.
1 (Screening enabled)
0 (Park and Page disabled) 1 (Park and Page enabled) 0 (Message Wait disabled) 1 (Message Wait enabled)
Conditions Make sure the Voice Mail system programming matches the options you set in this program.
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0416 - Voice Mail Integration Options
Item 1 = Call Screening, Item 2 = Park and Page and Item 3 = Message Waiting. For the item selected, enter 1 to enable the option; 0 to disable the option. HOLD Item No? Return to step 5 and select another item (1-3). OR HOLD + Return to step 3 and select another Tenant Group (1-4). OR HOLD + HOLD to exit.
6. 7. 8.
768 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0417 - Traffic Management Report Options
0417 - Traffic Management Report Options Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available requires system software 3.04.
IN
Use Program 0417 - Traffic Management Report Options to set various options for the Traffic Management Report. You make separate entries for each Tenant Group. The Traffic Managment Report report includes call data and Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) data. Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**) for the specifics on ACD.
Traffic Management Report Options Item Description Range Default
TMS Report Printer Output Port Enter the DCI Software Port (1-144, 145-288) to which the TMS printer is connected.
TMS Report Print Range Specify which extensions and trunks you want to include in each of the TMS reports: From (EXT) To (EXT) From (TRK) To (TRK) Designate the first extension in the print range (1-256) Designate the last extension in the print range (1-256) Designate the first trunk in the print range (1-128) Designate the last trunk in the print range (1-128) 1-256 0 = no selection 1-256 0 = no selection 1-128 0 = no selection 1-128 0 = no selection 0 (no manual printing) 1 (manual printing enabled) 0 (no selection) 0 (no selection) 0 (no selection) 0 (no selection) 0
TMS Report Manual Printing (Telephone programming only) Enter 1 for this option if you want the TMS report range specified in Item 2 above to immdiately print to the printer specified in 0417 Item 1. Immediate printing is available only if 0417 Item 4 Mode=0 (manual mode).
TMS Report Print Time Setup Use this option to specify the print mode for the TMS report.
PROGRAMMING 769
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0417 - Traffic Management Report Options
Traffic Management Report Options Item Description Range Default
4 (Contd)
Mode Entry 0 Manual aprinting enabled. Manual printing will occur when requested in 0417 Item 3. Entry 1 Automatic printing (at a preset time) enabled for trunk data only. The TMS report will include only sections 2 and 5. Use the prompts Hour and MIN below to select the automatic print time. The TMS data clears after the report prints. Entry 2 Automatic printing (at a preset time) enabled for trunk and ACD data only. The TMS report will provide data in sections 2-5 only. Use the prompts Hour and MIN below to select the automatic print time. The TMS data clears after the report prints. Entry 3 Automatic printing (at a preset time) enabled for all data. Use the prompts Hour and MIN below to select the automatic print time. The TMS data clears after the report prints. Hour This option selects the start hour (1-23) for automatic printing. Use a 24-hour clock (e.g., 13=1:00 PM). MIN This option selects the start minute (1-59) for the hour selected in the previous option.
Conditions None
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0417 - Traffic Management Report Options
2. Return to step 4 in Part 1 to select another item. OR HOLD + Return to step 3 in Part 1 to select another Tenant Group. OR HOLD + HOLD to exit.
Part 3 To enter data for Item 2 (TMS Report Print Range): 1. Enter the first extension in the print range (1-256) + HOLD To (EXT) 2. Enter the last extension in the print range (1-256) + HOLD From (TRK) 3. Enter the first trunk in the print range (1-128) + HOLD To (TRK) 4. Enter the last extension in the print range + HOLD 5. Return to step 4 in Part 1 to select another item. OR HOLD + Return to step 3 in Part 1 to select another Tenant Group. OR HOLD + HOLD to exit. Part 4 To enter data for Item 3 (TMS Report Manual Printing): 1. Enter 1 to enable manual printing + HOLD OR Enter 0 to skip to the next step without printing + HOLD 2. Return to step 4 in Part 1 to select another item. OR HOLD + Return to step 3 in Part 1 to select another Tenant Group. OR HOLD + HOLD to exit. Part 5: To enter data for Item 4: (TMS Report Print Time Setup) 1. Enter the Print Time Setup mode (0-3) + HOLD If you entered mode 0, skip to step 4. Hour: 2. Enter the print start hour (1-23) + HOLD MIN: 3. Enter the print start minute (1-59) + HOLD 4. Return to step 4 in Part 1 to select another item. OR HOLD + Return to step 3 in Part 1 to select another Tenant Group. OR HOLD + HOLD to exit.
PROGRAMMING 771
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B)
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B) Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available refer to the required system software levels for each item. 384i Available refer to the required system software levels for each item.
IN
Use Program 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B) to set the Extension Class of Service (COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 1005 - Class of Service. The 384i has 15 Classes of Service in each of four Tenant Groups. The 124i has 10 Classes of Service. Refer to the following chart for a description of each COS option, its range and default setting. For additional Class of Service options, refer to 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A) on page 746.
Name
(384i 3.05.10 or higher or 124i Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18 or higher) Manual Tandem Trunking (384i 3.05.10 or higher or 124i Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18 or higher) Tandem Trunking on Hang up (384i 3.05 or higher or 124i Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18 or higher) VAU Reminder Messages (384i 3.05 or 124i EXCPRU 4.02 or higher ACD Queue Status Display Not used
This option...
Allows an extension user to set up a tandem call by pressing their CONF (TRF) key.
Is used with...
"Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)"
0 (Disabled)
Allows an extension user to set up a tandem call automatically when they hang up.
0 (Disabled)
Enables/disables the Call Forwarding, Message Waiting and Voice Mail reminder messages.
0 (Disabled)
Enables/disables the Queue Status Display for the ACD Group Supervisors COS. Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**) for additional information.
0 (Disabled)
772 PROGRAMMING
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B)
Class of Service Options (Part B), Program 0419 Default Item
6
Name
(384i 3.06.06) Enhanced Dial Buffering
This option...
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) Enhanced Dial Buffering. If disabled, the system uses the standard dial buffering. This option must be enabled in order for the operator to use service codes 57-60 in Program 0514.
Is used with...
"Park"
(384i 3.07.10 or higher or 124i EXCPRU 4.02 or higher ACD Supervisors Position Enhancement (384i 3.07.10 or higher or 124i Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher) Display 911 Dialed Station Name and Number (384i 3.07.10 or higher or higher or 124i Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher) E911 Alarm Ring (384i 3.07.10 or higher or higher or 124i Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher) Clear E911 Alarm Ring (384i 3.07.12 or higher or higher or 124i Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher) TAPI Auto Idle Mode (Driver ID) (384i 3.07.24 or higher) DID Off Hook Ringing
0 (Disabled)
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to display the name and number of the extension that activated E911 service. (If disabled, option 9 below is also disabled.)
"E911 Compatibility"
0 (Disabled)
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension s ability to play tne E911 alarm ring. (This can only occur if option 8 above is also enabled.) If enabled (1), an extension user can dial 886 to turn off the E911 alarm ring. If disabled, an extension user cannot dial 886.
"E911 Compatiblity"
0 (Disabled)
10
"E911 Compatibility"
0 (Disabled)
11
Enter 0 for this option if you are installing the Nitsuko TAPI Service Provider 1.02.02 driver. Enter 1 for this option if you are installing the Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver. Enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions Off Hook Signaling for incoming DID calls.
"TAPI Compatibility"
12
PROGRAMMING 773
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B)
Class of Service Options (Part B), Program 0419 Default Item
13
Name
(384i 3.07.24 or higher) Block Manual Off Hook Signaling (384i 3.07.24 or higher) Block Camp On (384i 3.07.24 or higher) DID Call Waiting Not used (384i 3.07.31 or higher) Allow COS to be Changed Not used Conditions None
This option...
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to block off hook signals manuall sent from a co-worker. Enable (1) or disable (0) an extensions ability to block callers from dialing 2 to Camp On. Enable (1) or disable (0) DID Call Waiting for an extension.
Is used with...
"Off Hook Signaling"
14
15
16-18 19
Enable (1) or disable (0) the ability of an extensions COS to be changed via Service Code 177.
"Class of Service"
16-64
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B)
10. Repeat from step 6 to program another timer. OR HOLD to return to the Class No? prompt.
PROGRAMMING 775
Description
124i Available requires Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Available requires system software 3.07.14 or higher.
IN
Use Program 0420 - E911 Options to set various E911 options. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Tenant Group Options (Part A) Item Description Feature Range Default
Item 1
Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access If enabled (1),an extension user can dial 911 without first dialing a trunk access code or pressing a line key. If disabled (0), an extension user must dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9) or press a line key before dialing 911.
"E911 Compatibility"
Conditions None
776 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available in Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Setting up single digit Service Codes in Program 0501 requires Base 3.04, EXCPRU 3.04 or higher. 384i Available. Each Tenant Group can have unique system numbering. Setting up single digit Service Codes in Program 0501 available in all software levels.
IN
Use Program 0501 - System Numbering to set the systems internal (Intercom) numbering plan. The numbering plan includes the digits an extension user must dial to access features and other extensions. If the default numbering plan does not meet the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site.
CAUTION
Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation. Make sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering plan before proceeding. If you must change the standard numbering, use the table beginning on page 779 to keep careful and accurate records of your changes. Before changing your numbering plan, make a backup copy of your systems data. Use the extra disk shipped with your system to make the backup copy. Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps: 1. Enter the digits you want to change. 2. Specify the length of the code you select to change. 3. Assign a function to the code selected. Step 1: Enter the digit(s) you want to change You can make either single or two digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in the table beginning on page 779, the nX rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The remaining rows (e.g., 11, 12, etc.) are for two digit codes. Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with that digit. For exam ple, entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6. The entries you make in step 2 and step 3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6. (For example, if you enter 3 in step 2 the entries affected would be 600-699. If you enter 4 in step 2 below, the entries affected would be 6000-6999.) Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials. For example, entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning with 60. In the default program, only * and # use two-digit codes. All the other codes are single digit. If you enter a two digit code between 0 and 9, be sure to make separate entries for all the other two digit codes within the range as well. This is because in the default program all the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are undefined. In the PC Program, the nX entry is for single digit codes. For example, 6X is for all codes be tween 600 and 699. Step 2: Specify the length of the code you want to change After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the system how many digits comprise the code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the table beginning on page 779. In the default program, all codes from 100-899 are three digits long. Codes beginning with 9 or 0 are one digit long. Codes beginning with * and # and 2-4 digits long, depending on the function. If you are programming two digit codes in the PC Program, make sure the nX entry for Number of Digits Required is the maximum allowed by any of the two digit codes in the range. This is why the default Number of Digits Required entry for #X is four digits long. Even though #1-#9, 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0 PROGRAMMING 777
Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your system operates. Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from 100-399. In order to make extension numbers correspond to room numbers, you should: - Change the Dial Type for the digit 1 from 1 (Service Code) to 2 (extension number). - Change the Dial Type for the digit 7 from 3 (not used) to 1 (Service Code). - In Program 0502, reassign extension numbers on each floor from 100 to 399). - In Program 0514, reassign the Service Codes from the 100 series (e.g., 116) to the 700 series (e.g., 716). (Other applications might also require you to change entries in Program 0511.) - Check Program 0512 to be sure that the Single Digit Service Code 04 (digit 7) does not affect any post dial Service Codes codes in 0514. (Unless you changed codes from their default assignments, this would not be the case.) - In Program 0416, disable (0) Item 1. This disables Voice Mail Call Screening. If you left screening enabled, Voice Mail ports could call the wrong extensions. For example, a Voice Mail port trying to call screen extension 130 would outdial 1130. This would call extension 113 instead. Extension numbers now will correspond to room numbers, and all the Service Codes in the 100 series will be in the 700 series. If you are programming two digit codes in the PC Program, make sure the Dial Type entry for nX is F. This "unlocks" the two digit entries. This step is not necessary when using the Telephone Program (which automatically enters 15).
For default settings, refer to the chart beginning on page 779. Conditions None
778 PROGRAMMING
7=Operator Access, 8=Alternate Trunk Access, 0, 3-5=Not Used Dialed Number 1X 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 1* 1# Number of Digits Required Default 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New Dial Type Default 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
2X 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 20 2* 2#
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PROGRAMMING 779
7=Operator Access, 8=Alternate Trunk Access, 0, 3-5=Not Used Dialed Number 3X 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 3* 3# Number of Digits Required Default 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New Dial Type Default 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
4X 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 40 4* 4#
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
780 PROGRAMMING
7=Operator Access, 8=Alternate Trunk Access, 0, 3-5=Not Used Dialed Number 5X 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 50 5* 5# Number of Digits Required Default 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New Dial Type Default 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
6X 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 60 6* 6#
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PROGRAMMING 781
7=Operator Access, 8=Alternate Trunk Access, 0, 3-5=Not Used Dialed Number 7X 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 70 7* 7# Number of Digits Required Default 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New Dial Type Default 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
8X 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 80 8* 8#
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
782 PROGRAMMING
7=Operator Access, 8=Alternate Trunk Access, 0, 3-5=Not Used Dialed Number 9X 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 90 9* 9# Number of Digits Required Default 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New Dial Type Default 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
0X 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 00 0* 0#
7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PROGRAMMING 783
7=Operator Access, 8=Alternate Trunk Access, 0, 3-5=Not Used Dialed Number *X *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *0 ** *# Number of Digits Required Default 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New Dial Type Default 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 New
#X #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #0 #* ##
4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2
F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
784 PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING 785
Description
124i Available extension ports are 172; virtual extension ports are 73-96. 384i Available extension ports are 1256; virtual extension ports are 257-384.
IN
Use Program 0502 - Extension Numbers and Names to set the extension/virtual extension numbers and names. This lets an employee move to a new location (port) and retain the same extension number and name. Use the following chart when programming names (up to 10 digits). Press DND to toggle between upper and lower case letters.
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *). Clear the text entry if you want to start over. Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
DSS10
CHECK
786 PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING 787
Description
124i Available 72 DCI software ports. 384i Available 288 DCI software ports. System software 3.05 adds default assignments for first three 3DCI ports.
IN
Use Program 0503 - DCI Extension Number to assign extension numbers to DCI (Data Communications Interface) software ports. System users place data calls to DCIs by dialing the DCI extension numbers (not the software port numbers). Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 600). If you want to use an extension number in the normal extension number range (e.g., 301-556 in 384i), first remove the default assignment. For example, to use extension number 325 for a DCI software port, first give extension port 025 a different extension number. Notes:
In 384i, DCI Module software ports are 1-144. 3-DCI software ports are 145-288. For more information on software ports, refer to Program 0005. In 124i, DCI Module software ports (1-72) are the same as the extension ports to which they are connected.
Conditions None
788 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 2 ACI Modules providing 6 software ports which auto-ID in order of installation. 384i Available 64 ACI Modules providing 192 software ports.
IN
Use Program 0504 - ACI Extension Number to assign extension numbers to ACI (Analog Communications Interface) software ports. System users can page through ACIs by dialing the ACI extension numbers (not the software port numbers). Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 600). If you want to use an extension number in the normal extension number range (e.g., 301-556 in 384i), first remove the default assignment. For example, to use extension number 325 for an ACI software port, first give extension port 025 a different extension number. Notes:
In 384i, ACI software ports are 1-192. The first ACI installed has software ports 1-3; the second ACI has software ports 4-6, etc. For more information on software ports, refer to Program 0005. In 124i, ACI software ports are 1-6 and auto-ID according the order of installation of the ACI Modules.
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 789
0500 - System Numbering 0505 0505 - (Contd) Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Not available.
790 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available eight groups. 384i Available each Tenant Group has 32 groups.
IN
Use Program 0506 Department Calling Group Numbers to assign pilot numbers and names to each Department Group set up in Program 1003. The pilot number (200-799) is the number users dial for Department Calling. Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 600). If you want to use a number in the normal extension number range (e.g., 301-556 in 384i), first remove the default assignment. For example, to use extension number 325 for a Department Group pilot number, first give extension port 025 a different extension number. In 384i, each Tenant Group can have their own set of Department Group numbers. The Department Group name (up to 10 digits) helps to identify the Department Groups. Use the following chart when programming Department Group Names.
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *).
DSS10
CHECK
PROGRAMMING 791
CLEAR Clear the text entry if you want to start over. Dialpad digits 0-9, # and *. Conditions None Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
792 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available eight groups. 384i Available each Tenant Group has 32 groups.
IN
Use Program 0507 DCI Pooling Pilot Numbers to assign the pilot number to the DCI Pooling Groups set in Program 1204. To call a DCI software port within the group, users dial the pilot number. The range is 200799. Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 600) for the pilot numbers. If you want to use a number in the normal extension number range (e.g., 301-556 in 384i), first remove the default assignment. For example, to use extension number 325 for a DCI Pooling Group pilot number, first give extension port 025 a different extension number. In 384i, each Tenant Group can have their own DCI Pooling pilot numbers. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 793
Description
124i Available eight groups. 384i Available each Tenant Group has 32 groups.
IN
Use Program 0508 ACI Group Pilot Number to assign the pilot number to the ACI Groups set in Program 1303. The range is 200-799. To call an ACI software port within the group, users dial the pilot number. Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 600) for the pilot numbers. If you want to use an extension number in the 301-556 range, first remove the default assignment. For example, to use extension number 325 for an ACI Group pilot number, first give extension port 025 a different extension number. Each Tenant Group can have their own ACI Group pilot numbers. Conditions None
794 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Not available.
PROGRAMMING 795
Description
124i Available in Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher one Tenant Group. 384i Available. Each Tenant Group (1-4) can have a unique Trunk Access Code.
IN
Use Program 0510 - Trunk Access Code to assign the single-digit trunk access code (normally 9). This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection or Trunk Group Routing.
Caution
The digit 9 is defined in Program 0501 as Dial Type 6 with the Number of Digits Required set to 1. If you change the trunk access code in Program 0510, you must make the corresponding changes in Program 0501. Conditions None
796 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available in Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher one Tenant Group. Does not include ACD codes. 384i Available. Each Tenant Group (1-4) can have unique Service Codes.
IN
Use Program 0511 - Service Code Setup (Part A) to customize the first set of Service Codes. You can customize additional Service Codes in Program 0514 (Service Code Setup [Part B] on page 806. The following chart shows: The number of each code (001-100) The codes default assignment. For example, dialing 881(code 001) allows users to change the Music on Hold tone. The feature reference for the code The function of the Service Code. If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the "New" column. Conditions None
Initiating a Personal Greeting, VAU Park "Call Forwarding, and Page or Off-Premise Call Forward. Off-Premise" "Voice Announce Unit" "Message Waiting" "Message Waiting" "Message Waiting" "Last Number Redial" Answering a Message Waiting request Canceling all Messages Waiting a user has left at other extensions Canceling a Message Waiting a user has left at another extension. Using Last Number Redial from a Single Line Telephone
*0 873 871 #5
PROGRAMMING 797
016 017
*# 869
"Door Box" "Paging, External" "Camp On / Call Waiting" "Callback" "Callback" "Alarm" "Abbreviated Dialing" "Abbreviated Dialing" "Save Number Dialed" "Paging, Internal" "One-Touch Calling" "Central Office Calls, Placing" Not used Not used Not used "Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing" "Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing" "Flash"
021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032
Enabling Handsfree Answerback for incoming Intercom calls Enabling Forced Ringing for incoming Intercom calls Flashing a trunk from a Single Line Telephone
033
823
034
#3
798 PROGRAMMING
"Meet Me Conference" Joining a Meet Me Conference/Page on an "Meet Me Paging" External Paging Zone "Meet Me Conference" Joining a Meet Me Conference/Page on an "Meet Me Paging" Internal Paging Zone (if your extension is in the group called) "Headset Operation" Not used "Data Communications Enabling the DCI auto-answer mode Interface (DCI)" "Data Communications Disconnecting an active data call Interface (DCI)" "Data Communications Initializing the DCI Interface (DCI)" "Background Music" Turning Background Music on and off Switching from headset to handset mode and visa versa
047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
"Dial Pad Confirmation Enabling/disabling Dial Pad Confirmation Tone" Tone "Last Number Redial" "Park" "Park" "Hold" Clearing number saved by Last Number Redial Parking a call in orbit Picking up a parked call Placing a call on Group Hold PROGRAMMING 799
"Selectable Ring Tones" Changing your extensions incoming ring tones "Department Step Calling" Cycling to the next member of a Department Calling Group. This code is only available if you disable Single Digit Dialing code 09 in Program 0512. Barging in on an extensions call Enabling Call Forwarding No Answer. This code is currently not implemented. Enabling Call Forwarding Busy. This code is currently not implemented.
061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081
810 #9 853 854 *5 817 899 885 800 811 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
Placing an outside call over a specific trunk Storing Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers Storing Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers
"Data Communications Setting modem outgoing parameters Interface (DCI)" "Save Number Dialed" "Name Storing" Testing the operation of single line telephones Clearing the number saved by Saved Number Redial Programming extension names
800 PROGRAMMING
3. 4.
5. 6.
802 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available in Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher one Tenant Group. 384i Available. Each Tenant Group (1-4) can have unique Single Digit Service Codes.
IN
Use Program 0512 - Single Digit Service Code Setup to assign the Single Digit Service Codes. These are the post-dialing codes a user can dial after placing an Intercom call to a co-worker. Available post-dialing codes are 0-9, # and *. The following chart shows: The number of each code (01-12). The codes default dialing assignment. For example, dialing # activates the Department Step Calling function of code 01. The feature reference for the code The function of the post-dialing code. If you change the default Single Digit Service Codes, be sure to record your entry in the "New" column.
04 05
7 2
06
07 08 09 10 11 12
0 6 8 -
PROGRAMMING 803
telemanuals.com
804 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Not available.
PROGRAMMING 805
Description
124i Available in Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher one Tenant Group. Does not include ACD, Hotel/Motel or Personal Park codes. 384i Available. Each Tenant Group (1-4) can have unique Service Codes.
IN
Use Program 0514 - Service Code Setup (Part B) to customize the second set of Service Codes. You can customize additional Service Codes in Program 0511 (Service Code Setup [Part A] on page 797). The following chart shows: The number of each code (001-100) The codes default assignment. For example, dialing 111(code 001) allows users to listen to the General Message (if recorded). The feature reference for the code The function of the Service Code. If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the "New" column.
"Voice Announce Unit" Listening to the General Message. "Voice Announce Unit" Recording, listening to or erasing the General Message
"Voice Announce Unit" Recording, listening to or easing a VAU message "Voice Mail" Calling your mailbox
"Voice Over"
Initiating a Voice Over. This code is only available if you disable Single Digit Dialing code 09 in Program 0512. Canceling a Call Forwarding, Personal Greeting or Park and Page. This code is currently not implemented.
010
"Call Forwarding"
"Voice Announce Unit" Calling, erasing or scrolling through phone numbers on your display left by the VAU Automated Attendant Not used Not used "Caller ID" Not used "Caller ID" Returning or erasing a messed Caller ID call PROGRAMMING 807 Changing, deleting or adding new numbers to the Caller ID Table
146 148
044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059
154 155 156 157 158 159 160 #7 857 167 168 169
808 PROGRAMMING
062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088
886 867 -
PROGRAMMING 809
810 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0515 - VAU Master Number to assign Voice Announce Unit master number (200-799). Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 600). If you want to use a number in the normal extension number range (e.g., 301-556 in 384i), first remove the default assignment. For example, to use extension number 325 for the VAU master number, first give extension port 025 a different extension number. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 811
Description
124i. Available. 384i. Available.
IN
Use Program 0516 - Voice Mail Master Number to set the Voice Mail master number. This is the number users dial to reach the Voice Mail. The range is 200-799. Normally, you should use unassigned extension numbers (e.g., 600) for the master number. If you want to use a number in the normal extension number range (e.g., 301556 in 384i), first remove the default assignment. For example, to use extension number 325 for a Voice Mail Master Number, first give extension port 025 a different extension number. Use the following chart when programming Voice Mail Master Number names. Press DND to toggle between upper and lower case.
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *). Clear the text entry if you want to start over.
DSS10
CHECK
CLEAR
812 PROGRAMMING
Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 813
Description
124i Not available. 384i Not available.
814 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. 384i Available each Tenant Group (14) can have a unique code.
IN
Use Program 0518 - Alternate Trunk Route Access Code to define additional single-digit trunk access codes. In 384i, each Tenant Group can have its own unique alternate code. Assign Alternate Trunk Access Routes to extensions in 0922 - Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions. When a user dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code, the system routes their call to the Alternate Trunk Access Route. The alternate trunk access code can be up to four digits long. Make sure you dont use a code assigned to an extension or Service Code. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 815
0500 - System Numbering 0519 - Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes / 0520 - ACD Master Number
0519 - Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes / 0520 - ACD Master Number Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available each Tenant Group can have a unique set of codes.
IN
IN
816 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. System has 360 fixed bins. Common bins are 000-199. Group bins are 200-359. Each of the eight groups assigned in 1023 has 20 group bins. 384i Available 1990 Abbreviated Dialing bins available (0000-1990).
IN
Use Program 0601 - Common Abbreviated Dialing Bins to assign Common Abbreviated Dialing bins to Tenant Groups. The system has 1990 bins (0000-1990) that you can allocate between Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing. Each bin can have a stored number up to 24 digits long. When programming Common Abbreviated Dialing bins, you must specify: The Tenant Group you want to program The start address (0000-1990) for each Tenant Groups bins. The number of bins assigned to each Tenant Group (1-1000 in multiples of 10). Bin numbers are 00-99 or 000-999, depending on how many bins you assign to a starting address. Common Abbreviated Dialing bin numbers for each Tenant Group restart from 00 or 000. In addition, the Group Abbreviated Dialing bin numbers for each Tenant Group restart from 00 or 000. Refer to Program 0602 for Group Abbreviated Dialing. Common Abbreviated Dialing Example Give Tenant Group 1 the first 100 bins and Tenant Group 2 the second 100 bins. For Tenant Group 1, specify a starting address of 000 and the number of bins as 100. For Tenant Group 2, specify a starting address of 0100 and the number of bins also as 100. The bin numbers for each Tenant Group are 00-99. Since the start addresses are different, the tenants cannot share the bins. For tenants to share bins, they should have the same start address. Refer to the following chart when allocating Abbreviated Dialing bins.
Common Abbreviated Dialing (Program 0601) Group Abbreviated Dialing (Program 0602) Group Number Start Addr. Length Bin Name and Entry (Program 0603)
Tenant Group
Start Addr.
Length
Bin
Example 1: 2-digit Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing 1 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 100 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 1 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 100 00 01 02 03 04 05 06
Example 2: 3-digit Common Abbreviated Dialing and 1-digit Group Abbreviated Dialing 1 0000 0001 0002 0003 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0 1000 0000 0001 0002 003 1 1000 1001 1002 1003 10 00 01 02 03 PROGRAMMING 817
Conditions Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing access a common group of 1990 bins. If you allocate all your bins for Common Abbreviated Dialing, you will have no bins left for Group Abbreviated Dialing and visa versa.
818 PROGRAMMING
10.
PROGRAMMING 819
Description
124i Not available 360 fixed bins available. Common bins are 000199. Group bins are 200-359. Each of the eight groups assigned in 1023 has 20 group bins. 384i Available 1990 Abbreviated Dialing bins available (0000-1990).
IN
Use Program 0602 - Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins to assign Group Abbreviated Dialing bins to the Abbreviated Dialing Groups set in Program 1023. The system has 1990 bins that you can allocate between Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing. Each bin can have a stored number up to 24 digits long. When programming Group Abbreviated Dialing bins, you must specify: The Tenant Group you want to program. Normally, all extensions within an Abbreviated Dialing Group are in the Same Tenant Group. The Abbreviated Dialing Group you want to program The start address (0000-1990) for each groups Group Abbreviated Dialing bins. The number of bins assigned to the Abbreviated Dialing Group (in multiples of 10). Bin numbers are 00-99 or 000-999, depending on how many bins you assign to a starting address. Group Abbreviated Dialing bin numbers for each Abbreviated Dialing Group restart from 00 or 000. In addition, Common Abbreviated Dialing bin numbers for each Tenant Group restart from 00 or 000. Refer to Program 0601 for Common Abbreviated Dialing. For example, to give Abbreviated Dialing Group 2 the second 100 bins, specify a starting address of 0100 and the number of bins as 100. This gives Abbreviated Dialing Group 2 bins 100-199. To have Abbreviated Dialing Groups share bins (for system-wide access), they should have the same start address. If Abbreviated Dialing Groups should have separate bins, specify different start addresses (e.g., 0200 for group 2, 0300 for group 4, etc.). Group Abbreviated Dialing Example For example, give Abbreviated Dialing Group 1 the third 100 bins and Abbreviated Dialing Group 2 the fourth 100 bins. For group 1, specify a starting address of 0200 and the number of bins as 100. For group 2, specify a starting address of 0300 and the number of bins also as 100. The bin numbers for each Abbreviated Dialing Group are 00-99. Since the start addresses are different, the groups cannot share the bins. For groups to share bins, they should have the same start address. Refer to the chart on page 817 when allocating Abbreviated Dialing bins. Conditions Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing access a common group of 1990 bins. If you allocate all your bins for Common Abbreviated Dialing, you will have no bins left for Group Abbreviated Dialing and visa versa.
PROGRAMMING 821
0600 - Abbreviated Dialing Options 0603 - Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Names
0603 - Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Names Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 360 fixed bins available. Common bins are 000199. Group bins are 200-359. Each of the eight groups assigned in 1023 has 20 group bins. Entering a Flash requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. 384i Available 1990 Abbreviated Dialing bins available (0000-1990).
SB
Use Program 0603 - Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Names to enter the Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers and names. Make the entries in this program according to address. For the addresses of your systems bins, refer to the chart on page 817 . The 384i has 200 bins numbered 0000-1990. The 124i has 360 bins numbered 000-359. Use the following chart when programming Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing names. Press DND to toggle between upper and lower case letters.
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it.
DSS10
822 PROGRAMMING
0600 - Abbreviated Dialing Options 0603 - Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Names
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
CHECK
Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *). Clear the text entry if you want to start over.
CLEAR Dialpad digits 0-9, # and *. Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 823
0600 - Abbreviated Dialing Options 0604 - Common Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Groups
0604 - Common Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Groups Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 200 Common Abbreviated Dialing bins and 16 Trunk Groups 384i Available up to 1990 Common Abbreviated Dialing bins and 128 Trunk Groups.
SA
Use Program 0604 - Common Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Groups to specify the routing for Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers. To have Common Abbreviated Dialing bins route over ARS/Trunk Group Routing, enter 0. To have the bins route to a specific Trunk Group, enter the Trunk Group number (1-128 in 384i, 1-16 in 124i). When entering data, this option correlates Common Abbreviated Dialing bin Addresses to Trunk Groups. There are three things you can do to help determine the correct bin address: Look at the telephone display when programming Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers. The digits to the right of ABB characters on the first line are the bin address. Review the entries in Program 0603. Review the Common Abbreviated Dialing portion of the chart on page 817. Note: If a user preselects a trunk, their preselection overrides the setting in this option. Conditions None
824 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available eight Toll Restriction classes. 384i Available 15 Toll Restriction Classes in each of 4 Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 0701 - Toll Restriction Class to set the systems Toll Restriction. In 384i, each of the four tenants can have 15 Toll Restriction Classes, for a system maximum of 60. There are eight Toll Restriction classes in 124i. See the Toll Restriction Routing flowchart below for routing specifics. Refer to the chart on the following page for a description of each Toll Restriction option, its range and the Toll Restriction class 1 default setting.
Start
Are digits dialed in a Permit Table? No No Are digits dialed in a Restrict Table? Yes Has maximum local digit length been exceeded? No Digits sent out over trunk. Yes Toll violation occurs system drops call.
Yes
Yes
PROGRAMMING 825
Item 1
International Call Restrict Table This option assigns/unassigns the International Call Restrict Table for the Toll Restriction Class you are programming. The system uses this table for international call restriction. Enter International Call Restrict Table data in Program 0702 (Item 1). International Call Permit Table This option assigns/unassigns the International Call Permit Table for the Toll Restriction Class you are programming. The system uses this table for international call restriction. Enter International Call Permit Table data in Program 0702 (Item 2). Maximum Number of Digits for Local Call This option enables/disables maximum number of digit restriction for local calls. If enabled, this option limits the number of digits that can comprise a local call according to Program 0702 (Item 3).
0 (Unassigned) or 1 (Assigned)
0 (Unassigned)
Item 2
0 (Unassigned) or 1 (Assigned)
1 (Assigned)
Item 3
0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled for Pgm 0702 - Item 3, Entry 1) 2 (Enabled for Pgm 0702 - Item 3, Entry 2) 3 (Enabled for Pgm 0702 - Item 3, Entry 3) 4 (Enabled for Pgm 0702 - Item 3, Entry 4) 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled for Pgm 0702 - Item 4, Entry 1) 2 (Enabled for Pgm 0702 - Item 4, Entry 2) 3 (Enabled for Pgm 0702 - Item 4, Entry 3) 4 (Enabled for Pgm 0702 - Item 4, Entry 4) 0 (Not assigned) or 1 (Assigned)
Item 4
Maximum Number of Digits for Non-Local Calls This option enables/disables maximum number of digit restriction for non-local calls. If enabled, this option limits the number of digits that can comprise a non-local call according to Program 0702 (Item 4).
Item 5
Common Permit Code Table This option assigns/unassigns the Common Permit Code Table (Program 0702, Item 7) for the class you are programming. If assigned, Toll Restriction checks the table for the digits dialed. If the digits are in the table, the system allows the call. Common Restrict Table This option assigns/unassigns the Common Restrict Table (Program 0702, Item 8) for the class you are programming. If assigned, Toll Restriction checks the table for the digits dialed. If the digits are in the table, the system restricts the call.
1 (Assigned)
Item 6
0 (Not assigned)
826 PROGRAMMING
Item 7
Restriction for Common Abbreviated Dialing Use this option to enable/disable Toll Restriction for Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers. If enabled, Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers have the same restrictions as manually dialed numbers. Restriction for Group Abbreviated Dialing Use this option to enable/disable Toll Restriction for Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers. If enabled, Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers have the same restrictions as manually dialed numbers. Intercom Call Restriction Use this option to allow or prevent an extension with this class from dialing Intercom calls. PBX Call Restriction Use this option to set how the system Toll Restricts calls over PBX trunks. If you enable PBX Toll Restriction, the system begins Toll Restriction after the PBX access code. The user cannot dial a PBX extension. If you disable PBX Toll Restriction, the system only restricts calls that contain the PBX access code. The system does not restrict calls to PBX extensions. Refer to the PBX compatibility feature. Make sure Program 0702 Item 4 (Maximum Number of Digits in Non-Local Call) allows for PBX Toll Call Dialing (normally 12 digits). Permit Code Table This option assigns/unassigns the Permit Code Table for the Toll Restriction class you are programming. If assigned, you must specify which of the four Permit Code Tables you want the class to use.
0 (Disabled) or 1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
Item 8
0 (Disabled)
Item 9
0 (Intercom calls allowed) 1 (Intercom calls prevented) 0 (PBX Toll Restriction disabled) 1 (PBX Toll Restriction enabled)
Item 10
Item 11
0 (Unassigned) 1 (Use Program 0702 Item 5, Table 1) 2 (Use Program 0702 Item 5, Table 2) 3 (Use Program 0702 Item 5, Table 3) 4 (Use Program 0702 Item 5, Table 4) 0 (Unassigned) 1 (Use Program 0702 Item 6, Table 1) 2 (Use Program 0702 Item 6, Table 2) 3 (Use Program 0702 Item 6, Table 3) 4 (Use Program 0702 Item 6, Table 4)
0 (Unassigned)
Item 12
Restrict Code Table This option assigns/unassigns the Restrict Code Table for the Toll Restriction class you are programming. If assigned, you must specify which of the four Restrict Code Tables you want the class to use.
0 (Unassigned)
PROGRAMMING 827
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 0 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0
1 0 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 3 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PROGRAMMING 829
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables to specify the Toll Restriction Tables, digit length restrictions and the PBX access code. Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. You can also use FLASH as a dont care (wild card) digit. Each Tenant Group can have a different set of entries for this program. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Toll Restriction Tables Option Description Range Default
Item 1
International Call Restrict Table This option lets you program the Restrict Table for international calls. The system has one International Call Restrict Table. You can program up to 10 different entries in the table. Each entry can be up to four digits long, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card). International Call Permit Table This option lets you program the Permit Table for international calls. The system has one International Call Restrict Table. You can program up to 10 different entries in the table. Each entry can be up to four digits long, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card). Maximum Number of Digits in Local Call This option sets the maximum number of digits allowed in a local call. A system with Toll Restriction defines local calls as any call dialed that does not match an entry in the Permitted Code Table or the Common Permitted Code Table. You can have up to four different entries for this item with a different number of digits in each entry. Maximum Number of Digits for Non-Local Calls Use this option to set maximum allowable length of non-local calls. A non-local call is any call allowed by the Common Permit or Permit Code Tables. Users cannot place calls that exceed this setting, even if allowed in a Permit Table. You can have up to four different entries for this item with a different number of digits in each entry.
Entries 1-10 correspond to the 10 table entries. Each entry can have up to four digits.
No entries
Item 2
Entries 1-20 correspond to the 10 table entries. Each entry can have up to six digits.
No entries
Item 3
Entries 1-4 correspond to the four different entries for this item. Range for each entry is 4-8.
All entries = 7
Item 4
Entries 1-4 correspond to the four different entries for this item. Range for each entry is 4-30.
All entries = 30
830 PROGRAMMING
Item 5
Permit Code Table This option lets you program the Permit Code Tables. If the system has Toll Restriction enabled, users can dial numbers only if permitted by these tables and the Common Permit Table (Item 7). There are four Permit Code Tables, with up to 60 entries in each table. The system permits calls exactly as you enter the code. For example, to permit 1-203 calls you must enter 1203 into a Permit Table. Each Permitted Code Table entry can be up to 12 digits long, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card). Restrict Code Table This option lets you program the Restrict Code Tables. If the system has Toll Restriction enabled, users cannot dial numbers listed in these tables (unless also included in Items 5 and 7). There are four Restrict Code Tables, with up to 60 entries in each table. The system restricts calls exactly as you enter the code. For example, to restrict 1-900 calls you must enter 1900 into a Restrict Table. Each Restrict Code Table entry can be up to 12 digits long, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card). Common Permit Code Table This option lets you program the Common Permit Code Table. This table contains up to 10 codes you commonly allow users to dial (such as 1-800 and 911). Each code can be up to 4 digits long, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (dont care). Common Restrict Table This option lets you program the Common Restrict Code Table. This table contains up to 10 codes you commonly prevent users from dialing (such as 1976 and 1900). Each code can be up to 12 digits long, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (dont care). PBX Access Code Use this option to enter the PBX Access Code. When the system is behind a PBX, this is the code users dial to access a PBX trunk. Toll Restriction begins after the PBX access code. For PBX trunks (Program 0901 Items 7-10) the system only Toll Restricts calls that contain the access code. Always program this option when the system is behind a PBX, even if you dont want to use Toll Restriction. PBX Access Codes can be up to 2 digits, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (dont care). Not used
No entries
Item 6
No entries
Item 7
Entries 1-10 correspond to the 10 table entries. Each entry can have up to four digits. Entries 1-10 correspond to the 10 table entries. Each entry can have up to 12 digits.
No entries
Item 8
No entries
Item 9
Entries 1-4 correspond to the 4 PBX Access Codes. Each code can have up to 2 digits.
No entries
Item 10
PROGRAMMING 831
PROGRAMMING 833
834 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. 384i Available five patterns for each of four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 0801 - Automatic Night Service Patterns to set up the Automatic Night Service patterns. There are five different patterns. Each pattern lets you assign one of four different Night Service Modes (Day, Night, Midnight and Rest) to the time periods in a day. You can configure up to 10 different time periods in each day. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting. See the illustration on the following page for a typical Automatic Night Service pattern setup.
Automatic Night Service Patterns Option Range Default
Night Service Pattern Number Use this option to select the Night Service pattern you want to program. There are five Night Service patterns for each tenant. Night Service Time Periods Use this option to set up the Automatic Night Service time periods. Each time period is a division of a day. For example, a pattern with just Day Mode and Night Mode would have two time periods. A pattern with Day Mode, Night Mode and Midnight Mode would have three time periods. Each pattern can have up to 10 time periods. Time Period Start Hour Use this option to select the start hour for the time period you are programming. Always use a 24-hour clock (e.g., 13 = 1:00 PM). Time Period Start Minute Use this option to select the start minute (0-59) for the time period your are programming Time Period Stop Hour Use this option to select the stop hour for the time period you are programming. Always use a 24-hour clock (e.g., 13 = 1:00 PM). Time Period Stop Minute Use this option to select the stop minute (0-59) for the time period you are programming. Time Period Mode Use this option to select the Night Service mode of the time period you are programming. Using mode 0 deletes your time settings. However, the system assigns the Day Mode to all time periods not assigned to modes 1-3.
1-5
None
1-10
None
0 (12:00 AM)
0 (12:00 AM)
PROGRAMMING 835
1 2 3 4 5
0:00
9:00
12:00 13:00
17:00 18:00
22:00
0:00
Midnight
Day
R e s t
Day
R e s t
Night
Midnight
PROGRAMMING 837
Description
124i Available. 384i Available with unique entries for each of the four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 0802 - Weekly Night Service Switching to assign one of the five Automatic Night Service patterns you set in Program 0801 to each day of the week. You can make different assignments for each Tenant Group. Conditions None
838 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. 384i Available with unique entries for each of the four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use this Program 0803 - Holiday Night Service Switching to assign one of the five Automatic Night Service patterns to holidays. The settings in this program override the settings you make in Program 0802. You can make a different entry for each Tenant Group. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 839
840 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 trunk ports. 384i Available 128 trunk ports. Item 24 requires system software 3.05.10. Items 14-17 entry 6 (T1 wink start ANI/DNIS) requires 384i system software 3.06.02. Enhanced Answer Supervision in Item 24 requires system software 3.05.15. See page 844. Enabling/disabling DTMF tones for outgoing calls (Item 29) is not available.
Enhanced Answer Supervision in Item 24 requres Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18. See page 844. Enabling/disabling DTMF tones for outgoing calls (Item 29) requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
IN
Use Program 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A) to set the basic options for each trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Refer also to Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part B) on page 870.
Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A) Option Description Range Default
Item 1
Signaling Type (DP/DTMF) This option sets the signaling type for the trunk. Ring Detect Type This option sets Extended Ring Detect or Immediate Ring Detect for the trunk. Refer to the graphic provided with Program 0114 Item 15 for more explanation. CODEC Gain Type Use this option to select the CODEC gain for the trunk. The option sets the amount of gain (signal amplification) for the trunk you are programming. There are five CODEC gain types (1-5). If necessary, you can change the preset values of the gain types in Program 0117.
0 (Dial Pulse, 10 PPS) 1 (Dial Pulse, 20 PPS) 2 (DTMF) 0 (Delayed ringing) 1 (Immediate ringing)
2 (DTMF)
Item 2
1 (Immediate ringing)
Item 3
1 (0 dB transmit and receive gain) 2 (-5 dB transmit and receive gain) 3 (-3 dB transmit and receive gain) 4 (+3 dB transmit and receive gain) 5 (+ 5 dB transmit and receive gain)
Item 4 Item 5
Not used Flash Type This option to select the flash type (open loop or ground). Always set this option for open loop. Flash For Timed Flash or Disconnect This option lets you use Flash for Timed Flash (Program 0114 - Item 9) or Disconnect (Program 0114 - Item 10). (A user implements Flash by pressing the FLASH key while on a trunk call.) 0 (Open loop flash) 1 (Ground flash) 0 (Timed Flash) 1 (Disconnect) 0 (Open loop flash) 0 (Timed Flash)
Item 6
PROGRAMMING 841
Items 7-10
Behind PBX Use these items to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX. There is one item for each of the Night Service Modes: Item 7 = Day Mode Item 8 = Night Mode Item 9 = Midnight Mode Item 10 = Rest Mode Dial Tone Detection for Directly Accessed Trunks Use this option to enable/disable dial tone detection for directly accessed trunks. If disabled, the system outdials on the trunk without monitoring for dial tone. See Program 0116 Items 11-32 for dial tone detection options). Pause After First Digit for Manually Dialed Calls Use this option to enable/disable a pause before the system outdials a manually dialed call on the trunk. If enabled, the system will wait before outdialing the dialed digits. If disabled, the system outdials the digits as the user dials them. Set the pause interval in Program 0405, Item 13. If you have dial tone detection set in Program 0901, Item 11, the system will wait for dial tone before outdialing. SMDR Print Out Use this option to have the system include/exclude the trunk you are programming from the SMDR printout. See Program 0404 for SMDR printout options. Trunk Service Type Use this option to set the service type for the trunk you are programming. There is one item for each of the Night Service modes: Item 14 = Day Mode Item 15 = Night Mode Item 16 = Midnight Mode Item 17 = Rest Mode
Item 11
Item 12
0 (No pause)
Item 13
0 (Print out)
Items 14-17
0 (Normal) 1 (Trunk answered by VAU Automated Attendant) 2 (DISA - Direct Inward System Access) 3 (DID - Direct Inward Dial) 4 (DIL - Direct Inward Line) 5 (Tie line) 6 (T1 wink start ANI/DNIS) (requires 384i system software 3.06.02) 0 (Outgoing calls prevented) 1 (Outgoing calls allowed)
Item 18
Outgoing Calls Use this option to allow/prevent outgoing calls on the trunk you are programming.
842 PROGRAMMING
Item 19
Toll Restriction Use this option to enable/disabled Toll Restriction for the trunk. If enabled, the trunk follows Program Series 0700 programming. If disabled, the trunk is a toll free line. Forced Release of Held Call Use this option to enable/disable forced release for calls on Hold. If enabled, the system disconnects a call if it is on Hold longer than a programmed interval (Program 0405 - Timer 40). If disabled, forced disconnection does not occur. Program 0405 - Timer 22 also affects this option. Private Line Not used. Data Line Use this option to assign/unassign the trunk as a Data Line. Unsupervised Conference Call CODEC Gain Type Use this option to select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference. Set the CODEC gains for Unsupervised Conference in Program 0131. Answer Detection Type Use Answer Detection Type 0 to prevent a tie line from being placed on Hold. With type 1, the system may be able to place a tie line on Hold. Requires 384i system software 3.05.10. This option is enhanced in 124i Base 2.13, 2.18 EXCPRU 2.18 and 384i 3.05.15. Refer to the explanation that follows this table on page 844. Tie Line Dial Tone (Immediate Start) For immediate start tie lines, use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) dial tone transmission. If enabled, immediate start tie lines always send dial tone to the calling system when the call is set up. Refer to Program 2301 when setting up start signaling. Tie Line Dial Tone (Wink Start) For wink start tie lines, use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) dial tone transmission. If enabled, wink start tie lines always send dial tone to the calling system when the call is set up. Refer to program 2301 when setting up start signaling. DID Signaling Type For DID trunks, use this option to set the trunks signaling type (Dial Pulse or DTMF). Not used
0 (Toll Restriction enabled) 1 (Toll Restriction disabled) 0 (Forced disconnect disabled) 1 (Forced disconnect enabled)
Item 20
Item 21 Item 22
0 (Data Line disabled) 1 (Data Line enabled) 1-5 (From Program 0131)
Item 23
Item 24
0 (Type 0) 1 (Type 1)
1 (Type 1)
Item 25
0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
Item 26
0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
Item 27
0 (Dial Pulse)
PROGRAMMING 843
Item 29
DTMF Tones for Outgoing Calls Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls. Not used Loop Disconnect Supervision Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) loop supervision for the trunk. This option is required for Call Forwarding Off-Premise and Tandem Trunking only.
0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
Item 30 Item 31
0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
Enhanced Answer Supervision (Item 24) Enhanced Answer Supervision improves the systems answer supervision capability for DID, DISA and tie trunks (analog and T1). These enhancements minimize the likelihood of one-way conversations and bypassing Toll Restriction when using trunk-to-trunk connections (e.g., Off Premise Call Forwarding and Tandem Trunking). With this enhanced capability, the systems DID, DISA and tie trunks can: Use the answer supervision signaling from the telco. OR Use an algorithm that does not rely on the telcos answer supervision signaling. When 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 24: Answer Supervision Item 24 = 0 (Answer Supervision Available): Manual Dialing (DISA trunk or tie line to outbound trunk) After the user seizes the outbound trunk and dials the destination phone number, the system sets up a one-way talk path so the caller doesnt hear the digits redialing. The system sets up a two-way talk path only after receiving the answer supervision signal from the telco. Call Forwarding Off Premise (Inbound DID, DISA or tie trunk forward off-premise) The system sets up a two-way talk path only after receiving the answer supervision signal from the telco. The system sends answer supervision back through to the DID trunk. With a VAU installed, the system sends answer supervision after the reroute message. When 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 24: Answer Supervision Item 24 = 1 (Answer Supervision Not Available - Analog Trunks) Manual Dialing (DISA trunk or tie line to outbound trunk) When incoming caller seizes the outbound trunk, the system sets up a one-way path so the caller doesnt hear the digits redialing. After caller dials the first digit, the system tears down the talk path (both sides) After interdigit time-out, the system outdials all the digits the caller dialed and sets up the normal twoway talk path. Call Forwarding Off Premise (Inbound DID, DISA or tie trunk forward off-premise) As soon as the incoming caller seizes an outbound trunk, the system sets up a one-way path so the caller doesnt hear digits dialing out and supervisory tones. After dialing completes, the system sets up the normal two-way talk path. The system sends answer supervision back though the DID trunk. With a VAU installed, the system sends answer supervision after the reroute message. Conditions None
844 PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING 845
Description
124i Available 52 trunk ports. 384i Available 128 trunk ports.
IN
Use Program 0902 - Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone within the range selected when it rings an extension. There are four ring tones available (see the Trunk Ring Tone Range entries in Table 1-7). Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 0111. Also see Program 1001 Item 2 to select the tone (pitch) within the range selected. Conditions None
846 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 trunk ports. 384i Available 128 trunk ports.
IN
Use Program 0903 - Trunk Names to set the names for trunks. The trunk name displays at display keysets for incoming and outgoing calls. Use the following chart when programming names (up to 10 digits). Press DND to toggle between upper and lower case letters.
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *). Clear the text entry if you want to start over.
DSS10
CHECK
CLEAR Dialpad digits 0-9, # and *. Conditions None 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0 PROGRAMMING 847 Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
848 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 0904 - Trunk Tenant to assign trunks (1-128) to Tenant Groups (1-4) in 384i. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 849
Description
124i Available 52 trunk ports in 16 Trunk Groups. 384i Available 128 trunk ports in 128 Trunk Groups.
IN
Use Program 0905 - Trunk Groups to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also assign the outbound priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk group, they seize the trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry. Conditions None
850 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 16 trunk groups and 36 routes. 384i Available 128 trunk groups and 64 routes.
IN
Use Program 0906 - Trunk Group Routing (Dial 9) to set up an outbound routing table for the trunk groups you assigned in Program 0905. When users dial 9, the system routes their calls in the order (priority) you specify. For example, if a user dials 9 and all calls in the first group are busy, the system may route the call to another group. Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 0911 and 0912) may limit this option. When programming Trunk Group Routing, route numbers can be any of the following: 0 (not set) In 384i, 1-128 (trunk groups 1-128) In 124i, 1-16 (trunk groups 1-16) In 384i, route numbers 1-64 (entered as 1001-1064) In 124i, route numbers 1-36 (entered as 1001-1036)
When a user assigned to route 1 dials 9, their call routes as follows: Group 1 Group 2 Group 4 (from route 2) Group 1 (from route 1)
Route 1
Route 1 Call Routing Priority 1 Group 1
Route 2
Priority 1 Group 4
Priority 2 Route 2
Priority 2 Route 1
Priority 3 Group 2
PROGRAMMING 851
852 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 96 extensions/virtual extensions and 36 routes. 384i Available 384 extensions/virtual extensions and 64 routes.
IN
Use Program 0907 - Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program 0906 routes to extensions. You can have a different route for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIGHT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 853
0900 - Trunk Options 0908 - Trunk Group Routing for DCI Ports
0908 - Trunk Group Routing for DCI Ports Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 72 DCI ports and 36 routes. 384i Available 288 DCI ports and 64 routes.
IN
Use Program 0908 - Trunk Group Routing for DCI Ports to assign Program 0906 routes to DCI software ports. You can have a different route for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIGHT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
854 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 96 extensions/virtual extensions and 16 Ring Groups. 384i Available 384 extensions/virtual extensions and 128 Ring Groups.
IN
Use Program 0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign extensions to Ring Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming. The 384i system allows 128 Ring Groups. The 124i system allows 16 Ring Groups. Use Program 0910 to assign trunks to Ring Groups. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 855
Description
124i Available 52 trunk ports and 16 Ring Groups. 384i Available 128 trunk ports and 128 Ring Groups.
IN
Use Program 1910 - Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to Ring Groups. The 384i system has 128 Ring Groups. The 124i system has 16 Ring Groups. A trunk can be in only one Ring Group at a time. There are four assignments for each trunk - one for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIGHT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Use Program 0909 to assign extensions to Ring Groups. Conditions None
856 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 Access Maps. 384i Available 128 Access Maps.
IN
Use Program 0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets an extensions access options for trunks. For example, an extension can only place outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access. In 384i. there are 128 different Access Maps, with all 128 trunks in each map. In 124i, there are 52 Access Maps with all 52 trunks in each map. An extension can use one of the maps you set up in this program. Use Program 0912 to assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions. Each trunk can have one of eight access options for each Access Map:
Access Map Options Phone Programming PC Programming Option
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 T R H 1
No access Outgoing access only Incoming access only Access only when trunk on Hold Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold Incoming and outgoing access Incoming access, outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold
Conditions None
7. 8.
858 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 Access Maps and 72 extensions. 384i Available 128 Access Maps and 256 extensions.
IN
Use Program 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment to assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions. Each extension can have four Access Map assignments one for each Night Service Mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 859
0900 - Trunk Options 0913 0913 Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Not available.
860 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 6 ACI software ports and 52 trunks. 384i Available 192 ACI software ports and 128 trunks.
IN
Use Program 0914 - Setting the Music on Hold Source to select a trunks Music on Hold source. The source can be:
Option
A customer-provided source connected to one of the 192 ACI software ports Internal synthesized MOH A customer-provided source connected to the CPRU MOH terminals
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 861
0900 - Trunk Options 0915 - Incoming ISDN (3.1 Khz Audio) Ring Group
0915 - Incoming ISDN (3.1 Khz Audio) Ring Group Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the ISDN PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**).
862 PROGRAMMING
0900 - Trunk Options 0916 - Incoming ISDN Data Trunk Ring Group
0916 - Incoming ISDN Data Trunk Ring Group Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
Refer to the ISDN PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**).
PROGRAMMING 863
Description
124i Available 52 trunks, 96 extensions/virtual extensions and eight Department Groups. 384i Available 128 trunks, 384 extensions/virtual extensions and 32 Department Groups. DIL to Department Groups requires system software 3.04 or higher.
IN
Use Program 0917 - DIL Assignment to assign DILs to extensions and Department Calling Groups. A DIL rings an extension directly, without any other Access Map or Ring Group programming. If an extension has a line key, the DIL rings the line key. If the extension does not have a line key, the DIL rings one of the CALL keys. Use Program 0901 (Items 14-17 to designate a trunk as a DIL). You can make four DIL assignments, one for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode In 384i, DIL destinations are extensions 1-256, virtual extensions 257-384 and Department Groups 1-32 (by entering 385-417). In 124i, DIL destinations are extensions 1-72, virtual extensions 73-96 and Department Groups 1-8 (by entering 97-104). Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 865
Description
124i Available 52 trunks and eight DCI Groups. 384i Available 128 trunks and 32 DCI Groups.
IN
Use Program 0918 - Data Line Assignment to assign a Data Line to a DCI Group. This allows an available DCI within the group to answer an incoming data call on the Data Line. Designate a trunk as a Data Line in Program 0901 Item 22. Assign a DCI software port to a DCI group in Program 1204. You can make four assignments per Data Line, one for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode This option is currently not implemented. Conditions None
866 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 trunks and 16 Ring Groups. Voice Mail as destination requires Base 1.2R or higher and all versions of EXCPRU. VAU Automated Attendant as destination requires Base 4.02 and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Available 128 trunks and 128 Ring Groups. Voice Mail as destination requires system software 3.05.15 or higher. VAU Automated Attendant as destination requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
IN
For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 0919 - DIL No Answer Destination to assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time (Program 0405 Item 62). DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group. You make four assignments, one for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 867
868 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 trunks. 384i Available 128 trunks.
IN
Use Program 0920 - ACI Call Recording (Per Trunk) to assign the ACI Call Recording destination on a per trunk basis. The destination can be an ACI ports extension number (assigned in Program 0504 or an ACI Department Group pilot number (assigned in Program 0508). In addition, make sure A=1 and S=0. When using this option, also make sure that the entry for Program 1020 is cleared. Conditions Press CLEAR to erase an entry. Do not enter 000.
PROGRAMMING 869
Description
124i Available 52 trunks. Item 3 (Outgoing Trunk Rotary on No Dial Tone) requires Base 4.02 or higher and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Item 4 (Account Code) requires Base 4.02 or higher and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Available 128 trunks. Item 3 (Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone) requires system software 3.07.10 or higher. Item 4 (Account Code) requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
IN
Use Program 0921 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part B) to set additional basic options for each trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting. Refer also to Program 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A) on page 841.
Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part B) Option Description Range Default
Item 1 Item 2
Not used Caller ID Disable Enable/disable a trunks ability to receive Caller ID name/number information. Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone Use this option to enable/disable the systems ability to skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option pertains to calls placed using Loop Keys, Speed Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or Save Number Dialed. It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls. Account Code Enable/disable Forced Account Codes for each trunk. Not used 0 (Receive Caller ID disabled) 1 (Receive Caller ID enabled) 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled) 0 (Receive Caller ID disabled) 0 (Disabled)
0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
Items 5-16
Conditions None
3. 4.
5. 6.
PROGRAMMING 871
Description
124i Available 96 extensions/virtual extensions and 36 routes. 384i Available 384 extensions/virtual extensions and 64 routes.
IN
Use Program 0922 - Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions to designate the trunk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to Program 0518 - Alternate Trunk Access Code when setting up alternate trunk codes. Turn to Program 0906 - Trunk Group Routing (Dial 9) to set up the trunk routes. When entering data for this option, enter the route number (1-64 in 384i or 1-16 in 124i) or 0 to prevent routing. You make four assignments, one for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
872 PROGRAMMING
0900 - Trunk Options 0923 - Alternate Trunk Route for DCI Ports
0923 - Alternate Trunk Route for DCI Ports Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 72 DCI software ports and 36 routes. 384i Available 288 DCI software ports and 64 routes.
IN
Use Program 0923 - Alternate Trunk Route for DCI Ports to designate the trunk route accessed when a DCI dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to Program 0518 - Alternate Trunk Access Code when setting up alternate trunk codes. Turn to Program 0906 - Trunk Group Routing (Dial 9) to set up the trunk routes. When entering data for this option, enter the route number (1-64 in 384i or 1-16 in 124i) or 0 to prevent routing. You make four assignments, one for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 873
Description
124i Currently not implemented. 384i Available requires system software 3.06.02 and higher.
IN
Use Program 0924 - ANI/DNIS Service Option Number Assignment to assign a Service Option Number (115) to a trunk. Set up the ANI/DNIS Service Options in 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options. In 0901 Items 1417, assign Trunk Service Type 6 to all ANI/DNIS trunks. (ANI/DNIS trunks must be immediate start or wink start T1 trunks with E&M signaling.) For each trunk, you make four assignments (one for each Night Service mode): DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
874 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extension ports. 384i Available 256 extension ports.
IN
Use Program 1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A) to set the basic options of each extension port. Also see Program 1008 for Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B) of page 893. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.
Basic Extension Port Setup Options - Part A Option Description Range Default
The following items are for keysets only. Item 1 Item 2 Not used Trunk Ring Tone (Pitch) Use this option to set the tone (pitch) of the incoming trunk ring for the extension port you are programming. Also see Program 0902. Extension Ring Tone (Pitch) Use this option to set the tone (pitch) of the incoming extension call ring for the extension port you are programming. Also see program 1018. 1 (High) 2 (Mid range) 3 (Low) 1 (High) 2 (Mid range) 3 (Low) 2 (Mid range)
Item 3
2 (Mid range)
The following items are for 500/2500 type single line sets only Item 1 Telephone Signaling Type Use this option to tell the system the type of dialing the connected telephone uses. This option is also valid for 2-OPX Modules (circuit type 9). Not used Loop current CODEC Gain Type Use this option to select the CODEC gain for the extension. This options sets the amount of gain (signal amplification) for the extension you are programming. There are five CODEC gain types (1-5), set in Program 0118. Terminal Type Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port to receive DTMF tones after the initial call setup. Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF tones after the initial call setup. For Voice Mail, always enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones). Incoming Ring for 500/2500 Sets Use this option to set the ring cycle for the 500/2500 type extension you are programming. This option works with Program 1008 Item 4 to determine ringing. See the Single Line Ring Options chart below. Not used 1-5 (See Program 0118) 1 0 (Dial Pulse) 1 (DTMF) 1 (DTMF)
Item 5
0 (Ignores DTMF tones after initial call setup) 1 (Receives DTMF tones after initial call setup) 0 or 1 (See Single Line Ring Options chart below)
0 (Normal)
Item 6
PROGRAMMING 875
Long ring followed by short pause 1 second on followed by 1 second off Continuous ringing 1 second on followed by 1 second off Long ring followed by short pause 1 second on followed by 1 second off
2 short rings followed by a pause 1 second on followed by 1 second off Continuous ringing Continuous ringing
1 second on followed by 1 second off 1 second on followed by 1 second off Continuous ringing Continuous ringing
0 1
1 1
0 1
2 2
Short ring followed by long pause Short ring followed by long pause
Short ring followed by long pause Short ring followed by long pause
Conditions None
876 PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING 877
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 1002 - Extension Tenant to assign an extension to a Tenant Group. The system allows up to four Tenant Groups (1-4). Conditions None
878 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available eight extension groups and 96 extensions/virtual extensions. 384i Available 32 extension groups and 384 extensions/virtual extensions.
IN
Use Program 1003 - Extension (Department) Groups to set the Extension Groups. The system uses these groups for Department Calling. Assign pilot numbers to Extension Groups you set up in Program 0506. This lets system users place calls to the departments. Also use this program to set the priority of each extension within each Extension Group. When a call comes into the group, it may ring the extensions in order of their priority. The 384i system allows up to 32 extension groups. The 124i system allows up to eight extension groups. Conditions An extension can only be in one Extension Group. In addition, extensions in the same Extension Group should also be in the same Tenant Group.
PROGRAMMING 879
Description
124i Available eight Toll Restriction classes and 72 extensions 384i Available 15 Toll Restriction classes in each Tenant Group and 256 extensions.
IN
Use Program 1004 - Toll Restriction Class to assign a Toll Restriction class to an extension. The 384i system has 15 Toll Restriction classes in each Tenant Group. The 124i system as eight Toll Restriction classes. For an extension, you make one entry for each Night Service mode and one for the Power Failure mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode BACKUP = Power Failure Mode Use Program 0700 to program Toll Restriction. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 881
Description
124i Available 10 Classes of Service and 96 extension/virtual extension ports. 384i Available 15 Classes of Service in each Tenant Group and 384 extension/virtual extension ports.
IN
Use Program 1005 - Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to an extension. The 384i system has 15 Classes of Service in each Tenant Group. The 124i system has 10 Classes of Service. To specify the options in each Class of Service, refer to Programs 0406 and 0419. You make four entries for Program 1005, one for each Night Service Mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
882 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extensions. 384i Available 256 extensions.
IN
Use Program 1006 - Programming Function Keys (Part A) to set the functions of an extensions Programmable Function Keys. For certain functions, you can append data to the keys basic function. For example, the function 1009 appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1. You can also program Function Keys using Service Code 851. The following chart shows the available Programmable Function Key codes, indexed by feature. The additional information required (if any) follows the key code.
Dialing a stored Group Code: 1038 Operation: Press key + Abbreviated Dialing number bin + Line or CALL key Account Code Code: 1054 Operation: Press key + Dial Account Code Entering an Account Code
None
#4 + bin
None
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (Refer to the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Manual, P/N 92000ACD**).
Basic Operation Code: 1046 Operation: Press key to Logging in or out of an ACD Group log in Press key + 1 to log out or 0 to cancel Code: 1047 Operation: Press key Code: 1048 Operation: Press key Call Recording Not used Emergency Call Placing or receiving an Emergency Call
On red when logged in Off when logged out On while calling your supervisor or after being answered by your supervisor Flashing fast at the supervisor while ringing On red when Rest Mode enabled Off when Rest Mode disabled
*5
PROGRAMMING 883
Code: 1051 Operation: Press key Code: 1052 Operation: Press key Code: 1053 Operation: Press key
On when Work Time enabled, Flashing (while on a call) if Auto Work Time enabled Off when Work Time disabled Off when idle. On when busy. Double wink on when making an Emergency Call. Wink off when logged off or not installed. Double wink on when logged on. None None None
Code: 1079 Operation: Press key Barge In Call Forwarding Call Forwarding, Off-Premise Code: 1019 Operation: Press key Code: 1080 Operation: Press key Code: 1081 Operation: Press key
Queue Status Check Not used Barging In on a co-workers conversation Call Forwarding to extension or Voice Mail Setting up Call Forwarding Off-Premise, Selectable Display Messaging, VAU Park and Page and VAU Personal Greeting Overriding an extensions Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb
*2 *4
None
884 PROGRAMMING
Caller ID
None
146
Code: Trunk number Pressing a line key to place or (0001-0128) or 0000 to answer a trunk call (where trunks are 0001-0128) undefine Operation: Press key
On green when seized, on red when in use (by other party), Slow Flash green when ringing, Hold flash when on Hold On red during setup
#9
Conference
Setting up a Conference or a Code: 1016 Operation: Set up call Meet Me Conference + Press key + set up call to add + Press key twice Code: 1017 Operation: Set up trunk call + Press key Setting up a Voice Call Conference
#1
None
Data Communications
Placing a data call Code: 1029 Operation: Press key + ext or outside number Code: 1045 Operation: Press key + terminal dial Using your PC for Telemarketing Dial Logging in or logging out of your Department Calling Group Step Calling through a Department Group for an idle member Using Directory Dialing
Department Calling
Code: 1074 Operation: Press key Code: 1021 Operation: Dial busy ext + Press key Code: 1082 Operation: Do not lift handset + Press key
150
None
3 (On hook)
PROGRAMMING 885
None
869
Code: 1009 + Pickup Answering a call ringing a Group (1-9 or 01-32) phone in a specific Pickup Operation: CALL + Group Press key + Pkup Group Hotline Headset Operation Hold Code: 1058 + dest. ext Operation: Press key Code: 1028 Operation: Press key Placing a call to your Hotline partner Enabling or disabling Headset Operation
None
868
Full BLF (red) for covered ext. On red when activated None
834 -
Putting a call on System Hold Code: 1043 (if your phones Hold key is Operation: Place or answer call + Press key reassigned) Putting a call on Exclusive Code: 1044 Hold Operation: Place or answer call + Press key
None
Loop Keys
Placing or answering a trunk Code: 1078 + 0 call (Incoming), 1 (Outgoing) or 2 (Both Ways) + 000 (All trunk groups incoming or ARS outgoing) or Trunk group (001-128). Operation: Press key Code: 1010 Operation: Press key Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page
None
863
Code: 1015 Storing, using or checking a Operation: Memo Dial number Store: While on call, Press key + number to store Use: Press key + CALL or line Erase: CALL + Press key Code: 1023 Operation: Call extension + Press key Answering a Message Waiting
None
Message Waiting
None
*0
886 PROGRAMMING
Placing or answering a call to your virtual (phantom) extension Activating the Day Mode
818 + pswd (0000) + 0 818 + pswd (0000) + 1 818 + pswd (0000) + 2 818 + pswd (0000) + 3 7
None
852
Paging, External
On red when activated On red when activated On red when activated On red when activated Fast Flash when orbit is busy (green at originator, red at others)
803 + zone
Making an external All Call page Broadcasting to an Internal Paging Zone Broadcasting to all Internal Paging zones Placing a call into or retrieving a call from a Park Orbit
PROGRAMMING 887
Code: 1056 + dest. ext. Initiating Reverse Voice Over Operation: Press and hold key Activating Room Monitor Code: 1025 Operation: Press key at destination and source Code: 1014 Saving, redialing or checking Operation: a saved number Save: Place call + Press key Redial: Line or CALL + Press key Code: 1031 + sec. ext Operation: Press key Code: 1032 + boss ext Operation: Press key Code: 1081 Operation: Press key Calling your secretary (using the buzzer) A secretary picking up a call ringing your bosss extension. Setting up Call Forwarding Off-Premise, Selectable Display Messaging, VAU Park and Page and VAU Personal Greeting Placing a Serial Call to a coworker Transferring a call (if CONF (TRF) is not set for Transfer) Accessing a trunk using Trunk Group Routing
Room Monitor
On red at source Fast Flash red at destination On red when activated None
*4
Serial Call
Code: 1035 Operation: Trk call + Hold + ext + Press key Code:1077 Operation: Press key Code: 1011 Operation: Press key
None
9 804
Code: 1012 + tr group Using a loop key to access a (1-9, 01-99 or 001-128) Trunk Group Operation: Press key Camping On or Queuing for a Code: 1020 Operation: Hear busy trunk tone for trk + Press key
Trunk Queuing
None
888 PROGRAMMING
Voice Mail
Code: 1059 In 384i 3.07.10 or higher, enter 1059 followed by extension or Message Center number. Operation: Press key Code: 1060 Operation: Set up call + Press key
None
*8 or 8
Slow Flash red when active On red when responding Hold Flash red when listening
Voice Over
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 889
8.
890 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extensions. 384i Available 256 extensions.
SB
Use Program 1007 - Programming One-Touch Keys to select the functions of an extensions One-Touch Keys. You can also program One-Touch Keys by using Service Code 855. An extension can have One-Touch Keys for: Direct Station Selection Trunk Access (9, 804 + group, or #9 + trunk) Abbreviated Dialing (#2 + bin for common, #4 + bin for group) Service Codes (e.g., 2 for Callback) You can optionally enter a name (8 digits max.) for a One-Touch Key. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press DSS1 three times. Press DND to toggle between upper and lower case letters.
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *).
DSS10
CHECK
PROGRAMMING 891
CLEAR Clear the text entry if you want to start over. Dialpad digits 0-9, # and *. Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
Conditions None
892 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 96 extensions/virtual extensions. 384i Available 384i extensions/virtual extensions.
IN
Use Program 1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B) to set additional options for extension ports. (Also see Program 1001 on page 875 for additional Basic Extension Port Setup options.) Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting
Basic Extension Port Setup Options - Part B Option Description Range Default
Item 1
SMDR Printout Use this option to include or exclude the extension you are programming in the SMDR report. Outgoing Intercom Line Preference Use this option to set the extensions outgoing Intercom Line Preference. If enabled, the extension user gets Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset. Refer to the Line Preference feature for more details. Outgoing Trunk Line Preference Use this option to set the extensions outgoing Trunk Line Preference. If enabled, the extension user gets trunk dial tone when they lift the handset. The user hears trunk dial tone only if allowed by Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 0911 and 0912). Refer to the Line Preference feature for more details. Ring Cycle for Keysets Use this option to set the ring cycle for the keyset extension you are programming (see the Keyset Ring Options chart below). This option also affects how calls ring single line telephones. Refer to the Single Line Ring Options chart provided with Program 1001 Item 6 for more information. Off Hook Ringing Use this option to set the keysets off hook signaling. Off hook signaling occurs when a keyset user receives a second call while busy on a handset call. To enable/disable Off Hook Signaling for an extensions Class of Service, use Program 0406 Item 6.
0 (Do not print on SMDR report) 1 (Include on SMDR report) 0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
Item 2
1 (Enabled)
Item 3
0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
Item 4
0 (Normal ringing)
Item 5
0 (Muted Off Hook Ringing) 1 (No Off Hook Signaling) 2 (Normal Off Hook Ringing) 3 (Two beeps in speaker) 4 (Single beep in handset)
PROGRAMMING 893
Intercom Call
1 second on followed by 1 second off Continuous ring Short ring followed by a long pause
Conditions None
894 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extensions. 384i Available 256 extensions.
IN
Use Program 1009 - Cordless/Desktop Extension assignment to assign a Nitsuko 900i cordless telephone to its companion keyset. You must make an assignment in this program if you want to enable the "desk" button on the Nitsuko 900i base unit. This program is currently not used. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 895
Description
124i Available eight alarm inputs (four on each PGDU PCB). 384i Available 16 alarm inputs (eight on each PGDU PCB).
IN
Use Program 1010 - External Alarm Extensions to assign extensions to each of the system alarm inputs. When an alarm occurs, the system alerts the assigned extensions. The 384i system can have up to 16 alarm inputs (eight on each PGDU PCB). The 124i system can have up to eight alarm inputs (four on each PGDU PCB). Conditions None
896 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extensions. 384i Available 256 extensions
IN
Use Program 1011 - Function Key Initialization to initialize an extensions Programmable Function Keys. When initialized, all of an extensions function keys are line keys. Conditions This option is not available in the PC Program.
PROGRAMMING 897
Description
124i Available 92 extensions/virtual extensions and eight Call Pickup Groups. 384i Available 384 extensions/virtual extensions and 32 Call Pickup Groups.
IN
Use Program 1012 - Call Pickup Group to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups. The 384i system allows up to 32 Call Pickup Groups. The 124i allows up to eight Call Pickup Groups. This program also lets you assign an extensions Call Pickup Group priority. If two extensions in a group are ringing at the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first. Conditions None
898 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 96 extensions/virtual extensions and 24 Hotline assignments. 384i Available 384 extensions/virtual extensions and 50 Hotline assignments (in each Tenant Group).
IN
Use Program 1013 - Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignments to set up the Hotline assignments. The 384i system supports up to 50 Hotline assignments in each Tenant Group. The 124i system supports 24 Hotline assignments. Each assignment as an originator/boss extension and a destination secretary extension. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 899
Description
124i Available 72 extensions and eight Park Groups. 384i Available 256 extensions and 32 Park Groups.
IN
Use Program 1014 - Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The 384i system allows a total of 32 Park Groups. The 124i system allows a total of eight Park Groups. An extension can only pick up a call parked in orbit by an extension in its own group. Conditions None
900 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extensions and 36 routes. 384i Available 256 extensions and 64 routes.
IN
Use Program 1015 - Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes 1-64 (set in Program 0906) to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging system is in an extensions assigned route, the user can dial the Universal Answer code (#0) to pick up the call. You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions (not their own). When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in Program 0906). The extension users own ringing calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing other co-workers extensions. Refer to the Line Preference feature for more information. You make one entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
902 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extensions. 384i Available 256 extensions.
IN
Use Program 1016 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Assignment to assign the ringing options for an extensions Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys. You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 0502. Program Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys in Program 1006 (code 1036). Conditions None
904 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extensions and 16 Voice Mail ports. 384i Available 256 extensions and 16 Voice Mail ports.
IN
Use Program 1017 - Voice Mail Port Assignment to assign single line (ASTU PCB) ports as Voice Mail ports. The system allows up to 16 Voice Mail Ports. When programming, you must correlate a physical port in the Voice Mail system to an ASTU PCB extension port in the telephone system. If you have four ports in the Voice Mail system, you must make four different assignments in this program. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 905
1000 - Extension Options 1018 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone Range
1018 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone Range Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 96 extension/virtual extension ports. 384i Available 384 extension/virtual extension ports.
IN
Use Program 1018 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone to assign a ring tone range (0-4) to each extension port and virtual extension port assigned to a Multiple Directory Number key. If you enable ringing for the key in Program 1016, the key rings with the tone you set in this program. Also see Program 1001 Item 2. The chart below shows the available tones:
Ring Type (Program 1018 Entry) System Tone (From Table 1-7)
0 1 2 3 4 Conditions None
Trunk Ring Tone Range 1 Trunk Ring Tone Range 2 Trunk Ring Tone Range 3 Trunk Ring Tone Range 4 No Ringing
906 PROGRAMMING
1000 - Extension Options 1019 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone Priority
1019 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone Priority Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 72 extensions. 384i Available 256 extensions.
IN
Use Program 1019 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone Priority to set the priority (1-4) for the Multiple Directory Number Ring Tones set in Program 1018. When Multiple Directory Number calls ring an extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest priority (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys just flash. By default, Multiple Directory Number ring tones have the following priority:
Priority Ring Tone (Set in Program 1018)
1 2 3 4 Conditions None
0 1 2 3
PROGRAMMING 907
1000 - Extension Options 1020 -ACI Call Recording Destination (Per Extension)
1020 -ACI Call Recording Destination (Per Extension) Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 72 extensions.. 384i Available 256 extensions..
IN
Use Program 1020 - ACI Call Recording Destination to assign the ACI Call Recording destination on a per extension basis. The destination can be an ACI ports extension number (assigned in Program 0504) or an ACI Department Group pilot number (assigned in Program 0508). When entering data, make sure A=1and S=0. Also make sure that the entry for Program 0920 is cleared. Conditions Press CLEAR to erase an entry. Do not enter 000.
908 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
PROGRAMMING 909
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
910 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extensions and eight Abbreviated Dialing Groups. 384i Available 256 extensions and 32 Abbreviated Dialing Groups.
SA
Use Program 1023 - Abbreviated Dialing Groups to set the Abbreviated Dialing Groups. The system uses these groups for Group Abbreviated Dialing. All members of an Abbreviated Dialing Group share the same set of Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers. The 384i system allows up to 32 Abbreviated Dialing Groups, numbered 1-32. The 124i system allows up to eight Abbreviated Dialing Groups, numbered 1-8. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 911
Description
124i Available 72 extensions and 199 Common Abbreviated Dialing bins. 384i Available 256 extensions and up to 999 Common Abbreviated Dialing bins in each Tenant Group.
SA
Use Program 1024 - External Hotline Setup to set up the External Hotlines. When a user lifts the handset, their extension automatically dials the assigned Abbreviated Dialing number. The 384i system allows up to 10 External Hotlines in each Tenant Group. The 124i allows up to five External Hotlines. For each External Hotline, you enter: (384i only) The Tenant Group to which the External Hotline is assigned The External Hotline number (1-10 in 384i, 1-5 in 124i) The External Hotline extension number (301-556 in 384i, 301-372 in 124i)) The Common Abbreviated Dialing bin number assigned to the External Hotline (000-999 in 384i, 000-359 in 124i) Conditions None
912 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extensions. 384i Available 256 extensions.
SA
Use Program 1025 - Toll Restriction Override Codes to assign Toll Restriction Override codes to extension ports. Each code must be four digits long, using any combination of 0-9, # and *. Each extension can have a separate code, or many extensions can share the same override code. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 913
Description
124i Available 72 extensions and 16 Trunk Groups. 384i Available 256 extensions and 128 Trunk Groups.
IN
Use Program 1026 - Loop Key Data to enter the functions for an extensions loop keys (see the chart below). Loop keys can be incoming, outgoing or both ways. Outgoing loop keys use the Data 1 options. Incoming loop keys use the Data 2 option. Both ways loop keys use both the Data 1 and Data 2 options.
PROGRAMMING 915
Description
124i Available 96 extension/virtual extension destinations. 384i Available 384 extension/virtual extension destinations. Option 4 requires system software version 3.04.
IN
For each extension/virtual extension port, use Program 1027 - Fixed Call Forwarding Setup to assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Type (0-4) and the destination extension/virtual extension port. The following chart shows the Fixed Call Forwarding Types:
Fixed Call Forwarding Type 1 Description
0 1 2 3 4
1
Fixed Call Forwarding disabled Fixed Call Forwarding with both extensions ringing Fixed Call Forwarding when unanswered Fixed Call Forwarding immediate Fixed Call Forwarding when busy or unanswered
To assign Fixed Call Forwarding when busy in 384i prior to software version 3.04, refer to Program 1029.
The Fixed Call Forwarding destination can be an on- or off-premise extension port or a Voice Mail port. Conditions Do not use Fixed Call Forwarding Type 1 (Both Ringing) with Voice Mail ports.
6.
PROGRAMMING 917
1000 - Extension Options 1028 - Multiple Directory Number Key Delayed Ringing
1028 - Multiple Directory Number Key Delayed Ringing Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 72 extensions. 384i Available 256 extensions.
IN
Use Program 1028 - Multiple Directory Number Key Delayed Ringing to individually program an extensions Multiple Directory Number/Call Coverage keys for Delayed Ringing (1) or Immediate Ringing (0). You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Program the Delayed Ringing interval for Multiple Directory Number/Call Coverage keys in Program 0414 Item 5 (see page 764). Conditions None
Description
124i Not available. 384i Not available in system software 3.04 or higher. Prior to system software version 3.04, this option was for Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy or Unanswered.
IN
For each extension/virtual extension port, use Program 1029 - Fixed Call Forwarding When Busy to assign the Fixed Call Forwarding When Busy destination extension port. The following chart shows the Fixed Call Forwarding Types. The Fixed Call Forwarding destination can be an on- or off-premise extension port or a Voice Mail port. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 919
Description
124i Available 96 extension/virtual extension ports. 384i Available 384 extension/virtual extension ports.
IN
For each extension/virtual extension port, use Program 1030 - Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise to assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise telephone number. The Off-Premise destination can be up to 24 digits long, using 0-9, *, # and P (for pause). Be sure to include the trunk access code (e.g., 9) in the number. Conditions None
920 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available two DSS Consoles per extension; eight maximum per system. 384i Available four DSS Consoles per extension, 32 maximum per system.
IN
Use Program 1101 - DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which extensions have DSS Consoles connected. In 384i, you can have up to eight different extensions with DSS Consoles. A single extension can have up to 4 DSS Consoles (32 maximum consoles per system). In 124i, you can have up to four different extensions with DSS Consoles. A single extension can have up to two DSS Consoles (eight maximum per system). When programming, each extension/DSS Console(s) combination is called a Console Number. In 384i, there are eight Console Numbers (1-8). In 124i, there are four Console Numbers (1-4). You assign Console Numbers to extensions. When entering data, you normally make the assignment for Console Number 1 first. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 921
Description
124i Not required a single console can access all extensions and DLS. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 1102 - DSS Console Key Range to set the range of the DSS Consoles keys. You can have the keys on a DSS Console access one of the following four ranges:
DSS Console Key Ranges Range Keys Description
1 2 3 4
First 200 extensions (ports 1-200) Second 200 extensions (ports 201-400) Third 200 extensions (ports 401-600) Direct line selection
When programming, each Console Number (1-8) can have up to four consoles installed. Each installed console is called a Connection Number. For example, a Console Number with one DSS Console installed has Connection Number 1. A Console Number with three DSS Consoles installed has Connection Numbers 1-3. Conditions If an extension has four DSS Consoles, one of the consoles must be for Direct Line Selection (Type 4).
922 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available four Console Numbers with a key range from 1-100. 384i Available eight Console Numbers with a key range from 1-600.
IN
Use Program 1103 - DSS Console Key Assignments to customize the key assignments for DSS Consoles. A DSS Console key can have any function up to four digits long (e.g., extension number, Service Code etc.). Conditions In 384i, use Program 1106 to change the key assignments for DSS Consoles programmed for Direct Line Selection (range 4).
PROGRAMMING 923
Description
124i Available up to four extensions can have DSS Consoles (Console Numbers 1-4). 384i Available up to eight extensions can have DSS Consoles (Console Numbers 1-8).
SA
Use Program 1104 - DSS Console Alternate Answering to select the Alternate Answering extension for a DSS Console. When a user places their console off-duty (by pressing the ALT. key), their calls go to the programmed destination instead. Conditions None
924 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available one operator per system (one Tenant Group). 384i Available one operator in each of the four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 1105 - Operators Extension to designate a Tenant Groups operator. When a user dials 0, calls go to the operator selected in this program. If you dont assign an extension in Program 0011 - Alarm Display Telephone, system alarms appear on the extension assigned in this option. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 925
Description
124i Available all 52 trunks available when you press EXT.2. 384i Available on DLS, EXT.1 provides trunks 1-100 and EXT.2 provides trunks 101-128.
IN
Use Program 1106 - Direct Line Selection to customize DSS Console keys that are set for Direct Line Selection. In 124i, you access the DLS when you press EXT.2 on a DSS Console. In 384i, DLS Consoles are those assigned range 4 in Program 1102. Conditions None
926 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available except Items 9-20 and requires Base 4.02 or higher and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Available requires system software 3.07.14 or higher.
IN
Use Program 1107 - DSS Console Lamp Table to customize flash rates for the systems DSS Consoles. Refer to the chart and table below. Use the New Entry column in the chart below to record your entries if you make any changes to the DSS Console flash rates.
DSS Console Lamp Table
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21-50
Idle Extension Busy Extension DND Extension ACD Agent Busy Out of Schedule (ACD DSS) ACD Agent Log-Out (ACD DSS) ACD Agent Log-In (ACD DSS) ACD Agent Emergency (ACD DSS) Hotel Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code * (Hotel DSS) Hotel Status Code # (Hotel DSS) Not used
0 1 2 1 0 3 4 6 1 5 7 0 3 2 6 4 2 5 4 3
PROGRAMMING 927
telemanuals.com
Conditions (A.) Lamps on the DSS Consoles do not automatically update when changed. The change will update when the status of the extension changes. (B.) Changes to the DSS Consoles flash rates may effect the BLF color on the PC Attendant
3 (Wink Off)
4 (Double Wink On, then Off) 5 (Slow Flash) 6 (Double Wink Off, then On) 7 (Double Wink On, then Off)
920 - 141e
120 IPM
60 IPM
60 IPM
60 IPM
928 PROGRAMMING
telemanuals.com
1100 - DSS Console Options 1107 - DSS Console Lamp Table
Feature Cross Reference
"Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console"
PROGRAMMING 929
930 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 DCI software ports. 384i Available 288 DCI software ports.
IN
Use Program 1201 - DCI Setup to set the values of the DCI S-registers and LAPB registers. Use the S-registers to set communications options. Use the LAPB registers to set X.25 packet switching options. You can have different register entries for each of the DCI sub-types set in Program 1202. In 384i, refer to the "Order" option in Program 0005 for the DCI software port number. In 124i, the DCI software port number is the same as the extension to which it is connected. See the following charts for an explanation of each S-register and LAPB register, their ranges and default settings.
DCI S-Registers (Register Type 1) Register Description Range Default
Number of Rings Until Auto-Answer The number of rings required before the DCI port answers the call. Ring Count The register that stores the number or rings detected by the DCI Escape Character The decimal value of the ASCII character used for Escape Carriage Return Character The decimal value of the ASCII character used for carriage return Line Feed Character The decimal value of the ASCII character used for line feed. Backspace Character The decimal value of the ASCII character used as a backspace. Wait for Carrier After Dial During call setup, sets time DCI waits for carrier from remote modem before hanging up. Also Sets time DCI pauses when it encounters a W in the dial string. Carrier Detect Response Time Minimum duration of valid carrier signal. Lost Carrier to Hang Up Delay Length of time DCI waits before hanging up after loss of carrier (must be greater than register 9) Escape Code Guard Time Delay (guard) time before and after entering escape character.
0-127 (decimal)
43
0-127 (decimal)
13
0-127 (decimal)
10
1-255 (seconds)
30
9 10
12
50 (1 second)
PROGRAMMING 931
25
Delay to DTR In synchronous mode, sets interval between connection and examination of DTR. Also After connection, sets minimum duration of valid DTR signal. DTE/DCE Terminal Type You can configure a DCI-A Module (P/N 92266) as either a DCE of DTE device. Use the DCE (1) configuration if you have a straight-thru cable and you want to connect directly to a terminal or PC serial port. Use the DTE (0) configuration if you have a straight-thru cable and you want to connect directly to a modem. (This option requires system software 3.04. Prior to 3.04, this options was Register 59, Data Watchdog Timer.) Data Watchdog Timer (Low) If a data low condition exists for longer than this interval, the system disconnects the data call. This option is only available in system software prior to 3.04. Data Watchdog Timer(High) If a data high condition exists for longer than this interval, the system disconnects the data call. This option is only available in system software prior to 3.04. Packet Size Sets the size of the data packet. Packets exceeding this size are transmitted. Packets less than this size are not (unless timeout occurs - see register 63). Terminate Code The decimal value of the ASCII code used to end (terminate) a command line. Data Transmission Time Sets how long DCI waits before transmitting an incomplete packet. Use register 61 to set packet size. Result Code Send/Block Allows/prevents sending of Result Codes to device connected to DCI. Result Code Type Enables sending of Result Codes as words or numbers. Result Code Mode Determines which set of Result Codes are sent to device connected to DCI (Basic or Extended - see Table with DCI feature).
5 (50mS)
58
0 = DTE 1 = DCE
0 (DTE)
59
0 (disabled)
60
0 (disabled)
61
255
62
0-127 (decimal)
13 (CR)
63
0, 1-255 (0, 50-12750 mS) 0=disabled 0=Send 1=Do Not Send 0=Numeric 1=Words 0=Basic 1=Extended
5 (250 mS)
64
0 (Send)
1 (Words)
0 (Basic)
932 PROGRAMMING
65
1=300 BPS 2=600 BPS 3=1200 BPS 4=2400 BPS 5=4800 BPS 6=9600 BPS 7=19,200 BPS 0=1 stop bit 1=2 stop bits 0=7 data bits 1=8 data bits 0=No parity 1=Not used 2=Odd parity 3=Even parity 0=Control enabled 1=Disabled (normally on) 0=Control enabled 1=Disabled (normally on) 0=Control enabled 1=Disabled (follows RTS) 0=No flow control 1=RTS/CTS (hardware) flow control enabled 2=XON/XOFF between DCI and connected terminal 3=XON/XOFF between sender and receiver (DCI transparent)
6 (9600 BPS)
Stop Bit Sets the number of stop bits the DCI expects in the data stream Data Bits Sets the number of data bits the DCI expects in the data stream. Parity Sets the parity method the DCI expects in the data stream 66 Request to Send (RTS) Control Enables (0) or disables (1) RTS (pin 4) control. If disabled, the DCI holds RTS on. Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Control Enables (0) or disables (1) DTR (pin 20) control. If disabled, the DCI holds DTR on. Clear to Send (CD) Control Enables (0) or disables (1) CTS (pin 5) control. If disabled, CTS follows RTS (pin 4). Flow Control Sets flow control.
0 (1 stop bit)
1 (8 data bits)
0 (no parity)
PROGRAMMING 933
DCI X.25 Packet Switching (LAPB) Registers (Register Type 2) Register Description Range Default
Internal Calls 1 T1 Timer After the DCE (DCI) sends a packet, it must receive a response from the connected DTE within the T1 interval. If a response is not received, the DCE resends the packet. T2 Timer After the connected DTE receives a packet from the DCE, it must respond within the T2 interval. (T2 must be less than T1.) N1 The maximum number of bits in an I (Information Transfer) frame. N2 After T1 expires, N2 is the maximum number of transmissions and retransmissions of a packet allowed. K The maximum number of I (Information Transfer) frames a connected device may have unacknowledged (outstanding). 0-65535 mS 500 mS
0-65535 mS
250 mS
0-65535 bits
2080 bits
0-65535 times
20 times
0-7 frames
7 frames
External Calls 6 T1 Timer After the DCE (DCI) sends a packet, it must receive a response from the connected DTE within the T1 interval. If a response is not received, the DCE resends the packet. T2 Timer After the connected DTE receives a packet from the DCE, it must respond within the T2 interval. (T2 must be less than T1.) N1 The maximum number of bits in an I (Information Transfer) frame. N2 After T1 expires, N2 is the maximum number of transmissions and retransmissions of a packet allowed. K The maximum number of I (Information Transfer) frames a connected device may have unacknowledged (outstanding). 0-65535 mS 2000 mS
0-65535 mS
1000 mS
0-65535 bits
2080 bits
0-65535 times
7 times
10
0-7 frames
7 frames
PROGRAMMING 935
Description
124i Available 72 DCI software ports. 384i Available 288 DCI software ports. Additional port types are available in system software 3.04 and higher.
SB
For each DCI software port (1-144 and 145-288 in 384i, 1-72 in 124i), use Program 1202 - DCI Port Type to assign the DCI port type (RS-232-C or Centronics) and the DCI sub-type. Available types are: 0 (None) 1 (DCI connected to RS-232 DTE port) 2 (DCI connected to Centronics port) 3 (Not used) 4 (DCI connected to RS-232 DCE port) Each sub-type is a unique DCI configuration, with unique register settings (Program 1201). When programming, assign DCIs with the same configuration to the same sub-type. In 384i, refer to the "Order" option in Program 0005 for the DCI software port number. In 124i, the DCI software port number is the same as the extension to which it is connected. Conditions None
936 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available 288 DCI software ports and four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 1203 - DCI Tenant Group to assign a DCI software port (1-144, 145-288) to a Tenant Group (14). Refer to the "Order" option in Program 0005 for the DCI software port number. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 937
Description
124i Available 72 DCI software ports and eight DCI Department Groups. 384i Available 288 DCI software ports and 32 DCI Department Groups.
IN
Use Program 1204 - DCI Department Group to set up DCI Department Groups. The system allows up to 32 DCI Department Groups in 384i and eight in 124i. This program also lets you assign the priority of each DCI software port within a DCI Department Group. When calling a DCI Department Group, DCIs with a higher priority number (e.g., 1) are connected before DCIs with a lower priority number (e.g., 72). In 384i, refer to the "Order" option in Program 0005 for the DCI software port number. In 124i, the DCI software port number is the same as the extension to which it is connected. Be sure to also assign pilot numbers to the DCI Departments in Program 0507. Conditions None
938 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available eight DCI Toll Restriction classes. 384i Available 15 DCI Toll Restriction Classes.
IN
Use Program 1205 - DCI Toll Restriction Class to set the Toll Restriction Class (1-15 in 384i, 1-eight in 124i) for each DCI software port. The system uses Toll Restriction Class for outgoing (trunk) data calls. Toll Restriction Class does not affect internal data calls. For each DCI software port, you make one entry for each Night Service mode and the Power Failure mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode BACKUP = Power Failure Mode In 384i, refer to the "Order" option in Program 0005 for the DCI software port number. Conditions None
940 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 DCI software ports . 384i Available 288 DCI software ports
IN
After changing the register values in Program 1201, use Program 1206 - Initialize DCI to initialize the DCI software port changed. You must initialize a DCI software port before the changes you made in Program 1201 will take effect. In 384i, refer to the "Order" option in Program 0005 for the DCI software port number. In 124i, the DCI software port number is the same as the extension to which it is connected. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 941
Description
124i Available 24 Hotline pairs. 384i Available 50 Hotline pairs in each of four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 1207 - DCI Hotline Setup to set up a DCI Hotline ("nailed-up" connection) between an extension with a DCI Module and a destination DCI. When the user at the DCI Hotline originator presses the data key, the system automatically calls the programmed destination. In 384i, each Tenant Group has 50 Hotline pairs that you can assign. The 124i has 24 Hotline pairs. When assigning Hotline pairs, use the DCI extension numbers set in Program 0503. Conditions None
942 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available six ACI software ports (2 3-ACI Modules max.). 384i Available 192 ACI software ports (64 3-ACI Modules max.).
IN
Use Program 1301 - ACI Port Function to set the function of each software port on an Analog Communications Interface. Each ACI software port can have only one function (input, output or none). In 384i, refer to the "Order" option in Program 0005 for the ACI software port number. In 124i, the ACI software ports are the port into which the ACI is connected and the next two consecutive ports. Conditions
PROGRAMMING 943
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available 192 ACI software ports (64 3-ACI Modules max.).
IN
Use Program 1302 - ACI Tenant Group to assign an ACI software port (1-192) to a Tenant Group (1-4). Refer to the "Order" option in Program 0005 for the ACI software port number. Conditions None
944 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available six ACI software ports (2 3-ACI Modules max.) and four ACI Department Calling Groups. 384i Available 192 ACI software ports (64 3-ACI Modules max.) and 32 ACI Department Calling Groups.
IN
Use Program 1303 - ACI Department Calling Group to assign ACI software ports (1-192) to Department Groups. The 384i system has 32 ACI Department Groups; the 124i system has four. An ACI software port can only be in one group. ACIs in the same Department Group should also be in the same Tenant Group. In 384i, refer to the "Order" option in Program 0005 for the ACI software port number. In 124i, the ACI software ports are the port into which the ACI is connected and the next two consecutive ports. Also use this program to set the ACI software ports priority. When a call comes into the ACI Department Group, it connects to the ACI software port in order of their priority. A higher priority port (e.g., 1) receives calls before a lower priority port (e.g., 6). Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 945
946 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available eight Door Boxes distributed among the four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 1501 - Door Box Tenant Assignment to assign a Tenant Group (1-4) to each Door Box. The system can have up to eight Door Boxes (four on each PGDU PCB). Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 947
Description
124i Available 72 extensions and eight Door Boxes. 384i Available 256 extensions and eight Door Boxes.
IN
Use Program 1502 - Door Box Ring Assignments to assign Door Box ringing to extensions. If enabled (1), an extension rings when a caller presses the associated Door Boxs call button. If disabled (0), the extension does not ring. You make a separate entry for each extension and for each Door Box. A Door Box can ring any number of extensions. Conditions None
948 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available eight Door Boxes and one Chime Tone. 384i Available eight Door Boxes and three Chime Tones.
IN
Use Program 1503 - Door Box Chime Pattern to select the chime pattern for each Door Box. In 384i, there are three distinctive chime patterns. In 124i, there is only one chime pattern. Conditions None Default Setting
PROGRAMMING 949
950 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extensions and eight Internal Paging Groups; extensions not assigned to a group by default. 384i Available 32 Internal Paging Groups and 256 extensions; extensions assigned to group 1 by default.
IN
Use Program 1601 - Internal Paging Groups to assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). In 384i, each of the four Tenant Groups can have up to 32 Internal Paging Groups. The 124i can have up to eight Internal Paging Groups. An extension can be in only one Internal Paging Group. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 951
Description
124i Available eight Internal Paging Groups. 384i Available 32 Internal Paging Groups.
IN
Use Program 1602 - Internal Paging Group Names to assign names to Internal Paging Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system shows the names you program on the telephone displays. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press DSS1 three times. Press DND to toggle between upper and lower case letters.
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *). Clear the text entry if you want to start over.
DSS10
CLEAR
CLEAR Dialpad digits 0-9, # and *. Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
952 PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING 953
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available eight External Paging Zones allocated among four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 1603 - External Paging Zone Tenant to assign a Tenant Group to each External Paging zone. The system has eight External Paging zones that you can assign to one of four Tenant Groups. Each PGDU PCB can have four External Paging outputs (2 PCBs max. per system). When programming, the first zone used (on the first PGDU PCB) is zone 1; the last zone used (on the second PGDU PCB) is zone 8. If the system has Door Boxes, you lose one External Paging zone to each Door Box. Conditions None
954 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available eight External Paging zones and eight alarm circuits maximum (Items 11-18 not used). 384i Available eight External Paging zones and 16 alarm circuits maximum.
IN
Use Program 1604 - External Paging Zone Control to set the options for each External Paging zone. The options are: Broadcast splash tone before a Paging announcement (Item 1 in the chart below) Play Background Music over the zone when it is idle (Item 2 in the chart below) Broadcast alarm rings for the 16 PGDU PCB external alarms (Items 3-18 in the chart below). When programming, the first zone used (on the first PGDU PCB) is zone 1; the last zone used (on the second PGDU PCB) is zone 8. If the system has Door Boxes, you lose one External Paging zone to each Door Box. Refer to the following chart for a description of each item, its range and default setting.
External Paging Zone Control Options Option Description Range Default
Item 1
Broadcast Splash Tone Before Paging Use this option to enable or disable splash tone before Paging over an external zone. If enabled, the system broadcasts a splash tone before the External Paging announcement. Broadcast BGM When Idle Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting Background Music when it is idle. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 1 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 1. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 2 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 2. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 3 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 3. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 4 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 4. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 5 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 5.
Item 2
0 (BGM prevented)
Item 3
0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed)
0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented)
Item 4
Item 5
Item 6
Item 7
PROGRAMMING 955
Item 8
Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 6 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 6. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 7 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 7. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 8 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 8. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 9 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 9. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 10 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 10. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 11 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 11. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 12 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 12. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 13 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 13. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 14 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 14. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 15 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 15. Broadcast Alarm Signal for Alarm 16 Use this option to allow or prevent the External Paging zone you select from broadcasting alarm signals for external alarm 16.
0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 1 (Alarm signal allowed)
0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented) 0 (Alarm signal prevented)
Item 9
Item 10
Item 11
Item 12
Item 13
Item 14
Item 15
Item 16
Item 17
Item 18
PROGRAMMING 957
Description
124i Available 52 trunks. 384i Available 128 trunks.
IN
Use Program 1605 - Universal Night Answer to assign Universal Night Answer ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port (1-52 in 124i or 1-128 in 384i), you make a separate entry for each External Paging zone (1-8). When programming, the first zone used (on the first PGDU PCB) is zone 1; the last zone used (on the second PGDU PCB) is zone 8. If the system has Door Boxes, you lose one External Paging zone to each Door Box. For UNA ringing, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
15.
PROGRAMMING 959
Description
124i Available eight External Paging zones and eight External Paging Groups. 384i Available eight External Paging zones and eight External Paging Groups.
IN
Use Program 1606 - External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging zone to an External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when broadcasting announcements to the external zone. When programming, the first zone used (on the first PGDU PCB) is zone 1; the last zone used (on the second PGDU PCB) is zone 8. If the system has Door Boxes, you lose one External Paging zone to each Door Box. To simplify programming and troubleshooting, always make make the External Paging Zone Group the same number as the External Paging zone (i.e., 1 = 1, 2 = 2, etc.). Conditions None
960 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available eight Internal Paging zones. 384i Available 32 Internal Paging zones.
IN
Use Program 1607 - Internal Paging Tone to allow an extension to have normal (0), muted (1) or no (2) Internal Paging alert beeps before a Paging announcement. Conditions Muted tones can occur only if the extension user sets the telephone volume control switch to medium or high.
PROGRAMMING 961
Description
124i Available 72 extensions; All Call turned off by default. 384i Available 256 extensions; All Call turned on by default. Each of the four Tenant Groups can have their own All Call Paging zone.
IN
Use Program 1608 - All Call Internal Paging to allow or prevent All Call Internal Paging for each extension. If allowed, extension can place and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements. If prevented, extension can only make (not receive) All Call Internal Paging announcements. Each Tenant Group has their own All Call Internal Paging. Keep the following in mind when using this program: In 384i, users cannot make All Call Internal Paging announcements across Tenant Groups. Refer to Pro gram 1002 for the extension Tenant Group assignments. An extension can have All Call Internal Paging (set in this program) and be a member of a Paging Zone (set in Program 1601). Conditions None
962 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. 384i Available each of the four Tenant Groups can have their own All Call Paging zone.
IN
Use Program 1609 - All Call Paging Zone Name to assign a name to each Tenant Groups All Call Internal Paging zone. The system shows the names you program on the telephone displays. Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press DSS1 three times. Press DND to toggle between upper and lower case letters.
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *). Clear the text entry if you want to start over.
DSS10
CHECK
CLEAR
PROGRAMMING 963
964 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available eight Internal Paging zones and eight External Paging zones. 384i Available 32 Internal Paging zones and eight External Paging zones. Make a separate entry for each of the four Tenant Groups.
SA
Use Program 1610 - Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging Zone (1-8) to an Internal Paging Zone (1-32 in 384i, 1-8 in 124i) for Combined Paging. When an extension user makes a Combined Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone. In 384i, make sure the extensions assigned to the Internal Paging zone are in the same Tenant Group as the corresponding External Paging zone. Use the table below for the default assignments.
5.
6.
966 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Not available.
IN
PROGRAMMING 967
968 PROGRAMMING
DID
Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 15 users and 10 DISA Classes of Service. 384i Available 15 users and 15 DISA Classes of Service in each of four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 1801 - DISA Password to set the 6-digit DISA password and the DISA Class of Service for each user. In 384i, there are 15 users per Tenant Group, with one password and one DISA Class of Service assignment (from 1-15) for each user. This allows for up to 60 assignments. In 124i, there are 15 users with one password and one DISA Class of Service assignment (from 1-10) for each user. When a DISA caller enters a password, the system identifies the user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of Service in program 0412. When programming DISA Class of Service, you make one entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions (A.) The DISA Class of Service cannot be 0. (B.) You cannot use Programs 0406 and 1005 to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.
PROGRAMMING 969
970 PROGRAMMING
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1802 - DISA and OPA Operating Mode
1802 - DISA and OPA Operating Mode Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available one Tenant Group. 384i Available with a unique entry for each of four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 1802 - DISA and OPA Operating Mode to set the operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant (OPA) caller calls a busy or unanswered extension, dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (1). When setting the DISA and OPA Operating Mode, you make an entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode The options are: Item 1 = Time-out without dialing Item 2 = Unanswered or busy Item 3 = Misdial If the DISA Automated Attendant (OPA) trunk is set to Transfer (1), use Program 1803 to set the transfer destination. Conditions For Automated Attendant (OPA) callers, the call follows the setting of Item 3 only if Program 2209 = 0 for the trunk.
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1802 - DISA and OPA Operating Mode
Mode(REST) : For the Operating Mode selected, enter 0 to disconnect or 1 to Transfer in the Rest Mode. HOLD Item No? Repeat from step 4 to enter another DISA Operating Mode. OR HOLD + Repeat from step 3 to program another Tenant Group. OR HOLD + HOLD to exit.
972 PROGRAMMING
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination
1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 52 trunks and 16 Ring Groups. 384i Available 128 trunks and 128 Ring Groups. Voice Mail destination requires system software 3.04 or higher.
IN
Use Program 1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination to set the transfer destination for each DISA and Automated Attendant (OPA) trunk. In 384i prior to system software 3.04 and in 124i, the destination can be a Ring Group (1-128 in 384i, 1-16 in 124i). In 384i system software 3.04 or higher, the destination can be a Ring Group (1-127) or Voice Mail (128). The DISA or OPA calls routes to the destination if: An Operating Mode is set to 1 in Program 1802, and The caller causes the condition to occur. When assigning the transfer destination Ring Group, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions To have Automated Attendant overflow go to Voice Mail, enter the number of the Ring Group that contains just the Voice Mail ports (with ringing enabled).
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination
11. 12. HOLD TRK Port No? Repeat from step 3 to program another trunk. OR HOLD to exit.
974 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 trunks. 384i Available 128 trunks.
IN
Use Program 1804 - VAU Setup to assign the trunks that the Automated Attendant (VAU) should answer. Enter 4 for each trunk you want answered by the Automated Attendant (VAU). Make a separate entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
976 PROGRAMMING
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1805 - DID Translation Table Setup
1805 - DID Translation Table Setup Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available four DID Translation Tables with 200 entries each. 384i Available eight DID Translation Tables with 1500 entries each.
IN
Use Program 1805 - DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID Translation Tables. In 384i there are 1500 Translation Table entries that you can allocate among the eight Translation Tables. In 124i there are 200 Translation Table entries that you can allocate among the four Translation Tables. When entering data: For each Translation Table, specify the starting address that corresponds to the lowest numbered Transla tion Table entry for that table. The address is always one less than the entry (e.g., address 0000 in 384i is entry 1). After specifying the starting address, enter the total number of entries in the table. For example, if table 2 in 384i begins at entry 450 (address 0449) and has 100 entries, enter 100. The entries for table 2 would be 450-549 (addresses 0449-0548). Conditions None In 124i, the start address for table 1 is 000 and all 200 entries are in table 1.
PROGRAMMING 977
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1806 - DID Translation Table Number Conversion
1806 - DID Translation Table Number Conversion Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available Four DID Translation Tables with 200 entries each. DID Routing to the VAU Automated Attendant requires Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. Routing by trunk to a specific VAU message requires Base 4.02 or higher and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Available eight DID Translation Tables with 1500 entries each. DID Routing to the VAU Automated Attendant requires system software 3.06.16 or higher. Limited capabiliteis available with 3.06.09. Routing by trunk to a specific VAU message requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
IN
Use Program 1806 - DID Translation Table Number Conversion to specify for each Translation Table entry (1-1500 in 384i, 1-200 in 124i): The digits received by the system (eight max.) The extension the system dials after translation (24 digits max.) The name that should show on the dialed extensions display when it rings (eight characters max.) Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press DSS1 three times. Press DND to toggle between upper and lower case letters.
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it.
978 PROGRAMMING
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1806 - DID Translation Table Number Conversion
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
DSS10
Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *). Clear the text entry if you want to start over. Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
CHECK
Conditions None
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1806 - DID Translation Table Number Conversion
8. HOLD 1806:Table_nnnn Name Enter the name associated with the Translation Table entry. Table No? Repeat from step 3 to program another Translation Table entry. OR HOLD to exit.
9. 10.
980 PROGRAMMING
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1807 - DID Translation Table Expected Digits
1807 - DID Translation Table Expected Digits Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available four DID Translation Tables. 384i Available eight DID Translation Tables.
IN
For each Translation Table (1-8), use Program 1807 - DID Translation Table Expected Digits to enter the number of digits the table expects to receive from the telco. Use this program to make the system compatible with three- and four-digit DID service. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 981
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1808 - DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
1808 - DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 16 Trunk Groups and four DID Translation Tables. 384i Available 128 Trunk Groups eight DID Translation Tables.
IN
Use Program 1808 - DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the DID Trunk Groups to DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own group. If you have more than one type of DID trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk Group. For each Trunk Group, you make a Translation Table entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
982 PROGRAMMING
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1809 - DID Intercept Ring Group
1809 - DID Intercept Ring Group Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available four DID Translation Tables and 16 Ring Groups. In Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher, Voice Mail as the destination is available by entering 16. VAU Automated Attendant as the destination requires Base 4.02 or higher and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. 384i Available eight DID Translation Tables and 128 Ring Groups. Voice Mail as the destination is available (by entering 128). VAU Automated Atendant as the destination (by entering 127) requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
IN
For each DID Translation Table, use Program 1809 - DID Intercept Ring Group to assign the destination for DID Intercept. The destination can be a Ring Group (1-126 in 384i, 1-14 in 124i), the operator (0), Voice Mail (128 in 384i or 16 in 124i), or the VAU (127 in 384i or 15 in 124i). For each table, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Use Programs 0909 and 0910 to set Ring Groups. Conditions None
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1809 - DID Intercept Ring Group
Group(REST) : For the Translation Table selected in step 3, assign the DID Intercept Ring Group for the Rest Mode. HOLD Table Area No? Repeat from step 3 to program another DID Translation Table. OR HOLD to exit.
984 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available one Tenant Group. 384i Available unique entries for each of four Tenant Groups.
IN
For each Tenant Group, use Program 1810 - DID Intercept Options to selectively enable DID Vacant Number Intercept, Busy Intercept, Ring-No-Answer Intercept and DID Camp-On. Refer the the following chart for a description of each item, its range and default setting.
Item 1
Vacant Number Intercept Use this option to enable or disable Vacant Number Intercept for the Tenant Group you select. Busy Intercept Use this option to enable or disable Busy Intercept for the Tenant Group you select. Ring-No-Answer Intercept Use this option to enable or disable Ring-No-Answer Intercept for the Tenant Group you select. DID Camp-On Use this option to enable or disable DID Camp-On for the Tenant Group you select.
0 (Disabled)
Item 2
0 (Disabled)
Item 3
0 (Disabled)
Item 4
0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
Conditions None
7.
986 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 10 DISA Classes of Service and 36 trunk routes. 384i Available 15 DISA Classes of Service in each of four Tenant Groups and 64 trunk routes.
IN
Use Program 1811 - DISA Route to assign the Trunk Group route chosen when a user places a DISA call into the system and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 0906. Enable or disable the DISA callers ability to dial 9 in Program 0412 (Item 2). You assign a route to each DISA Class of Service (1-10). The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based on the password the DISA caller dials. When programming, you make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions If the system has Automatic Route Selection, dialing 9 accesses ARS.
PROGRAMMING 987
988 PROGRAMMING
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1812 - DISA Toll Restriction Level
1812 - DISA Toll Restriction Level Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 15 DISA users and eight Toll Restriction Classes. 384i Available 15 DISA users, in addition to 15 Toll Restriction Classes allocated among the four Tenant Groups.
IN
For systems that use Toll Restriction, use Program 1812 - DISA Toll Restriction Level to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15 in 384i and 1-8 in 124i) to each DISA user (1-15). The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Program 0701. The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service and user, which is determined by the password the caller dials. When programming, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions You cannot use Program 1004 to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1812 - DISA Toll Restriction Level
13. 14. HOLD Class No? Repeat from step 4 to select another user. OR HOLD + Repeat from step 3 to select another Tenant Group. OR HOLD + HOLD to exit.
990 PROGRAMMING
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1813 - Alternate Trunk Routing for DISA Calls
1813 - Alternate Trunk Routing for DISA Calls Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 10 DISA Classes of Service and 36 trunk routes. 384i Available 15 users and 15 DISA Classes of Service in each of four Tenant Groups and 64 trunk routes.
IN
Use Program 1813 - Alternate Trunk Routing for DISA Calls to define the trunk route selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route selected is based on the DISA callers Class of Service, which is in turn determined by the password the caller dials. Use Program 0518 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code. Use Program 0906 to set trunk routes. Conditions None
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID 1813 - Alternate Trunk Routing for DISA Calls
14. Repeat from step 4 to select another DISA Class of Service. OR HOLD + Repeat from step 2 to select another Tenant Group. OR HOLD + HOLD to exit.
992 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available.
IN
PROGRAMMING 993
994 PROGRAMMING
Options
Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 96 extension/virtual extension ports and 52 trunk ports. 384i Available 384 extension/virtual extension ports and 128 trunk ports.
IN
Use Program 2001 - Copy Command to copy an extensions programming to another extension. This can save time during system setup for extensions that have similar programming. You can copy any of the commands in the following chart:
0104 - DP to DTMF Conversion Options 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A) 0902 - Trunk Ring Tone Range 0904 - Trunk Tenant (384i only) 0907 - Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 0908 - Trunk Group Routing for DCI Ports 0910 - Trunk Ring Group Assignment 0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment 0914 - Setting the Music on Hold Source 0915 - ISDN (G4) Fax Line Ring Group 0916 - ISDN Data Communication Trunk Ring Group (384i only) 0921 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part B) 1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A) 1002 - Extension Tenant
1004 - Toll Restriction Class 1005- Class of Service 1006 - Programming Function Keys (Part A) 1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B) 1010 - External Alarm Extensions 1014 - Park Group 1015 - Universal Answer/Auto Answer 1103 - DSS Console Key Assignments 1202 - DCI Port Type 1203 - DCI Tenant Group 1205 - DCI Toll Restriction Class 1502 - Door Box Ring Assignments 1601 - Internal Paging Groups 1605 - Universal Night Answer
Conditions None
5.
6.
7.
8.
996 PROGRAMMING
2000 - Copy and Clear Options 2002 - Initialize Extension Numbers and Names
2002 - Initialize Extension Numbers and Names Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2002 - Initialize Extension Numbers and Names to initialize the systems extension numbers and names. This option applies to telephone, DCI and ACI extensions. After initialization, only the extension connected to port 1 (extension 301) functions. Conditions You can only implement this option from extension port 1.
PROGRAMMING 997
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2003 - Initialize Service Codes to initialize the systems Service Codes.
!! CAUTION !!
After initialization, only the Program Entry Service Code (#*#*) remains.
Conditions None
998 PROGRAMMING
2100 - Automatic Route Selection 2101 - ARS Call Route Options Table
2101 ARS Call Route Options Table 2100- Automatic Route Selection Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 16 Trunk Groups. 384i Available 128 Trunk Groups.
IN
Use Program 2101 - ARS Call Route Options Table to specify the routing options for the 64 Selection Numbers. Options include: Rate Period (1-8) ARS Class of Service (0-27) Service Number (Trunk Groups 1-128 in 384i, 1-16 in 124i) Dial Treatment (0-15) Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 999
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2102 - ARS Six Digit Table to set up the ARS Six Digit Table. This gives ARS the capability to route a call based on both the NPA and NNX a user dials. During programming, you set up an NNX list for each NPA you enter in the Six Digit Table. Conditions None
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2103 - ARS Three Digit Table to set up the ARS Three Digit Table. Normally, the Three Digit Table sets the routing for the majority of NPA calls. It also sets the routing for all 1 + NNX calls (unless overridden by Separate Routing in Program 2108). Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1001
Description
124i No available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2104 - Conflict Area to indicate if the system is in a conflict or non-conflict area. Conditions None
1002 PROGRAMMING
2100 - Automatic Route Selection 2105 - Minimum COS for Dialing 976
2105 - Minimum COS for Dialing 976 Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2105 - Minimum COS for Dialing 976 to allow or restrict ARS users from dialing exchange 976 services. The system restricts according to the extensions ARS Class of Service (set in Program 2110). Extensions with an ARS Class of Service higher than the Program 2105 entry cannot dial 976. Extensions with an ARS Class of Service equal to or lower than the Program 2105 entry can dial 976. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1003
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2106 - ARS Rate Period Table to define the ARS Rate Periods (1-8). You can define up to eight Rate Periods for different times of the day and days of the week. ARS divides the day into 48 1/2 hour Time of Day Patterns. During programming, you assign one of the eight Rate Periods to each of the 48 Time of Day Patterns. The table below shows the default rate periods.
Default Rate Periods Rate Period Time/Day
Mon-Fri, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM Mon-Fri, 5:00 PM to 11:00 PM Sat, Sun, Holiday, 8:00 AM to 11:00 PM All days, 11:00 PM to 8:00 AM Not defined
6.
1004 PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING 1005
Description
124i Available. EXCPRU 2.18 or higher allows you to enter # and * characters in ARS Dial Treatments. Base 4.02 or higher and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher allows X in ARS Dial Treatments. 384i Available. System software 3.05.06 or higher allows you to enter # and * characters in ARS Dial Treatments. System software 3.07.10 or higher allows X in ARS Dial Treatments.
IN
Use Program 2107 - ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 2101. The ARS Dial Treatment options are: Fnn Fnn is the ARS Authorization code entry. If the extension from which the call is placed has an ARS Class of Service equal to or greater than the entry specified by nn, ARS requires an Authorization Code. Set the ARS Authorization Codes in Program 2109. 3 Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial call. 2 Delete the leading if dialed as part of the initial call. 1 Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the initial call. Inpa Insert the NPA specified by npa. Dnn Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example, D041234 outdials 1234. Valid entries are 0-9, #, *, Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause). R Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications. E End of the Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code. X When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment in order for the system to output the extension number of the calls originator to the black box for the E911 feature. Use the following chart when entering and editing text for Dial Treatments. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press DSS1 three times.
Keys for Entering Dial Treatment Text Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it.
1006 PROGRAMMING
Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *). Clear the text entry if you want to start over. Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
DSS10
CHECK
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1007
1008 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. E911 Compatibility not available. 384i Available. E911 Compatibility requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
IN
Use Program 2108 - Separate ARS Routing Options to set unique routing for: Operator-assisted (0+) calls International (011) calls Directory assistance (411, 1411 and 555 calls) Emergency (911) calls Refer to the following chart for a description of each Separate ARS Routing Option, its range and default setting. When assigning Selection Numbers to the options, remember that Selection Number 0 always uses Trunk Group 1.
Separate ARS Routing Options Option Range Default
Operator-assisted Calls Use this option to assign the Selection Number ARS uses for all operator-assisted (0+) calls. International Calls Use this option to assign the Selection Number ARS uses for all international (011) calls. Directory Assistance Calls Use this option to assign the Selection Number ARS uses for all directory assistance (411, 1411 and 555) calls. Emergency Calls Use this option to assign the Selection Number ARS uses for emergency (911) calls. The system also uses this entry for E911 Compatibility. Conditions None
0-64
0-64
0-64
0-64
5. 6. 7.
1010 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 72 extensions. 384i Available 256 extensions.
IN
Use Program 2109 - ARS Authorization Codes to enter the ARS Authorization Codes for each extension. ARS Dial Treatments (set in Program 2107) may require users to enter Authorization Codes before dialing. Authorization Codes can be up to 10 digits long, using 0-9, # and #. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1011
Description
124i Available 72 extensions. 384i Available 256 extensions.
IN
Use this program to assign an extensions ARS Class of Service. Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route an extensions calls. When programming, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions ARS does not use Class of Service assignments made in Program 1005.
1012 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2111 - ARS Equal Access Control to choose the Selection Numbers (1-64) ARS will use for Equal Access (10XXX) calls. You make two choices: The Selection Number ARS uses for directly-dialed (10XXX + 1) Equal Access calls The Selection Number ARS uses for operator-assisted (10XXX + 0) Equal Access calls This program only applies to calls placed using ARS. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1013
1014 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2201 - VAU Initialization to initialize (erase) the VAU messages. You must initialize after initially installing a VAU Module. You can also initialize any time you want to erase your VAU messages and start over. There are three initialization options :
Initialization Option Description
1 2 3
Erase all VAU messages and Personal Greetings Erase only VAU messages Erase only Personal Greetings
PROGRAMMING 1015
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2202 - VAU Message Length to set the maximum length of VAU messages (Item 1) and Personal Greetings (Item 2). The range is from 1 to 225 seconds. Conditions None
1016 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available. 384i Available with a separate entry for each of the four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 2203 - General Message Number to specify the VAU message number (01-16) you want to use for the General Message. In 384i, you make a separate entry for each Tenant Group (1-4). Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1017
Description
124i Available 16 Ring Groups. 384i Available 128 Ring Groups with a separate entry for each of the four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 2204 - VAU No Answer Destination to set the VAU No Answer Destination Ring Group (1-128). When all VAU ports are busy, incoming DILs and DISA calls wait for the VAU No-Answer Time (Program 0405 Item 63) and then ring the VAU No Answer Destination Ring Group. In 384i, you make a separate entry for each Tenant Group. Conditions None
1018 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 trunks. 384i Available 128 trunks.
IN
Use Program 2205 - OPA Message Assignment to assign the VAU message (1-16) an outside caller hears when their call is answered by the Automated Attendant (OPA). When programming, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
2200 - VAU Module Options 2206 2206 Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Not available.
1020 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 trunks. 384i Available 128 trunks.
IN
Use Program 2207 - 900 Preamble to assign the 900 preamble to trunks. For each trunk that should have the 900 Preamble, enter the number of the VAU message (1-16) that is your recorded preamble message. Enter 0 for no preamble. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1021
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2208 - VAU Password to enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system will allow them to record, listen to and or erase the VAU messages. Conditions None
1022 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 trunks. 384i Available 128 trunks.
IN
Use Program 2209 - OPA Error Message Assignment to assign the OPA error message. For each trunk that the VAU Automated Attendant will answer, enter the VAU message (1-16) the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter 0 (i.e., no error message), the call reroutes according to Program 1802 Item 3 and Program 1803. For each trunk, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
12.
1024 PROGRAMMING
2200 - VAU Module Options 2210 - Automated Attendant Single Digit Codes
2210 - Automated Attendant Single Digit Codes Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available. 384i Available.
IN
Use Program 2210 - Automated Attendant Single Digit Codes to set up single digit dialing through the VAU Automated Attendant. This gives VAU Automated Attendant callers single key access to extensions, the company operator, Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VAU Message set to answer outside calls (see Program 2205), you specify: The digit the Automated Attendant caller dials (1-12, where 10 = 0, 11 = * and 12 = #). (Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits 3 and 4, outside callers will not be able to dial system extensions.) The destination reached (four digits max.) when the caller dials the specified digit. The destination can be an extension, a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master number. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1025
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available make a separate entry for each of the four Tenant Groups.
IN
1026 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 trunks. 384i Available 128 trunks.
IN
Use Program 2301 - DID/E&M Start Signaling to set the start signaling mode for DID and tie trunks. DID and tie trunks can use either immediate start or wink start signaling. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1027
Description
124i Available 11 tie line Classes of Service and 52 trunks. 384i Available 16 tie line Classes of Service in each of four Tenant Groups and 128 trunks.
IN
Use Program 2302 - Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to a tie line. In 384i, there are 16 tie line Classes of Service in each of the four Tenant Groups (64 total). In 124i, there are 11 tie line Classes of Service. Use this program with program 0412, DISA & Tie Trunk Class of Service Options. For each tie line, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions You cannot use Programs 0406 and 1005 to assign Class of Service to tie lines.
1028 PROGRAMMING
2300 - Tie Line Options 2303 2303 Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Not available. 384i Not available.
IN
PROGRAMMING 1029
Description
124i Available 52 trunks and 36 trunk routes. 384i Available 128 trunks and 64 trunk routes.
IN
Use Program 2304 - Tie Line Route to assign the trunk group route (1-64 in 384i, 1-36 in 124i) chosen when a user seizes a tie line and dials 9. (Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 0906.) If the system has Automatic Route Selection, dialing 9 accesses ARS. You make a separate entry for each tie line - for each Night Service Mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions None
1030 PROGRAMMING
2300 - Tie Line Options 2305 - Inbound Trunk Outgoing Call Restriction
2305 - Inbound Trunk Outgoing Call Restriction Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available 16 trunk groups. 384i Available 128 trunk groups.
IN
Use Program 2305 - Inbound Trunk Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix for outgoing trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a tie line). For each inbound trunk group, enable or disable access to each CO trunk group. In 384i, you can have separate matrixes for each of the four Tenant Groups. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1031
2300 - Tie Line Options 2306 - Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
2306 - Tie Line Toll Restriction Class Sorts Data Updates CEU Can be Copied
Description
124i Available Eight Tie Line Toll Restriction Classes and 52 trunks. 384i Available 15 Tie Line Toll Restriction Classes in each of four Tenant Groups and 128 trunks.
IN
Use Program 2306 - Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction Class for each tie line. In 384i, there are 15 Toll Restriction Classes in each of four Tenant Groups (60 total). In 124i, there are eight Toll Restriction Classes. The system uses the class you enter here in Program 0701. For each tie line, you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode: DAY = Day Mode NIT = Night Mode MID = Midnight Mode REST = Rest Mode Conditions You cannot use Program 1004 to assign Toll Restriction to tie lines.
1032 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available 124i has 200 Caller ID bins numbered 000-199. 384i Available 1000 Caller ID Table addresses numbered 000-999.
IN
Use Program 2401 - Caller ID Table Setup to assign the 384i Caller ID Table to Tenant Groups. The Caller ID Table has 1000 possible entries (bins), assigned to addresses 000-999. In this program, you allocate starting address and a range of Caller ID Table entry addresses to each Tenant Group. Use the chart below to keep track of your Caller ID Table assignments. Youll need this information when entering data in Program 2402.
384i Caller ID Table Setup Tenant Group Start Address (0-999) Entries (0-1000)
Conditions None
8.
1034 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 200 Caller ID Table entries. 384i Available 1000 Caller ID Table entries.
IN
Use Program 2402 - Caller ID Table Entries to create a database of incoming Caller ID numbers (DNs) and associated names. This is important for Single Message Format calls. With these types of calls, the telco only supplies the incoming number not the name. The system looks up the DN in the Caller ID Table and sends the associated name to the telephones display. In 384i, use the chart provided with program 2401 to locate the correct Caller ID Table addresses for each Tenant Group. Refer to the T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility) feature on page 483 for additional ways to use this program. Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press DSS1 three times. Press DND to toggle between upper and lower case letters.
Keys for Entering Names Use this key . . . When you want to . . .
Enter characters A-D. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters E-H. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters I-L. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters M-P. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters Q-T. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter characters U-Z. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a hyphen (-). After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter a blank space. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter extended ASCII characters. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Enter punctuation marks. Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press check to have system accept it. Save text entry as part of name after you select it. You need to press CHECK after selecting characters from DSS keys 1-10. You dont need to press CHECK after dialing a dial pad digit (0-9, # or *).
DSS10
CHECK
PROGRAMMING 1035
Clear the text entry if you want to start over. Enter numbers, # and * as part of the name. You dont need to press CHECK after entering these characters.
Conditions None
1036 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available DCI software ports are 1-72. 384i Available DCI software ports are 1-288, Make a separate entry for each of the four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use Program 2403 - Caller ID Printer Port to assign the DCI software port number the system will use to output Caller ID information. In 384i, the DCI Module software port numbers are 1-144. The 3-DCI Unit software port numbers are 145-288. You can have a different assignment for each Tenant Group. In 124i, the DCI software port numbers are 1-72. Refer to the "Caller ID" feature for the format of the Caller ID output string. Also, refer to Program 0005 for more on DCI software port assignments. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1037
Description
124i ANI/DNIS Compatibility requires EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. It is not available in Base software. 384i Available requires system software 3.06.02 or higher.
IN
Use Program 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options to set the service options for T1 ANI/DNIS trunks. ANI/DNIS trunks must be immediate start or wink start T1 trunks with E&M signaling. The system allows 15 distinct ANI/DNIS Service Options. You assign ANI/DNIS Service Options to trunks in 0924. Refer to the following chart for a description of ANI/DNIS Service Option, its range and default setting.
ANI/DNIS Service Options Option Description Range Default
Item 1
ANI/DNIS Receive Format Use this option to specify the format of the ANI/DNIS data received from the telco. Make sure your entry is compatible with the service the telco provides. (The character * indicates a delimiter.) 0 = Address (called number without delimiters) 1 = *ANI* 2 = *DNIS* 3 = *ANI*Address* 4 = *ANI*DNIS* 5 = *DNIS*ANI* Delimiter Dial Code This option defines the character telco uses as a delimiter (see entries 1-9 in Item 1 above). Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. Routing Search Criteria (Data Source) This option specifies the source of the data the system uses to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. The choices are: 0 = No Routing. The system assumes an error has occurred and routes according to the setting in Item 8. 1 = Routes on Received DNIS or Address Data. The data source is the received DNIS or address data. This option requires that Item 1 be 0 or 2-5. 2 = Routes on Received ANI Data. The data source is the received ANI data. This option requires that Item 1 be 1 or 3-5.
0-5
0 (Address)
Item 2
0-9, # and *
Item 3
0-2
0 (No routing)
1038 PROGRAMMING
Item 4
Route Data The option sets how the system uses the route data (gathered in Item 3) to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. The choices are: 0 = Dial Data (From Caller ID Table Name Field) The system uses the Caller ID Table specified in Item 7 below for inbound routing. The data in the Caller ID Table Name field is used as dial data for routing. For this entry, the Name field entry can be an extension number, a Department Group pilot number or the Voice Mail or ACD master number. 1 = Trunk Ring Group (From Caller ID Table Name Field) Like entry 0 above, the system uses the Caller ID Table specified in Items 6 and 7 below for inbound routing. The data in the Caller ID Table Name field is used as dial data for routing. For this entry, the Name field entry must be a Trunk Ring Group number (1-128). 2 = DID Translation Table With this option, the system uses the DID Translation Tables set up in Programs 1805 and 1806 for inbound ANI/DNIS routing. In addition, use Program 1808 to associate the ANI/DNIS Trunk Group with the DID Translation Table you want to use. Refer to the Direct Inward Dialing feature for more on setting up DID Translation Tables.
0-2
Item 5
ANI Displayed as Caller ID Use this option to set if ANI data should appear on telephone displays as part of Caller ID display. The options are: 0 = Caller ID Off The system does not search the Caller ID table for a name. Instead, the telephone display will show the name programmed into the DID Translation Table (Program 1806) used if Item 4 above is 2. Otherwise, no name displays. 1 = Caller ID On The telephones display will show the ANI name as Caller ID data for the incoming ANI/DNIS call. This can occur if: The ANI number received has a name associated with it entered into the Caller ID Table addresses specified in Item 6. The format selected in Item 1 must include an ANI number. Program 0406 Item 123 (Caller ID Display) must be 1 (enabled).
0, 1
PROGRAMMING 1039
Item 6
ANI Caller ID Table Setup Use this option to define which part of the Caller ID Table set up in Program 2402 the system will use for ANI/DNIS Caller ID lookups. This is required if Items 4 and 5 above are 1 (Caller ID On). When you specify a starting address and length, the system uses that part of the table for lookups. ANI Routing Table Setup Use this option to define which part of the Caller ID Table set up in Program 2402 the system will use for ANI/DNIS routing. When you specify a starting address and length, the system uses that part of the table for routing. If the incoming ANI/DNIS number data matches the Number entry in the table, the system routes according to the associated Name data. That data can be an extension, Department Group pilot number, the Voice Mail master number or a Trunk Ring Group (depending on the setting in Item 4). Routing on ANI/DNIS Error This option lets you determine how the system will handle an ANI/DNIS call if a data error is detected in the incoming data string. The options are: 0 = Play busy tone to caller 1 = Route the caller to the Ring Group specified in Program 1803 Routing when Destination Busy or Unanswered This option lets you determine how the system will handle an ANI/DNIS call if the destination is busy or doesnt answer. The options are: 0 = System will play ringback or busy tone to the caller - whichever is required. 1 = System will route the caller to the Ring Group specified in Program 1803. Calling Number Address Length When Item 1 = 0 (ANI/DNIS receive format is address), use this option to specify the address length. The choices are from 1 to 8 digits in length.
Item 7
Item 8
0 or 1
Item 9
0 or 1
Item 10
1-8
Conditions None
1040 PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING 1041
1042 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available 256 extension ports.
IN
Use Program 2501 - PC Attendant Console Port Assignment to assign an extension port (1-256) to each PC Attendant Console. You can install up to two consoles in the system. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1043
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available two PC Attendant Consoles allocated among the four Tenant Groups.
IN
Use 2502 - PC Attendant Console Tenant to assign the PC Attendant Consoles to the four Tenant Groups. A console can belong to any combination of Tenant Groups. For each Tenant Group, enter the Remote Service Center telephone number. This is the number the system dials for Automatic Fault Reporting. The number can be up to 24 digits long, using the characters 0-9, # and *. Conditions None
1044 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Not available. 384i Available Item 1 (Attendant Camp On) only.
IN
Use Program 2503 - PC Attendant Console Options to assign various options for the PC Attendant Console. The entries you make in this program affect all the systems consoles. Refer to the table below for the description of each item, its data entry range and its default value.
PC Attendant Console Options Item Description Range Default
Item 1
Attendant Camp On Use this option to enable or disable Attendant Camp On for the PC Attendant Consoles.
0 (Disabled) 1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1045
1046 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available 52 trunks. 384i Available 128 trunks.
IN
Use Program 2601 - T1 Setup to designate the trunks on the T1/PRI Interface PCB for loop start (0) or ground start (1) operation. You can make a different assignment for each trunk on each T1/PRI Interface PCB. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1047
Description
124i Available three maximum PCBs per system. 384i Available five maximum PCBs per system.
IN
Use Program 2602 - T1 Clock Source to select the clock source for each T1/PRI Interface PCB. The clock source can be internal (1) or external (2). If set for internal, the PCB uses its own clock. If set for external, the PCB uses the clock provided by the telco. Conditions None
1048 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available with Base 4.02 or higher and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. In earlier versions, use Program 0407 instead. 384i Available with system software 3.07.10 or higher. In earlier versions, use Program 0407 instead.
IN
Use Program 3001 - Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an extensions Class of Service. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 1005 - Class of Service. The 384i has 15 Classes of Service in each of four Tenant Groups. Refer to the following chart for a description of each Account Code option, its range and default setting.
Account Code Setup Item Description Range Default
Account Code Mode Use this option to select the Account Code Mode (0-3).
0 (Account Codes disabled) 1 (Account Codes optional) 2 (Account Codes required but not verified) 3 (Account Codes required and verified) 0 (Account Codes for both toll and local calls) 1 (Account Codes just for local calls) 0 (Account Codes for incoming calls disabled) 1 (Account Codes for incoming calls enabled) 0 (Account Codes displayed) 1 (Account Codes hidden)
0 (Disabled)
Forced Account Code Toll Call Setup Use this option enable Account Codes for all calls or just toll calls. Account Codes for Incoming Calls Use this option to allow users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any codes entered dial out on the connected trunk. Hiding Account Codes Use this option to either hide or show the Account Codes on a telephones display.
Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1049
5.
6. 7.
1050 PROGRAMMING
Description
124i Available requires Base 4.02 or higher and EXCPRU or higher. 384i Available requires system software 3.07.10 or higher.
IN
Use Program 3002 - Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the Verified Account Code list. You can enter up to 1000 codes from 3-16 digits long, using the characters 0-9 or #. Use the FLASH key to enter a wild card. For example, the entry FLASH234 means the user can enter 0234-9234. Conditions None
PROGRAMMING 1051
1052 PROGRAMMING
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
N/A
2.
If an entry had a different value in a prior software level, the "historical" entry is shown in a row just below the current entry. Look at Program 0401 Item 2 as an example. In software levels prior to 124i EXCPRU 2.18, the entry was 0. The remainder of the row is shaded in gray to indicate that the change only applies to 124i EXCPRU.
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
0 < 2.18=0
PROGRAMMING 1053
1054 PROGRAMMING
Program 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 0110 0111 0112 0114
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
0115
0116
Duration: Pause: Type: Type: Trk No: 1- 128 Trk nnn: N/A N/A N/A Refer to chart Freq:nn Freq:nn Dur:nn Refer to chart Refer to chart Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 Item 13 Item 14 Item 15 Item 16 Item 17 Item 18 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3
N/A
75 75 15 10 8 8 4 5 50 78 9 1 13 38 13 63 60 30 1 1 20 59 19 99 19 69 19 64 1 1 1
150
75
150
156
78
156
199
99
199
129
64
127
129
Program
Item/Prompt Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 Item 13 Item 14 Item 15 Item 16 Item 17 Item 18 Item 19 Item 19 Item 19 Item 20 Item 20 Item 20 Item 21 Item 21 Item 21 Item 22 Item 22 Item 22 Item 23 Item 23 Item 23 Item 24 Item 24 Item 24 Item 25 Item 25 Item 25 Item 26 Item 26 Item 26 Item 27 Item 27 Item 27 Item 28 Item 28 Item 28 Item 29 Item 29
Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 1 Type 2
124i Base 3.04 Reserve 6 Reserve 6 Reserve 6 Reserve 7 Reserve 10 8 1 Reserve 2 Reserve 132 132 42 167 167 57 42 20 3 0 0 0 57 29 8 0 0 0 87 20 3 0 0 0 112 29 8 0 29 0 1 3
384i 3.07.34 5 1 6 6 4
124i PC Program 0 0 0 0 0
384i PC Program 5 1 6 6 4
1 2
Reserve Reserve
0 0
1 2
Program
Item/Prompt Item 29 Type 3 Item 30 Type 1 Item 30 Type 2 Item 30 Type 3 Item 31 Type 1 Item 31 Type 2 Item 31 Type 3 Item 32 Type 1 Item 32 Type 2 Item 32 Type 3 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 Port 1- Port 8 Power Feed Detection Function Timer 1 Data: Timer 2 Data: Timer 3 Data: Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 Item 13
0117
0118
0119
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
N/A
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0123
Program
Item/Prompt Item 14 Item 15 Item 16 Item 17 Item 1- 4 T200 T201 T202 T203 Item 1 Data: Item 2 Data: Item 3 Data: Item 4 Data: Item 5 Data: Item 6 Data: Item 7 Data: Item 8 Data: Item 9 Data: Item 10 Data: T301: T302: T303: T304: T305: T306: T307: T308: T309: T310: T312: T313: T314: T316: T317: T318: T319: T320: T321:
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0124
0125
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
19 11
0126
78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Program
Item/Prompt T322: T3M1: Item No. 1 Data: Item No. 2 Data: Sta Port No. 1256 DSP Type: Item 1- 128 DSP Type: Format: Type 1: Type 2: Type 3: Type 4: Type 5: Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 Item 13 Item 14 Item 15 Item 16 Item 17 Item 18 Item 19 Item 20 Item 21 Item 22 N/A Item 1 Item 2
124i EXCPRU 97 28
0127
0128
N/A N/A 0 0 42 38 6 10 3 6 30 25 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2 7
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
1 1
0132
0133
15 7 20 7 15 10 8 8 4 5 25 3 25 10 48 12 44 3 19 8 27 13
0134 0135
Program
Item/Prompt Item 3 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 Item 13 Item 14 Item 15 Item 16 Item 17 Item 18 Item 19 Item 20 Item 21 Item 22 Item 23 Item 24 Item 25 Item 26 Item 27 Item 28 Item 29 Item 30 Item 31 Item 32 Item 33 Item 34 Item 35 Item 36 Item 37 Item 38 Item 39 Item 40 Item 41 Item 42 Item 43 Item 44 Item 45 Item 46
0136
124i Base 3.04 6 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
384i 3.07.34 15 15 6 6 6 6 6 10 10 7 7 10 50 10 6 18 18 13 15 10 7 3 25 25 3 3 12 45 13 3 19 8 27 9 9 9 9 9 3 1 5 5 5 25 30 10
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Program
Item/Prompt Item 47 Item 48 Item 49 Item 50 Item 51 Item 52 Item 53 Item 54 Item 55 Item 56 Item 57 Item 58 Item 59 Item 60 Item 61 Item 62 Item 1: Item 2: Item 3: Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 RLS Option ACK Option Status ENQ Bch MT Cause Option Reset Respon: Reset ACK: DL Establish: DL Release: Index: 1- 16 Line 1: Line 2:
0137
0138
124i Base 3.04 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0139
Item/Prompt
124i Base 3.04 DX-2NA 3 2 Customer 1 0000 3 Customer 2 9999 4 N/A N/A N/A 0000 0000
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
0202
User No 2 PWD: Level: User No 3 PWD: Level: User No 4 PWD: Level: User No 5- 8 Name: PWD: Level: Item No: 1- 2 PWD (CLK): PWD (NIT):
12345678
Item/Prompt
124i Base 3.04 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 1 N/A N/A 0 -
384i 3.07.34 1
124i PC Program
384i PC Program 1
Tenant Comm: Item 1 Hold Tone: Item 2 Conf Mode: Block No: 1- 32 Type: Add Info: Sensor 2 Type: Add Info: Sensor 3 Type: Add Info: Sensor 4 Type: Add Info: Sensor 5 Type: Add Info: Sensor 6 Type: Add Info: Sensor 7 Type: Add Info: Sensor 8 Type: Add Info: Sensor 9 Type: Add Info: Sensor 10 Type: Add Info: Sensor 11 Type: Add Info: Sensor 12 Type: Add Info: Sensor 13 Type: Add Info: Sensor 14 Type: Add Info: Sensor 15 Type: Add Info: Sensor 16 Type: Add Info: Sensor 1- 16 Pre-ringing Index 1- 16 Slot: Block 1 -16: Mode N/A Index No. 1 Sensor 1
Odd # 1 Even # 4
N/A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0
0 0
N/A N/A
0 0
N/A
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 Item 13 Item 14 Item 15 Item 16 Item 17 Item 18 Item 19 Item 20 Item 21 Item 22 Item 23 Item 24 Item 25 Item 26 Item 27 Item 28 Item 29 Item 30 Item 31 Item 32 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Message 1 Message 2 Message 3 Message 4
0 < 2.18=0
0402
0403
Program
Item/Prompt
Message 5 Message 6 Message 7 Message 8 Message 9 Message 10 Message 11- 20 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Print Item no? 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12- 16 Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 Timer 4 Timer 5 Timer 6 Timer 7 Timer 8 Timer 9 Timer 10 Timer 11 Timer 12 Timer 13 Timer 14
0404
124i Base 3.04 me on Busy call me on Out for lunch back Business trip until Business trip call Gone for the day On vacation until Message nn 0 0 0 0 0
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
147 147 0
0405
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 15 90 30 10 30 15 60 15 90 10 0 5 1 30
Program
Item/Prompt Timer 15 Timer 16 Timer 17 Timer 18 Timer 19 Timer 20 Timer 21 Timer 22 Timer 23 Timer 24 Timer 25 Timer 26 Timer 27 Timer 28 Timer 29 Timer 30 Timer 31 Timer 32 Timer 33 Timer 34 Timer 35 Timer 36 Timer 37 Timer 38 Timer 39 Timer 40 Timer 41 Timer 42 Timer 43 Timer 44 Timer 45 Timer 46 Timer 47 Timer 48 Timer 49 Timer 50 Timer 51 Timer 52 Timer 53 Timer 54 Timer 55 Timer 56 Timer 57 Timer 58 Timer 59 Timer 60 Timer 61
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
4 60
5 35
Program
Item/Prompt
Timer 62 Timer 63 Timer 64 Timer 65 Timer 66 Timer 67 Timer 68 Timer 69 Timer 70 Timer 71 Timer 72 Timer 73 Timer 74 Timer 75 Timer 76 Timer 77 Timer 78 Timer 79 Timer 80 0406 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 Item 13 Item 14 Item 15 Item 16 Item 17 Item 18 Item 19 Item 20 Item 21 Item 22 Item 23 Item 24 Item 25 Item 26
384i 3.07.34
384i PC Program
Program
Item/Prompt Item 27 Item 28 Item 29 Item 30 Item 31 Item 32 Item 33 Item 34 Item 35 Item 36 Item 37 Item 38 Item 39 Item 40 Item 41 Item 42 Item 43 Item 44 Item 45 Item 46 Item 47 Item 48 Item 49 Item 50 Item 51 Item 52 Item 53 Item 54 Item 55 Item 56 Item 57 Item 58 Item 59 Item 60 Item 61 Item 62 Item 63 Item 64 Item 65 Item 66 Item 67 Item 68 Item 69 Item 70 Item 71 Item 72 Item 73
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Program
Item/Prompt Item 74 Item 75 Item 76 Item 77 Item 78 Item 79 Item 80 Item 81 Item 82 Item 83 Item 84 Item 85 Item 86 Item 87 Item 88 Item 89 Item 90 Item 91 Item 92 Item 93 Item 94 Item 95 Item 96 Item 97 Item 98 Item 99 Item 100 Item 101 Item 102 Item 103 Item 104 Item 105 Item 106 Item 107 Item 108 Item 109 Item 110 Item 111 Item 112 Item 113 Item 114 Item 115 Item 116 Item 117 Item 118 Item 119 Item 120
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Program
Item/Prompt Item 121 Item 122 Item 123 Item 124 Item 125 Item 126 Item 127 Item 128
0406 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 Item 13 Item 14 Item 15 Item 16 Item 17 Item 18 Item 19 Item 20 Item 21 Item 22 Item 23 Item 24 Item 25 Item 26 Item 27 Item 28 Item 29 Item 30 Item 31 Item 32 Item 33 Item 34 Item 35 Item 36 Item 37 Item 38
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
0 0
Program
Item/Prompt Item 39 Item 40 Item 41 Item 42 Item 43 Item 44 Item 45 Item 46 Item 47 Item 48 Item 49 Item 50 Item 51 Item 52 Item 53 Item 54 Item 55 Item 56 Item 57 Item 58 Item 59 Item 60 Item 61 Item 62 Item 63 Item 64 Item 65 Item 66 Item 67 Item 68 Item 69 Item 70 Item 71 Item 72 Item 73 Item 74 Item 75 Item 76 Item 77 Item 78 Item 79 Item 80 Item 81 Item 82 Item 83 Item 84 Item 85
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
1 1
0 0
1 1
0 0
0 0
1 1
0 0
Program
Item/Prompt Item 86 Item 87 Item 88 Item 89 Item 90 Item 91 Item 92 Item 93 Item 94 Item 95 Item 96 Item 97 Item 98 Item 99 Item 100 Item 101 Item 102 Item 103 Item 104 Item 105 Item 106 Item 107 Item 108 Item 109 Item 110 Item 111 Item 112 Item 113 Item 114 Item 115 Item 116 Item 117 Item 118 Item 119 Item 120 Item 121 Item 122 Item 123 Item 124 Item 125 Item 126 Item 127 Item 128 Mode N/A N/A Station 1- 52
384i 3.07.34 0
124i EXCPRU 1
124i PC Program
384i PC Program 0
0 0 0
1 1 1 0 1 1
1 0
0 1
Program
Item/Prompt Item 1- 4 Meter base: Class 1 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 Item 13 Item 14 Item 15 Item 16 Print Port: Print Item 1, 2 Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 Timer 4 Timer 5 Timer 6 Timer 7 Timer 8 Timer 9 Timer 10 Timer 11 Timer 12Timer 80 Count: Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Menu 1 Print Port: Menu 2 From (Ext):
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
384i PC Program
0411 0412
0413 0414
0 0
N/A N/A
0 0
30
5 60 3
0 0 0
5 3
0415 0416
0417
N/A N/A
0 1
Program
Item/Prompt Menu 2 To (Ext): Menu 2 From (TRK): Menu 2 To (TRK): Line/Page: Menu 3 Print All? Menu 4 Mode: Menu 4 Hour: Menu 4 Min: N/A Item 1 - Item 64 Item 1- Item 64 Item 1 Item 2- 8
124i EXCPRU 72
128
52
0 0 0
0 0 0
0418 0419
0420
1 0
N/A N/A
Item/Program
384i 3.07.34 3 1
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
0501
1X 1X 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 10 10 1* 1* 1# 1# 2X 2X 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29
Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind:
Program
Item/Program 20 20 2* 2* 2# 2# 3X 3X 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 30 30 3* 3* 3# 3# 4X 4X 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit:
0501
0501
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Program
Item/Program 47 48 48 49 49 40 40 4* 4* 4# 4# 5X 5X 51 51 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 56 56 57 57 58 58 59 59 50 50 5* 5* 5# 5# 6X 6X 61 61 62 62 63 63 64 64 Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind:
0501
0501
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Program
Item/Program 65 65 66 66 67 67 68 68 69 69 60 60 6* 6* 6# 6# 7X 7X 71 71 72 72 73 73 74 74 75 75 76 76 77 77 78 78 79 79 70 70 7* 7* 7# 7# 8X 8X 81 81 82 Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit:
0501
0501
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Program
Item/Program 82 83 83 84 84 85 85 86 86 87 87 88 88 89 89 80 80 8* 8* 8# 8# 9X 9X 91 91 92 92 93 93 94 94 95 95 96 96 97 97 98 98 99 99 90 90 9* 9* 9# 9# Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind:
0501
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Program 0501
Item/Program 0X 0X 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 08 08 09 09 00 00 0* 0* 0# 0# *X *X *1 *1 *2 *2 *3 *3 *4 *4 *5 *5 *6 *6 *7 *7 *8 *8 *9 *9 *0 Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit: Kind: Digit:
0501
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
0 15
2 1
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Program
Item/Program *0 Kind: ** Digit: ** Kind: *# Digit: *# Kind: #X Digit: #X Kind: #1 Digit: #1 Kind: #2 Digit: #2 Kind: #3 Digit: #3 Kind: #4 Digit: #4 Kind: #5 Digit: #5 Kind: #6 Digit: #6 Kind: #7 Digit: #7 Kind: #8 Digit: #8 Kind: #9 Digit: #9 Kind: #0 Digit: #0 Kind: #* Digit: #* Kind: ## Digit: ## Kind: Station Port: 1- 99 Station Port: 100- 199 Station Port: 200- 299 Station Port: 300- 384 DCI port 1 DCI port 2- 144 DCI port 145 DCI port 146 DCI port 147 DCI port 148- 288 ACI port 1- 192 N/A
0501
0502
124i Base 3.04 0 0 0 0 0 4 15 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3nn N/A N/A N/A 601 N/A N/A N/A N/A -
384i 3.07.34 1 2 1
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program 0 0 0
4nn 5nn -
4nn 5nn -
0503
0504 0505
Program 0506
Item/Program STG 1- 8 Dial: Name: Group nn STG 9- 32 Dial: DCG 1- 8 Dial: DCG 9- 32 Dial: ACG 1 Dial: ACG 2 Dial: ACG 3 Dial: ACG 4 Dial: ACG 5- 32 Dial: N/A Code: SRVCD 001: SRVCD 002: SRVCD 003: SRVCD 004: SRVCD 005: SRVCD 006:
124i Base 3.04 N/A N/A N/A 9 881 807 *2 818 < 2.17; Not Used 847 868 *4 *0 873 871 #5 #1 809 *# 869 802 803 850 870 827 #2 #4 815 801 855 804 -
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
N/A
0507
N/A
0508
N/A
SRVCD 007: SRVCD 008: SRVCD 009: SRVCD 010: SRVCD 011: SRVCD 012: SRVCD 013: SRVCD 014: SRVCD 015: SRVCD 016: SRVCD 017: SRVCD 018: SRVCD 019: SRVCD 020: SRVCD 021: SRVCD 022: SRVCD 023: SRVCD 024: SRVCD 025: SRVCD 026: SRVCD 027: SRVCD 028: SRVCD 029:
Program
Item/Program SRVCD 030: SRVCD 031: SRVCD 032: SRVCD 033: SRVCD 034: SRVCD 035: SRVCD 036: SRVCD 037: SRVCD 038: SRVCD 039: SRVCD 040: SRVCD 041: SRVCD 042: SRVCD 043: SRVCD 044: SRVCD 045: SRVCD 046: SRVCD 047: SRVCD 048: SRVCD 049: SRVCD 050: SRVCD 051: SRVCD 052: SRVCD 053: SRVCD 054: SRVCD 055: SRVCD 056: SRVCD 057: SRVCD 058: SRVCD 059: SRVCD 060: SRVCD 061: SRVCD 062: SRVCD 063: SRVCD 064: SRVCD 065: SRVCD 066: SRVCD 067: SRVCD 068: SRVCD 069: SRVCD 070: SRVCD 071: SRVCD 072: SRVCD 073: SRVCD 074: SRVCD 075: SRVCD 076:
124i Base 3.04 821 823 #3 851 #*#* 828 812 875 852 864 865 863 834 883 884 880 825 824 876 #6 *6 832 862 820 808 810 #9 853 854 *5 817
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Program
Item/Program SRVCD 077: SRVCD 078: SRVCD 079: SRVCD 080: SRVCD 081: SRVCD 082: SRVCD 083: SRVCD 084: SRVCD 085: SRVCD 086: SRVCD 087: SRVCD 088: SRVCD 089: SRVCD 090: SRVCD 091: SRVCD 092: SRVCD 093: SRVCD 094: SRVCD 095: SRVCD 096: SRVCD 097: SRVCD 098: SRVCD 099: SRVCD 100: SRVCD 01: SRVCD 02: SRVCD 03: SRVCD 04: SRVCD 05: SRVCD 06: SRVCD 07: SRVCD 08: SRVCD 09: SRVCD 10: SRVCD 11: SRVCD 12: SRVCD2 001: SRVCD2 002: SRVCD2 003: SRVCD2 004: SRVCD2 005: SRVCD2 006: SRVCD2 007: SRVCD2 008: SRVCD2 009: SRVCD2 010:
0512
0514
124i Base 3.04 899 885 800 811 892 893 ## 830 840 860 #0 856 849 859 *7 # 1 7 2 0 6 8 111 112 114 ** 116 *8 890 < 2.17;
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
< 2.18;
< 1.09;
Program
Item/Program
SRVCD2 011: SRVCD2 012: SRVCD2 013: SRVCD2 014: SRVCD2 015: SRVCD2 016: SRVCD2 017: SRVCD2 018: SRVCD2 019: SRVCD2 020: SRVCD2 021: SRVCD2 022: SRVCD2 023: SRVCD2 024: SRVCD2 025: SRVCD2 026: SRVCD2 027: SRVCD2 028: SRVCD2 029: SRVCD2 030: SRVCD2 031: SRVCD2 032: SRVCD2 033: SRVCD2 034: SRVCD2 035: SRVCD2 036: SRVCD2 037: SRVCD2 038: SRVCD2 039: SRVCD2 040: SRVCD2 041: SRVCD2 042:
SRVCD2 043: SRVCD2 044: SRVCD2 045: SRVCD2 046: SRVCD2 047: SRVCD2 048: SRVCD2 049: SRVCD2 050: SRVCD2 051: SRVCD2 052: SRVCD2 053: SRVCD2 054:
124i Base 3.04 Not Used *3 126 143 146 148 150 *1 < 2.17; Reserve #8 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 #7 857 -
384i 3.07.34
384i PC Program
127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142
127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142
Program
Item/Program SRVCD2 055: SRVCD2 056: SRVCD2 057: SRVCD2 058: SRVCD2 059: SRVCD2 060: SRVCD2 061: SRVCD2 062: SRVCD2 063: SRVCD2 064: SRVCD2 065: SRVCD2 066: SRVCD2 067: SRVCD2 068: SRVCD2 069: SRVCD2 070: SRVCD2 071: SRVCD2 072: SRVCD2 073: SRVCD2 074: SRVCD2 075: SRVCD2 076: SRVCD2 077: SRVCD2 078: SRVCD2 079: SRVCD2 080: SRVCD2 081: SRVCD2 082: SRVCD2 083: SRVCD2 084: SRVCD2 085: SRVCD2 086: SRVCD2 087: SRVCD2 088: SRVCD2 089: SRVCD2 090: SRVCD2 091: SRVCD2 092: SRVCD2 093: SRVCD2 094: SRVCD2 095: SRVCD2 096: SRVCD2 097: SRVCD2 098: SRVCD2 099: SRVCD2 100: Dial:
0515
384i 3.07.34 166 167 168 169 170 886 866 867 177
124i EXCPRU -
124i PC Program
384i PC Program 166 167 168 169 170 886 866 867 177
Item/Program Dial: Name: Continue Code: Discontinue Code: Code: STG 1- 32: Dial 1- 12: ACDG 1- 8 Dial:
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
N/A N/A
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
0602
0603 0604
Tenant 1 Start: Length: Tenant 2- 4 Start: Length: STG: 1- 32 Start: Length: SPD 0- 1999: SPD 0- 1999: TRK Group:
0 1000 0 0 0 0
0 1000 0 0 0 0
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
CLASS 1 Item 1 - Item 12 CLASS 2 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 CLASS 3 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 CLASS 4 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 CLASS 5 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4
0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 1 0 3 3
Program
Item/Prompt Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 CLASS 6 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 CLASS 7 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 CLASS 8- 15 Item 1- Item 12 ITEM 1 Entry 1- 10: ITEM 2 Entry 1- 20 ITEM 3 Entry 1- 4 ITEM 4 Entry 1- 4 ITEM 5 Entry 1- 60 ITEM 6
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
0702
Program
Item/Prompt Entry 1- 60 ITEM 7 Entry 1 Entry 2 Entry 3 Entry 4 Entry 5 Entry 6 Entry 7 Entry 8 Entry 9 Entry 10
124i Base 3.04 911 1800 1888 < 2.17; No Default 900 1900 976 < 2.17; No Default -
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
ITEM 8 Entry 1 Entry 2 Entry 3 Entry 4 Etnry 5 Entry 6 Entry 7 Entry 8 Entry 9 Entry 10
ITEM 9 Entry 1- 4
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
0802
0803
Pattern 1 Set Number 1 Start (Hour): Start (Min.): End (Hour): End (Min.): Mode: Pattern 1 Set Number 2 Start (Hour): Start (Min.): End (Hour): End (Min.): Mode: Pattern 2 Set Number 1 Start (Hour): Start (Min.): End (Hour): End (Min.): Mode: Pattern 3- 5 Set Number 110 Start (Hour): Start (Min.): End (Hour): End (Min.): Mode: Day No 0 Day No 1 Day No 2 Day No 3 Day No 4 Day No 5 Day No 6 Month: 1- 12 Day: 1- 31
0 0 8 0 1
17 0 0 0 1
8 17 0
17 0 1
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 0
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Trunk 1- 128 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5 Item 6 Item 7 Item 8 Item 9 Item 10 Item 11 Item 12 Item 13 Item 14 Item 15 Item 16 Item 17 Item 18 Item 19 Item 20 Item 21 Item 22 Item 23 Item 24 Item 25 Item 26 Item 27 Item 28 Item 29 Item 30 Item 31 TRK 1- 128 TRK 1- 128 TRK 1- 128 TRK No: 1-24 TRG No: Order No: TRK No: 25- 128 TRG No: Order No: Route 1 Order 1 Route 1 Order 2 Route 1 Order 3 Route 1 Order 4
< 2.18=1
< 2.0=1
N/A
1 Line nnn
0 Line nn
1 Line nnn
0906
0907
0908
0909
0910
0911
0912
0916
Route 2- 64 Order 1-4 Port No. 1- 384 Route (Day): Route (Nit): Route (Mid): Route (Rest): Port No. 1- 288 Route (Day): Route (Nit): Route (Mid): Route (Rest): IRG No. 1 Sta Port 1- 16 Sta Port 17- 384 IRG No. 2- 128 Sta Port 1- 384 TRK No. 1- 128 Target (Day): Target (Nit): Target (Mid): Target (Rest): TAM 1 TRK 1- TRK 128 TAM 2- 128 TRK 1- TRK 128 Station Port: 172 ACS (DAY): ACS (NIT): ACS (MID): ACS (REST): N/A TRK No. 1- 128 TRK No: 1- 52 Target (Day): Target (Nit): Target (Mid): Target (Rest): TRK No: 1- 128 Target (Day): Target (Nit): Target (Mid): Target (Rest): TRK No: 1- 128 Target (Day): Target (Nit): Target (Mid): Target (Rest):
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 7 0
1 1 1 1 254 1 1 1 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0917
0918
0919
0920
0921 0922
0923
0924
TRK No: 1- 128 Target (Day): Target (Nit): Target (Mid): Target (Rest): TRK No: 1- 128 Target (Day): Target (Nit): Target (Mid): Target (Rest): TRK No: 1- 128 Target (Day): Taget (Nit): Target (Mid): Target (Rest): TRK No: 1- 128 ICM No: Auto: Save: Trunk No. 1- 128 Item No. 1- 16 Port No. 1- 384 Route (Day): Route (Nit): Route (Mid): Route (Rest): Port No. 1- 288 Route (Day): Route (Nit): Route (Mid): Route (Rest): TRK No. 1- 128 No. (Day): No. (Nit): No. (Mid): No. (Rest):
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
N/A N/A
0 0
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Sta Port No. 1- 256 KST Item: 1 KST Item: 2 KST Item: 3 2ST Item: 1 2ST Item: 2 2ST Item: 3 2ST Item: 4 2ST Item: 5 2ST Item: 6 Sta Port No. 1- 384 Sta. Port No: STG No: Order No: Sta. Port No: STG No: Order No: Sta Port No: 1- 72 Cls (Day): Cls (Nit): Cls (Mid): Cls (Rest): Sta Port No: 1- 256 Cls (Day): Cls (Nit): Cls (Mid): Cls (Rest): Cls (Backup): Sta Port No. 1 Cls (Day): Cls (Nit): Cls (Mid): Cls (Rest): Sta. Port No. 2- 384 Cls (Day): Cls (Nit): Cls (Mid): Cls (Rest): Sta. Port No. 1- 256 Key No: 1- 16 Code: Key No: 17- 32 Code: Add: Sta Port No. 1- 256
2 2 1
1 1- 16 1 1- 16 17- 384 0 0
384i
17-96 0 0
1004
2 2 2 2 2 15 15 15 15
1005
1006
Line nn 0 N/A
N/A
1007
Program
Item/Prompt Key No. 1- 10 Dial: Name: Sta. Port No. 1- 384 Item 1: Item 2: Item 3: Item 4: Item 5: Boss Sta Port: Sta 1- 256 Sta Port No. 1- 256 Sensor No. 1- 16 Sta Port No. 1- 256 Sta Port No. 1- 96 STG No: Order No: Sta Port No. 1- 384 STG No: Order No: Hotline No: 1- 50 Origin Ext No: Target EXT No: Sta Port No. 1- 256 Sta Port nnn: Sta Port No: 1- 256 Route (Day): Route (Nit): Route (Mid): Route (Rest): Sta Port No. 1- 256 F Key No. 1- 32 VX Port No: 1- 16 Sta Port No: ICM No: 1- 384 R-Type: Sta Port No: 1- 256 Order 1: Order 2: Order 3: Order 4: Sta Port No: 1- 384 ICM No: Auto: Save: Sta Port No: 1- 256
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
1008
0 Initial?(Yes:1) 0 Line nn N/A N/A 1 0 0 0 0 < 2.17=1 Not Defined! 0 0 0 1 2 3 0 0 N/A 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 < 2.18=1 0 0 N/A N/A
1013
1014 1015
1 1 1 1 < 1.09=1 0
1020
1021
N/A 0 0 0
Item/Prompt Sta Port No: 1- 256 Class: Sta Port No: 1- 256 Group No: Hotline No: 1- 10 Origin EXT No: Common SPD No: Sta Port No: 1- 256 Code: Sta Port No: 1- 256 Key No: 1- 32 Data 1: Data 2: Sta Port No: 1- 384 Type: Target Port : Sta Port No: 1- 256 Key No: 1- 32 Ring (Day): Ring (Night): Ring (Mid): Ring (Rest): N/A Sta Port No: 1- 384 Dial:
384i 3.07.34 10
124i PC Program
384i PC Program 3
1025 1026
0 0 0 0
1027
1028
0 0 0 0
1029 1030
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
1103
1107
DSS No. 1- 8 DSS n DSS No. 1- 8 Connect 1: Connect 2: Connect 3: Connect 4: DSS No. 1- 8 Key 1- 99 Key 100- 199 Key 200- 256 Key 257- 600 DSS No. 1- 8 Operator DSS No. 1- 200 Key 1- 128 Key 129- 200 Item 1: Item 2: Item 3: Item 4: Item 5: Item 6 Item 7: Item 8: Item 9: Item 10: Item 11: Item 12: Item 13: Item 14: Item 15: Item 16: Item 17: Item 18: Item 19: Item 20: Item 21- Item 50:
0 N/A N/A N/A N/A 3nn N/A N/A N/A 0 1 nnn N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 2 3 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 2 3 1
4nn 5nn -
4nn 5nn -
0 0 1 2 1 0 3 4 6 1 5 7 2 3 2 6 4 2 0 4 3 0
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 0 1 2 1 0 3 4 6 1 5 7 0 3 2 6 4 2 5 4 3 0
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Type No: 1- 10 Item No: 1 Register 0 Data: Register 1 Data: Register 2 Data: Register 3 Data: Register 4 Data: Register 5 Data: Register 7 Data: Register 9 Data: Register 10 Data: Register 12 Data: Register 25 Data: Register 58 Data: Register 59 Data: Register 60 Data: Register 61 Register 62 Register 63 Register 64 Result Code: Register 64 Result Type: Register 64 Result Mode: Register 65 Baud Rate: Register 65 Stop Bit: Register 65 Data Bits: Register 65 Parity:
Program
Item/Prompt Register 66 Request to Send: Register 66 Data Terninal: Register 66 Clear to Send: Register 66 Flow Control: Item No: 2 T1 (In): T2 (In): N1 (In): N2 (In): K (In): T1 (EX): T2 (EX): N1(EX): N2 (EX): K (EX): DCI No: 1- 288 DCI Type: DCI Sub Type: DCI No: 1- 288 DCI No: 1- 288 DCG No: Order No: DCI No: 1- 288 CLS (DAY): CLS (NIT): CLS (MID): CLS (REST): DCI No: 1- 288 Hotline No: 1- 50 Origin: Target:
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
1202
1203 1204
N/A
1205
1206 1207
N/A
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
ACI No. 1- 192 ACI No. 1- 192 ACI No. 1- 192 ACG No: Order No:
N/A
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34 1
124i PC Program
384i PC Program 1
1503
Door Phone 1- 8 Sta Port No: 1 Door Phone 1: Door Phone 2: Door Phone 3: Door Phone 4: Door Phone 5: Door Phone 6: Door Phone 7: Door Phone 8: Sta Port No: 2- 256 Door Phone 1- 8: Door Phone 1- 8: Door Phone 1 Door Phone 2 Door Phone 3 Door Phone 4- 8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 1
1 1 1 1
1 2 3 1
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
1605
Sta Port No. 1- 48 Sta Port No. 49- 256 IPG No: 1- 32 Group nn: SPK 1- 8 Speaker No: 1-8 Item 01: Item 02- 18 Trk No: 1- 128 Speaker No: 1- 8 Ring (Day): Ring (Nit): Ring (Mid): Ring (Rest): Speaker No: 1- 8 Speaker n Group: 1- 32 Type: Sta Port No: 1- 48 Sta Port No: 49- 256 Name: Zone 0- 8 Group No: Zone 0
N/A
N/A
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
1702
1703 1704
1705 1706
Type No. 1- 8 Modem Kind: Protocol: Type 1- 8 Item 1 Modem Kind: Item 2 Guard Tone: Item 3 Protocol: Item 4 S07: Item 5 S09: Item 6 S10: Item 7 S61: Item 8 S62: Item 9 S63: Item 10 S65 1: Item 11 S65 2: Item 12 S65 3: TRK No. 1- 128 Open MSG Member No. 1- 10 ACS No: Name: Modem No. 1- 16 Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 Item 4 Item 5
N/A N/A
0 0
N/A N/A
0 0
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
7 0 0 30 6 14 255 13 20 0 1 0 0 1 5 15 5 5 1
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
7 0 0 30 6 14 255 13 20 0 1 0 0 1 5 15 5 5 1
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
1802
User No: 1- 15 PWD: CLS (Day): CLS (Nit): CLS (Mid): CLS (Rest): Item No: 1- 3 Mode (Day): Mode (Nit): Mode (Mid): Mode (Rest): TRK Port: 1- 128 Group (Day): Group (Nit): Group (Mid): Group (Rest): TRK No: 1- 128 Item No: 1 Talkie (Day): Talkie (Nit): Talkie (Mid): Talkie (Rest): Item No: 2 Group (Day): Group (Nit): Group (Mid): Group (Rest): Table Area # 1 Start: Length: Table Area # 2- 9 Start: Length: Table: 1- 100 Table: 101- 1500 TRF: Name: Table Area 1- 8 TRG No: 1- 128 TBL Area (Day): TBL Area (Nit): TBL Area (Mid): TBL Area (Rest): Table Area: 1- 8 Group (Day):
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 < 2.17=0 1 1 1 1
< 2.18=0
< 1.09=0
1803
1804
1805
1500
200
1500
1806
N/A
1807 1808
1809
Program
Item/Prompt Group (Nit): Group (Mid): Group (Rest): Item No: 1- 4 Class No: 1- 15 Route (Day): Route (Nit): Route (Mid): Route (Rest): User No: 1- 15 Class (Day): Class (Nit): Class (Mid): Class (Rest): Class No: 1- 15 Route (Day): Route (Nit): Route (Mid): Route (Rest):
1810 1811
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
< 2.18=0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0
1812
1813
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
1902
1903
1904
1905 1906
1907
1908
1909
1910 1911
1912
1913
ACD No. 1- 144 Sta Port No: DCI Port No: Mode Pattern # 1- 8 IRG No. 1- 128 Mode Pattern # 1- 8 ACDG No: Data: Sta Port No: DCI No: REC Kind: REC GRP: ACDG No. 1- 8 Sta Port No: Mode: Day No: 0 6 Time Pattern No. 1- 4 Mode Pattern No.1- 8 Start (Hour): Start (Min): Stop (Hour): Stop (Min): Time Pattern No. 1- 4 Mode Pattern No. 1- 8 Start (Hour): Start (Min): Stop (Hour): Stop (Min): ACDG No: 1- 8 Mode: ACDG No: MSG1 SRC: MSG1 SRC KIND: MSG2 SRC: MSG2 SRC KIND: ACDG No. 1- 8 SRC Kind: SRC No: Digit: ACDG No. 1- 8 SRC Kind: SRC GRP: ACDG No. 1- 8 Item No. 1- 7 Item No. 8 Modem No:
0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Program
Item/Prompt DCI No. Modem No: DCI No: Modem No. DCI No: N/A ACDG No. 1- 8 1st Ann: 2nd Ann: N/A ACDG No. 1- 8 Route: N/A ACDG No. 1- 8 Mode: ACDG No: ACDG No. 1- 8 Wait No: Wait Time: Alarm ACDG No: 1- 8 Item 1: Item 2: ACD Group No. 1- 8 Type: ACDG No. 1- 8 1st MSG: 2nd MSG:
384i 3.07.34 0 0 0 0 0
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
N/A N/A
0 0
N/A
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
1922
1923
1924 1925
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
384i PC Program
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Selection No: 1 Rate Period: COS: Service No: Dial Treatment: Next Set? Selection No: 2 Rate Period: COS: Service No: Dial Treatment: Next Set? All Other Entries Have No Default No Entries No Entries Conflict Area: Minium COS: Day Type 1- 4 Pattern No: 1- 48 Treatment No: 115 Command: Operator Call: Internal Call: Directory Asst: Emergency Call: Sta Port 1- 256 Code: Sta Port 1- 256 COS (Day): COS (Nit): COS (Mid): COS (Rest): Operator Call: Direct Call:
1 No Default 20 No Default 1 No Default 0 No Default (Yes:1) No Default 1 No Default 10 No Default 2 No Default 0 No Default (Yes:1)
N/A 0 1
N/A
2108
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2109 2110
2111
Item/Prompt
124i Base 3.04 Erase All MSG? Erase VAU MSG? Erase Personal MSG? 16 0 1 0 0 0 0
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
384i PC Program
2210
2211
Item No: 1, 2 Length: MSG No: IRG No: TRK No: 1- 128 MSG (Day): MSG (Nit): MSG (Mid): MSG (Rest): N/A TRK No: 1- 128 Data: Password: TRK No: 1-128 MSG (Day): MSG (Nit): MSG (Mid): MSG (Rest): MSG No: 1- 16 REC No: 1- 12 Dial: MSG No:
0 000000 0 0 0 0
N/A
N/A
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
2303 2304
2305
2306
TRK No: 1- 128 Method: TRK No: 1- 128 Class (Day): Class (Nit): Class (Mid): Class (Rest): N/A TRK No: 1- 128 Route (Day): Route (Nit): Route (Mid): Route (Rest): In TRG No. 1- 128 Out TRKG # 1- 128 Out nnn: TRK No: 1- 128 Class (Day): Class (Nit): Class (Mid): Class (Rest):
1 1 1 1
0 1 1 1 1
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
Tenant: 1 Start: Length: Tenant: 2- 4 Start: Length: Bin No: 0- 999 Name Print port: Option No: 1 Item 1: Item 2: Item 3: Item 4: Item 5: Item 6 (Sta.): Item 6 (Len.): Item 7 (Sta.): Item 7 (Len): Item 8 Item 9: Item 10: Option No: 2- 15 Item 1: Item 2: Item 3: Item 4: Item 5: Item 6 (Sta.): Item 6 (Len.): Item 7 (Sta.): Item 7 (Len.): Item 8: Item 9: Item 10:
0 1000 0 0
0 1000
1000
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
2503
0 N/A 0 0 N/A 0
2600 - T1 Options
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
2602
Trk No: 5- 52 Type: Trk No. 1- 128 Type: Unit No: 1- 3 Type: Slot No: 1- 25 Type
2600 - T1 Options
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
2805
PMDU Modem No. 1 DATA DCI No. N/A Item 1- 8 Data Class No: 0 Class No: 1 Class No: 2 Class No: 3 Item 1 Timer: Retry: Item 2 Timer: Retry: Item 3 Timer: Retry: Item 4 Timer: Retry:
N/A N/A
0 0
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0 10 11 12 13 10 3 50 3 10 3 30 1
2900 - Networking
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
2902
2903
2904
2905 2906
2908 2909
Tenant 1 Start: Length: Tenant 2- 4 Start: Length: Item 1- 48 Length: Number: Item 1- 48 Day: Night: Mid: Rest: F-Route Table 1- 48 Trunk Group: Delete Digit: Add Dial: Data 1: Data 2: No Entries Type 1- 8 IN PAD (T) IN PAD (R) OUT PAD (T) OUT PAD (R) No Entries No Entries
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
1 48 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
2900 Networking
Item/Prompt
384i 3.07.34
124i EXCPRU
124i PC Program
384i PC Program
3002
N/A
Index
!
2-OPX, 465 2000 Compliance, 607 3-Port DCI Unit, 194 3DCI, 194 500/2500 Type Telephones, 465 900 Preamble, 565 900 Preamble - 2207, 1021 900i Cordless Telephone, 190 976 Routing (ARS), 97
A
Abandoned Call Reporting, SMDR, 470 Abbreviated Dialing, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68 Common Bins, Programming, 817, 818, 819 DIAL Key Control, 729 Group Bins, Programming, 820, 821 Numbers and Names, Programming, 822, 823 Setting dial tone detection criteria, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 Toll Restriction For, 525 Abbreviated Dialing Groups - 1023, 911 Abbreviated Dialing Keys, 395 Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Names - 0603, 822, 823 Abbreviated Dialing Options, Programming, 817, 818, 819, 820, 821, 822, 823, 824 Abbreviated Dialing, Tie Line COS, 512 Account Code Setup - 3001, 1049, 1050 Account Codes, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77 Forced, 69 Mode Setting, 756 Optional, 69 Account Codes - 0407, 756 Account Codes - 3000, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052 Account Codes, Verified, 70 ACD, 91 ACD MIS (inDepth), 324, 325 ACI, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89 Auxiliary Device Control, 83 External Paging, 83 Music on Hold, 83 Ringing Control, 83 Specifications, 85 ACI Call Recording Destination - 1020, 908 ACI Department Calling Group - 1303, 945, 946 ACI Extension Number - 0504, 789 ACI Group Pilot Number - 0508, 794 ACI Port Function - 1301, 943 ACI Tenant Group - 1302, 944 Add-on Conference, 179 Alarm, 78, 79 Alarm Display Telephone, 641 Alarm Duration Timer, 740 Alarm LED Setup, 639, 640 CO Call No-Answer Alarm, 727 Sensor Setup, 721, 722 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Alarm Display Telephone - 0011, 641 Alarm LED Setup - 0010, 639, 640 Alarm Report Port Setup - 0008, 635, 636 Alarm Reports Port Setup, 635, 636 Alarm Sensors, External, 284 All Call Internal Paging - 1608, 962 All Call Paging Zone Name - 1609, 963, 964, 965, 966 Alphanumeric Display, 39, 80, 81, 82 Call Timer, 132 Alternate Answer (from DSS Console), 255 Alternate Trunk Access Code - 0518, 815 Alternate Trunk Route for DCI Ports - 0923, 873 Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions - 0922, 872 Alternate Trunk Routing for DISA Calls - 1813, 991 ANA (Assigned Night Answer), 383 Analog Communications Interface See ACI Analog Station (ASTU) Timers - 0115, 669, 670 Analog Station Sidetone, 689, 690 Analog Station Sidetone Level - 0128, 689, 690 Analog Station Timers, 669, 670 Analog Station Timers Chart, 669, 671 Analog Trunk (ATRU) Timers (Part B) - 0135, 701, 702 Analog Trunk Sidetone, 691, 692 Analog Trunk Sidetone Setting - 0129, 691, 692 Analog Trunk Timers, 666, 667, 668 Analog Trunk Timers Chart, 666, 701 ANI/DNIS Compatiblity (T1 Trunking), 483, 484, 485, 486, 487, 488, 489, 490, 491, 492, 493, 494 ANI/DNIS Service Option Number - 0924, 874 ANI/DNIS Service Options - 2404, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042 Announced (Screened) Transfer, 543 Answering a Message Waiting, 365 Answering Machine Emulation, 586 Answering Outside Calls Caller ID, 138 ARS, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104 976 Routing, 97 See Automatic Route Selection Call Routing, 96 Dialing Translation, 96 Equal Access Routing, 97 Feature Summary, 96 Forced Authorisation Codes, 96 Hierarchical Class of Service Control, 96 Operator Assisted Routing, 97 Separate Routing Options Chart, 1009 Time of Day Selection, 96 ARS Access, Tie Line COS, 512 ARS Authorization Codes - 2109, 1011 ARS Call Route Options Table - 2101, 999 ARS Class of Service - 2110, 1012 ARS Dial Treatments - 2107, 1006, 1007, 1008 ARS Equal Access Control - 2111, 1013, 1014 Index - 1
Index
ARS Rate Period Table - 2106, 1004, 1005 ARS Six Digit Table - 2102, 1000 ARS Three Digit Table - 2103, 1001 Assigned Night Answer, 383 ATRU PCB Timers, 666, 667, 668 Attendant Call Queuing, 90 Attendant Console, PC-based, 419 Authorization Codes See also Toll Restriction Override Authorization Codes (ARS), 96 Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, 338 Automated Attendant Automatic Overflow, 561 Flexible Routing, 561 Automated Attendant (VAU) Programmable Greetings, 561 Simultaneous Call Answering, 561 Single Digit Dialing, 561 Automated Attendant (VAU) Greetings, 561 Automated Attendant Single Digit Codes 2210, 1025 Automatic Answer Callback, 728 Automatic Answer, Callback, 135 Automatic Backup - 0015, 645 Automatic Call Distribution, 91 Traffic Managment Reports, 534 Automatic Call Distribution - 1900, 993 Automatic Extension Circuit Type Setup 0004, 623, 624 Automatic Extension Ringdown, 444 Automatic Handsfree, 305, 727 Automatic Hold, 727 Automatic Night Service Patterns - 0801, 835, 836, 837 Automatic Off Hook Signaling, 389 Automatic Overflow (VAU Automated Attendant), 561 Automatic Pause, PBX, 415 Automatic Route Selection See ARS ARS Enable, 729 Defining the Trunk Access Code, 796 Setting Dial Tone Detection Criteria, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 Auxiliary Device Control With ACI, 83 Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part B) - 0921, 870, 871 Basic Trunk Port Setup - 0901, 841, 842, 843, 844, 845 Basic Trunk Port Setup Chart, 841 Basic Trunk Port Setup Chart (Part B), 870 Before Reading the Features, 3 Behind a PBX, 415 BGM, 105, 106, 107 Blocked Call Reporting, SMDR, 470 Blocking Incoming Calls See Do Not Disturb Both Ringing Call Forwarding, 112 Both Ways Loop Keys, 345 Both Ways Private Line, 427 BRI - Basic Rate Interface See ISDN Compatibility BRI ISDN Line TEI Assignment - 0139, 711, 712 Bridged Fax Line, 287 Busy Intercept (DID), 231 Busy Lamp Field BLF Control, 729 Busy Transfer, 729 Buzzer (Secretary Call), 453 Bypassing Toll Restriction, 532
C
Call Accounting, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77 Call Costing, SMDR, 470 Call Coverage Keys, 368 Call Forwarding, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117 Both Ringing, 112 Busy or Not Answered, 112 Delayed Call Forwarding Time, 739 Fixed, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122 Immediate, 112 Override, 130 Personal Answering Machine Emulation, 112, 586 To Voice Mail, 585 When Unanswered, 112 Call Forwarding Follow Me, 127, 128, 129 Call Forwarding Off-Premise, 123, 124, 125, 126 Call Forwarding/DND Override, 130, 131 Call Pickup Directed, 264 Group, 298 Secretary, 456 Call Pickup Group - 1012, 898 Call Queuing See Call Waiting Call Restriction, International, 524 Call Restriction, Outgoing with Tie Lines, 513 Call Restriction, PBX, 415, 525 Call Routing with ARS, 96 Call Timer, 132 Call Waiting, 133, 134 Call Waiting / Camp On Call Waiting Tone Timer, 739 DIL Call Waiting, 730 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
B
Background Music, 105, 106, 107 Barge In, 108, 109, 110 Barge In Tone, 727 Basic Extension Port Options (Part A) - 1001, 875, 876, 877 Basic Extension Port Options (Part A) Chart, 875 Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B) - 1008, 893, 894 Basic Extension Port Setup Chart (Part B), 893 Index - 2
Index
Callback, 135, 136, 137 Automatic Answer, 728 Callback Ring Duration Time, 739 Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time, 741 Trunk, 555 Callback Automatic Answer, 135 Called Extension Block, 389 Caller ID, 138, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143, 144, 145, 146, 147 Caller ID Printer Port - 2403, 1037, 1047 Caller ID Table Entries - 2402, 1035, 1036 Caller ID Table Setup - 2401, 1033, 1034 Camp On Trunk, 555 Camp-On, 133 DID, 231 Canceling a Message Waiting, 365 Central Office Calls Answering, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155 Placing, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162 Central Office Calls, Answering Assigning CODEC Gain Types, 676 No-Answer Alarm, 727 Pre-Ringing Enable, 723 Ring No Answer Alarm Time, 739 Setting the Trunk Ring Tone (0111), 656, 657, 658, 659, 660 Central Office Calls, Placing Assigning CODEC Gain Types, 676 Defining the Trunk Access Code, 796 Long Conversation Alarm 1 Timer, 741 Long Conversation Alarm 2 Timer, 741 Pause Timer, 740 Preselection Timer, 740 Setting Dial Tone Detection Criteria, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 Charts Analog Station Timers Chart, 669, 671 Analog Trunk Timers, 666, 701 ARS Separate Routing Options, 1009 Automatic Night Service Patterns, 835 Basic Extension Port Setup, 893 Basic Extension Port Setup Options - Part A, 875 Basic Trunk Port Setup, 841, 870 Class of Service Options (B), 175, 772 DCI Hayes Commands, 204 DCI Physical and Software Ports, 196 DCI Result Codes, 203 DCI RS-232-C Connector Pinout, 202 Department Calling Group Options, 758 DID Intercept Options, 985 DID Options Worksheet, 239 DID Trunk Timers, 696 DISA and Tie Trunk COS Options, 761 External Paging Zone Control Options, 955 Function Key Codes by Feature, 21, 883 Function Key Codes by Number, 27 Multibutton Telephone Displays, 39 Ring Rates, 54 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0 Service Codes by Feature, 14 Service Codes by Number, 7 Single Line Ring Options Chart, 876 SMDR Options, 736 System Flash Rates, 55 System Number Plan, 33, 617 System Timers (Part A), 739 System Timers (Part B), 764 System Tones, 36 T1 Trunk Timers , 703 Tenant Group Options, Part A, 727, 775 Tenant Group Options, Part B, 732 Tie Line Timers, 698 Toll Restriction Class, 826 Toll Restriction Tables, 830 Voice Mail Integration Options, 767, 769 Voice Prompting Messages, 562 Charts (A) Class of Service Options, 165, 746 Checking the date, time and extension number, 566 Checking Your Voice Mail Messages, 598 Circuit Type Setup Automatic, 623, 624 Manual, 625, 626, 627 Circuit Type Setup, Automatic, 623, 624 Circular Routing (Department Calling), 212 Class of Service, 163, 164, 165, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177 Programming Class of Service, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, 751, 752, 753, 754, 755 Table of Options, 165, 175, 746, 772 Class of Service - 0406, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, 751, 752, 753, 754, 755 Class of Service - 1005, 882 Class of Service Control Through ARS, 96 Class of Service Options (Part B) - 0419, 772, 773, 774 Codec Extension Gain Setup, 677, 678 External Page/Door Box Gain, 681 External Page/Door Box Gain Type, 679, 680 Unsupervised Conference Codec Gain, 694, 695 Combined Paging, 402, 406 Combined Paging Assignments - 1610, 965, 966 Common Abbreviated Dialing and DISA, 246 Common Abbreviated Dialing Bins - 0601, 817, 818, 819 Common Permit Code Table, 524 Common Restrict Code Table, 524 Conference, 179, 180, 181, 182, 183 Circuit Setup, 725 Conference Key Operating Mode, 733 Meet Me, 349 Setup, 718 Unsupervised (Tandem Trunking), 495 Index - 3
telemanuals.com
Index
Unsupervised, CODEC Gain Setup, 694, 695 Voice Call/Privacy Release, 184, 185, 186 Conference Circuit Setup - 0308, 725 Confirmation Tone When Dialing, 225, 227 Conflict Area - 2104, 1002 Connecting a DCI, 196 Connecting to a PBX, 415 Connecting to Fax Machines, 287 Continued Dialing, 187, 188, 189 Intercom Calls, 187 Trunk Calls, 187 Conversation Record, 586 See Voice Mail Compatibility Converting from Pulse to Tone Dialing, 433 Copy Command - 2001, 995, 996 Cordless Telephone, 190 Cordless/Desktop Extension Assignment 1009, 895 CTI TAPI Compatibility, 502 Customized Date Format, SMDR, 470 Cutting Off the Microphone, 366, 367 DCI Pooling Pilot Numbers - 0507, 793 DCI Port Type - 1202, 936 DCI Setup - 1201, 931, 932, 933, 934, 935 DCI Tenant Group - 1203, 937 DCI Toll Restriction Class - 1205, 939, 940 Delayed Ringing Call Coverage Keys, 368 Delayed Ringing (Outside Calls), 148 Delayed Ringing with DILs, 241 Deleting PCBs, 628 Department Calling, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 220 Circular Routing, 212 DCI Department Groups, 195 Department Group Transfer, 543 DISA Calls with Overflow Message, 246 Option Programming, 758, 759 Options Chart, 758 Priority Routing, 212 Department Calling Group Number - 0506, 791, 792 Department Groups Step Calling, 91, 221, 502 Department Step Calling, 221, 222 Dial Buffering, Enhanced, 411 Dial Number Preview, 223, 224 Dial Number Preview Timer, 742 Dial Pad Confirmation Tone, 225, 226 Setting the Keyset Confirmation Tone (0110), 654, 655 Dial Tone Circuit Setup, 719, 720 Extension Dial Tone Timer, 741 Dial Tone Detection, 227, 228, 229 Dialed Number Translation with DID, 230 Dialing Translation with ARS, 96 Dialing, Converting from Pulse to Tone, 433 DID Automated Attendant Routing, 231 Busy Intercept, 231 Camp-On, 231 Dialed Number Translation, 230 FCC Information, 232 Flexible DID Service Compatibility, 231 Intercept Options Table, 985 Options Worksheet, 239 Ring-No-Answer Intercept, 231 Trunk Timers, 696, 697 Vacant Number Intercept, 231 DID (Direct Inward Dialing), 230 DID Intercept Options - 1810, 985, 986 DID Intercept Options Table, 985 DID Intercept Ring Group - 1809, 983, 984 DID Translation Table Expected Digits - 1807, 981 DID Translation Table Number Conv. - 1806, 978, 979, 980 DID Translation Table Setup - 1805, 977 DID Trunk Group Translation Table - 1808, 982 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
D
Data Call Tracking, SMDR, 470 Data Communiations Interface, 194 Data Communications See DCI Data Line Assignment - 0918, 866 Data Privacy, 424 Date and Time, 521 Display Mode, 650 Date Format for SMDR & System Reports - 0130, 693 Date Format, SMDR and Reports, 693, 703, 704, 705, 706, 707, 708 Date, Time and Extension Number Check (VAU), 566 DCI, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211 3-Port DCI Unit, 194 Centronics Module, 194 Connecting, 196 Department Groups, 195 Hayes Commands, 204 Hayes Compatibility, 196 Hotline, 196 Keyset-Originated Data Call, 194 Physical and Software Ports, 196 Result Codes Chart, 203 RS-232-C Connector Pinout, 202 RS-232-C Module, 194 Speed Conversion, 196 Terminal-Originated Data Call, 194 Terminal-Originated Voice Call, 194 DCI Department Group - 1204, 938 DCI Extension Numbers - 0503, 788 DCI Hotline Setup - 1207, 942 Index - 4
Index
DID Trunk Timers, 696 DID Trunk Timers - 0132, 696, 697 DID/E&M Start Signaling, 1027 Digit Counting Local Call, 525 Toll Call, 525 Digit Counting, SMDR, 470 Digit Masking, SMDR, 470 DIL, 241 Delayed Ringing, 241 See Direct Inward Line To Fax, 287 DIL Assignment - 0917, 864, 865 DIL No Answer Destination - 0919, 867, 868 Direct Inward Dialing (DID), 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240 DID Ring-No-Answer Timer, 741 DID Trunk Disconnect After Transfer Timer, 742 Setting DTMF criteria, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 Direct Inward Line, 241, 242, 243, 244 Direct Inward Line (DIL) Call Waiting, 730 DIL No Answer Recall Timer, 743 Direct Inward System Access Abbreviated Dialing, Allowing Common, 761 Operator Calling Programming, 761 Paging, External, Programming, 761 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Assigning CODEC Gain Types, 676 Class of Service for DISA Lines, 761, 762 Direct Trunk Access Programming, 761 See also DISA DISA Dial Tone Timer, 741 DISA External Paging Timer, 744 DISA Internal Paging Timer, 744 DISA No Answer Timer, 742 DTMF Receiver Active Time, 740 Forced Trunk Disconnect, Programming, 762 Paging, Internal Programming, 761 Setting DTMF criteria, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 Trunk Access, Specific, Programming, 762 Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access Programming, 761 Direct Line Selection - 1106, 926 Direct Messaging (Message Waiting), 362 Direct Station Selection Console, 255 Direct Station Selection Keys, 395 Direct Trunk Access Placing an Outside Call, 162 Direct Trunk Access with DISA, 246 Direct Trunk Access, Tie Line COS, 512 Directed Call Pickup, 264 Directory Dialing, 265 DISA, 245 Class of Service, 245 Department Calling with Overflow Message, 246 Operating Modes, 246 Operator Calling, 246 Paging, 246 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0 Toll Restriction, 246 Using Common Abbreviated Dialing, 246 Using Direct Trunk Access, 246 Using Trunk Group Access, 246 Using Trunk Group Routing/ARS, 245 DISA and OPA Operating Mode - 1802, 971, 972 DISA and OPA Transfer Destination - 1803, 973, 974 DISA and Tie Trunk COS Options - 0411, 761, 762 DISA Password - 1801, 969, 970 DISA Route - 1811, 987, 988 DISA Toll Restriction Level - 1812, 989, 990 DISA Trunk COS Options Chart, 761 Disconnecting Trunks, 296 Display Intercom Abandoned Call Display, 331 Display Messages See Selectable Display Messages Display Messaging, Selectable, 457 Display Prompts while Programming, 616 Display Prompts, What They Mean, 616 Displays for Multibutton Telephone, 39 Displays on Telephones, 80, 81, 82 Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns, 268, 269, 270, 271 Keyset Splash Tone - 0109, 652 Setting the Intercom and Alarm Ring Tones, 661, 662, 663, 664, 665 Setting the Trunk Ring Tone (0111), 656, 657, 658, 659, 660 DND, 272 DND Override, 130 Do Not Disturb, 272, 273, 274 Do Not Disturb Override, 130 Door Box, 275, 276, 277 Codec Gain, 681 Codec Gain Type, 679, 680 Door Box Answer Time, 740 Door Box Chime Patterns - 1503, 949, 950 Door Box Ring Assignments - 1502, 948 Door Box Tenant Assignment - 1501, 947 DP to DTMF Conversion, 651 DSS Console, 60, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263 Altenate Answer, 255 Calling extensions and Door Boxes, 255 Night Service Switching, 255 Paging, 255 Placing and Answering Outside Calls, 255 DSS Console Alternate Answering - 1104, 924 DSS Console Extension Assignment - 1101, 921 DSS Console Key Assignments - 1103, 922, 923 DSS Console Key Range - 1102, 922 DSS Console Lamp Table - 1107, 927, 928, 929, 930 Index - 5
Index
DSS Console Operating Mode-0309, 726 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup - 0303, 719, 720 DTMF Circuit Setup, 719, 720 DTMF Tone Duty Cycle - 0101, 649 Dual Line Appearance, 278 Dual-OPX, 465 Duration Monitoring, SMDR, 471 External Paging, 402 Codec Gain, 681 Control Options Chart, 955 Meet Me External Paging Transfer, 358 With ACI, 83 External Paging Zone Control - 1604, 955, 956, 957 External Paging Zone Group - 1606, 960 External Paging Zone Tenant - 1603, 954
E
E911 Compatibility, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283 E911 Options - 0420, 775 Enhanced Dial Buffering, 411 Enhanced hunting, 213 Entering Data, 614 Entering the Programming Mode, 612 Equal Access Routing (ARS), 97 Exclusive Hold, 312 Executive Override See Barge In Exiting the Programming Mode, 613 Extension (Department) Group Options - 0410, 758, 759 Extension (Department) Groups - 1003, 879 Extension Access Map Assignment - 0912, 859 Extension Callback, 135 Extension Circuit Type Setup - 0005, 625, 626, 627 Extension Class of Service, 163 See Class of Service Extension Codec Gain Type Setup - 0118, 677, 678 Extension Exclusion, SMDR, 471 Extension Hotline, 321 Extension Hunting Department Calling, 212 Extension Names, 377 Extension number, date and time check (VAU), 566 Extension Numbers and Names - 0502, 786, 787 Extension Ring Group Assignment - 0909, 855 Extension Ringdown, 444 See Ringdown Extension Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assign - 1013, 899 Extension Tenant - 1002, 878 External Alarm Extensions - 1010, 896 External Alarm Sensors, 284, 285, 286 Setting the Alarm Ring Tone, 661, 662, 663, 664, 665 External Hotline, 323, 324 See also Ringdown Extension External Hotline Setup - 1024, 912 External Meet Me Conference, 351 External Meet Me Page, 355 External Page/Door Box CODE Gain Typ - 0119 Codec Gain Type, 679, 680 External Page/Door Box CODEC Gain Stup 0120, 681 Index - 6
F
Fax Machine Compatibility, 287, 288, 289 Bridged Fax Line, 287 Direct Inward Line to Fax, 287 Sensor Setup, 721, 722 Transfer to Fax, 287 FCC Information for DID Trunks, 232 Features Section Before Reading, 3 Before Using, 3 First Digit Absorption See Tie Lines First Digit Absorption, Tie Line COS, 512 Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise - 1030, 920 Fixed Call Forwarding, 118 Fixed Call Forwarding Setup - 1027, 916, 917 Fixed Call Forwarding When Busy - 1029, 919 Flash, 290, 291, 292 Flash Patterns Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns, 268 Flash Rates Chart, 55 Flexible DID Service Compatibility, 231 Flexible Routing (VAU Automated Attendant), 561 Flexible Service Compatibility, Tie Lines, 513 Flexible System Numbering, 293, 294, 295 Assigning the numbering plan, 777, 778, 779, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785 Service Code Setup, Part A-0511, 797, 798, 799, 800, 801, 802 Service Code Setup, Part B-0514, 806, 807, 808, 809, 810 Single Digit Service Code Setup-0512, 803, 804 Follow Me Call Forwarding, 127 Forced Account Codes, 69 Forced Authorization Codes (ARS), 96 Forced Intercom Ringing, 307, 308, 309, 728 Forced Trunk Disconnect, 296, 297 Forwarding Calls Off-Premise, 123 Forwarding to Voice Mail, 585 Forwarding, Fixed, 118 Function Key Codes by Feature, 21, 883 Function Key Codes by Number, 27 Function Key Initialization - 1011, 897 Function Keys, Programmable, 430
Index
G
General Message, 559 General Message Number - 2203, 1017 Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins - 0602, 820, 821 Group Call Pickup, 298, 299, 300, 301, 302 Group Hold, 312 Group Listen, 303, 304 Groups, Ringing, 440
H
Handsfree, 4 Automatic, 305 Volume Control, 603 Handsfree and Monitor, 305, 306 Automatic Handsfree, 727 Handsfree Microphone Control, 728 Handsfree Answerback, 307, 308, 309 Hayes Commands (DCI), 204 Hayes Compatibility, 196 Headset Busy Mode, 730 Headset Operation, 310, 311 Hidden Account Codes, 70 Hidding Account Codes, 70 Hierarchical Class of Service Control (ARS), 96 Hold, 312, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317, 318 Automatic Hold, 727 Exclusive, 312 Exclusive Hold Recall Time, 739 Forced Release of Held Calls, 742 Group, 312 Hold Key Operating Mode, 732 Hold Recall Callback Timer, 741 Hold Recall Timer, 740 Intercom, 312 System, 312 Holiday Night Service Switching - 0803, 839, 840 Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes - 0519, 816 Hotel Mode Printer Port - 0413, 763 Hotel Mode Toll Restriction Class - 1022, 910 Hotel Telephone Setup - 1021, 909 Hotel Wake Up Message Assignment - 2211, 1026 Hotel/Motel, 319 DSS Console Operating Mode, 726 Hotline, 321, 322 External, 323 See One-Touch Calling Hotline, DCI, 196 Hunting See Department Calling Hunting, enhanced, 213 Hybrid Loop Keys, 345
I
Idle Line Preference, 338 Illustrations 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
ACI Installation, 84 Connecting a DCI, 196 DSS Console, 60 Multibutton Telephone, 920/922 Series, 59 Multibutton Telephone, 926 Series, 58 Super Display Telephone (926 Series), 56 Super Display Telephone, 920/922 Series, 57 Immediate Call Forwarding, 112 Inbound Trunk Outgoing Call Restriction- 2305, 1031 Incoming ISDN (3.1 Khz Audio) Ring Grp - 0915, 862 Incoming ISDN Data Trunk Ring Group - 0916, 863 Incoming Line Preference, 338 Incoming Only Loop Keys, 345 Incoming Only Private Line, 427 Incoming Prime Line Preference, 420 Incoming Ring See Ring Groups inDepth, 324, 325 Initialize DCI - 1206, 941 Initialize Extension Numbers and Names - 2002, 997 Initialize Extension Numbers and Names - 2003, 998 Inter-system Networking, 381, 382 Inter-Tenant Calling, 717 Inter-Tenant Calling - 0301, 717 Intercom, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330 Abandoned Call Display, 331 Extension Dial Tone Timer, 741 Forced Intercom Ringing, 307, 728 Handsfree Answerback, 307 Hold, 312 Hotline, 321 Intercom Interdigit Time, 740 Microphone Cutoff, 366, 367 Multiple Intercom Numbers, 368 Setting the Intercom Ring Tone, 661, 662, 663, 664, 665 Transfer, 543 Voice Over, 599 Intercom Abandoned Call Display, 331, 332 Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone - 0112, 661, 662, 663, 664, 665 Intercom Hold, 312 Intercom Keys See Dual Line Appearance Intercom, Private See Reverse Voice Over Internal Meet Me Conference, 352 Internal Meet Me Page, 355 Internal Paging, 406 Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer, 359 Internal Paging Group Names - 1602, 952, 953 Internal Paging Groups - 1601, 951 Internal Paging Tone - 1607, 961 Internal Paging, Combined, 402, 406 Index - 7
Index
International Call Restriction, 524 Introduction to Programming, 611, 612, 613, 614, 615, 616, 617, 618, 619, 620 Intrusion See Barge In ISDN, 333 ISDN Layer 1 Operation Mode Setup - 0121, 682 ISDN Layer 1 Timer Setup - 0122, 683 ISDN Layer 2 Operation Mode Setup - 0123, 684 ISDN Layer 2 Timer Setup - 0124, 685 ISDN Layer 3 Op. Mode Setup - 0125, 686 ISDN Layer 3 Timer Setup - 0126, 687 ISDN PRI Layer 2 Operating Mode Setup - 0137, 709 ISDN PRI Layer 3 Operating Mode Setup - 0138, 710 ITSU Operation Mode Setup - 0127, 688 Long Conversation Warning Tone, 604 Loop Back Testing - 0009, 637, 638 Loop Key Data - 1026, 914, 915 Loop Keys, 345, 346, 347, 348
M
Macro Keys See One-Touch Serial Operation Mailbox Calling Your Voice Mail Mailbox, 595 Maintenance Options, 621, 622, 623, 624, 625, 626, 627, 628, 629, 630, 631, 632, 633, 634, 635, 636, 637, 638, 639, 640, 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 646, 647, 648 Manual Circuit Type Setup, 625, 626, 627 Manual Off Hook Signaling, 389 Meet Me Conference, 349, 350, 351, 352 Meet Me Conference Time, 739 Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer, 359 Meet Me Paging, 353, 354, 355 Meet Me Paging Time, 740 Meet Me Paging External Transfer, 358 Meet Me Paging Transfer, 356, 357, 358, 359 Memo Dial, 360, 361 Message Waiting, 362, 363, 364, 365 Messages, Voice Prompting, 562 Microphone Cutoff, 366, 367 Minimum COS for Dialing 976 - 2105, 1003 MIS (inDepth), 324, 325 Modem Pooling See DCI Department Groups MOH, 373 Monitor, Room, 447 Moving Around in the Programs, 614 Multi-party Conference, 179 Multibutton Telephone 920/922 Series, 59 926 Series, 58 Multiple Direct Num Ring Tone Priority - 1019, 907 Multiple Directory Num. Key Delay Ring - 1028, 918 Multiple Directory Number Ring Assign - 1016, 903, 904 Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone - 1018, 906 Multiple Directory Numbers, 368, 369, 370, 371, 372 Multiple Tenants, 507 Music Background Music, 105, 106, 107 Music on Hold, 373, 374, 375, 376 Setup, 718 With ACI, 83 Music on Hold and Conference Set Up - 0302, 718
K
Key Flash Rates Chart, 55 Key Layout DSS Console, 60 Multibutton Telephone, 920/922 Series, 59 Multibutton Telephone, 926 Series, 58 Super Display Telephone (926 Series), 56 Super Display Telephone, 920/926 Series, 57 Keys for Entering Data, 614 Keyset Confirmation Tone - 0110, 654, 655 Keyset Splash Tone - 0109, 652, 653 Keyset-Originated Data Call, 194 Keystrips See Labelmaker
L
Labelmaker, 335 Last Number Redial, 336, 337 Leaving a Message (Message Waiting), 362 Leaving a Voice Mail Message, 586 Line Keys Trunk Group Key Operating Mode, 732 Line Preference, 338, 339, 340, 341, 342, 343, 344 Idle, 338 Incoming, 338 Incoming Call Priority, 728 Outgoing, 338 Ringing, 338 Ringing Line Preference, Intercom, 728 Ringing Line Preference, Trunk Calls, 728 Line Preference, Prime Line Incoming, 420 Outgoing, 420 Lines, Private, 427 Listening in a Group See Group Listen Load Data - 0002, 622 Local Call Digit Counting, 525 Index - 8
N
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Index
Name Storing, 377, 378, 379, 380 Names and Messages, 615 Networking, 381, 382 Night Answer Universal Night Answer, 383 Night Service, 383, 384, 385, 386, 387, 388 Assigned Night Answer, 383 Automatic Night Service Patterns Chart, 835 Manual Enable, 727 Night Mode Switch Operating Mode, 732 Night Service Switching With a DSS Console, 255 Nitsuko 900i Cordless Telephone, 190 Non-Ringing Lines, Auto Answer, 338 Notepad See Memo Dial Number Dialed, Save, 450 Number Plan See Flexible System Numbering Number Preview, 223 Number Redial, 336 Number Redial, Repeat, 435 Operators Extension - 1105, 925 Optional Account Codes, 69 Options Worksheet for DID, 239 Orbits, Park, 411 Outgoing Call Restriction, Tie Lines, 513 Outgoing Line Preference, 338 Outgoing Only Loop Keys, 345 Outgoing Only Private Line, 427 Outgoing Prime Line Preference, 420 Outside Calls Answering, 148 Answering Using Loop Keys, 345 Answering with Caller ID, 138 Delayed Ringing, 148 Dial Number Preview, 223 Direct Inward Dialing, 230 Flash, 290 Overflow to Voice Mail, 586 Placing, 156 Placing using a trunk group, 161 Placing using Loop Keys, 345 Placing Using Trunk Group Routing, 161 Placing with Direct Trunk Access, 162 Placing with Trunk Group Routing, 161, 549 Private Lines, 427 Pulse to Tone Conversion, 433 Save Number Dialed, 450 Serial Call, 463 Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference), 495 Tie Lines, 512 Toll Free, 525 Transfer, 543 Trunk Calling Keys, 395 Universal Answer , 148 Voice Over, 599 Warning Tone for Long Conversation, 604 With a DSS Console, 255 Outside Calls, Ringing Ring Groups, 440 Overflow to Voice Mail, 586 Overriding Toll Restriction, 532
O
Off Hook Signaling, 389, 390, 391, 392, 393, 394 Automatic Signaling, 389 Called Extension Block, 389 Extensions with Handsfree, 390 Extensions Without Handsfree, 390 Manual Signaling, 389 Off Hook Signaling Mode, 728 Selectable Off Hook Signaling, 389 Off Premise Extensions See Single Line Telephone Compatibility Off-Premise Call Forwarding, 123 Off-Premise Extensions See Single Line Telephones (2-OPX) One-Touch Calling, 395, 396, 397, 398, 399 Abbreviated Dialing, 395 Direct Station Selection, 395 Personal Speed Dial Keys, 395 Service Codes, 395 Trunk Calling , 395 One-Touch Data Calls See DCI Hotline One-Touch Keys See One-Touch Calling One-Touch Serial Operation, 400, 401 OPA Error Message Assignment - 2209, 1023, 1024 OPA Fax Line Ring Group - 2206, 1020 OPA Message Assignment - 2205, 1019 Operating Modes in DISA, 246 Operator Assistance See Automated Attendant (VAU) Operator Assisted Routing (ARS), 97 Operator Calling with DISA, 246 Operator Calling, Tie Line COS, 512 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
P
Paging Combined, 402, 406 Combined Paging, 406 Meet Me Paging Transfer, 356 With a DSS Console, 255 Paging with DISA, 246 Paging, External, 402, 403, 404, 405 Codec Gain, 679, 680, 681 Page Announcement Duration Timer, 740 Paging, Internal, 406, 407, 408, 409, 410 Page Announcement Duration Timer, 740 Paging, Meet Me, 353 Paging, Tie Line COS, 512 Parallel and Serial SMDR Communication, 471 Index - 9
telemanuals.com
Index
Park, 411, 412, 413, 414 Park Hold Timer, 743 Park and Page See Voice Announce Unit Park and Page (VAU), 560 Park Group - 1014, 900 Passwords Programming, 713, 714, 715, 716 User Passwords, 716 Pause Timer, 740 Pause, Automatic when behind PBX, 415 PBX Flashing a PBX Trunk, 290 PBX Call Reporting, SMDR, 471 PBX Call Restriction, 525 PBX Compatibility, 415, 416, 417, 418 Automatic Pause, 415 Call Restriction, 415 Trunk Access Code Screening, 415 Trunk Toll Restriction, 415 PC Attendant Console, 419 PC Attendant Console Options - 2503, 1045 PC Attendant Console Tenant - 2502, 1044 PC Attendant Port Assignment - 2501, 1043 Permit Code Table, 524 Permit Table, Common, 524 Personal Answering Machine Emulation, 112, 586 Personal Greeting, 559 Personal Speed Dial Keys, 395 PGDU PCB Alarm/Fax Sensor Setup, 721, 722 See External Paging PGDU PCB Alarm/Fax Sensor Setup - 0304, 721 PGDU PCB Sensor Activation Mode - 0305, 722 Physical and Software Ports, 196 With ACI, 84 Picking Up Calls, Secretary, 456 Pickup, Group Call, 298 Placing a call over a Trunk Group, 161 Placing a call with Direct Trunk Access, 162 Placing a call with Trunk Group Routing, 161 Ports DCI Physical and Software Ports, 196 Physical and Software Ports with ACI, 84 Post Dialing Codes See Single Digit Service Code Setup-0512 Pre-ringing Enable - 0306, 723 Preselection Timer, 740 PRI - Primary Rate Interface See ISDN Compatibility Prime Line Selection, 420, 421, 422, 423 Incoming Prime Line Preference, 420 Outgoing Prime Line Preference, 420 Printer SMDR Printer Output Port, 736 Priority Routing (Department Calling), 212 Privacy (Data), 424, 425, 426 Privacy Release (Voice Call Conference), 184 Private Intercom Index - 10 See Reverse Voice Over Private Line, 427, 428, 429 Both Ways, 427 Incoming Only, 427 Outgoing Only, 427 Programmable Function Keys, 430, 431, 432 Trunk Group Key Operating Mode, 732 Programmable Keys, 3 Programming Considerations, 612 Programming Function Keys (Part A)- 1006, 883, 884, 885, 886, 887, 888, 889, 890 Programming Names and Messages, 615 Programming Names and Text Messages, 615 Programming One-Touch Keys - 1007, 891, 892 Programming Passwords, 713, 714, 715, 716 Pulse to Tone Conversion, 433 Programming, 651
Q
Queuing Trunk, 555 Queuing for Calls, 133 Queuing, Attendant, 90
R
Recording a Conversation, 586 Redial (Last Number), 336 Redial, Repeat, 435 Redialing a Saved Number, 450 Remote Maintenance Service Center Phone Number, 642, 643, 772, 773, 774 Remote Service Center Phone Number - 0012, 642, 643 Remote Service Center Trunk Group - 0013, 643 Remote Service Center Users Data - 0014, 644 Removing PCBs, 628 Repeat Redial, 435, 436, 437 Busy Tone for Repeat Dial Busy Timer, 743 Repeat Dial Enable Time, 742 Repeat Redial Timer, 742 Repeat Redial Count - 0415, 766 Reports Date Format, 693, 703, 704, 705, 706, 707, 708 Restrict Code Table, 524 Restrict Code Table, Common, 524 Result Codes (DCI), 203 Reverse Voice Over, 438, 439 Ring Groups, 440, 441, 442, 443 Ring Rates Chart, 54 Ring-No-Answer Intercept, 231 Ringdown Extension, 444, 445, 446 See also External Hotline Ringdown Extension Timer, 740 Ringer Control With ACI, 83 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Index
Ringing Delayed, 148 Delayed Ringing with DILs, 241 Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns, 268 Forced Intercom Ringing, 307 Pre-Ringing Enable, 723 Ring Rates Chart, 54 Selecting the Ring Tones, 461 Single Line Ring Options Chart, 876 Volume Control, 603 Ringing Line Preference, 338 Room Monitor, 447, 448, 449 Rotaries See Trunk Groups RS-232-C Connector Pinout, 202 Single Digit Dialing (VAU), 561 Single Digit Service Code Setup-0512, 803, 804 Single Line Ring Options Chart, 876 Single Line Telephone Compatibility Answering Mode, 729 Dial Sending Start Timer for SLT, 742 DTMF Receiver Active Time, 740 Single Line Telephones, 465, 466, 467, 468, 469 Available Features, 469 Setting DTMF criteria, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 Slot Control - 0006, 628 SMDR Data Format, 693, 703, 704, 705, 706, 707, 708 See Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Account Codes, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77 SMDR Options - 0404, 736, 737, 738 Software and Physical Ports, 196 With ACI, 84 Speakerphone See Handsfree Special Dialing Instructions with ARS, 96 Specifications ACI, 85 Speed Conversion (DCI), 196 Speed Dial See Abbreviated Dialing Station Analog, Sidetone, 689, 690 Station Call Coverage, 368 Station Message Detail Recording, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 475, 476, 477, 478, 479, 480, 481, 482 Abandoned Call Reporting, 470 Block Call Reporting, 470 Call Costing, 470 Customized Date Format, 470 Data Call Tracking, 470 Digit Counting, 470 Digit Masking, 470 Duration Monitoring, 471 Extension Exclusion, 471 PBX Call Reporting, 471 Programming SMDR Options, 736, 737, 738 Serial and Parallel Communication, 471 Trnasferred Call Tracking, 470 Trunk Exclusion, 471 Usage Summaries, 471 Station Timers, Analog, 669, 670 Step Calling, 91, 221, 502 Storing Extension and Trunk Names, 377 Super Display Telephone 920/922 Series, 57 926 Series, 56 System Flash Rates Chart, 55 System Hold, 312 System Number Plan Chart, 33, 617 System Numbering - 0501, 777, 778, 779, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785 System Numbering, Programming, 777, 778, 779, Index - 11
S
Save Data - 0001, 621 Save Number Dialed, 450, 451, 452 Screened Transfer, 543 Secretarial Service Hotline, 321 Secretary Call (Buzzer), 453, 454, 455 Secretary Call Pickup, 456 Selectable Display Messages, 457, 458, 459, 460 Programming, 734, 735 Selectable Display Messages - 0403, 734, 735 Selectable Display Messaging Default Messages Table, 457 Selectable Off Hook Signaling, 389 Selectable Ring Tones, 461, 462 Separate ARS Routing Options - 2108, 1009, 1010 Serial and Parallel SMDR Communication, 471 Serial Call, 463, 464 Serial Operations, 400 Service Center Phone Number, 642, 643, 772, 773, 774 Service Code Keys, 395 Service Code Setup, Part A-0511, 797, 798, 799, 800, 801, 802 Service Code Setup, Part B-0514, 806, 807, 808, 809, 810 Service Codes by Feature, 14 Service Codes by Number, 7 Setting the ISDN Line Operating Mode - 0307, 724 Setting the Music On Hold Source - 0914, 861 Setting the Programming Passwords - 0201, 713, 714, 715 Setting the Time and Date, 521 Setting User Passwords - 0202, 716 Sidetone Analog Station, 689, 690 Analog Trunk, 691, 692 Silent Monitor See Barge In Monitor Mode Simplifying Keyset Operation, 3 Simultaneous Call Answering (VAU), 561 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Index
780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 791, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, 798, 799, 800, 801, 802, 803, 804, 805, 806, 807, 808, 809, 810, 811, 812, 813, 814, 815, 816 System Park Orbits, 411 System Report Port Setup - 0007 Port Setup, 629, 630, 631, 632, 633, 634 System Reports Report Setup, 629, 630, 631, 632, 633, 634 System Ring Rates, 54 System Time and Date, 521 System Timers See Timers System Timers (Part A) - 0405, 739, 740, 741, 742, 743, 744, 745 System Timers (Part B) - 0414, 764, 765 System Timers (Part B) Chart, 764 System Timers Chart (Part A), 739 System Tones Adjusting the Keyset Splash Tone, 652, 653 DTMF Tone Duty Cycle, 649 Keyset Confirmation Tone, 654, 655 System Tones Chart, 36 Tie Line Class of Service - 2302, 1028 Tie Line Route - 2304, 1030 Tie Line Timers - 0133, 698, 699, 700 Tie Line Timers Chart, 698 Tie Line Toll Restriction Class - 2306, 1032 Tie Lines, 512, 513, 514, 515, 516, 517, 518, 519, 520 Assigning CODEC Gain Types, 676 Class of Service for Tie Lines, 761, 762 COS: Common Abbreviated Dialing, 512 COS: Direct Trunk Access, 512 COS: First Digit Absorption, 512 COS: Operator Calling, 512 COS: Paging, 512 COS: Trunk Group Routing/ARS, 512 First Digit Absorption, Programming, 761 Flexible Service Compatibility, 513 Outgoing Call Restriction, 513 Setting DTMF criteria, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 Timers, 698, 699, 700 Toll Restriction Class, 513 Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access Programming, 761 Tie Trunk COS Options Chart, 761 Time and Date, 521, 522, 523 Display Mode, 650 Features Affected, 521 Time and Date - 0003, 623 Time and Date Display Mode - 0103, 650 Time of Day Selection In ARS, 96 Time, Date and Extension Number Check (VAU), 566 Timer DISA External Paging Timer, 744 VAU No-Answer Timer, 743 Timers Alarm Duration, 740 Analog Station Timers Chart, 669, 671 Analog Trunk Timers Chart, 666, 701 ASTU (Analog Station) Timers, 669, 670 ATRU PCB (Analog Trunk) Timers, 666, 667, 668 Busy Tone for Repeat Dial Busy, 743 Busy Tone Time, 739 Call Waiting Tone Tiner, 739 Callback Ring Duration Time, 739 Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Timer, 741 Conference Mode Callback Timer, 742 Confirmation Tone, 740 Congestion Tone, 740 Delayed Call Forwarding Time, 739 Dial Number Preview Timer, 742 Dial Sending Start Timer for SLT, 742 Dial Tone Detection, 740 DID Ring-No-Answer Time, 741 DID Trunk Disconnect After Transfer Timer, 742 DID Trunk Timers, 696 DIL No Answer Recall Timer, 743 DISA Dial Tone Timer, 741 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
T
T1 Clock Source - 2602, 1048 T1 Setup - 2601, 1047 T1 Trunk Timers - 0136, 703, 704, 705, 706, 707, 708 T1 Trunk Timers Chart, 703 T1 Trunking Assigning CODEC Gain Types, 676 T1 Trunking with ANI/DNIS Compatibility, 483, 484, 485, 486, 487, 488, 489, 490, 491, 492, 493, 494 Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference), 495, 496, 497, 498, 499, 500, 501 Tape Recorders With ACI, 83 TAPI Compatibility, 502 Telemarketing Dial, 194 Telephone Displays, 39, 80, 81, 82 Telephones Differences between models, 3 Tenant Group Options, Part A - 0401, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731 Tenant Service, 507, 508, 509, 510, 511 Feature Interaction, 507 Inter-Tenant Calling, 717 Tenant Group Options, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731, 732, 733 Tenat Group Options, Part B - 0402, 732, 733 Terminal-Originated Data Call, 194 Terminal-Originated Voice Call, 194 Testing Loop Back Testing, 637, 638 Text Messaging See Selectable Display Messaging Index - 12
Index
DISA Internal Paging Timer, 744 DISA No Answer Timer, 742 Door Box Answer Time, 740 DTMF Receiver Active Time, 740 Exclusive Hold Recall Time, 739 Extension Dial Tone Timer, 741 Forced Release of Held Calls, 742 Guidance Sending Timer, 742 Hold Recall Callback Timer, 741 Hold Recall Time, 740 Intercom Interdigit Time, 740 LCD Display Hold Timer, 741 Long Conversation Alarm 1, 741 Long Conversation Alarm 2 Timer, 741 Meet Me Conference Time, 739 Meet Me Paging Time, 740 Page Announcement Duration, 740 Park and Page Repeat Timer, 743 Park Hold Timer, 743 Pause, 740 Preselection Time, 740 Programming System Timers, 739, 740, 741, 742, 743, 744, 745 Record Alert Tone Interval Timer, 743 Repeat Dial Enable Time, 742 Repeat Redial Timer, 742 Ring No Answer Alarm Time, 739 Ringdown Extension Timer, 740 T1 Trunk Timers Chart, 703 Tie Line, 698, 699, 700 Tie Line Timers Chart, 698 Toll Restriction Override Timer, 742 Transfer Recall Time, 739 Trunk Guard Timer, 741 Trunk Interdigit Timer, 741 Trunk Queuing Callback Timer, 741 Warning Tone, 740 Timing Calls, 132 TMS Reports, 534 Toll Call Digit Counting, 525 Toll Free Trunks, 525 Toll Restriction, 524, 525, 526, 527, 528, 529, 530, 531 Common Permit Code Table, 524 Common Restrict Code Table, 524 For Abbreviated Dialing, 525 International Call Restriction, 524 Local Call Digit Counting, 525 PBX Call Restriction, 525 Permit Code Table, 524 Restrict Code Table, 524 Tables, 830 Toll Call Digit Counting, 525 Toll Free Trunks, 525 Toll Restriction Override Timer, 742 Toll Restriction Class - 0701, 825, 826, 827, 828, 829 Toll Restriction Class - 1004, 880, 881 Toll Restriction Class Chart, 826 92000SWG08 Issue 1-0 Toll Restriction Class, Tie Lines, 513 Toll Restriction Override, 532, 533 Toll Restriction Override Codes - 1025, 913 Toll Restriction Tables - 0702, 830, 831, 832, 833, 834 Toll Restriction with DISA, 246 Tone Detection Setup - 0116, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 Tones Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns, 268 Selectable Ring Tones, 461 Volume Control, 603 Traffic Management Report Report Options Chart, 769 Traffic Management Report Options - 0417, 769 Traffic Managment Reports, 534 Transfer, 543, 544, 545, 546, 547, 548 Busy Transfer, 729 Conference Key Operating Mode, 733 Department Group Transfer, 543 Meet Me Paging Transfer, 356 Screened Transfer, 543 Serial Call, 463 To Fax, 287 To Voice Mail, 586 Transfer Key Operating Mode, 732 Transfer Recall Time, 739 Unscreened Transfer, 543 Without Holding, 543 Transferred Call Tracking, SMDR, 470 Trunk Analog, Sidetone, 691, 692 DID Timers, 696, 697 Trunk Access Code - 0510, 796 Trunk Access Code Screening, PBX, 415 Trunk Access Map Setup - 0911, 857, 858 Trunk Calling Keys, 395 Trunk CODEC Gain Type Settings-0117, 676 Trunk Exclusion, SMDR, 471 Trunk Group Access with DISA, 246 Trunk Group Routing, 549, 550, 551 Defining the Trunk Access Code, 796 Placing a Call with Trunk Group Routing, 161 Trunk Group Routing (Dial 9) - 0906, 851, 852 Trunk Group Routing for DCI Ports - 0908, 854 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions - 0907, 853 Trunk Group Routing, Tie Line COS, 512 Trunk Group Routing/ARS with DISA, 245 Trunk Groups, 552, 553, 554 Placing an Outside Call Using a Trunk Group, 161 Trunk Groups - 0905, 850 Trunk Names, 377 Trunk Names - 0903, 847, 848 Trunk Queuing Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time, 741 Index - 13
Index
Trunk Queuing/Camp On, 555, 556, 557 Trunk Queuing Callback Timer, 741 Trunk Ring Group Assignment - 0910, 856 Trunk Ring Tone - 0111, 656, 657, 658, 659, 660 Trunk Ring Tone Range - 0902, 846 Trunk Rotaries See Trunk Groups Trunk Tenant - 0904, 849 Trunk Timers, 666, 667, 668 Trunk Toll Restriction, PBX, 415 Trunks Basic Trunk Port Setup Chart, 841 Basic Trunk Port Setup Chart (Part B), 870 Pre-Ringing Enable, 723 Trunk Group Key Operating Mode, 732 Trunk Guard Timer, 741 Trunk Interdigit Timer, 741 Trunks, Private, 427 Trunks, Toll Free, 525 Turning Off the Microphone, 366, 367 Voice Annonce Unit 900 Preamble, 565 Voice Announce Unit, 558, 559, 560, 561, 562, 563, 564, 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570, 571, 572, 573, 574, 575, 576, 577, 578, 579, 580, 581, 582, 583, 584 Automated Attendant, 561 General Message, 559 Park and Page, 560 Park and Page Repeat Timer, 743 Personal Greeting, 559 Time, Date and Extension Number Check, 566 VAU Messages, 558 VAU No-Answer Timer, 743 Voice Prompting Messages, 562 Voice Call Conference, 184 Voice Mail, 585, 586, 587, 588, 589, 590, 591, 592, 593, 594, 595, 596, 597, 598 Call Forwarding, 585 Calling Your Mailbox, 595 Checking Your Messages, 598 Conversation Record, 586 Forwarding to your Mailbox, 595 Integration Options Chart, 767 Leaving a Message, 586, 595 Overflow to Voice Mail, 586 Personal Answering Machine Emulation, 586, 597 Recording Your Conversation, 597 Setting DTMF and other tone criteria, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675 Transfer to Voice Mail, 586 Transferring a Call to Your Mailbox, 596 Voice Mail Compatibility Record Alert Tone Interval Timer, 743 Voice Mail Integration Options - 0416, 767, 768 Voice Mail Master Number - 0516, 812, 813 Voice Mail Port Assignment - 1017, 905 Voice Over, 599, 600, 601, 602 Voice Over, Reverse, 438 Voice Prompting Messages, 562 Voice Prompting Messages Table, 562 Volume Controls, 603
U
UNA (Universal Night Answer), 383 Unannounced Transfer, 543 Unanswered Call Forwarding, 112 Universal Answer (Outside Calls), 148 Universal Answer/Auto-Answer - 1015, 901, 902 Universal Night Answer, 383 Universal Night Answer - 1605, 958, 959 Unscreened Transfer, 543 Unsupervised Conf CODEC Gain Setup - 0131, 694, 695 Unsupervised Conference, 495 Usage Summaries, SMDR, 471 User Passwords, 716 Using a Headset, 310 Using Handsfree, 4 Using the Features Section, 3
V
Vacant Number Intercept (DID), 231 VAU DISA Department Calling with Overflow, 246 See Voice Announce Unit VAU Initialization - 2201, 1015 VAU Master Number - 0515, 811 VAU Message Length - 2202, 1016 VAU Messages, 558 VAU No Answer Destination - 2204, 1018 VAU Park and Page, 560 VAU Password - 2208, 1022 VAU Setup - 1804, 975, 976 Verified Account Codes, 70 View Alarm Report - 0092, 647, 648 View System Report - 0091, 646 Index - 14
W
Walking Class of Service See Toll Restriction Override Warning Tone for Long Conversation, 604, 605, 606 Weekly Night Service Switching - 0802, 838 Windows-based Attendant Console, 419
Z
Zone Paging, Combined, 406 Zone Paging, External, 402 Zone Paging, Internal, 406
Nitsuko Canada, Division of Nitsuko America 165 Matheson Blvd. E., Unit #4-6 Mississauga, Ontario Canada L4Z 3K2
TEL: 905-507-2888 FAX: 905-507-2971